VJ628D Service Manual

MAINTENANCE
MANUAL
VJ-628X
VJ628XE-M-00
Table of contents VJ628XE-M-00
1 Safety Instructions 3.3 Replacing Cover section . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 67

3.3.1 Replacing Panel Board . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 67
1.1 Introduction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11 3.3.2 Replacing Cover Switch Assy . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 68
1.2 Types and Meanings of Warnings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11 3.3.3 Replacing Switch Lever . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 69
3.3.4 Replacing Cover R Cable Assy . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 70
1.3 Warning Labels . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12 3.3.5 Replacing Switch Panel Cable Assy . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 71
1.3.1 Location and Type of Warning Labels . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12
3.4 Replacing Frame section . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 72
2 Troubleshooting 3.4.1 Replacing Media Holder. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 72
3.4.2 Replacing Scroller Holder Roller Assy . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 73
2.1 Introduction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14 3.4.3 Replacing Adsorption Fan . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 74
2.2 Troubleshooting with Error Messages. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 15 3.4.4 Replacing Adsorption Fan Cable . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 75
2.2.1 Operation Status . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 15 3.5 Replacing Board Base section . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 76
2.2.2 Errors with Message . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 17 3.5.1 Replacing Power Board . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 76
2.2.3 Errors Requiring Reboot . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 21 3.5.2 Replacing AC JUNC-Power Cable Assy . . . . . . . . . . . . 77
2.2.4 Error Messages during File Transmission . . . . . . . . . . . 32 3.5.3 Replacing IL Dummy Cable Assy . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 78
2.3 Troubleshooting Without Error Messages . . . . . . . . . . . . 34 3.5.4 Replacing Main DC Cable Assy. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 79
2.3.1 Initial Operation Problems . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 34 3.5.5 Replacing FG Cable Assy . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 80
2.3.2 Media Feed Problems . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 38 3.5.6 Replacing AC Inlet . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 81
2.3.3 Printing Problems . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 39 3.5.7 Replacing Slide Switch . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 82
2.3.4 Noise Problems . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 51 3.5.8 Replacing AC SEL SW Cable Assy . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 83
2.3.5 Online Function Problems . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 54 3.5.9 Replacing Cooling FAN . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 84
2.3.6 Other Problems . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 55 3.5.10 Replacing MAIN Board . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 85
2.3.7 Problems in Using MUTOH Service Assistance . . . . . . 57 3.5.11 Replacing JUNCTION Board . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 87
3.5.12 Replacing JUNC_ID Cable . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 88
3 Parts Replacement 3.5.13 Replacing JUNC_FFC . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 89
3.5.14 Replacing Inlet AC JUNC Cable Assy . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 90
3.1 Introduction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 62
3.6 Replacing Y Rail part . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 91
3.2 Removing Covers. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 63
3.6.1 Replacing CR Motor. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 91
3.2.1 Removing Top Cover. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 64 3.6.2 Replacing CR Belt . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 93
3.2.2 Removing Side Cover . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 65 3.6.3 Replacing CR Motor Relay Assy . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 96
Table of contents 2
3.6.4 Replacing CR Origin Sensor . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 97 3.8.12 Replacing Mini Latch . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 128

3.6.5 Replacing CR Origin Sensor Cable . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 98 3.8.13 Replacing Roller Arm Assy . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 129
3.6.6 Replacing Lever Sensor Cable . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 99 3.8.14 Replacing Valve head . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 130
3.6.7 Replacing Lever Sensor . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 100 3.8.15 Replacing Head . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 134
3.6.8 Replacing T Fence. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 101 3.8.16 Replacing Head FFC . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 139
3.6.9 Replacing Fence Guide . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 103 3.8.17 Replacing Carriage Assy . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 141
3.6.10 Replacing T Fence Spring . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 104 3.8.18 Replacing Head FG Assy. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 145
3.6.11 Replacing CR Return Pulley Assy . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 105
3.9 Replacing Cable Guide section. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 146
3.6.12 Replacing Pressure Roller Spring . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 107
3.9.1 Replacing Steel Bare . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 146
3.6.13 Replacing Pressure Roller Assy and Pressure Roller Axis
Assy . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 108 3.9.2 Replacing Tube Guide Film Assy. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 148
3.6.14 Replacing P_REAR Sensor . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 109 3.9.3 Replacing CR FFC. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 150
3.9.4 Replacing Ink Tube . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 152
3.7 Replacing PF section. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 110
3.10 Replacing Maintenance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 157
3.7.1 Replacing PF Motor . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 110
3.7.2 Replacing PF Encoder. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 111 3.10.1 Replacing Waste Fluid Pump. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 157
3.7.3 Replacing PF Encoder Scale. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 112 3.10.2 Replacing Pump Motor Cable . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 158
3.7.4 Replacing X Speed Reduction Belt . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 113 3.10.3 Replacing Wiper. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 159
3.7.5 Replacing PF Speed Reduction Pulley . . . . . . . . . . . . 114 3.10.4 Replacing Wiper Solenoid Cable . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 160
3.7.6 Replacing PF Motor Cable. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 115 3.10.5 Replacing Wiper Solenoid . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 161
3.10.6 Replacing Cap Head Assy . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 163
3.8 Replacing Cursor section . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 116 3.10.7 Replacing Maintenance Assy. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 164
3.8.1 Releasing Carriage Lock . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 116 3.10.8 Replacing Waste Fluid Tank . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 165
3.8.2 Removing Carriage Cover . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 117
3.11 Replacing IH . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 166
3.8.3 Removing CR Board Cover . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 118
3.8.4 Replacing CR Board . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 119 3.11.1 Removing Pump stay. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 166
3.8.5 Replacing CR Encoder . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 120 3.11.2 Removing Heater Board Stay . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 167
3.8.6 Replacing P_EDGE Sensor. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 121 3.11.3 Replacing Cartridge Holder . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 168
3.8.7 Replacing Cutter Spring. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 122 3.11.4 Replacing INK ID Board Assy . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 170
3.8.8 Replacing PG Origin Sensor Cable . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 123 3.11.5 Replacing Holder Pressure Spring. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 171
3.8.9 Replacing Cutter Holder Assy . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 124 3.11.6 Replacing HEATER DRIVE Board. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 172
3.8.10 Replacing Cutter Solenoid Assy . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 125 3.11.7 Replacing AC JUNC CNT Cable Assy. . . . . . . . . . . . . 173
3.8.11 Replacing Cutter Solenoid Cable. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 127 3.11.8 Replacing Circulation pump . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 174
Table of contents 3
3.11.9 Replacing Circulation Pump Relay Cable . . . . . . . . . . 175 4.5.1 Adjustment Procedure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 230
4 Adjustment 4.6 CR Belt Tension Adjustment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 231

4.6.1 Adjustment procedure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 231
4.1 Introduction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 177
4.7 Head Adjustment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 232
4.2 Adjustment Item . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 177 4.7.1 Head Alignment (Horizontal Slant). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 232
4.3 Working with MUTOH Service Assistance Software . . . 179 4.7.2 Head Alignment (Vertical Slant). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 235
4.3.1 Parameter Backup . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 180 4.8 Head Height Adjustment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 238
4.3.2 Jigs and Tools . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 181 4.8.1 Adjustment Procedures . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 238
4.3.3 Required Environment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 182
4.3.4 Updating Date and Time . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 196 5 Self Diagnosis Function
4.3.5 Editing Media Type . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 197
5.1 Introduction. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 241
4.3.6 Acquiring and Saving Error Log. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 199
4.3.7 Updating main firmware. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 201 5.2 Preparation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 242
4.3.8 Receiving Backup Parameters . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 202 5.2.1 Preparations on Machine . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 242
4.3.9 Sending Backup Parameter. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 203 5.2.2 Starting Up . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 243
4.3.10 Board Replacement Wizard. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 204
4.3.11 Diagnostic Mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 210 5.3 Operations in Self-Diagnosis Mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 248
4.3.12 Acquiring Printer Identification Data . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 217 5.3.1 Operating Self-Diagnosis Mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 248
4.3.13 Sending Authorization code. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 218 5.3.2 Diagnosis Items in Self-Diagnosis Menu . . . . . . . . . . . 249
4.3.14 Referring Set Up Information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 219 5.3.3 Reset Waste Ink Counter. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 250
4.3.15 Reffering Adjustment Parameter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 221 5.3.4 Error Message Display. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 251
4.3.16 Initializing activation. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 223 5.4 Test Menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 252
4.3.17 Version Information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 224 5.4.1 Memory Size Menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 253
4.3.18 Switch to Board Manager Mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 225 5.4.2 Version Menu. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 254
4.3.19 Maintenance Panel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 226 5.4.3 Operation Panel Menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 255
4.3.20 Terminating Application . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 228 5.4.4 Sensor Menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 256
4.4 X Speed Reduction Belt Tension Adjustment . . . . . . . . . 229 5.4.5 Encoder Menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 258
4.4.1 Adjustment Procedure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 229 5.4.6 Fan Menu. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 259
5.4.7 Record Menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 260
4.5 PF Encoder Position Adjustment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 230 5.4.8 Head Waveform Menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 267
Table of contents 4
5.4.9 Time Check Menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 268 5.11.7 Wiper Endurance Menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 337
5.11.8 Print Head Endurance (Nozzle Print) Menu. . . . . . . . . 338
5.5 Ink Charging Menu. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 269
5.11.9 General Endurance Menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 339
5.6 Adjustment Menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 270 5.11.10Endurance Running Check Menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 340
5.6.1 Rear/ Edge Sensor Adjustment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 271
5.12 Media Feed Menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 341
5.6.2 Head Nozzle Check Menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 273
5.6.3 Skew Check Menu. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 275 5.13 Media Initial Menu. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 342
5.6.4 Head Slant Check Menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 276
5.14 Heater . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 343
5.6.5 Uni-D/ Bi-D Adjustment Menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 290
5.14.1 Sensor . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 343
5.6.6 Bi-D Copy . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 304
5.14.2 Check. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 344
5.6.7 Margin adjustment Menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 305
5.6.8 Test Printing Menu. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 306 5.15 Speed mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 345
5.6.9 Longstore Menu. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 307
5.6.10 Software Counter Initialization Menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 308 6 Maintenance Mode 2
5.6.11 Feed Pitch Check Menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 309
6.1 Introduction. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 347
5.6.12 Solid Print Menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 310
6.2 Operations in Maintenance Mode 2 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 348
5.7 Cleaning Menu. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 311
6.2.1 Starting Up . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 348
5.8 Sample printing Menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 312 6.2.2 Operating Maintenance Mode 2. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 353
5.9 Parameter Menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 314 6.3 Maintenance Mode 2 Menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 354
5.9.1 Parameter Initialization Menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 315 6.3.1 Reset Waste Ink Counter. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 355
5.9.2 Parameter Update Menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 317 6.3.2 Error Message Display. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 356
6.3.3 Indication Menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 357
5.10 Servo Setting Menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 329
6.3.4 Counter Initialization Menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 366
5.11 Endurance Running Menu. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 330 6.3.5 Cleaning Menu. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 367
5.11.1 CR Motor Endurance Menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 331 6.3.6 Counter Print Menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 368
5.11.2 PF Motor Endurance Menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 332 6.3.7 Media Feed Menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 369
5.11.3 Cutter Menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 333
5.11.4 Pump endurance Menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 334 7 Maintenance
5.11.5 CPump endurance Menu. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 335
7.1 Introduction. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 371
5.11.6 Head Lock Menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 336
Table of contents 5
7.2 Periodical Services . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 372 9.5 Choosing Place for the Printer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 393
7.2.1 Periodic Replacement Parts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 373
7.2.2 Parts Which Require Inspection/Replacement . . . . . . 374 10 Appendix
7.3 Part Life Information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 375 10.1 Introduction. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 395
7.4 Jigs and Tools . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 376 10.2 Maintenance Part List . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 395
7.4.1 Required Tools . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 376
7.5 Lubrication/Bonding . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 378
7.6 Transportation of Product . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 379
8 Product Overview
8.1 Introduction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 381
8.2 Part Names and Functions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 382

8.2.1 Appearance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 382
8.2.2 Operation panel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 383
8.3 Printer Status . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 386

8.3.1 Operating Status Type (when using Jig Panel) . . . . . . 386
8.3.2 Switching Operation Status (when using Jig Panel) . . 387
9 Specifications
9.1 Introduction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 389
9.2 Product Specifications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 390

9.2.1 Main Unit Specifications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 390
9.3 Interface specification . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 391

9.3.1 Network interface specification . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 391
9.4 Options/Supplies List . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 392

9.4.1 Supplies . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 392
Table of contents 6
VJ628XE-M-00
Important Notice
1. For Users in Europe

• No part of this product or publication may be reproduced, copied, or
Important: transmitted in any form or by any means, except for personal use,
This is a Class A product approved for industrial environ- without the permission of MUTOH INDUSTRIES LTD.
ments. In a domestic environment this product may cause • The product and the contents of this publication may be changed without
radio interference in which case you may be required to take prior notification.
adequate measures.
• MUTOH INDUSTRIES LTD. has made the best efforts to keep this
publication free from error, but if you find any uncertainties or misprints,
2. For Users in the United States please call us or the shop where you bought this equipment.
This equipment has been tested and found to comply with the limits for a Class A • MUTOH INDUSTRIES LTD. shall not be liable for any damages or
digital device, pursuant to Part 15 of the FCC Rules. These limits are designed to troubles resulting from the use of this equipment or this manual.
provide reasonable protection against harmful interference when the equipment is
operated in a commercial environment.
This equipment generates, uses, and can radiate radio frequency energy and, if not
Warranty Limitations
installed and used in accordance with the instruction manual, may cause harmful
interference to radio communications. Operation of this equipment in a residential 1. MUTOH INDUSTRIES LTD. warrants part repair or replacement as a sole measure only
area is likely to cause harmful interference in which case the user will be required to if a failure is found in the system or in the materials and workmanship of the product the
correct the interference at his own expense. seller produced.
3. Trademark Mentioned in this Manual However, if the cause of failure is uncertain, decide the action after due mutual
• MUTOH, ValueJet, VJ-628X are registered trademarks or product names of MUTOH consultation.
INDUSTRIES LTD. 2. The warranty shall not apply to any direct or indirect loss, or compensation for the loss
• Windows95, Windows98, Windows98SE, Windows NT4.0, Windows2000, Windows due to the product that has been subject to misuse, neglect, or improper alternation.
XP, Windows Vista, Windows 7 and MS-DOS are registered trademarks or product
names of Microsoft Corporation.
• Intel and Pentium are trademarks or registered trademarks of Intel Corporation.
• Other company and product names may be registered trademarks or product names.
7
VJ628XE-M-00
About this Manual 3. Manual Notation

The following symbols are used in this manual for easier understanding of the information.
1. Purpose and Target Readers
This manual explains preparations needed before maintaining and checking
Symbol Meaning
operations for MUTOH Full Color Ink Jet Printer (VJ-628X).
This manual is prepared for the maintenance personnel of this printer. Must be followed carefully to avoid death or serious bodily injury
Before using this printer, fully understand the contents and directions in this manual. WARNING
2. Manual Configuration Must be observed to avoid slight or moderate bodily injury or

CAUTION damage to your equipment
Section Contents
1 Safety Instructions Explains types of warnings, cautions and warnings labeled on the Contains important information and useful tips on the operation
printer for the both operators of the printer and maintenance of the product
personnel.
NOTE
2 Troubleshooting Explains troubles that may occur when using the printer and how Indicates useful tips for operating or understanding the
to solve them. equipment
T IP
3 Parts Replacement Explains the procedures of replacement and removal of the
service parts of the printer. Indicates reference pages in this manual
4 Adjustment Explains the adjusting procedures of the printer parts.
5 Self-Diagnostic Mode Explains the self-diagnostic functions of the printer. 4. Establishment Date of This Document
This document was established on May 22 2015.
6 Maintenance Mode 2 Explains the maintenance mode2 of the printer.
5. Firmware version covered by this document
7 Maintenance Explains daily maintenance of the printer.
Firmware version:1.00
8 Product Overview Explains the features, part names, and functions of the printer.
9 Specifications Explains the specifications of the printer.
10 Appendix Explains the maintenance information and the exploded views for
this printer.
Use the built-in self-diagnostic program to locate a defective part and adjust/check
during maintenance.
8
VJ628XE-M-00
Revison Reason Chapter Section Contents Page No. Errata Remarks

00 - - - New - - -
9
VJ628XE-M-00
1 Safety Instructions
1.1 Introduction .....................................................................11
1.2 Types and Meanings of Warnings .................................11
1.3 Warning Labels................................................................12
1.3.1 Location and Type of Warning Labels................... 12
10
1.1 Introduction VJ628XE-M-00
1.1 Introduction
This chapter explains the installation of this printer, the warning terms that operators need to
know, the caution items and warning labels on the main unit.
WARNING
Make sure to follow all instructions and warnings on this manual when installing,
operating, or maintaining the equipment.
1.2 Types and Meanings of Warnings

Safety terms in this manual and the contents of warning labels attached to the
printer are categorized into the following five types depending on the degree of risk
(or the scale of the accident).
Make sure to understand the meaning of the following warning terms, and follow the
instruction in this manual.
Table 1-1 Explanation of safety terms
Safety terms Details

Must be followed carefully to avoid death or serious bodily injury.
WARNING
Must be observed to avoid slight or moderate bodily injury or

CAUTION damage to the whole or each part of the product.
Contains important information and useful tips on the operation of

NOTE the product.
11
1.3 Warning Labels VJ628XE-M-00
1.3 Warning Labels 1.3.1 Location and Type of Warning Labels

This section explains the handling of warning label, pasting location and types. The locations of warning labels are shown in the following figure.
Warning labels are attached to parts of the printer that need special caution.
Understand the locations and the descriptions of the danger associated with each label
before operating the printer.
1
Handling the Warning Labels
Make sure to note the following when handling the warning labels.
NOTE
• Make sure that all warning labels can be recognized.If the text or illustrations
cannot be seen clearly, clean or replace the label.
• When cleaning warning labels, use a cloth with water or neutral detergent. Do not
use a solvent or gasoline.
• If a warning label is damaged, lost, or cannot be recognized, replace the label.
Table 1-2 List of the warning label types
No. Types of Warning Labels

1
1.3.1 Location and Type of Warning Labels 12

VJ628XE-M-00
2 Troubleshooting
2.1 Introduction .....................................................................14
2.2 Troubleshooting with Error Messages..........................15
2.2.1 Operation Status ................................................... 15
2.2.2 Errors with Message ............................................. 17
2.2.3 Errors Requiring Reboot ....................................... 21
2.2.4 Error Messages during File Transmission............. 32
2.3 Troubleshooting Without Error Messages....................34
2.3.1 Initial Operation Problems..................................... 34
2.3.2 Media Feed Problems ........................................... 38
2.3.3 Printing Problems.................................................. 39
2.3.4 Noise Problems..................................................... 51
2.3.5 Online Function Problems..................................... 54
2.3.6 Other Problems ..................................................... 55
2.3.7 Problems in Using MUTOH Service Assistance ... 57
13
2.1 Introduction
This chapter provides information on possible causes of machine errors/damage and recovery actions.
If the machine is malfunctioning and an error message is displayed on Operation panel, refer to"2.2Troubleshooting with Error Messages. If the machine is malfunctioning but no error messages
are displayed, refer to"2.3Troubleshooting Without Error MessagesIf cause of errors/damage and recovery actions are not found in this chapter, or the machine cannot restore to normal status,
please contact the distributor you purchased the product from or our customer support center.
No. Trouble Contents Reference

1 When the message is displayed Trouble with an error message displayed on Operation panel when the printer is "2.2Troubleshooting with Error Messages
malfunctioning.
2 When the message is not Trouble without an error message displayed on Operation panel even when the printer "2.3Troubleshooting Without Error Messages
displayed is malfunctioning.
14
2.2 Troubleshooting with Error Messages VJ628XE-M-00
2.2 Troubleshooting with Error Messages

This section describes the messages displayed in normal operation and upon an error occurrence as well as how to correct the error. The available messages are as follows.
2.2.1 Operation Status

This section describes the message contents, check items, and recovery actions for normal operation.
Table 2-1 Events and Check Items for Operation Status Messages
No. Message Event/symptom Check item Action Reference

1 Cover open Front cover is open. 1. Is Switch board pressing the sensor Fix Switch board so that it presses the "3.3.4Replacing Cover R Cable Assy
while Front cover is closed? sensor. "Electric Wiring Diagram
2. Is Switch board installed facing down? Reinstall it correctly.

3. Is Cover sensor wobbly? Tighten the screw on Cover sensor.
4. Are the cables of F cover R sensor and Securely connect the cable to connector.
F cover L sensor securely connected? Check if the interlock cable is securely
connected to MAIN board
5. Are F cover R sensor and F cover L Replace F cover R sensor and F cover L
sensor damaged? sensor.
6. Check the operation of Front cover Replace Front cover sensor if it is not "5.4.4Sensor Menu
sensor in “Sen : Cover” in the self- working properly. "3.3.4Replacing Cover R Cable Assy
diagnosis function.
7. MAIN board may be damaged. Replace MAIN board. "3.5.10Replacing MAIN Board
2 Set media Pressure Handle is 1. Does Pressure Handle move smoothly? Lubricate pressure cam. "7.5Lubrication/Bonding
raised.
　 2. Is Lever sensor securely installed? Clean the sensor portion with a cotton swab, "3.6.6Replacing Lever Sensor Cable
etc.
3. Is the sensor portion of Lever sensor Clean the sensor portion with a cotton swab,
dirty? etc.
4. Is the cable of Lever sensor securely Securely connect Lever sensor cable.
connected?
5. Check the operation of Lever sensor in Replace Lever sensor if it is not working "5.4.4Sensor Menu
“Sen : Lever” in the self-diagnosis properly. "3.6.6Replacing Lever Sensor Cable
function.
6. JUNCTION board may be damaged. Replace JUNCTION board. "3.5.11Replacing JUNCTION Board
2.2.1 Operation Status 15

Table 2-1 Events and Check Items for Operation Status Messages (Continued)

3 End of Roll Media has run out. 1. Is the cable of P Rear Sensor placed Securely connect it. "Electric Wiring Diagram
under Paper guide R securely
connected?
2. Check if there is paper in “Sen : Rear” in If “No media” is displayed even when paper is "5.4.4Sensor Menu
the self-diagnosis function. loaded, check the item 5.
3. P Rear Sensor may need adjustment or it Adjust P Rear Sensor. "5.6.1Rear/ Edge Sensor Adjustment
may be damaged.
If the same error continues to be displayed, "3.6.14Replacing P_REAR Sensor
replace P Rear Sensor.
4 No media Media is not loaded. 1. Check if there is paper in “Sen. : Rear” in If “No media” is displayed even when paper is "5.6.1Rear/ Edge Sensor Adjustment
the self-diagnosis function. loaded, replace P Rear Sensor.
"3.6.14Replacing P_REAR Sensor
2. Does the media in use have low Instruct the user that media with low -
reflectance? reflectance cannot be used.
3. Is the cable of P Rear Sensor placed Securely connect it. "Electric Wiring Diagram
under Paper guide R securely
connected?
4. P Rear Sensor may need adjustment or it Adjust P_REAR sensor. "5.6.1Rear/ Edge Sensor Adjustment
may be damaged.
If the same error continues to be displayed, "3.6.14Replacing P_REAR Sensor
replace P_REAR sensor.
2.2.1 Operation Status 16

2.2.2 Errors with Message

This section describes the contents of errors with messages as well as the check items and recovery actions.
These messages are displayed when an abnormal condition occurs while the printer is running.
Upon an occurrence of an error with message, the printer stops its operation at the same time.
The error can be cancelled by removing the error causes. After that, the printer will restart its operation.
Table 2-2 Symptoms and Check Items for Errors with Message

1 Media detection Media detection has 1. Is the media loaded outside the printing Instruct the user how to load media. Operation Manual
error failed. range (not placed in the center or the width is
smaller than the minimum width)?
2. Is P EDGE Sensor securely installed? Install P EDGE Sensor correctly. "3.8.6Replacing P_EDGE
Sensor
3. Are there taint or any foreign substances on Remove any taint or foreign substances. Operation Manual
the surface of Platen and P EDGE Sensor?
4. Is the cable of P EDGE Sensor connected Securely connect it to CR board connector "3.8.4Replacing CR Board
securely?
5. Is the cable of P Rear Sensor connected Securely connect it to MAIN board connector "Electric Wiring Diagram
securely?
　 6. Check the sensitivity of the sensor in “Sen : Replace P_EDGE Sensor. "5.6.1Rear/ Edge Sensor
EdgeAD” in the self-diagnosis function. Adjustment
7. Does the media in use have low Instruct the user that media with low reflectance -
reflectance? cannot be used.
8. Is CR_FFC obliquely inserted? Correctly plug the CR_FFC again. "3.8.4Replacing CR Board
9. P_EDGE sensor may be damaged. Replace P_EDGE Sensor. "3.8.6Replacing P_EDGE

Sensor
　 10. CR_FFC may be damaged. Replace CR_FFC. 3.9.3 Replacing CR FFC
11. CR board may be damaged. Replace CR board. "3.8.4Replacing CR Board
　 12. MAIN board may be damaged. Replace MAIN board. "3.5.10Replacing MAIN Board
2 Media skew error Media is running 1. Reload media and check whether the same If the error is due to the way the user loads the -
obliquely. error occurs. media, instruct the user how to load media
properly.
2. Does Suction FAN correctly operate in “Test: • Check the connection of the "5.4.6Fan Menu
Fan” – “Fan: Vacuum Fan” in the self- connectors of the Suction FAN "3.5.10Replacing MAIN Board
diagnosis function? • Replace Suction FAN Cable.
• Replace Suction FAN.
2.2.2 Errors with Message 17

Table 2-2 Symptoms and Check Items for Errors with Message(Continued)

3 ［*］Ink Near End Ink has run out. Printing 1. Check the ink in the ink cartridge. Replace the ink cartridge when there is no ink. -
operation stops If there is sufficient amount of ink, refer to the
［*］Ink End immediately. check item 2.
*Ink color is
2. Check the ink cartridge with no ink in the self- Insert or remove the cartridge and wait for more "5.4.4Sensor Menu
displayed in the
diagnosis function to see if the ink cartridge than three minutes to see if the same error is still
［*］.
displayed is the same one with the error. displayed.
If the same error continues to be displayed, refer
to the check item 3.
3. Check the connection of I/C Cables. Make sure to connect it securely. "3.11Replacing IH
4. Check the connection of JUNC_ID Cable. Make sure to connect it securely.

5. Check the connection of JUNC_FFC/ Make sure to connect it securely.
6. Is there ink leakage or bleeding around the Check the connection of Ink tube. "3.9.4Replacing Ink Tube
connection area of Ink tube?
7. I/C cable may be damaged. Replace it. "3.11.3Replacing Cartridge
Holder
8. JUNC_ID cable may be damaged. Replace it. "3.5.12Replacing JUNC_ID

Cable
9. JUNC_FFC may be damaged. Replace it. "3.5.13Replacing JUNC_FFC
10. JUNCTION Board may be damaged. Replace it. "3.5.11Replacing JUNCTION

Board
11. MAIN board may be damaged. Replace it. "3.5.10Replacing MAIN Board
4 ［*］No cartridge Ink cartridge is not 1. Are Ink cartridges used dedicated ink Instruct the user to use the dedicated ink -
*Ink color is inserted. cartridges? cartridges.
displayed in the
2. Is the message displayed after turning off the When the message is displayed: Refer to the -
［*］.
printer and turning it back on? check item 3 for action.
3. Check if there are ink cartridges in the self- Insert or remove the cartridge and wait for more "5.4.4Sensor Menu
diagnosis function to see if the ink cartridge than three minutes to see if the same error is still
displayed is the same one with the error. displayed.
• If the same error continues to be
displayed, adjust the mounting position of
I/C cable.
4. Check the connection of the connector of I/C Make sure to connect it securely. "3.11Replacing IH
cable.


4 ［*］No cartridge Ink cartridge is not 5. Check the connection of JUNC_ID cable. Make sure to connect it securely. "3.5.11Replacing JUNCTION
*Ink color is inserted. Board
displayed in the 6. Check the connection of JUNC_FFC. Make sure to connect it securely.
［*]. 7. At the connection point of the ink tubes, ink Check the connection of Ink tube. "3.11Replacing IH
leakage, or bleeding did not occur?
8. I/C cable may be damaged. Replace I/C cable. "3.11.3Replacing Cartridge
Holder
9. JUNC_ID cable may be damaged. Replace JUNC_ID cable. "3.5.12Replacing JUNC_ID

Cable
10. JUNC_FFC may be damaged. Replace JUNC_FFC. "3.5.13Replacing JUNC_FFC
11. Ink ID board Assy may be damaged. Replace Ink ID board. "3.11.4Replacing INK ID Board
Assy
12. JUNCTION Board may be damaged. Replace it. "3.5.11Replacing JUNCTION

Board
5 Broken Chip A dedicated S/C card 1. Check if the message is displayed after When the message is displayed: Refer to the Operation Manual
S/C Color Err may be malfunction. turning off the printer and turning it back on. check item 2.
S/C Ink Err
2. Check if the dedicated Smart chip cards are Replace with the dedicated Smart chip cards.
S/CCode Err
used.
3. Check if the dedicated Smart chip cards are
broken or the chip portion is damaged.
4. Check if ink ID is correctly recognized in the "5.4.4Sensor Menu
self-diagnosis function.
5. Ink ID board Assy may be damaged. Replace Ink ID board. "3.11.4Replacing INK ID Board
Assy
6 Full wasteInkTank Waste fluid bottle is full. 1. Check if Waste fluid bottle is full. Dispose of waste fluid. -
2. Check the connection of the connector of Re-insert the connector of the waste liquid level "3.5.11Replacing JUNCTION
Waste fluid level switch. switch. Board
3. JUNCTION board may be damaged. Replace it. "3.5.11Replacing JUNCTION

Board


7 Life Times [Head] The operational life of Check the life counter in Maintenance mode 2. Replace Head as necessary. Clear the counter 3.8.15 Replacing Head
Head has almost after replacing it. 6.3.4 Counter Initialization
expired. Menu
8 Life Times [Pump] The operational life of Replace Pump as necessary. Clear the counter "3.10.7Replacing Maintenance
Pump has almost after replacing it. Assy
expired. 6.3.4 Counter Initialization
Menu
9 Life Times [CR The operational life of Replace CR motor as necessary. Clear the "3.6.1Replacing CR Motor
Motor] CR motor has almost counter after replacing it. 6.3.4 Counter Initialization
expired. Menu
10 Life Times [PF The operational life of Replace PF motor as necessary. Clear the "3.7.1Replacing PF Motor
Motor] PF motor has almost counter after replacing it. 6.3.4 Counter Initialization
expired. Menu
11 Smart/C End Smart/C is End. Explain to User that it needs to be Smart Charge. - Operation Manual
12 Smart/C Low Smart/C is Low. Explain to User that it needs to be Smart Charge. - Operation Manual
NOTE
• The square bracket pair in an error message indicates the applicable ink color.
• If no ink and no cartridge occur at the same time, no cartridge message has priority to be displayed.

2.2.3 Errors Requiring Reboot

This section describes the contents of reboot-requiring errors as well as the check items and recovery actions.
These errors are issued when any of the following critical problems occur.
• Obstacle that prevents the machine's operation

• Damage of electric circuits (Boards, Motors, Sensors)
• Abnormal operation of control programs
When any of the above conditions occur, the machine follows the steps shown below before stopping its operation.
1. Turn OFF the driving system power automatically.

2. Flash all lamps on Operation panel and generate intermittent audible alarm.
3. Display the applicable error message on the LCD.
The error can be cancelled by removing the error causes and restarting the machine.
(1) CPU system serious error

　
Table 2-3 Symptoms and Check items for CPU System Serious Errors

1 E016 Interrupt Interruption exception 1. Check AC power supply and printer Replace MAIN board. Operation Manual
［00］ error: peripherals.
An anomaly is detected
2. Check whether the same error occurs. Even
during interruption "3.5.10Replacing MAIN Board
when there is no problem, turn off the printer
process.
and turn it back on a few times to check.
2 E016 Command border 3. Check if the firmware is the latest one.
TLB Modif exception/TLB
［01］ exception (load or 4. Check the serial number of the printer.
command fetch) error: 5. MAIN board may be damaged.
An anomaly is detected
in command border.
Or TLB exception is
detected while loading
data or fetching data.
2.2.3 Errors Requiring Reboot 21

Table 2-3 Symptoms and Check items for CPU System Serious Errors (Continued)

3 E016 TLB-L/I Data border exception/ 1. Check AC power supply and printer Operation Manual
［02］ TLB exception error peripherals.
4 E016 TLB-S Data border exception/ 2. Check whether the same error occurs. Even
"3.5.10Replacing MAIN Board
［03］ TLB exception (store) when there is no problem, turn off the printer
error: and turn it back on a few times to check.
An anomaly is detected 3. Check if the firmware is the latest one.
in data border.
Or TLB exception is 4. Check the serial number of the printer.
detected while storing 5. MAIN board may be damaged. • Replace MAIN board.
data.
5 E016 AddErr-L/I Address exception error
［04］ (load or command
fetch):
Address error is
or fetching command.
6 E016 AddErr-S Address exception error
［05］ (store):
An address error is
detected while
escaping.
7 E016 Pass exception error
BusErr-I (command fetch):
［06］ Address error is
or storing command.


8 E016 Bus exception error 1. Check the serial number of the printer. Operation Manual
BusErr-L ／ S (load or store): • Replace MAIN board. "3.5.10Replacing MAIN Board
2. MAIN board may be damaged.
［07］ Bus error is detected
while loading or storing
command.
9 E016 System call exception
SystemCall error:
［08］ An anomaly is detected
in system call.
10 E016 Break point exception
BreakPoint error:
in break point.
11 E016 Reserved command
Reserved exception error:
in reserved command.
12 E016 Coprocessor disabled
Copro exception error:
in coprocessor.


13 E016 Arithmetic overflow 1. Check AC power supply and printer • Contact your local MUTOH dealer. Operation Manual
Overflow exception error: peripherals.
［12］ Overflow is detected.
2. Check whether the same error occurs. Even
14 E016 Arithmetic overflow when there is no problem, turn off the printer
Trap exception error: and turn it back on a few times to check.
［13］ Overflow is detected. 3. Check the serial number of the printer.
15 E016 Floating decimal point 4. MAIN board may be damaged. • Replace MAIN board.
Floating exception error: "3.5.10Replacing MAIN Board
in floating decimal point.
16 E016 Watch exception error:
Watch An anomaly is detected
[23] in Watch.
17 E016 Watchdog time-out
WatchDog exception error:
［32］ A time-out is detected in
Watchdog.
18 E016 Abort error:
Abort Err Abort is detected.
［33］
19 E016 EXC error (undefined)
Exception　Err other than the above
［XX］ has occured.
E016 XX stands for a number.
Abort Err
［33］
20 CPU ERROR[35] The content of flash The contents of flash ROM may be destroyed. • Replace MAIN board.
ROM may be destroyed.
NOTE
For the PC settings, refer to your PC's operation manual.

(2) Mechanical Serious Errors　

Table 2-4 Symptoms and Check Items for Mechanical Serious Errors

1 E 065Err An anomaly is detected 1. Check if the is paper jam around Grid Roller. • Remove paper jam.
PF motor in PF motor (X-axis)
2. Check the error record in “Test : Record” in
during printer operation.
the self-diagnosis function.
Displayed when there is Check the connection of the following connectors "5.4.7Record Menu
E 067Err a big difference between 3. Set the endurance time to more than 50 of MAIN board .
2 times in “Life: PF Motor” in the self-diagnosis • PF motor cable connector
PF encoder motor command value "3.5.10Replacing MAIN Board
and feedback from function to see if any errors related to PF
• PF_ENC connector:
encoder. motor such as “PF motor error” occurs. "5.11Endurance Running Menu
• Connector that is connecting PF motor
4. Check “Encoder: PF” in “Check: Test” – and PF motor relay
“Test5: Encoder” in the self-diagnosis "5.4.5Encoder Menu
function.
• Turn PF connecting axle by hand and see
if the value displayed on the panel
changes as follows.
• Front feed direction: Increase
• Back feed direction: Decrease
5. Check if DC42V is correctly supplied from
Power board, using the tester. "3.5.1Replacing Power Board
If Main power board is damaged, replace it.
6. PF encoder may be damaged. • Replace PF encoder. "3.7.2Replacing PF Encoder
7. Check if PF encoder scale is installed facing "3.6.14Replacing P_REAR
the correct direction. • Install PF encoder scale properly. Sensor
8. Check if PF encoder scale is dirty or misted "4.4X Speed Reduction Belt
over. Tension Adjustment
• Adjust PF belt tension.
"3.7.1Replacing PF Motor
9. Check if the tension of PF belt is appropriate.
10. PF encoder may be damaged. • Replace PF motor.
• Replace MAIN board.

Table 2-4 Symptoms and Check Items for Mechanical Serious Errors(Continued)

3 E069 Err An anomaly is detected 1. Check the error record in “Test : Record” in "5.4.7Record Menu
PF Timeout in media feed amount the self-diagnosis function. "3.5.10Replacing MAIN Board
(X-axis) during printer Check the connection of the following connectors "5.11Endurance Running Menu
2. Set the endurance time to more than 50
operation. of MAIN board. "5.4.5Encoder Menu
times in “Life: PF Motor” in the self-diagnosis
Displayed when Grid • PF motor cable connector "Electric Wiring Diagram
function to see if any errors related to PF
roller has not reached • PF_ENC connector:
motor such as “PF motor error” occurs.
the designated position.
3. Check “Encoder: PF” in “Check: Test” – • Connector that is connecting PF
“Test: Encoder” in the self-diagnosis motor and PF motor relay
function.
changes as follows.
"3.7.2Replacing PF Encoder
"3.5.1Replacing Power Board
4. PF encoder may be damaged. • Replace PF encoder.
• If Main power board is damaged, replace
5. PF encoder may be damaged.
it.
6. MAIN board may be damaged. • Replace PF motor.


4 E071 Err An overload condition is 1. Is the weight of the media used within the • Explain the user about the recommended "5.11.10Endurance Running
PF Current detected in PF motor (X- recommended weight? media weight. Check Menu
E073 Err axis) during printer • Remove paper jam, check if Media holder
2. Is there paper jam around Grid roller?
PF2 Current operation. and Head are damaged, and check if the "3.5.10Replacing MAIN Board
same error occurs.
Check the connection of the following connectors "5.11Endurance Running Menu
of MAIN board .
"5.4.5Encoder Menu
• PF motor cable connector
"3.7.2Replacing PF Encoder
3. Check the error record in “Test : Life” in the • PF_ENC connector
self-diagnosis function. • Connector that is connecting PF "3.5.1Replacing Power Board
motor and PF motor relay
4. Set the endurance time to more than 50
times in “Life: PF Motor” in the self-diagnosis
motor such as “PF motor error” occurs.
5. Check “Encoder: PF” in “Check: Test” –
“Test5: Encoder” in the self-diagnosis
function.
changes as follows.
6. PF encoder may be damaged. • Replace PF encoder.
7. PF motor may be damaged.
• Replace PF motor.
8. Power board may be damaged.

• Replace Power board.
9. MAIN board may be damaged. • Replace MAIN board.


5 E066 Err An anomaly is detected 1. Check if there is paper jam around Grid • After removing any foreign substances "3.8.5Replacing CR Encoder
CR Motor in CR motor (Y-axis) Roller or any foreign substances around the and checking if the printer itself is not "5.4.7Record Menu
during printer operation. range of CR movement. damaged, check if the same error still "3.6.8Replacing T Fence
occurs.
2. Check the error record in “Test: Record” in
the self-diagnosis function. • Check if T fence is placed between CR
encoders. If not, reassemble CR encoder "7.5Lubrication/Bonding
6 E068 Err CR Displayed when there is 3. Move Carriage from side to side while the
Encoder a big difference between correctly. If T fence is damaged, replace
printer is turned off and see if there is it.
motor command value anywhere Carriage does not move smoothly.
and feedback from • Clean and lubricate CR rail roller guide.
encoder. 4. Set the endurance time to more than 50 • Check the connection of the following
"5.11Endurance Running Menu
times in “Life: CR Motor” in the self-diagnosis connectors.
motor such as “CR motor error” occurs. MAIN board :
• CR motor connector 3.9.3 Replacing CR FFC
• CR_FFC connector
CR board : 3.6.1 Replacing CR Motor
• CR_FFC connector
• Check the connection to CR motor is
appropriate.
• Check if the tensions of CR speed
reduction belt and Steel belt are
appropriate.
Replace the following parts:
• T fence
• CR encoder
• CR_FFC
• CR motor
• CR board
• MAIN board
7 E070 Err CR A timeout is detected in 5. Check if T fence is dirty or twisted. • When there is grease or dust on it: Wipe it "3.6.8Replacing T Fence
Timeout the Head shift amount with a dry cloth.
(Y-axis) during printer • When there is ink on it: Damp a cloth with
operation. mild detergent and lightly wipe off the ink.
Displayed when • When it is too dirty and the adhered
Carriage has not substance cannot be removed: Replace T
reached the designated fence.
position.


8 E070 Err A timeout is detected in 6. Check “Encoder: CR” in “Check: Test” – When NG: "5.4.5Encoder Menu
CR Timeout the Head shift amount “Test: Encoder” in the self-diagnosis a) Check the cable connection at the following 3.6.1 Replacing CR Motor
(Y-axis) during printer function. places. "3.8.5Replacing CR Encoder
(Continuted) operation. • Move Carriage to see if the values on the • CR board connector 3.9.3 Replacing CR FFC
Displayed when panel increases/decreases as follows. b) Replace the following parts. "3.8.4Replacing CR Board
Carriage has not • CR encoder
reached the designated
• CW direction: Increase • T fence
position.
• CCW direction: Decrease • CR motor
• CR_FFC
• CR board
7. Carriage lock solenoid may be damaged. When Carriage lock solenoid is malfunctioning, "3.8.1Releasing Carriage Lock
(Check if “ON” is displayed when Carriage is replace it.
locked and “OFF” is displayed when
Carriage is moved in “Sen.: CR Origin” in the
self-diagnosis function.)
8 E072 Err An overload condition is

CR Current detected in CR motor
(Y-axis) during printer
9 E074 Err operation.
CR2 Current
10 E092 Err
CR Overload
11 E075 Head Temp This indicates that Heat Head FFC may be damaged. 1. Make sure to connect Head FFC surely. 3.8.16 Replacing Head FFC
transistor is Head thermistor may be damaged. 3.8.15 Replacing Head
2. Replace Head FFC.
malfunctioning.
3. Replace Head.
12 E076 Err An anomaly is detected Thermistor or Heater’s connector may be 1. Plug Thermistor or Heater’s connector -
Pre heat system in Pre heater system disconnected, wiring may be faulty, or Thermistor properly.
(Thermistor, Heater). cable maybe nipped by plates, or Heater may be
2. Check the connections of HEATER DRIVE
damaged.
board.
3. Replace HEATER DRIVE board.
4. Replace Heater.


13 E077 Err An anomaly is detected Thermistor or Heater’s connector may be 1. Plug Thermistor or Heater’s connector -
Platen heat system in Platen heater system disconnected, wiring may be faulty, or Thermistor properly.
(Thermistor, Heater). cable maybe nipped by plates, or Heater may be
2. Check the connections of HEATER DRIVE
damaged.
board.
3. Replace HEATER DRIVE board.
4. Replace Heater.
14 E081 Err CR origin cannot be 1. Check CR origin sensor in “Sen.: CR Origin” Check connection of CR origin sensor cable "5.4.4Sensor Menu
CR Origin detected. in the self-diagnosis function. connector.
(Check if “ON” is displayed when Carriage is
locked and “OFF” is displayed when
Carriage is moved.)
2. CR origin sensor may be damaged. Replace it. "3.6.4Replacing CR Origin
Sensor
3. JUNCTION board may be damaged. Replace it. "3.5.11Replacing JUNCTION

Board
15 E 085 Err An anomaly is detected 1. Check the connection of Head FFC. 1. Make sure to connect Head FFC surely. 3.8.16 Replacing Head FFC
Head Heat in Head driver. 3.9.3 Replacing CR FFC
2. Check the connection of CR_FFC. 2. Make sure to connect CR_FFC surely.
16 E 087 Err This indicates that Head 3. 3.8.15 Replacing Head
Head FFC may be damaged. 3. Replace Head FFC.
H trans Th. transistor is "3.5.10Replacing MAIN Board
malfunctioning.（The 4. CR_FFC may be damaged. 4. Replace CR_FFC.
temperature of Head 5. Head may be damaged. 5. Replace Head.
transistor of MAIN board
may be abnormal, or the 6. CR board may be damaged. 6. Replace CR board.
sensor of Thermistor 7. MAIN board may be damaged. 7. Replace MAIN board.
may be malfunctioning.)
17 E 090 Err An anomaly is detected 1. Check input voltage. Replace HEATER DRIVE board. "3.11.6Replacing HEATER
Heater Volt. in Heater Volt. DRIVE Board
2. HEATER DRIVE board may be malfunction.
18 E097 Err An anomaly is detected - Replace MAIN board. "3.5.10Replacing MAIN Board
NVRAM. in NVRAM.
19 E140Err An anomaly is detected 1. Pre Thermistor connector may be 1. Make sure to connect thermistor connector -
Pre heat Th. in Pre Thermistor. malfunctioning. securely.
2. Thermistor may be disconnecting. 2. Replace Pre Thermistor relay.
3. HEATER DRIVE board may be 3. Replace Pre Thermistor.
malfunctioning.
4. Replace DRIVE board.


20 E141Err An anomaly is detected 1. Platen Thermistor connector may be 1. Make sure to connect thermistor connector "3.11.6Replacing HEATER
Platen heat Th. in Platen Thermistor. malfunctioning. securely. DRIVE Board
2. Platen Thermistor may be disconnecting. 2. Replace Thermistor relay.

3. HEATER DRIVE board may be 3. Replace DRIVE board.
malfunctioning.
21 E 154 Err Interception of the 1. AC cable may have unplugged. Plug AC cable securely. Operation Manual
AC Volt. Low power-supply to a
2. Instantaneous power failure may have Reboot the printer.
printer or the supply Operation Manual
occurred.
voltage decreased.
3. Power board may be damaged. Replace Power board. "3.5.1Replacing Power Board
22 E227 Err This indicates that 1. HEATER DRIVE board may be Replace HEATER DRIVE Board. "3.11.6Replacing HEATER
Heater SSR “Heater Off “ is not malfunctioning. DRIVE Board
worked.

2.2.4 Error Messages during File Transmission

This section describes the error messages displayed when sending backup parameters and firmware using dedicated online software, as well as their recovery actions.　
Table 2-5 Error Messages During File Transmission

1 Transfer failed Firmware data format is Check if the transferred firmware was the correct After checking, reinstall the firmware. 4.3 Working with MUTOH
Data format error wrong. file. Service Assistance Software
2 Transfer failed The cancel button on - Retransfer the firmware.
Aborted by the the computer is clicked.
HOST
3 Transfer failed A communication time- Check the connection between the printer and After solving the problem, retransfer the
Data timeout out is detected. computer. firmware.
4 Transfer failed File checksum error is - 1. Retransfer the firmware.
Check-sum error detected.
2. If this does not solve the problem, check if
the transferred firmware was the correct file.
5 Transfer failed Received wrong-sized Check if the program file is correct. After checking, retransfer the data.
Wrong size data.
xxxxxxxx
6 Transfer failed Incompatible firmware is Check if the program file is correct. After checking, reinstall the firmware.
Incompatible F/W detected.
7 Transfer failed ROM erase error is Board may be damaged. Replace MAIN board. "3.5.10Replacing MAIN Board
Flash erase error detected.
8 Transfer failed ROM writing error is Board may be damaged.
Flash write error detected.
9 Transfer failed ROM comparing error is Board may be damaged.
Flash compare detected.
error
10 Transfer failed FROM with unknown This should not normally happen.
Unknown Flash size written method is FROM may be damaged.
detected.
11 Internal Error No memory area is This should not normally happen. Replace MAIN board.
Memory Exhausted available.
2.2.4 Error Messages during File Transmission 32

Table 2-5 Error Messages During File Transmission(Continued)

12 Internal error Parameter writing failed. This should not normally happen. Replace MAIN board. "3.5.10Replacing MAIN Board
Parameter save FROM may be damaged.
error
13 Transfer failed Received wrong year MAIN board may be damaged.
Wrong year xxxx data. (xxxx).
14 Transfer failed Received wrong month
Wrong month xx data. (xx).
15 Transfer failed Received wrong date
Wrong day xx data. (xx).
16 Transfer failed Received wrong time
Wrong hour xx data. (xx).
17 Transfer failed Received wrong minute
Wrong min xx data. (xx).
18 Transfer not ready Transfer is not available. Check if the LED display on Operation panel is in Press an arbitrary button on Operation panel to 4.3 Working with MUTOH
standby state in Board manager mode. set the panel display in the standby state, and Service Assistance Software
then reinstall.
2.2.4 Error Messages during File Transmission 33

2.3 Troubleshooting Without Error Messages VJ628XE-M-00
2.3 Troubleshooting Without Error Messages

This section describes the symptoms of errors without an error message as well as the check items and recovery actions.
2.3.1 Initial Operation Problems

　
Table 2-6 Symptoms, Check Items and Actions for Initial Operation Problems
No. Symptom Check item Action Reference

1 Printer cannot be turned on 1. Are the cables between Inlet and Power board and Connect Power cable securely. "3.5Replacing Board Base
Power board and MAIN board securely connected? section
2. Is Power cable damaged?
If it is damaged, replace it.
3. Is Panel FFC cut or shorted out? Replace Panel FFC. "3.3.1Replacing Panel Board
4. Panel unit may be damaged. Replace Panel unit.

5. Inlet may be damaged. Replace Inlet. "3.5.6Replacing AC Inlet
2 LCD display malfunction 1. Check the connection of Panel FFC connector area on Correctly plug the following connectors again. "3.5.10Replacing MAIN Board
(When using Jig Panel) the Panel unit side and MAIN board side. • Panel FFC
• Is Panel FFC obliquely inserted?
2. Panel FFC may be damaged. Replace Panel FFC. "3.3.1Replacing Panel Board
3. Is LCD monitor of Panel unit damaged? Replace Panel unit.

2.3.1 Initial Operation Problems 34

Table 2-6 Symptoms, Check Items and Actions for Initial Operation Problems(Continued)

3 Initial ink charge does not 1. Is “Cover open” displayed on LCD monitor while Front • Adjust the mounting position of Cover "3.3.2Replacing Cover Switch
start cover is closed? sensor. Assy
• Replace Cover sensor.
2. Is “Lever up” displayed on LCD monitor while Prewssure Check if Lever sensor is correctly operating in "5.4.4Sensor Menu
Handle is lowered? “Check: Test” - “Sen.: Sensor” – “Test: Lever” in
3. Check the connection of MAIN board connector. • Correctly plug the connector again.
4. Does the next self-diagnosis function correctly operate • Follow the same procedure as when “[*] "2.2.2Errors with Message
while specific ink bags are securely inserted? Ink END” is displayed to take appropriate "5.9.2Parameter Update Menu
• Ink detection in “Sen.: Ink END” measures.
• After adjustment and replacement,
perform Initial ink charge in “Check:
InkCharg” – “InkCharge: Normal” in the
5. Does the dedicated cartridge status properly operate in • Follow the same procedure as when "2.2.2Errors with Message
“Sen.: INK ID” in the self-diagnosis function, while “error about S/C card” is displayed to take "5.9.2Parameter Update Menu
specified ink bags are securely inserted? appropriate measures.
• After adjustment and replacement,
perform Initial ink charge in “Check:
InkCharg” – “InkCharge: Normal” in the
6. MAIN board may be damaged. • Replace MAIN board. "3.5.10Replacing MAIN Board
• After replacement, perform Initial ink "5.5Ink Charging Menu
charge in “Check: InkCharg” –
“InkCharge: Normal” in the self-diagnosis
function.
4 Initial ink charge started, but 1. Is Maintenance Assy damaged, or is Tube disconnected • If Tube is disconnected, connect it again. "3.10Replacing Maintenance
ink does not reach Head from Maintenance Assy? • Replace Maintenance Assy. "3.11Replacing IH
2. Is tube damaged? • Replace Ink tube. "3.8Replacing Cursor section
3. Is Tube disconnected from Maintenance Assy? • Connect Pump motor connector securely.
4. Is Pump motor connector securely connected?

5. Is Pump motor rotated?
• Replace Valve head.
6. Valve head may be damaged.
• Replace Head.
7. Head may be damaged.


5 Ink does not come out even 1. Is Capping position appropriate? • Once the ink flow is confirmed, perform "5.5Ink Charging Menu
after initial ink charge is initial charge again.
completed
2. Is Ink tube in Maintenance Assy folded? • Replace Maintenance Assy and see if the "5.5Ink Charging Menu
cleaning operation makes the ink flow.
• When ink flow is confirmed, perform initial
ink charge again.
3. Is Wiper operating properly? • Correctly plug the connector of MAIN "3.5.10Replacing MAIN Board
(Check On/OFF in “Check: Test” – “Test: Sensor” – board again. "3.10.7Replacing Maintenance
“Sen.: Wiper” in the self-diagnosis function. • Replace Maintenance Assy. Assy
4. Is Pump working during cleaning operation? • Correctly plug the connector of MAIN "3.5.10Replacing MAIN Board
board again. 3.10.1 Replacing Waste Fluid
• Replace Pump motor cable. Pump
• Replace Pump.
5. Check the connection of Ink Tubes. • Connect Ink Tubes securely. "3.9.4Replacing Ink Tube
6. Is Ink tube bent, or does it have scratches or air • Replace the damaged Ink tube and check "3.9.4Replacing Ink Tube
leakage? if the cleaning operation makes the ink "5.5Ink Charging Menu
flow.
ink charge again.
7. Check the following points and connections and of Head Correctly plug Head FFC to the connector again. 3.8.16 Replacing Head FFC
FFCs on the CR board side and the head side. "3.8.4Replacing CR Board
• Is Head FFC obliquely inserted?
8. Is Head FFC disconnected? Replace Head FFC. 3.8.16 Replacing Head FFC
9. Check the connection of CR FFC. Make sure connect Head FFC securely. 3.8.16 Replacing Head FFC
10. Is Head damaged? Replace Head. 3.8.15 Replacing Head
11. Is CR board damaged? Replace CR board. "3.8.4Replacing CR Board
12. Check the connections of CR_FFC connector areas on Correctly plug the connector again. "Electric Wiring Diagram
the CR board side and MAIN board side
13. Is CR_FFC broken? Replace CR_FFC. 3.9.3 Replacing CR FFC


6 • The printer does not 1. Is “Cover open” displayed on LCD monitor while Front • Check the connectors of MAIN board. "3.5.10Replacing MAIN Board
operate after turned cover is closed? • Adjust the mounting position of Front "3.3.2Replacing Cover Switch
on. Does Front cover sensor correctly operate in “Test: cover sensor. Assy
• The printer does not Sensor” – “Sen.: Cover” in the self-diagnosis function? • Replace Front cover sensor. "Cover open
stop operation even
when Front cover or 2. Check the connection of Panel FFC connector areas on Correctly plug the following connectors again. "3.5.10Replacing MAIN Board
Maintenance cover is the Panel unit side and MAIN board side. • Panel FFC
opened.
• Is Panel FFC obliquely inserted?
• After the printer is
turned on, "Initializing" 3. Is “Set media” displayed on LCD with pressure arm • Check MAIN board connector. "3.5.10Replacing MAIN Board
is displayed and the lowered? • Replace Lever sensor. "3.6.7Replacing Lever Sensor
printer resets
4. Does P Rear Sensor correctly detect in “Test: Sensor” – • Check MAIN board connector. "5.4.7Record Menu
• Loading media does
“Sen.: Rear” in the self-diagnosis function • Replace P Rear Sensor. "3.5.10Replacing MAIN Board
not start the initial
operation "3.6.14Replacing P_REAR
• The printer does not Sensor
operate even when
Front cover or 5. Is DC cable between Power board and MAIN board • Reconnect DC cable. "3.5.1Replacing Power Board
Maintenance cover is correctly connected? • Replace DC cable.
closed.
(Continued)
7 The printer does not 1. Does the next self-diagnosis function correctly operate • Follow the same procedure as when “Ink "2.2.2Errors with Message
recognize the installed ink while specific ink bags are securely inserted? END” is displayed to take appropriate "5.9.2Parameter Update Menu
cartridges • Ink detection in “Sen.: Ink END” measures.
• Cartridge detection in “Sen.: Ink NOT”
2. Does the dedicated cartridge status properly operate in • Follow the same procedure as when Error "2.2.2Errors with Message
“Ctrl: Sensor” – “Sen. : etc” – “ Ink ID” in the self- concerning “S/C” is displayed to take "5.9.2Parameter Update Menu
diagnosis function, while specified ink bags are securely appropriate measures.
inserted?
8 Nothing can be input from 1. Check the connection of Panel FFC connector area on Connect Panel FFC securely. "3.5.10Replacing MAIN Board
Operation panel the Panel unit side and MAIN board side.
2. Panel unit may be damaged. Replace Panel unit. "3.3.1Replacing Panel Board
9 Printing does not start even - - "2.3.5Online Function Problems

after receiving data.

2.3.2 Media Feed Problems

　
Table 2-7 Symptoms, Check Items and Actions for Media Feed problems

1 Media slips during media 1. When using roll media, are Flanges correctly attached? • Correctly insert Flanges into the media Operation Manual
initialization or printing. tube of roll media. "3.5.10Replacing MAIN Board
2. Does P Rear Sensor correctly detect in “Test: Sensor” –
“Sen.: Rear” in the self-diagnosis function? • Check the connection of the following "3.8.4Replacing CR Board
connectors. "3.6.14Replacing P_REAR
• MAIN board:
Sensor
• CR board:
• Replace P Rear Sensor .
2 Media skews or meanders 3. Does Suction FAN correctly operate in “Test: Fan” in the • Check the connection of the connectors of "3.5.10Replacing MAIN Board
during media initialization or self-diagnosis function? the following MAIN board.
printing. • Suction FAN relay :
• Replace the Suction FAN.
3 Media wrinkles during media • Replace the Suction FAN’s cable which
initialization or printing. doesn’t work properly.
4 Media tears during media 4. Are you using media whose edges are curled up? • Instruct the users to use the Operation Manual
initialization or printing. recommended media and how to use
Media holder.
5. Does Pressure roller rotate smoothly while Pressure If paper dust or pieces of paper is adhered
Handle is raised? around Pressure roller, wipe it off with a soft
damp cloth.
6. Is Platen greatly distorted, scratched, or containing any • If there are any foreign substances such
foreign substances? as pieces of paper on Platen, remove
them.
• Replace Paper guide.
5 Media size is not correctly Is the customer using recommendation media? Reload the media recommended by MUTOH,
detected after media and check again.
initialization. If the media used is not recommended by
MUTOH, Paper sensor may have a reading miss
and may not be able to recognize media.
2.3.2 Media Feed Problems 38

2.3.3 Printing Problems

Table 2-8 Symptoms, Check Items and Actions for Printing Problems

1 The printer does not print 1. Check if you can print with a different data. Data may be faulty. -
continuously.
2. Firmware on the Main side may be faulty. Upgrade Firmware on the Main side. 4.3 Working with MUTOH
Service Assistance Software
2 After printing, the printer 1. Check if you can print with a different data. Data may be faulty. -
feeds an extra amount of
2. Firmware on the Main side may be faulty. Upgrade Firmware on the Main side. 4.3 Working with MUTOH
media.
3 Nozzles are clogged during 1. Is ink accumulated in Flushing box? If not, instruct him/her to perform daily Operation Manual
printing maintenance.
Replace Flushing box.
4 Cleaning does not mend the 2. Is cleaning sufficiently done? Perform cleaning twice in a row. Operation Manual
clogged nozzles or skewed
ink discharge.
3. Is ink adhered on Wiper? • After wiping the surface of Cleaning wiper Operation Manual
with the attached Cleaning stick, perform
4. Check if Wiper correctly operates in “Sen.: Wiper” in the
cleaning twice in a row. "3.10.6Replacing Cap Head
• If Cleaning wiper is sticky with ink, replace Assy
it with a new one.
5. Print out Nozzle check pattern in “Test : Adjustment” – If Nozzle check pattern is correctly printed, refer "5.6.8Test Printing Menu
“Adj : NozzleChk” in the self-diagnosis function. to the check item 4 for action.
6. Is Pump rotating during cleaning operation? • Correctly plug the connectors of MAIN "3.5.10Replacing MAIN Board
board again.
• Replace Maintenance Assy. "3.10.7Replacing Maintenance
• Replace MAIN board. Assy
7. Is the nozzle surface correctly wiped? Confirm the mounting status of Wiper, and fix it "3.10.6Replacing Cap Head
correctly. Assy
8. Is the rank of Head actually installed the same as the Input the correct Head rank. "5.9.2Parameter Update Menu
registered rank?
2.3.3 Printing Problems 39

Table 2-8 Symptoms, Check Items and Actions for Printing Problems(Continued)

3 Nozzles are clogged during 9. Is ink adhered on Head surface or inside nozzles? Follow the procedure below to perform Head
printing cleaning.
(Continued)
"5.6.9Longstore Menu
1. Perform Head cleaning in "Adj.: HeadWash" in
"5.9.2Parameter Update Menu
2. Perform Initial ink charge in “Update: Head
Rank”.
3. Check the printing status again.

4 Cleaning does not mend the 10. Is Ink tube folded? • Replace Ink tube and see if the cleaning "3.9.4Replacing Ink Tube
clogged nozzles or skewed operation makes the ink flow. "5.5Ink Charging Menu
ink discharge. • When ink flow is confirmed, perform initial
ink charge again.
11. Is Head damaged? Replace the damaged Head. 3.8.15 Replacing Head

Replace MAIN board. "3.5.10Replacing MAIN Board


5 Cannot print at all 1. Check power supply voltage (DC42V). Replace Power board . "3.5.1Replacing Power Board
A specific color is missing
2. Is CR_FFC obliquely inserted? Reinsert the connectors of CR_FFC. "3.5.10Replacing MAIN Board
"3.8.4Replacing CR Board
3. CR_FFC may be damaged. Replace CR_FFC. 3.9.3 Replacing CR FFC
4. Are Valve head , Ink tube, and joint screws loose? • Install the joint screw and the O-ring "3.8.2Removing Carriage Cover
Is O-ring properly mounted? appropriately.
"3.2Removing Covers
5. Is Ink tube bent, or does it have scratches or air • Replace Ink tube and see if the cleaning "3.9.4Replacing Ink Tube
leakage? operation makes the ink flow. "5.5Ink Charging Menu

ink charge again.
6. Does the next self-diagnosis function correctly operate • Follow the same procedure as when “Ink "2.2.2Errors with Message
while specific cartridges are securely inserted? NOT” is displayed to take appropriate "5.9.2Parameter Update Menu
• Ink detection in “ Ink END” measures.
• Cartridge detection in “ Ink NOT” • After adjustment and replacement,
perform Initial ink charge in “Update:
Head Rank” in the self-diagnosis function.
7. Is Pump rotating during cleaning operation? • Correctly plug the connectors of Pump "3.5.10Replacing MAIN Board
again. 3.10.7 Replacing Maintenance
Assy
8. Check the connections of Head FFCs on the CR board Correctly plug Head FFC to the connector again. 3.8.15 Replacing Head
side and the Head side. "3.8.4Replacing CR Board
• Is Head FFC obliquely inserted?
9. Valve head may be damaged. Replace it. "3.8.14Replacing Valve head


5 Cannot print at all 10. Head may be damaged? Replace it. 3.8.15 Replacing Head
A specific color is missing
(Continued)
11. CR board may be damaged. Replace it. "3.8.4Replacing CR Board
6 The page is printed all black. 1. Check the connections of Head FFCs on the CR board Correctly plug Head FFC to the connector again. 3.8.15 Replacing Head
side and the Head side. "3.8.4Replacing CR Board
• Is Head FFC inserted obliquely?
2. Is CR_FFC obliquely inserted? Reinsert the connectors of CR_FFC. "3.5.10Replacing MAIN Board
4. Head FFC may be damaged. Replace Head FFC. 3.8.15 Replacing Head


7 The page is printed blocky. 1. Ask the user of he/she is performing maintenance. If the plotter is used immediately after initial ink "9.5Choosing Place for the
replenishment is complete, the following results Printer
2. Is the printer used in an environment within the range of
may occur. Operation Manual
operating conditions?
8 Images are printed unevenly. 3. Did you print immediately after initial ink charge? If the plotter is used immediately after initial ink
replenishment is complete, the following results
may occur.
9 Lines in the CR direction look
• Printed lines become blurred.
split.
• White lines appear in the printed
10 White or black lines appear on media.
printed media. In such cases, perform cleaning two to three
times before printing, and then check the printing
result.
If there is no improvement in the print result even
after performing cleaning, leave the plotter
unused for an hour or more.
4. Is the media feed compensation value correct? Set media feed compensation value to more than "5.12Media Feed Menu
500mm to adjust.
5. Is Head adjusted correctly? When replacing Head, adjust it using the self- "4.2Adjustment Item
diagnosis function (Excluding the input of Head
rank.)
6. Are the nozzles of Head clogged? Perform cleaning. "2.3.3Printing Problems
7. Is a recommended print mode used? If the mode was set to Banner mode, instruct the Operation Manual
Have the effects been changed? user that it is not guaranteed
8. Is the media contaminated? Wipe it with dry cloth, or replace it. Operation Manual
9. Does Suction FAN correctly operate in “Test: Fan” in the • Check the connection of Suction FAN "3.5.10Replacing MAIN Board
self-diagnosis function? relay.
• Replace Suction FAN's cable which
doesn't work properly.
10. If roll media is used, does Roll media holder rotate Adjust the mounting position of Roll media holder -
smoothly? .
Replace Roll media holder.
11. Is the tension of X speed reduction belt adjusted to the
specified value? Adjust X speed reduction belt tension. "4.4X Speed Reduction Belt
Tension Adjustment


7 The page is printed blocky. 12. Is Cleaning wiper operating properly? • Check the operation in Wiper endurance "5.11.10Endurance Running
(Continued) in the self-diagnosis function. Replace Check Menu
13. How is the condition of Cleaning wiper?
Wiper unit if it does not operate properly. Operation Manual
• After wiping the surface of Cleaning wiper "3.10.7Replacing Maintenance
with the attached Poly-knit wiper, perform
Assy
cleaning twice in a row.
• If Cleaning wiper is sticky with ink, replace
it with a new one.
8 Images are printed unevenly. 14. Is the nozzle surface correctly wiped? Confirm the mounting status of Wiper, and fix it "3.10.6Replacing Cap Head
(Continued) correctly. Assy
9 Lines in the CR direction look 15. Is T fence dirty? • Clean T fence.

split.(Continued) • If T fence is still dirty after cleaning or "3.6.8Replacing T Fence
damaged, replace it.
10 White or black lines appear on 16. Does Pressure roller rotate smoothly while Pressure If paper dust or pieces of paper is adhered Operation Manual
printed media(Continued) lever is raised? around Pressure roller, wipe it off with a soft
damp cloth.
17. Is Pump motor rotating during cleaning operation? • Correctly plug the connector of MAIN "3.5.10Replacing MAIN Board
Is ink discharged? board again. "3.10.7Replacing Maintenance
• Replace MaintenanceAssy. Assy
18. Is Ink tube folded? • Replace Ink tube and see if the cleaning "3.9.4Replacing Ink Tube
operation makes the ink flow.
ink charge again.
registered rank?


7 The page is printed blocky. 20. Is ink adhered on the surface of Head or inside Follow the procedure below to perform Head "5.6.9Longstore Menu
(Continued) nozzles? cleaning.

the self-diagnosis function. "5.9.2Parameter Update Menu
2. Perform Initial ink charge in “Update: Head
Rank”.
8 Images are printed unevenly. 21. Is Head damaged? Replace the damaged Head. 3.8.15 Replacing Head
(Continued)
9 Lines in the CR direction look 22. CR board may be damaged. Replace CR board. "3.8.4Replacing CR Board
split.
(Continued)
10 White or black lines appear on Replace MAIN board. "3.5.10Replacing MAIN Board
printed media
(Continued)
11 The printed borders are 1. Does cleaning remedy the situation? Perform cleaning twice in a row. Operation Manual
blurred.
2. Are you using the media recommended by MUTOH? Reload the media recommended by MUTOH, Operation Manual
and check again.
3. Is Head correctly adjusted? Perform the same adjustment as when changing "4.2Adjustment Item
Head.


12 There are unwanted dots 1. Is the printer used in an environment within the range of Use the printer under the operating conditions. "9.5Choosing Place for the
(satellites). operating conditions? Printer
Lines are printed blurry
(messy printing result)
2. Is there sufficient amount of ink left in the ink cartridges? Replace with the new ink cartridge. Operation Manual
3. Perform cleaning three times in a row. Print again. Operation Manual
4. Head rank may be malfunctioning. Check Head rank in the self-diagnosis function. "(2)Head Rank
5. Is Head adjusted correctly? Perform the same adjustment as when changing "4.2Adjustment Item
Head.
6. Perform test printing. Nozzle check pattern is correctly printed, refer to -
the check item 7.
7. Did you print immediately after initial ink charge? After the initial ink charge, wait for more than six Operation Manual
hours before printing.
Print quality cannot be guaranteed until ink
charge is stabilized.
8. Check if CR encoder and T fence are touching each • If they are touching, adjust the mounting "3.8.5Replacing CR Encoder
other. positions of CR encoder and T fence. "3.8.4Replacing CR Board
• If the situation is not improved after "3.6.8Replacing T Fence
adjustment, replace CR board and T
fence.
9. Is Cleaning wiper operating properly? • Check the operation in Wiper endurance "5.11Endurance Running Menu
in the self-diagnosis function. Operation Manual
10. How is the condition of Cleaning wiper?
Replace Wiper unit if it does not operate "3.10.6Replacing Cap Head
properly.
Assy
• Damp the attached Cleaning wiper
cleaning cloth with the specialized
cleaning fluid and wipe off the surface of
Cleaning wiper.
After wiping off the surface of Cleaning
wiper, perform cleaning twice in a row.
• If Cleaning wiper is sticky with ink, replace
it with a new one.


12 There are unwanted dots 11. Is the nozzle surface correctly wiped? Confirm the mounting status of Wiper, and fix it "3.10.6Replacing Cap Head
(satellites). correctly. Assy
Lines are printed blurry
(messy printing result)
(Continued)
12. Is the rank of Head actually installed the same as the Input the correct Head rank. "3.6.8Replacing T Fence
registered rank?
13. Is Pump rotating during cleaning operation? • Correctly plug the connector of MAIN "3.5.10Replacing MAIN Board
board again. "3.10.7Replacing Maintenance
• Replace Pump. Assy
14. Is Ink tube folded? • Replace Ink tube and see if the cleaning "3.9.4Replacing Ink Tube
operation makes the ink flow.
• When ink flow is confirmed, perform initial "5.5Ink Charging Menu
ink charge again.
15. Is ink adhered on the surface of Head or inside Follow the procedure below to perform Head
nozzles? cleaning.
"5.6.9Longstore Menu
2. Perform Initial ink charge in “Update1: Head "(2)Head Rank
Rank”.
16. Head may be damaged. Replace Head. 3.8.15 Replacing Head


13 Mixed color lines are not 1. Is the rank of Head actually installed the same as the Input the correct Head rank. "5.9.2Parameter Update Menu
overlapped. registered rank?
2. Is there a problem with Head alignment? Adjust Head alignment and Head height. "4.8Head Height Adjustment
Is there a problem with Head height adjustment? "4.7Head Adjustment
3. Is there a problem with CW adjustment? Perform CW Alignment. "5.6.5Uni-D/ Bi-D Adjustment
4. Is there a problem with bi-directional print alignment? Adjust bi-directional print alignment. Menu
5. Check if CR encoder and T fence are touching each • If they are touching, adjust the mounting "3.8.5Replacing CR Encoder
other. positions of CR encoder and T fence. "3.8.4Replacing CR Board
• If the situation is not improved after "3.6.8Replacing T Fence
adjustment, replace CR board and T
fence.


14 The printed results are 1. Is the printer used in an environment within the range of Use the printer under the operating conditions. "9.5Choosing Place for the
uneven. (Vertical direction operating conditions? Printer
against the printer unit)
2. In printing, does Steel Bare bounce? Reassemble Steel Bare. "3.9.1Replacing Steel Bare
3. Is T fence dirty? • Clean T fence. "3.6.8Replacing T Fence

• If T fence is still dirty after cleaning or
damaged, replace it.
4. The internal processing of MAIN board may be Initialize parameters, re-input or readjust it, and -
faulty. then check the operation again.
5. Does Suction FAN correctly operate in “Test: Fan” in the • Check the connection of the connector of "3.5.10Replacing MAIN Board
self-diagnosis function? the Suction FAN.
• Replace Suction FAN cable.
6. Is the tension of CR Belt adjusted to the specified value? Adjust CR Belt tension. "4.4X Speed Reduction Belt
Tension Adjustment
7. If roll media is used, does Scroller rotate smoothly? • Adjust the mounting position of Roll media -
holder.
• Replace Roll media holder.
8. Does Pressure roller rotate smoothly while Pressure If paper dust or pieces of paper is adhered Operation Manual
Handle is raised? around Pressure roller, wipe it off with a soft
damp cloth.
9. CR Motor may be malfunctioned. Replace CR Motor. 3.6.1 Replacing CR Motor


15 The printed results are 1. Is the printer used in an environment within the range of Use the printer under the operating conditions. "9.5Choosing Place for the
uneven. (Horizontal direction operating conditions? Printer
against the printer unit)
2. Is the media feed compensation value correct? Set media feed compensation value to more than Operation Manual
500mm to adjust.
3. Is PF driving pulley loose? Replace PF motor. "3.7.1Replacing PF Motor
4. Is the tension of X speed reduction belt adjusted to the Adjust X speed reduction belt tension. "4.4X Speed Reduction Belt
specified value? Tension Adjustment
5. Does Pressure roller rotate smoothly while Pressure If paper dust or pieces of paper is adhered Operation Manual
lever is raised? around Pressure roller, wipe it off with a soft
damp cloth.
6. Is the rough area on the surface of Grid roller partially If paper dust or pieces of paper is adhered Operation Manual
pealed off? around Grid roller, wipe it off with a nylon brush.
7. Is Grid roller rotating heavily? Clean the area other than the painted portion of
Or does any part of Grid roller rumble when rotated? Grid roller.
8. If roll media is used, does Scroller rotate smoothly? Adjust the mounting position of Roll media -
holder.
Replace Roll media holder.
Change the media.
9. Is there a problem with Head alignment? Adjust the head alignment. "4.7Head Adjustment
10. Is there a problem with bi-directional print alignment? Adjust bi-directional print alignment. "5.6.5Uni-D/ Bi-D Adjustment
Menu
11. Is T fence dirty? Clean T fence. "3.6.8Replacing T Fence

If T fence is still dirty after cleaning or damaged,
replace it.
registered rank?
13. Check if the vertical lines printed in “Adj.: NozzleChk” Replace Steel bearer. 3.9.1 Replacing Steel Bare
in the self-diagnosis function are connected, while the
nozzle check pattern printed in “Adj.: HeadSlant”
shows it is properly adjusted.
14. Is Carriage wobbly? Replace Carriage. 3.8.17 Replacing Carriage Assy

2.3.4 Noise Problems

　
Table 2-9 Symptoms, Check Items, and Actions for Noise Problems

1 Abnormal noise is heard 1. Are there any contact substances or foreign substances Check the damage of the cable and connection "3.5.10Replacing MAIN Board
when media is sucked around the rotating fin of Suction FAN? of the connector.
2. Check the damage of the cable and connection of the If damaged, replace the part. -
connector.
3. Suction FAN itself may be faulty. Replace Suction FAN. -
2 Abnormal noise is heard 1. Are there any contact substances or foreign substances Remove any contact substances or foreign -
during waiting time at the area where noise is coming from? substances.
2. Is the noise coming from Board ? • If it is microvibration noise (which sounds "3.5.1Replacing Power Board
like tinnitus) during standby, tell the user "3.5.10Replacing MAIN Board
that it is the specification.
• If the above does not apply, replace the
3.8.15 Replacing Head
following part(s):
• Power board
• MAIN board
• CR board
• Head
2.3.4 Noise Problems 51

Table 2-9 Symptoms, Check Items, and Actions for Noise Problems(Continued)

3 Abnormal noise is heard while 1. Is the noise the sound generated by ink discharging Explain the specifications. -
Head is moving laterally during printing?
2. Is the traveling surface of Cursor rail roller dirty? • Clean Cursor rail roller with a dry cloth. -
• Remove any foreign substances on
3. Does Bearing have any foreign substances on it?
Carriage bearing and Roller guide. -
• When cleaning Roller guide, make sure to
camp a cloth with Sumigrease spray to
apply to the surface of Roller guide.
4. Is the cause of the noise loose screw(s) on a cover? Retighten the screw(s). 3.2 Removing Covers
5. Does Carriage portion make clattery noise when moved • Remove any foreign substances on -
from side to side? Carriage bearing and Roller guide.
• When cleaning Roller guide, make sure to
camp a cloth with Sumigrease spray to
apply to the surface of Roller guide.
6. Is CR_FFC making noise? • Straighten and fix it. 3.2 Removing Covers
• If the noise is coming from between Steel
bearer and Tube guide, replace Tube
guide.
7. Is the cable connected to CR board on Carriage • If it is touching, adjust the mounting 3.9.3 Replacing CR FFC
touching CR board cover? position of the relevant part.
• If the situation is not improved after
adjustment, replace the relevant part.
8. Is the noise coming from Bearing of CR following Replace CR following movement pulley. 3.6.11 Replacing CR Return
movement pulley? Pulley Assy
9. Is the noise coming from CR motor? Replace CR motor. "3.6.1Replacing CR Motor

Table 2-9 Symptoms, Check Items, and Actions for Noise Problems(Continued)

4 Abnormal noise is heard 1. Is the gear jumping between speed reduction pulleys? Replace X speed reduction belt. 3.7.4 Replacing X Speed
when feeding media Check Speed reduction belt tension. Reduction Belt
2. Is the noise coming from PF motor ? Replace PF motor.
3. Is the rough area on the surface of Grid roller partially If there is paper dust or pieces of paper on Grid Operation Manual
pealed off? roller, clean it with a nylon brush.
4. Is Grid roller rotating heavily?Or does any part of Grid
roller rumble when rotated?
5. Is PF scale dirty? Apply a damp and tightly squeezed soft cloth to -
wipe it off.
6. Is the mounting position of PF encoder correct? Install PF encoder properly. "3.7.2Replacing PF Encoder

2.3.5 Online Function Problems

　
Table 2-10 Symptoms, Check Items, And Actions for Online Function Problems

1 Other functions do not work 1. MAIN board may be damaged. Replace MAIN board. "3.5.10Replacing MAIN Board
correctly
2 Printing position is incorrect 1. Is there a problem with CW adjustment? Perform adjustment. "5.6.5Uni-D/ Bi-D Adjustment
Menu
2. Is there a problem with P EDGE Sensor adjustment? Perform adjustment. "5.6.1Rear/ Edge Sensor
Adjustment
3. Is P EDGE Sensor correctly connected? Connect it securely. 3.8.6 Replacing P_EDGE
4. P EDGE Sensor may be damaged. Replace P_Edge sensor. Sensor
3 Data or printing is garbled 1. Firmware on the Main side may be faulty. Upgrade Firmware on the Main side. 4.3 Working with MUTOH
4 Part of the data is not printed 2. Check if T fence is dirty or twisted. • When there is grease or dust on it: Wipe it
(missing) with a dry cloth.
• When there is ink on it: Damp a cloth with
mild detergent and lightly wipe off the ink.
"3.6.8Replacing T Fence
• When it is too dirty and the adhered
substance cannot be removed: Replace T
fence.
3. Check “Encoder: CR” in “Check: Test” – “Test: Encoder” • If NG, check the connection of the "3.5.10Replacing MAIN Board
in the self-diagnosis function. connector of CR board "3.6.8Replacing T Fence
• Replace T fence "3.9.4Replacing Ink Tube
• Replace CR_FFC "3.8.4Replacing CR Board
• Replace CR motor 3.9.3 Replacing CR FFC
• Replace CR board
4. Main board may be malfunctioned. Replace MAIN board. "3.5.10Replacing MAIN Board
2.3.5 Online Function Problems 54

2.3.6 Other Problems

　
Table 2-11 Symptoms, Check Items, And Actions

1 The printer hangs up 1. The internal processing of MAIN board may be Initialize parameters, re-input or readjust it, and "5.9.2Parameter Update Menu
faulty. then check the operation again. "5.9.2Parameter Update Menu
2 The power is shut down 1. Is Power cable short circuited? Check it with a tester. -
during printing
2. Is there electrical leakage? Check if the cable film is peeling and touching -
the chassis.
3. Check power supply voltage (DC24V). Replace Power board. "3.5.1Replacing Power Board
4. Power board may be damaged.

3 Ink cartridges cannot be 1. Is it installed correctly? Install it correctly. Operation Manual
inserted
2. Are Ink bags used dedicated ink bags? Instruct the user to use the dedicated ink bags.
4 Ink spills out of Waste fluid 1. Are there any foreign substances or ink accumulated in Remove the foreign substances. "3.10.8Replacing Waste Fluid
tank Waste fluid tank. Tank
5 Ink spills out of Maintenance 1. Are there any foreign substances or ink accumulated in • Remove the foreign substances. "3.10.7Replacing Maintenance
Ink receiver Maintenance Ink receiver? • Replace Maintenance Assy. Assy
2. PVA sponge may not be able to absorb ink. Replace PVA sponge. Operation Manual
2.3.6 Other Problems 55

Table 2-11 Symptoms, Check Items, And Actions(Continued)

6 Ink spills around X rail 1. Tubes of Flushing box or Maintenance Assy may be • Check if Tubes of Flushing box or 3.10 Replacing Maintenance
disengaged. Maintenance Assy are disengaged.
• Replace Maintenance Assy.
• Replace Flushing box.
2. Is Waste fluid tube bent? Make sure that approximately 160mm of Waste -
fluid tube comes out downward from Leg holder
base (exploded view A-1).
3. Is Waste fluid tube clogged? Replace Waste fluid tube. -
4. Ink tube may be disconnected Replace Ink tube. "3.9.4Replacing Ink Tube
6. Head may be damaged. Replace Head. 3.8.15 Replacing Head
2.3.6 Other Problems 56

2.3.7 Problems in Using MUTOH Service Assistance

　
Table 2-12 Problems, Check Items, and Actions in Using MUTOH Service Assistance

1 MUTOH Service Assistance ‐ Reinstall and perform initial settings. Network administration
does not start up Manual
2 "Transfer failed (Data 1. Are the printer and computer correctly connected with a Yes: Proceed to (2). 4.3 Working with MUTOH
timeout)" is displayed during LAN cable (when directly connected, use a cross cable No: Connect the printer and computer correctly. Service Assistance Software
transfer. and when connected via a hub, use a straight cable)?
2. Is the computer’s IP address correct? Yes: Proceed to (3). 4.3 Working with MUTOH
No: From the computer’s network connection Service Assistance Software
settings, use the property of local area
connection to adjust the properties of TCP/IP.
The computer and printer must have the same
sub net addresses (such as 192.168.1.1/24 and
192.168.1.253, etc).
3. Does the device connected to the hub have the same IP Yes: Remove the relevant device from LAN. ‐
address as the computer or printer? No: Proceed to (4).
4. Was the printer started in Board manager mode and only Yes: Proceed to (5). 4.3 Working with MUTOH
Power LED is lit? No: Start in Board manager mode. Service Assistance Software
If there is nothing displayed on LCD monitor,
MAIN board maybe faulty or firmware is not
installed (including a power shutdown due to
power outage during installation).
5. Is the computer’s IP address correct? Yes : Proceed to (6). 4.3 Working with MUTOH
No: MAIN board may be faulty. Service Assistance Software
6. Can the computer communicate with other devices via Yes: Connect the computer with other devices -
LAN? via LAN cable and check with ping command,
etc.
No: The computer or MAIN board may be faulty.
3 "The main F/W data is Is the firmware data (*.jfl) to be transferred correct? Transfer the correct firmware data again. 4.3 Working with MUTOH
incorrect." is displayed during Service Assistance Software
firmware transfer.
4 "The main F/W data is Does the firmware data (*.jfl) to be transferred match the Transfer the firmware date (*.jfl) that matches the
incompatible with the printer." printer model? printer model again.
is displayed during firmware
transfer.
2.3.7 Problems in Using MUTOH Service Assistance 57

Table 2-12 Problems, Check Items, and Actions in Using MUTOH Service Assistance(Continued)

5 "The F/W version cannot be Is the version of the firmware data (*.jfl) to be transferred Make sure that the version of the firmware data 4.3 Working with MUTOH
downgraded to the older older than that of the printer? (*.jfl) is newer than that of the printer and transfer Service Assistance Software
version." is displayed during it again.
firmware transfer.
2.3.7 Problems in Using MUTOH Service Assistance 58

VJ628XE-M-00
3 Parts Replacement 3.5.2 Replacing AC JUNC-Power Cable Assy ............... 77
3.5.3 Replacing IL Dummy Cable Assy .......................... 78

3.1 Introduction .................................................................... 62
3.5.4 Replacing Main DC Cable Assy ............................ 79
3.2 Removing Covers........................................................... 63
3.5.5 Replacing FG Cable Assy ..................................... 80
3.2.1 Removing Top Cover .............................................64
3.5.6 Replacing AC Inlet................................................. 81
3.2.2 Removing Side Cover ............................................65
3.5.7 Replacing Slide Switch .......................................... 82
3.3 Replacing Cover section ............................................... 67
3.5.8 Replacing AC SEL SW Cable Assy....................... 83
3.3.1 Replacing Panel Board ..........................................67
3.5.9 Replacing Cooling FAN ......................................... 84
3.3.2 Replacing Cover Switch Assy ................................68
3.5.10 Replacing MAIN Board .......................................... 85
3.3.3 Replacing Switch Lever..........................................69
3.5.11 Replacing JUNCTION Board................................. 87
3.3.4 Replacing Cover R Cable Assy..............................70
3.5.12 Replacing JUNC_ID Cable .................................... 88
3.3.5 Replacing Switch Panel Cable Assy ......................71
3.5.13 Replacing JUNC_FFC ........................................... 89
3.4 Replacing Frame section............................................... 72
3.5.14 Replacing Inlet AC JUNC Cable Assy ................... 90
3.4.1 Replacing Media Holder.........................................72
3.6 Replacing Y Rail part..................................................... 91
3.4.2 Replacing Scroller Holder Roller Assy ...................73
3.6.1 Replacing CR Motor .............................................. 91
3.4.3 Replacing Adsorption Fan......................................74
3.6.2 Replacing CR Belt ................................................. 93
3.4.4 Replacing Adsorption Fan Cable ...........................75
3.6.3 Replacing CR Motor Relay Assy ........................... 96
3.5 Replacing Board Base section...................................... 76
3.6.4 Replacing CR Origin Sensor ................................. 97
3.5.1 Replacing Power Board .........................................76
59
VJ628XE-M-00
3.6.5 Replacing CR Origin Sensor Cable........................98 3.8.1 Releasing Carriage Lock ..................................... 116
3.6.6 Replacing Lever Sensor Cable ..............................99 3.8.2 Removing Carriage Cover .................................. 117
3.6.7 Replacing Lever Sensor.......................................100 3.8.3 Removing CR Board Cover ................................. 118
3.6.8 Replacing T Fence ...............................................101 3.8.4 Replacing CR Board............................................ 119
3.6.9 Replacing Fence Guide........................................103 3.8.5 Replacing CR Encoder ........................................ 120
3.6.10 Replacing T Fence Spring....................................104 3.8.6 Replacing P_EDGE Sensor................................. 121
3.6.11 Replacing CR Return Pulley Assy........................105 3.8.7 Replacing Cutter Spring ...................................... 122
3.6.12 Replacing Pressure Roller Spring ........................107 3.8.8 Replacing PG Origin Sensor Cable ..................... 123
3.6.13 Replacing Pressure Roller Assy and Pressure Roller 3.8.9 Replacing Cutter Holder Assy ............................. 124
Axis Assy108
3.8.10 Replacing Cutter Solenoid Assy .......................... 125
3.6.14 Replacing P_REAR Sensor .................................109
3.8.11 Replacing Cutter Solenoid Cable ........................ 127
3.7 Replacing PF section ................................................... 110
3.8.12 Replacing Mini Latch ........................................... 128
3.7.1 Replacing PF Motor .............................................110
3.8.13 Replacing Roller Arm Assy.................................. 129
3.7.2 Replacing PF Encoder .........................................111
3.8.14 Replacing Valve head.......................................... 130
3.7.3 Replacing PF Encoder Scale ...............................112
3.8.15 Replacing Head ................................................... 134
3.7.4 Replacing X Speed Reduction Belt ......................113
3.8.16 Replacing Head FFC ........................................... 139
3.7.5 Replacing PF Speed Reduction Pulley ................114
3.8.17 Replacing Carriage Assy ..................................... 141
3.7.6 Replacing PF Motor Cable ...................................115
3.8.18 Replacing Head FG Assy .................................... 145
3.8 Replacing Cursor section............................................ 116
60
VJ628XE-M-00
3.9 Replacing Cable Guide section................................... 146 3.11.4 Replacing INK ID Board Assy.............................. 170
3.9.1 Replacing Steel Bare ...........................................146 3.11.5 Replacing Holder Pressure Spring ...................... 171
3.9.2 Replacing Tube Guide Film Assy.........................148 3.11.6 Replacing HEATER DRIVE Board ...................... 172
3.9.3 Replacing CR FFC ...............................................150 3.11.7 Replacing AC JUNC CNT Cable Assy ................ 173
3.9.4 Replacing Ink Tube .............................................152 3.11.8 Replacing Circulation pump................................. 174
3.10 Replacing Maintenance ............................................... 157 3.11.9 Replacing Circulation Pump Relay Cable............ 175
3.10.1 Replacing Waste Fluid Pump...............................157
3.10.2 Replacing Pump Motor Cable ..............................158
3.10.3 Replacing Wiper...................................................159
3.10.4 Replacing Wiper Solenoid Cable .........................160
3.10.5 Replacing Wiper Solenoid....................................161
3.10.6 Replacing Cap Head Assy ...................................163
3.10.7 Replacing Maintenance Assy...............................164
3.10.8 Replacing Waste Fluid Tank ................................165
3.11 Replacing IH.................................................................. 166
3.11.1 Removing Pump stay ...........................................166
3.11.2 Removing Heater Board Stay ..............................167
3.11.3 Replacing Cartridge Holder..................................168
61
3.1 Introduction
This chapter provides information on removal and replacement of service parts.
WARNING
• Before starting part replacement, always perform the following operations.

• Turn OFF machine power.
• Remove Power plug from outlet.
Otherwise, you may suffer electric shock or system circuit may be damaged.
• Remove any Cable s connected to the printer.
Otherwise, the printer may be damaged.
CAUTION
Components in the printer can be disassembled only if so instructed in this manual.
Do not disassemble frame components and other components that are not
instructed to disassemble in the manual.The printer has been assembled in MUTOH
factory with extremely high precision up to 1/100mm. If disassembled
inappropriately, it may not restore its normal functionality.
NOTE
• After replacing any service parts, perform necessary lubrication and bonding the
following instructions in section"7.5Lubrication/BondingP.378
• The pictures and illustrations of the disassembly procedure are still under
development
The specification of the parts that are not directly related to the procedure may not
be up-to-date.
62
3.2 Removing Covers VJ628XE-M-00
3.2 Removing Covers

This section describes the procedures to replace Covers.
Followings describe the list of Cover parts.
3 4
2
No. Name
1 Front Cover
2 R Side Cover
3 Top Cover
4 L Side Cover
5 Pressure Handle
63
3.2.1 Removing Top Cover

4 Remove the screws (8 pieces) retaining the
　 ● Tools & Jigs back side of Front Cover. A
Name No. Remarks A : Tapping screw M4ｘ8 S tight bind

Phillips screwdriver No.2 Generic - B : Tapping screw M3ｘ6 S tight bind
products
1 Open Front Cover. B
2 Remove Reuse Clamp from the main body.
A : Reuse Clamp A
B
A
5 Remove Top Cover.
6 To reassemble unit, reverse the removal

procedure.
3 Remove the screws (2 pieces) retaining the

front side of Front Cover.
A : Tapping screw M4x8 S tight bind
3.2.1 Removing Top Cover 64

3.2.2 Removing Side Cover

2 Remove the tip of Waste Fluid Tube from the
　 ● Tools & Jigs main body.
A
Name No. Remarks A : Waste Fluid Tube
Phillips screwdriver No.2 Generic -
slotted screwdriver（precision） products -
NOTE
When removing R Side Cover, the work of Procedure 1~2 are required.
Other work is the same at R Side Cover and L Side Cover.
CAUTION
In this section, the photograph of R Side Cover is used.
If the clamp is loosened, Ink may leak.
Poor
1 Remoe Pressure Handle.
Insert slotted screwdriver to the hole of
Pressure Handle, then release the hook.
Good
A : hole
3 Remove the screws (3 pieces).
A A : Tapping screw M4ｘ10 S Tight cup
A : Tapping screw M4ｘ8 S tight bind
3.2.2 Removing Side Cover 65

A : Tapping screw M4ｘ12 P tight bind

B : Tapping screw M4ｘ8 S tight bind
6 Remove Slid Cover.

procedure.
NOTE
When assembling, make sure not to nip
FFCs and cables.
3.2.2 Removing Side Cover 66

3.3 Replacing Cover section VJ628XE-M-00
3.3 Replacing Cover section 4 Remove the screws (2 pieces) retaining SW

Panel Bottom. A
3.3.1 Replacing Panel Board
A : SW Panel Bottom
　 ● Tools & Jigs & Maintenance part B : Tapping screw M3ｘ8　S Tight cup
Name No. Remarks
Panel Board Assy DG-44726 Exploded View Cover
B
Phillips screwdriverNo.1 products -
5 Remove SW Panel Bottom.
CAUTION
6 Remove the screws retaining Panel Board
Before replacing Panel Board Assy, unplug Power cable and leave it for a while.If Assy. A
operating with Power cable still plugged, Board may be damaged. or operators may
get an electric shock by residual electric charge. A : Switch Panel Bottom
B : P tight pan M3ｘ12
1 Remove Top Cover.

B
2 Remove Switch Panel Cable Assy from MAIN

Board. 7 Remove Switch Panel Cable Assy from MAIN
PANEL Board Assy.
A : Switch Panel Cable Assy A

B : PANEL Board Assy
-
B
3 Remove the cable from the claps on the path.
8 Replace Panel Board Assy.

procedure.
3.3.1 Replacing Panel Board 67

3.3.2 Replacing Cover Switch Assy

4 Remove the screw retaining SW Mounting
　 ● Tools & Jigs & Maintenance part Plate.
Name No. Remarks A : Tapping screw M3ｘ6 S tight bind A
Cover Switch Assy DG-42956 Exploded View Cover

products
Phillips screwdriver No.1 -
NOTE
Cover switch Assy looks like the following. 5 Remove SW Mounting Plate.
6 Remove the screws (2 pieces) retaining Cover

Switch Assy.
A : Pan-head screw with spring washer and A

flat washer (polished）M2ｘ12Ni-3
Open Closed
B : Cover Switch Assy
1 Move Carriage to left (the opposite side of

B
origin).
3.8.1 Releasing Carriage Lock
7 Replace Cover switch Assy.
2 Remove Cover R Cable Assy from Cover
switch Assy. 8 To reassemble unit, reverse the removal
procedure.
A : connecting point A
3 Remove Cover switch Assy Cable from the

clamps on the path.
3.3.2 Replacing Cover Switch Assy 68

3.3.3 Replacing Switch Lever

　 ● Tools & Jigs & Maintenance part
Name No. Remarks

Switch Lever Assy DG-44728 Exploded View Cover
products
1 Move Carriage to left (the opposite side of

origin).
2 Remove the screw retaining SW Mounting

Plate.
A : Tapping screw M3ｘ6 S tight bind A
3 Remove SW Mounting Plate.
4 Replace Switch Lever.
A : Switch Lever

procedure.
3.3.3 Replacing Switch Lever 69

3.3.4 Replacing Cover R Cable Assy

7 Replace Cover R Cable Assy.
Name No. Remarks

procedure.
Cover R Cable Assy DG-44729 Exploded View Cover
products
1 Open Front Cover.
2 Remove R Side Cover.

3 Remove Top Cover.

4 Remove Cover R Cable from MAIN Board.

J13
5 Remove Cover R Cable Assy from the clamps

on the path.
6 Remove Cover R Cable Assy from the clamps

on the path.
A : Connecting point A
3.3.4 Replacing Cover R Cable Assy 70

3.3.5 Replacing Switch Panel Cable Assy

4 Remove the screws (2 pieces) retaining SW
　 ● Tools & Jigs & Maintenance part Panel Bottom. A
Name No. Remarks A : SW Panel Bottom

Switch Panel Cable Assy DG-44727 Exploded View Cover B : Tapping screw M3ｘ8　S Tight cup

Phillips screwdriverNo.1 products -
B
CAUTION
Before replacing Panel Board Assy, unplug Power cable and leave it for a while.If 5 Remove SW Panel Bottom.
operating with Power cable still plugged, Board may be damaged. or operators may
get an electric shock by residual electric charge. 6 Remove the screws retaining SW Panel
Bottom. A
A : Switch Panel Bottom

1 Remove Top Cover. B : P tight pan M3ｘ12
2 Remove Switch Panel Cable Assy from MAIN

Board. B
7 Remove Switch Panel Cable Assy from Panel

Board.
A : Switch Panel Cable Assy A

- B : PANEL Board Assy
3 Remove the cable from the claps on the path.

B

procedure.
3.3.5 Replacing Switch Panel Cable Assy 71

3.4 Replacing Frame section VJ628XE-M-00
3.4 Replacing Frame section 4 To reassemble unit, reverse the removal

procedure.
3.4.1 Replacing Media Holder
Name No. Remarks

Media Holder Assy DG-44697 Exploded View Frame R•Heater
Phillips screwdriverNo.1 Generic -
products
㨀㧵㧼
This section describes the procedure to replace the maintenance part,Media Holder
Assy.In this section, it is referred to as Media Holder.
1 Remove the screw.

A : Pan head small screwM2ｘ5
2 Remove Media Holder horizontally.
A : Media Holder
3 Replace Media Holder.
3.4.1 Replacing Media Holder 72

3.4.2 Replacing Scroller Holder Roller Assy

5 Replace Scroller Holder Rollers.
Name No. Remarks

Scroller Holder Roller Assy DG-44698 Exploded View Frame R•Heater
Exploded View Frame L•Scroller
products A
㨀㧵㧼
• This section describes the procedure to replace the maintenance part, Scroller
procedure.
Holder Roller Assy.
In this section, it is referred to as Scroller Holder Roller.
• The replacement procedure is common to both R side and L side.This section
describes the procedure to replace L.
1 Removing L Side Cover.

2 Remove the screws (3 pieces) retaining

Scroller Holder L.
B
A : P tight pan M3x12 Ni-3
B : Scroller Holder L
3 Remove Scroller Holder Cover L.
4 Remove Scroller Holder L.
A : Scroller Holder Cover L

B : Scroller Holder L
A
B
3.4.2 Replacing Scroller Holder Roller Assy 73

3.4.3 Replacing Adsorption Fan

　 ● Tools & Jigs & Maintenance part procedure.
Name No. Remarks

Adsorption Fan Assy DG-42988 Exploded View Frame L•Scroller
products
㨀㧵㧼
This section describes the procedure to replace the maintenance part, Adsorption
Fan Assy.
In this section, it is referred to as Adsorption Fan.

2 Remove Adsorption Fan Cable from

Adsorption Fan. B
A : the cable of Adsorption Fan

B : Adsorption Fan Cable

Adsorption Fan.
A : Pan-head screw with spring washer and

flat washer (polished) M3x40 Ni-3
4 Replace Adsorption Fan.
3.4.3 Replacing Adsorption Fan 74

3.4.4 Replacing Adsorption Fan Cable

5 Remove Adsorption Fan Cable from MAIN
　 ● Tools & Jigs & Maintenance part Board.
J13
Name No. Remarks
Adsorption Fan Cable Assy DG-44694 Exploded View Frame L•Scroller
products
㨀㧵㧼
This section describes the procedure to replace the maintenance part, Adsorption
Fan Cable Assy.
6 Replace Adsorption Fan Cable.
In this section, it is referred to as Adsorption Fan Cable Assy.
procedure.
1 Remove Top Cover.


3 Remove Adsorption Fan Cable from

Adsorption Fan. B
A : the cable of Adsorption Fan

B : Adsorption Fan Cable
4 Remove Adsorption Fan Cable from the

clamps on the path.
3.4.4 Replacing Adsorption Fan Cable 75

3.5 Replacing Board Base section VJ628XE-M-00
3.5 Replacing Board Base section

3.5.1 Replacing Power Board
Name No. Remarks

Power Board Assy DG-43172 Exploded View Board Box
products
CAUTION
If Power board Assy needs to be removed, remove Power Cable and wait for 5
minutes or more before dismounting the Assy; this will discharge the residual
electrical charge of the electrolytic capacitor.
Touching Board before capacitor discharges may cause electric shock.
1 Remove Top Cover.

2 Remove connectors that are connected to

Power Board.

Power Board.
A : Cup screw Ｍ3ｘ6

A
4 Replace Power board.

procedure.
3.5.1 Replacing Power Board 76

3.5.2 Replacing AC JUNC-Power Cable Assy

5 Remove AC JUNC-Power Cable Assy from
　 ● Tools & Jigs & Maintenance part Power Board.
Name No. Remarks

AC JUNC-Power Cable Assy DG-44714 Exploded View Board Box
products
CN001
CAUTION
• Before replacing Board Assy and pulling or pushing cables, unplug Power cable
and leave it for a while.
procedure.
If operating with Power cable still plugged, Board may be damaged or operators
may get an electric shock by residual electric charge.
• When you handle Circuit board, do not touch any elements on it with bare hands.
Doing so may cause electrostatic discharge and damage the elements.
1 Remove Top Cover.



HEATER DRIVE Board. J3

the clamps on the path.
3.5.2 Replacing AC JUNC-Power Cable Assy 77

3.5.3 Replacing IL Dummy Cable Assy

Name No. Remarks

IL Dummy Cable Assy DG-44713 Exploded View Board Box
products
CAUTION
1 Remove Top Cover.

2 Remove IL Dummy Cable Assy from MAIN

Board.
J14
3 Replace IL Dummy Cable.

procedure.
3.5.3 Replacing IL Dummy Cable Assy 78

3.5.4 Replacing Main DC Cable Assy

Name No. Remarks

MAIN DC Cable Assy DG-42993 Exploded View Board Box
products
CAUTION
1 Remove Top Cover.

2 Remove MAIN DC Cable Assy from MAIN

Board and Power Board. CN301
J35
3 Remove MAIN DC Cable Assy from clamps on

the path.
4 Replacing MAIN DC Cable Assy.

procedure.
3.5.4 Replacing Main DC Cable Assy 79

3.5.5 Replacing FG Cable Assy

Name No. Remarks

FG Cable Assy DG-43741 Exploded View Board Box
products
CAUTION
1 Remove Top Cover.

2 Remove the screw retaining FG Cable Assy.

B
A : FG Cable
B : Tapping screw M4ｘ6S Tight cup
3 Remove FG Cable Assy from AC Inlet.
C : AC Inlet A
4 Replacing FG Cable.

procedure.
3.5.5 Replacing FG Cable Assy 80

3.5.6 Replacing AC Inlet

A : Countersunk head screw M3ｘ6
Name No. Remarks
AC Inlet Assy DG-43177 Exploded View Board Box
A
products
CAUTION
Unplug Power cable set before replacing AC inlet. There may be a risk of electric
shock by standby electricity.
4 Replace AC Inlet.

procedure.
㨀㧵㧼
This section describes the procedure to replace the maintenance part, AC Inlet
Assy.In this section, it is referred to as AC Inlet.
1 Remove Top Cover.

2 Remove the connectors (3 pieces) from AC

Inlet.
A : connector B
B : AC Inlet
3.5.6 Replacing AC Inlet 81

3.5.7 Replacing Slide Switch

A : Tapping screw M3ｘ6 S tight bind A
Name No. Remarks
Slide Switch Assy DG-44719 Exploded View Board Box
products
CAUTION
Unplug Power cable set before replacing Slide Switch. There may be a risk of electric
shock by standby electricity.
4 Replace Slide Switch.

procedure.
㨀㧵㧼
This section describes the procedure to replace the maintenance part, Slid Switch
Assy.In this section, it is referred to as Slide Switch.
1 Remove Top Cover.

2 Remove the connectors (6 pieces) from Slide

Switch.
B
A : connector
B : Slide Switch
A
NOTE
When connecting, the number (2a, 1a, 2,
1, 2b, 1b) and switch number (2a, 1a, 2, 1,
2b, 1b) of a cable are made to agree.
3.5.7 Replacing Slide Switch 82

3.5.8 Replacing AC SEL SW Cable Assy

5 Remove AC SEL SW Cable from HEATER
　 ● Tools & Jigs & Maintenance part DRIVE Board. J6
Name No. Remarks
AC SEL SW Cable Assy DG-44720 Exploded View Board Box
products
CAUTION
Unplug Power cable set before replacing AC SEL SW Cable. There may be a risk of
electric shock by standby electricity.
6 Replace AC SEL SW Cable.

procedure.
㨀㧵㧼
This section describes the procedure to replace the maintenance part,AC SEL
SWCable Assy.In this section, it is referred to as AC SEL SW Cable.
1 Remove Top Cover.


3 Remove AC SEL SW Cable from Slide Switch.
A : AC SEL SW Cable B
B : Slide Switch
NOTE A
When connecting, the number (2a, 1a, 2,
1, 2b, 1b) and switch number (2a, 1a, 2, 1,
2b, 1b) of a cable are made to agree.
4 Remove AC SEL SW Cable from the clamps

on the path.
3.5.8 Replacing AC SEL SW Cable Assy 83

3.5.9 Replacing Cooling FAN

　 ● Tools & Jigs & Maintenance part Cooling FAN. A
Name No. Remarks A : Pan-head screw with spring washer and
flat washer M3ｘ30
Cooling FAN (24V)Assy DG-45354 Exploded View Board Box
products
㨀㧵㧼
This section describes the procedure to replace the maintenance part, Cooling FAN
(24V) Assy.
7 Replace Cooling FAN.
In this section, it is referred to as Cooling FAN.

NOTE
When reassembling Cooling FAN, note
1 Remove Top Cover. the blowing direction.
3.2.1 Removing Top Cover $NQYKPIFKTGEVKQP
2 Remove connector of Cooling FAN from MAIN

Board Assy.

procedure.
J30
3 Remove the cables from the clamps on the

path.
4 Remove screws (2 pieces) retaining Cooling A

FAN Bracket.
A : Tapping screw M3ｘ6　S Tight cup
5 Remove Cooling FAN Bracket.
3.5.9 Replacing Cooling FAN 84

3.5.10 Replacing MAIN Board

2 Execute MSA.
　 ● Tools & Jigs & Maintenance part 4.3 Working with MUTOH Service
Assistance Software
Name No. Remarks
MAIN Board Assy DG-44712 Exploded View Board Box 3 Switch MSA to Technician mode.
(12) Switching to Technician Mode
products
4 Select “Board Replacement Wizard“othe main
window of MSA.
CAUTION 4.3.10 Board Replacement Wizard
• Before replacing Board Assy and pulling or pushing FFC type Cable s, unplug ● Follow the “Board Replacement Wizard“
Power Cable and leave it for a while. afterwards.
If operating with Power Cable still plugged, Board may be damaged or operators Proceed Step 5 when “Attachment and
may get an electric shock by residual electric charge. Diagnosis of the alternative board“
• When you handle Circuit board, do not touch any elements on it with bare hands. window is displayed.
• Before plugging FFC, check the condition of FFC terminals (that the corners of
the terminals are not crooked and reinforcing plate is not peeled).
• Plug/unplug FFC perpendicularly to the connector. Never plug/unplug it obliquely.
If plugged obliquely, it may damage/shorten/break terminals in connectors,
causing a breakdown of on-board devices.
• Make sure to plug FFC all the way in the connector. After plugging it, make sure
that FFC and the connector terminals are not misaligned sideways and that FFC
5 Remove all connectors from the MAIN Board
Assy.
is not plugged obliquely.
• If the printer which is using the lithium battery is exchanged for a battery
unsuitable type, there is danger of explosion. A used battery is disposed of
according to related law and regulation.
• Risk of explosion if battery is replaced by an incorrect type.Dispose of used
batteries according to the instructions.
NOTE
• When replacing MAIN board Assy, Be sure you are using MSA (MUTOH Service
Assistance) software and follow the board replacement wizard.
4.3 Working with MUTOH Service Assistance Software
• Use the latest version of MSA.
1 Remove Top Cover.

3.5.10 Replacing MAIN Board 85

6 Remove the screws (6 pieces) retaining MAIN

Board. A
A : Cup screw M3ｘ6
7 Replace MAIN Board Assy.
● After replacement, The window returns to

Board Replacement Wizard. Follow the
instructions displayed on the “Attachment
and Diagnosis of the alternative board“.
4.3.10 Board Replacement Wizard
㨀㧵㧼
When “Termination” window is displayed,
Board replacement wizard is completed.
8 Set the various settings.

Make the settings according to the board
replacement pattern.
(2) List of adjustment operations after
replacing the board for each board replacement
pattern
3.5.10 Replacing MAIN Board 86

3.5.11 Replacing JUNCTION Board

3 Remove the connectors connected to
　 ● Tools & Jigs & Maintenance part JUNCTION Board (R side).
Name No. Remarks

JUNCTION2 Board DG-43396 Exploded View JUNCTION Board
R,L
products
CAUTION
• Before replacing Board Assy and pulling or pushing FFC type cables, unplug 4 Remove the screws (4 pieces) retaining
Power cable and leave it for a while. JUNCTION Board.
may get an electric shock by residual electric charge. A : Tapping screw S Tight cupM3ｘ6
• When you handle Circuit board, do not touch any elements on it with bare hands. A
Doing so may cause electrostatic discharge and damage the elements. NOTE
• Before plugging FFC, check the condition of FFC terminals (that the corners of It is retained upper side only.
• Plug/unplug FFC perpendicularly to the connector. Never plug/unplug it
obliquely. If plugged obliquely, it may damage/shorten/break terminals in
connectors, causing a breakdown of on-board devices.
• Make sure to plug FFC all the way in the connector. After plugging it, make sure 5 To reassemble unit, reverse the removal
that FFC and the connector terminals are not misaligned sideways and that FFC procedure.
1 Removing R Side Cover.

2 Removing Pump Stay.

3.11.1 Removing Pump stay
NOTE
This procedure is needed for replacing R-
side.
3.5.11 Replacing JUNCTION Board 87

3.5.12 Replacing JUNC_ID Cable

4 Remove JUNC_IDCable from JUNCTION
　 ● Tools & Jigs & Maintenance part board.
-
Name No. Remarks
JUNC_ID Cable Assy DG-44717 Exploded View Board Box
（for R）
JUNC_ID Cable 2Assy DG-44718 Exploded View Board Box
（for L）
products
5 Remove JUNC_ID Cable from clamps on the
path.
CAUTION
Unplug Power cable set before replacing parts. There may be a risk of electric shock 6 Remove JUNC_IDCable from MAIN board.
by standby electricity.
R side: J21
L side: J22
㨀㧵㧼
This section describes the procedure to replace the maintenance
part,JUNC_IDCable Assy and JUNC_ID Cable 2 Assy. In this section, it is referred ,
to as JUNC_ID Cable

1 Remove Top Cover. procedure.
2 Replace R Side Cover or L Side Cover.


NOTE
side.
3.5.12 Replacing JUNC_ID Cable 88

3.5.13 Replacing JUNC_FFC

2 Remove R Side Cover or L Side Cover.
　 ● Tools & Jigs & Maintenance part 3.2.2 Removing Side Cover
Name No. Remarks

3 Remove JUNC_FFC from JUNCTION Board.
Head Cable Assy DF-49017 Exploded View Board Box
（for R） A : JUNC_FFC A
JUNC_FFCAssy DG-44716 Exploded View Board Box 4 Remove JUNC_FFC from the clamps on th e
（for L） path.
products
CAUTION
• Before replacing Board Assy and pulling or pushing FFC type cables, unplug 5 Remove JUNC_FFC from MAIN board.
Power cable and leave it for a while.
If operating with Power cable still plugged, Board may be damaged or operators A : JUNC_FFC（R side: J19）
may get an electric shock by residual electric charge. B : JUNC_FFC（L side: J18)
Doing so may cause electrostatic discharge and damage the elements. 6 Replacing JUNC_FFC.
Folding Direction　JUNC FFC A
the terminals are not crooked and reinforcing plate is not peeled). B
• Make sure to plug FFC all the way in the connector. After plugging it, make sure 7 To reassemble unit, reverse the removal
that FFC and the connector terminals are not misaligned sideways and that FFC procedure.
NOTE
• This section describes the procedure to replace the maintenance part, Head
Cable Assy（DF-49017）and JUNC_FFC Assy.
• The replacement procedure is common to both R side and L side.The procedure
described here is that of R side.
1 Remove Top Cover.

3.5.13 Replacing JUNC_FFC 89

3.5.14 Replacing Inlet AC JUNC Cable Assy

5 Remove Inlet AC JUNC Cable Assy from
　 ● Tools & Jigs & Maintenance part HEATER DRIVE Board. A
Name No. Remarks A : Inlet AC_JUNC Cable Assy

Inlet-AC_JUNC Cable Assy DG-44715 Exploded View Board Box B : HEATER DRIVE Board

products
B
CAUTION
Before replacing Board Assy and pulling or pushing FFC type cables, unplug Power
cable and leave it for a while.
procedure.
If operating with Power cable still plugged, Board may be damaged or operators may
get an electric shock by residual electric charge.
1 Remove Top Cover.


3 Remove Inlet AC JUNC Cable Assy from AC

Inlet.
A : Inlet AC_JUNC Cable Assy

path.
3.5.14 Replacing Inlet AC JUNC Cable Assy 90

3.6 Replacing Y Rail part VJ628XE-M-00
3.6 Replacing Y Rail part 5 Loosen the adjusting screw (1 piece), and the
loosen tension of CR Belt.
3.6.1 Replacing CR Motor B
　 ● Tools & Jigs & Maintenance part B : CR Belt
Name No. Remarks

A
CR Motor Assy DG-44693 Exploded View Y Rail Assy
products
Thread locker Three bond 1401
6 Remove CR Belt from CR Motor.
NOTE A : CR Belt
This section describes the procedure to replace the maintenance part, CR Motor B : CR Motor
Assy.
A
In this section, it is referred to as CR Motor.
B
1 Remove Top Cover.
2 Remove R Side Cover and L Side Cover. 7 Remove the screws (4 pieces) retaining CR
3.2.2 Removing Side Cover Motor.
A
3 Remove the cable of CR Motor from CR Motor A : Cup screw M4×8　Ni-3
relay Assy from the clamp. A
A : CR Motor Relay Assy A

B : the cable of CR Motor
C : clamp
8 Replace CR Motor.
C B
9 Assemble CR Belt to CR Motor.
4 Move Carriage to the top of Platen.
3.8.1 Releasing Carriage Lock 10 Adjust so that a tension adjustment plate is
located in a marking part.
3.6.1 Replacing CR Motor 91

11 After adjusting, apply Thread Locker to

Tension adjusting screw.

B : applying point
A
B

procedure.
13 Perform various adjustments.

4.2 Adjustment Item
3.6.1 Replacing CR Motor 92

3.6.2 Replacing CR Belt 6 Pull out Head FFC to the front.

　 ● Tools & Jigs & Maintenance part A
A : Head FFC
Name No. Remarks
CR Belt A1Assy DF-49044 Exploded View Y Rail Assy
products
Thread locker -
Bubble wrapping -
NOTE
7 Mark on all the Joint screws.
This section describes the procedure to replace the maintenance part,CR Belt
A1_Assy.
In this section, it is reffered to as CR Belt.
1 Remove Top Cover.

2 Remove R Side Cover and L Side Cover.

3.2.2 Removing Side Cover NOTE
Mark the place to which Tube is attached.
3 Remove CR Board Cover.
（ABCDEFGH)
#%& (
3.8.3 Removing CR Board Cover
4 Remove Carriage Cover. $') *

3.8.2 Removing Carriage Cover
5 Remove CR Board.
8 Turn Connector Valve Head 45 degrees,
3.8.4 Replacing CR Board
release the lock, and pull it out.
NOTE A : Connector Valve Head

Place the removed CR board on an A
bubble wrapping.
3.6.2 Replacing CR Belt 93

9 Remove CR encoder cable from th clamps on 12 Mark the position of CB belt tension adjusting
the path. plate. A
B
A : Clamp A : CR belt adjusting plate
B : Cable A B : Marking
B
C:
10 Remove the screws (3 pieces) retaining CR 13 Loosen the adjusting screw, and the loosen
Board Base to Cursor. tension of CR Belt.
B
A : Pan-head screw with spring washer and A : Pan head small screw M4ｘ30
flat washer M3ｘ6 B B : CR Bel
B : CR Board Base
A
11 Remove CR Board Base from Cursor. 14 Remove CR belt from CR motor.

A : CR belt
CAUTION B : CR motor
CR Board Base is removed while Steel A
Bare etc. are attached.
As load should not be applied to Steel
B
bare etc. , place it on a bubble wrap.
15 Remove CR Return Pulley from Return Pulley

Base. B
A : CR Return Pulley Assy

B : Return Pulley Base

16 Remove CR Belt from Cursor.

A : CR Belt B
B : Cursor
17 Replace CR Belt.
18 Assemble CR Belt to Cursor.
19 Assemble CR Belt to CR Return Pulley.
20 Assemble CR Return Pulley to Return Pulley
Base.
21 Assemble CR Belt to CR Motor.

22 Adjust so that a tension adjustment plate is
located in a marking part.
23 After adjusting, apply Thread Locker to

Tension adjusting screw.

B : applying position
A
B
24 Move Carriage to right and left by hand, and

confirm that there are no abnormalities in a
slide.

procedure.

3.6.3 Replacing CR Motor Relay Assy 5 Remove CR Motor Relay Cable from the cable
　 ● Tools & Jigs & Maintenance part of CR Motor. A
Name No. Remarks A : CR Motor Relay Assy

B : the cable of CR Motor
CR Motor Relay A1Assy DF-48991 Exploded View Y Rail Assy
products
B
NOTE
This section describes the procedure to replace the maintenance part, CR Motor 6 Replace CR Motor Relay Assy.
Relay A1_Assy.
In this section, it is reffered to as CR Motor Relay Assy 7 To reassemble unit, reverse the removal
procedure.
.
1 Remove Top Cover.


3 Remove CR Motor Relay Assy from MAIN

Board.
J17
4 Remove CR Motor Relay Cable from clamps

on the path.
3.6.3 Replacing CR Motor Relay Assy 96

3.6.4 Replacing CR Origin Sensor 4 Remove CR Origin Sensor.

A : CR Origin Sensor
Name No. Remarks
CR_HP Sensor, Lever Sensor DF-49471 Exploded View Y Rail Assy
products
Thread locker Three bond401
A
NOTE
• This section describes the procedure to replace the maintenance part,CR_HP
Sensor, Lever Sensor.In this section, it is reffered to as CR Origin Sensor. 5 Replace CR Origin Sensor.
• CR Origin Sensor is locked with Thread locker.
procedure.

NOTE
Apply Thread Locker to the new CR
2 Move Carriage to the top of Platen. Origin Sensor when installing it.
3 Remove CR Origin Sensor Cable from CR

Origin Sensor.
B
A : CR Origin Sensor Cable
B : CR Origin Sensor
3.6.4 Replacing CR Origin Sensor 97

3.6.5 Replacing CR Origin Sensor Cable 5 Remove CR Origin Sensor Cable from
　 ● Tools & Jigs & Maintenance part JUNCTION Board.
J14
Name No. Remarks
CR Origin Sensor Cable Assy DG-44691 Exploded View Y Rail Assy
products
NOTE
This section describes the procedure to replace the maintenance part,CR Origin 6 Replace CR Origin Sensor Cable.
Sensor Cable Assy.
In this section, it is reffered to as CR Origin Sensor Cable.
procedure.


3 Remove CR Origin Sensor Cable from CR

Origin Sensor.
B
A : CR Origin Sensor Cable
B : CR Origin Sensor
4 Remove CR Origin Sensor Cable from the

clamps on the path.
3.6.5 Replacing CR Origin Sensor Cable 98

3.6.6 Replacing Lever Sensor Cable 6 Remove Lever Sensor Cable from JUNCTION
J15
Name No. Remarks
Lever Sensor Cable Assy DG-44692 Exploded View Y Rail Assy
products
NOTE
This section describes the procedure to replace the maintenance part, Lever Sensor 7 Replace Lever Sensor Cable.
Cable Assy.In this section, it is reffered to as Lever Sensor Cable.
procedure.


4 Remove Lever Sensor Cable from Lever

Sensor.
A : Lever Sensor Cable B

B : Lever Sensor
5 Remove Lever Sensor Cable from the clamps

on the path.
3.6.6 Replacing Lever Sensor Cable 99

3.6.7 Replacing Lever Sensor 4 Remove Lever Sensor.

A : Lever Sensor
Name No. Remarks A
CR_HP Sensor, Lever Sensor DF-49471 Exploded View Y Rail Assy

products
Thread locker Threebond 1401
NOTE
• This section describes the procedure to replace the maintenance part,CR_HP 5 Replace Lever Sensor.
Sensor, Lever Sensor.In this section, it is reffered to as Lever Sensor.
• Lever Sensor is locker with Thread locker. procedure.
NOTE
3.2.2 Removing Side Cover Apply Thread locker to new Lever sensor,
and bond to the bracket firmly.
3 Remove Lever Sensor Cable from Lever

Sensor.
A : Lever Sensor Cable B

B : Lever Sensor
3.6.7 Replacing Lever Sensor 100

3.6.8 Replacing T Fence 4 Remove T Fence from Fence Guide (3

　 ● Tools & Jigs & Maintenance part pieces).
B
Name No. Remarks A : Fence Guide
B : T Fence
T Fence A1_Assy DF-49024 Exploded View Y Rail Assy
Phillips screwdriver No.2 Generic - CAUTION
products
• Do not pull T Fence by force; the Fence
Guide can be easily broken. A
NOTE • Pay attention not to damage or break T
This section describes the procedure to replace the maintenance part,T Fence Fence.
A1_Assy.In this section, it is reffered to as T Fence.
5 Remove T Fence from Hook.

3.2.2 Removing Side Cover A : T Fence B
B : Hook
3 Remove T Fence Spring (L side) from T Fence

Spring Hook.
A
A : T Fence Spring Hook
B : T Fence Spring
A 6 Replace T Fence.
B
NOTE
T fence as a maintenance part has a
sticker on it. Remove the sticker
completely before using it.
3.6.8 Replacing T Fence 101

7 Mountain fold (at 90 degrees) the new T fence

at 9mm from the tip and put it on a hook on the 90q
R side.(Do not fold the opposite side.)
9mm
8 Attach T fence to pass along the center of CR

encoder.
A : CR Encoder
B : T Fence B

procedure.
3.6.8 Replacing T Fence 102

3.6.9 Replacing Fence Guide 4 Remove T Fence from Fence Guide (3

　 ● Tools & Jigs & Maintenance part pieces).
B
Name No. Remarks A : Fence Guide
B : T Fence
Fence Guide Assy DF-49027 Exploded View Y Rail Assy
Phillips screwdriver No.2 Generic - CAUTION
products
• Do not pull T Fence by force; the Fence
Guide can be easily broken. A
NOTE • Pay attention not to damage or break T
This section describes the procedure to replace the maintenance part, Fence Guide Fence.
Assy.In this section, it is reffered to as T Fence Guide.
5 Replace Fence Guide.

procedure.
3 Remove T Fence Spring from T Fence Spring

Hook.

B : T Fence Spring
A
B
3.6.9 Replacing Fence Guide 103

3.6.10 Replacing T Fence Spring

Name No. Remarks

T Fence Spring Assy DG-44690 Exploded View Y Rail Assy
products
NOTE
This section describes the procedure to replace the maintenance part, T Fence
Spring Assy.
In this section, it is referred to as T Fence Spring.
1 Remove T Fence Spring from T Fence Spring

Hook.
B : T Fence Spring
A
B
2 Replace T Fence Spring.

procedure.
3.6.10 Replacing T Fence Spring 104

3.6.11 Replacing CR Return Pulley Assy 4 Mark the position of CB belt tension adjusting
　 ● Tools & Jigs & Maintenance part plate. A
Name No. Remarks A : CR belt adjusting plate

B : Marking
CR Return Pulley Assy DF-49047 Exploded View Y Rail Assy B

products
A
NOTE
This section describes the procedure to replace the maintenance part,CR Return 5 Remove CR Return Pulley from Return Pulley
Base. B
Pulley Assy.In this section, it is referred to as CR Return Pulley.
A : CR Return Pulley Assy
B : Return Pulley Base
A
2 Loosen the adjusting screw, and the loosen
tension of CR Belt.
B
A : Pan head small screw M4ｘ30
B : CR Bel
6 Remove Bearing Holder (2 pieces) from CR
Return Pulley.
A A : Bearing Holder
A
B : CR Return Pulley
B
3 Remove CR belt from CR motor.
A
A : CR belt
B : CR motor
7 Remove Return Pulley Axis from CR Return
A Pulley.
A : Return Pulley Axis

B
B : CR Return Pulley
B
A
3.6.11 Replacing CR Return Pulley Assy 105

8 Assemble Return Pulley Axis to New CR

Return Pulley Assy. Material notation (POM) at the top
A : Return Pulley Axis Make sure that the bearing

B : CR Return Pulley does not proture from CR
C : Bearing Return Pulley when installed
The thinner side of

the axis at the bottom

procedure.
NOTE
After installing CR Return pulley, move
Carriage with your hand from side to side,
and check if CR belt is equally balanced
on the pulley center section of CR Motor.
3.6.11 Replacing CR Return Pulley Assy 106

3.6.12 Replacing Pressure Roller Spring

Name No. Remarks

Pressure Roller Spring DF-49691 Exploded View Y Rail Assy
longnose pliers Generic -
products
1 Use a tool such as Long-nose Pliers and

remove Pressure Roller Spring from the hooks A
(top and bottom, 2 places).
A : Hook
B : Pressure Roller Spring
2 Replace Pressure Roller Spring.

procedure.
3.6.12 Replacing Pressure Roller Spring 107

3.6.13 Replacing Pressure Roller Assy and Pressure

Roller Axis Assy
Name No. Remarks

Pressure Roller Assy DF-49053 Exploded View Y Rail Assy
Pressure Roller Axis Assy DF-49054 Exploded View Y Rail Assy
products
longnose pliers -
NOTE
This section describes the procedure to replace the maintenance part, Pressure
Roller Assy, Pressure Roller Axis Assy.
In this section, it is reffered to as Pressure Roller and Pressure Roller Axis.
1 Remove Top Cover.

2 Remove Pressure Roller Spring (2 pieces).

3.6.12 Replacing Pressure Roller Spring
3 Remove Pressure Roller Axis from Pressure

Arm.
A : Pressure Roller Axis (Pressure Roller) A
NOTE
While lifting up the Pressure Arm, and
push the end of the Pressure roller axis to
remove.
4 Replace Pressure Roller and Pressure Roller

Axis.

procedure.
3.6.13 Replacing Pressure Roller Assy and Pressure Roller Axis Assy 108
3.6.14 Replacing P_REAR Sensor

4 Remove the screws (2 pieces) fixing Sensor
　 ● Tools & Jigs & Maintenance part Plate.
Name No. Remarks A : Pan-head screw with spring washer and A

flat washer M3ｘ6
P_REAR Sensor Assy DG-42945 Exploded View Y Rail Assy
B : Sensor Plate
products
Phillips screwdriver No.1 for M2 screw
B
㨀㧵㧼
• This section describes the procedure to replace the maintenance part,P_REAR
Sensor Assy.In this section, it is referred to as P_REAR Sensor. 5 Remove the screws (2 pieces) retaining
• P_RAER sensor is located near the center of X rail. Sensor Plate.
A : Cup screw M2ｘ4
1 Remove Top Cover.

A
2 Remove P_REAR Sensor from MAIN Board.
J26

procedure.

4.2 Adjustment Item
3 Remove the cable of P_REAR Sensor from

3.6.14 Replacing P_REAR Sensor 109

3.7 Replacing PF section VJ628XE-M-00
3.7 Replacing PF section 3 Remove the screws (2 pieces) retaining PF

Motor. A
3.7.1 Replacing PF Motor
4 Remove X Speed Reduction Belt from PF
　 ● Tools & Jigs & Maintenance part Motor.

flat washer M4ｘ8
PF Motor Assy DF-49020 Exploded View　PF Motor B
B : X Speed Reduction Belt
products
Tension gauge Max 40N (4,080gf)
5 Replace PF Motor.
NOTE
This section describes the procedure to replace the maintenance part, PF Motor procedure.
Assy.In this section, it is reffered to as PF Motor.
NOTE
Move PF Speed Reduction Pulley with
NOTE your hand to check if X Speed Reduction
Do NOT damage or bend PF Encoder scale or touch its outer circumference. Belt is equally balanced on the pulley
center section of PF Motor.

3.2.2 Removing Side Cover 7 Perform various adjustments.
4.2 Adjustment Item
2 Remove PF Motor Cable from the connector
of PF Motor.
A
A : PF Motor Cable
B : connecting point
3.7.1 Replacing PF Motor 110

3.7.2 Replacing PF Encoder 5 Remove the screws (2 pieces) retaining PF

　 ● Tools & Jigs & Maintenance part Encoder.
Name No. Remarks A : PF Encoder

B : Tapping screw M2ｘ8
PF Encoder Assy DG-44701 Exploded View PF Motor B
products A
Phillips screwdriverNo.1 -
NOTE
This section describes the procedure to replace the maintenance part, PF Encoder 6 Replace PF Encoder.
Assy.
n this section, it is reffered to as PF Encoder. 7 To reassemble unit, reverse the removal
procedure.

NOTE 4.2 Adjustment Item
Do NOT damage or bend PF Encoder scale or touch its outer circumference.

2 Remove Top Cover.

3 Remove PF Encoder from MAIN Board.

J24
4 Remove the cable of PF Encoder from the

clamps on the path.
3.7.2 Replacing PF Encoder 111

3.7.3 Replacing PF Encoder Scale 5 Remove the screws (4 pieces) retaining ENC
　 ● Tools & Jigs & Maintenance part Holder.
B A
Name No. Remarks A : ENC Holder
B : Tapping screw M3ｘ8P Tight cup
PF ENC Scale Assy DF-49028 Exploded View PF Motor
products
B
NOTE
This section describes the procedure to replace the maintenance part,PF ENC Scale 6 Replace PF Encoder Scale. Make sure that the letters >PET<
can be seen reversely when installed.
Assy.
n this section, it is reffered to as PF Encoder Scale. NOTE
When handling PF Encoder scale. be
careful with the following.
3.2.2 Removing Side Cover • Do NOT damage or bend PF Encoder Make sure that the letters >POM<
scale or touch its outer circumference. can be seen when installed.
2 Remove CR Motor. • Make sure that slit mounting flange has
3.6.1 Replacing CR Motor NO remaining double-sided tape.
3 Remove the screws (2 pieces) retaining PF

Encoder.
A : PF Encoder 7 To reassemble unit, reverse the removal

B : Tapping screw M2ｘ8 procedure.
B
4 Remove PF Encoder. 8 Perform various adjustments.
A 4.2 Adjustment Item
3.7.3 Replacing PF Encoder Scale 112

3.7.4 Replacing X Speed Reduction Belt 5 Remove the screws (4 pieces) retaining ENC
　 ● Tools & Jigs & Maintenance part Holder.
B A
Name No. Remarks A : ENC Holder
PF Timing Belt Assy DG-44700 Exploded View PF Motor C : PF Encoder Scale
products
Tension gauge Max:40N(4,080gf）
C B
NOTE
This section describes the procedure to replace the maintenance part, PF Timing 6 Loosen the screws (2 pieces) retaining PF
Belt Assy. Motor. A
n this section, it is reffered to as X Speed Reduction Belt.
flat washer M4ｘ8
B : X Speed Reduction Belt
B
2 Remove CR Motor.
3.6.1 Replacing CR Motor
7 Remove X Speed Reduction Belt.

3 Remove the screws (2 pieces) retaining PF
Encoder. A : X Speed Reduction Belt
A : PF Encoder
B : Tapping screw M2ｘ8
B
4 Remove PF Encoder.
A
A

procedure.

4.2 Adjustment Item
3.7.4 Replacing X Speed Reduction Belt 113

3.7.5 Replacing PF Speed Reduction Pulley 6 Loosen the screws (2 pieces) retaining PF
　 ● Tools & Jigs & Maintenance part Motor. A

flat washer M4ｘ8
Speed Reduction Pulley Assy DF-49051 Exploded View PF Motor B : X Speed Reduction Belt
products B
NOTE
This section describes the procedure to replace the maintenance part, Speed 7 Remove X Speed Reduction Belt.
Reduction Pulley Assy.In this section, it is reffered to as PF Speed Reduction Pulley.
A : X Speed Reduction Belt
1 Remove L Side Cover.

2 Remove CR Motor.
3.6.1 Replacing CR Motor A
3 Remove the screws (2 pieces) retaining PF 8 Remove the screws (2 pieces) retaining PF
Encoder. Speed Reduction Pulley.
A
A : PF Encoder A : Pan-head screw with spring washer and
B : Tapping screw M2ｘ8 flat washer M3ｘ8
B
B : PF Speed Reduction Pulley
4 Remove PF Encoder. B
A
5 Remove the screws (4 pieces) retaining ENC 9 PF Speed Reduction Pulley

Holder.
B A
A : ENC Holder 10 To reassemble unit, reverse the removal
procedure.
C : PF Encoder Scale
4.2 Adjustment Item
C B
3.7.5 Replacing PF Speed Reduction Pulley 114

3.7.6 Replacing PF Motor Cable 5 Remove PF Motor Cable from MAIN Board.
　 ● Tools & Jigs & Maintenance part J12
Name No. Remarks

PF Motor Cable Assy DG-44699 Exploded View PF Motor
products
NOTE
This section describes the procedure to replace the maintenance part,PF Motor 6 Replace PF Motor Cable.
Cable Assy.In this section n this section, it is reffered to as PF Motor Cable.
procedure.

2 Remove Top Cover.

3 Remove PF Motor Cable from the connector

of PF Motor.
A
A : PF Motor Cable
B : connecting point
4 Remove the cable of PF Motor Cable from the

clamps on the path.
3.7.6 Replacing PF Motor Cable 115

3.8 Replacing Cursor section VJ628XE-M-00
3.8 Replacing Cursor section

This section describes the procedure to replace Cursor section.

When Carriage lock is released on software, Carriage moves to the origin position after power
is turned off. This section describes the procedure to release Carriage lock with power turned
off.
1 Push a carriage in the direction of an arrow by

hand.
NOTE
When you change into a headlock state
again, push Carriage in the direction of
the arrow.
3.8.1 Releasing Carriage Lock 116


Name No. Remarks

products
1 Release the Carriage Lock.


Carriage Cover.

flat washer M3ｘ6
B : Carriage Cover
A
B
3 Remove Carriage Cover.

procedure.
3.8.2 Removing Carriage Cover 117


Name No. Remarks

products


3 Remove the screws (6 pieces) retaining CR

Board Cover.
A
flat washer M3ｘ6S Tight cup
A A

procedure.
3.8.3 Removing CR Board Cover 118


A
Name No. Remarks A : Cup screw M3ｘ6
CR Board Assy DG-42959 Exploded View CR Board
products
A
CAUTION
• Before replacing Board Assy and pulling or pushing the FFC type Cable s, pull out
Power Cable and leave it for a while. 6 To reassemble unit, reverse the removal
If Power Cable is not pulled out before operation, it may cause an electric shock procedure.
or damage to the board due to residual electrical charge. 　
Doing so may cause electrostatic discharge and damage elements.
• Make sure to plug FFC all the way in the connector. After plugging it, make sure
that FFC and the connector terminals are not misaligned sideways and that FFC



4 Remove all the cables from CR Board.
3.8.4 Replacing CR Board 119

3.8.5 Replacing CR Encoder

7 Remove the screw retaining CR Encoder
　 ● Tools & Jigs & Maintenance part mounting board.
Name No. Remarks A : Pan-head screw with spring washer and B

flat washer M3ｘ8
CR Encoder Assy DG-42947 Exploded View CR Board
B : CR Encoder Mounting Board
Phillips screwdriverNo.1 Generic -
products
Phillips screwdriver No.2 - NOTE
When removing CR Encoder, make sure A
not to damage T Fence.
㨀㧵㧼
This section describes the procedure to replace the maintenance part, CR Encoder
Assy.In this section, it is reffered to as CR Encoder.
8 Remove CR Encoder Mounting Board.
1 Removing R Side Cover. 9 Remove the screws (2 pieces) retaining CR

Encoder.

2 Release the Carriage Lock. flat washer (small）M2ｘ6

A
10 Replace CR Encoder.
5 Remove CR Encoder from CR Board.
NOTE
When reassembling CR encoder Assy,
refer to the following figure and make sure
that T fence goes through CR encoder
Assy sensor.
J15

6 Remove CR Encoder from the clamps on the procedure.
path.
3.8.5 Replacing CR Encoder 120

3.8.6 Replacing P_EDGE Sensor 7 Remove Cutter Holder Assy.

3.8.9 Replacing Cutter Holder Assy
Name No. Remarks 8 Remove the screw retaining P_EDGE Sensor.

P-Edge Sensor Assy DG-43319 Exploded View Cursor
Phillips screwdriver No.2 Generic - flat washer M3ｘ6
products B : P_EDGE Sensor
A
㨀㧵㧼
This section describes the procedure to replace the maintenance part,P-Edge
Sensor Assy.In this section n this section, it is reffered to as P_EDGE Sensor. B
9 Replace P_EGDE Sensor.

3.2.2 Removing Side Cover 10 To reassemble unit, reverse the removal
procedure.
2 Remove Top Cover.
3.2.1 Removing Top Cover 11 Perform various adjustments.
4.2 Adjustment Item

5 Remove P_EDGE Sensor from CR Board.
J11
6 Remove P_EDGE Sensor from the clamps on

the path.
3.8.6 Replacing P_EDGE Sensor 121

3.8.7 Replacing Cutter Spring 5 To reassemble unit, reverse the removal

Name No. Remarks

Cutter Spring DG-43484 Exploded View Cursor
products
1 Move Carriage to the opposite side of

Origin. 3.8.1 Releasing Carriage Lock
2 Remove Cutter Cap from Cutter Blade.

It moves in the direction of 2 , lowering a few
in the direction of 1.
A B
A : Cutter Blade
B : Cutter Blade
2
1
3 Remove Cutter Blade.
NOTE
Be careful not to cut a finger etc. with
Cutter Braid.
4 Replace Cutter Spring.
A : Cutter Spring
A
3.8.7 Replacing Cutter Spring 122

3.8.8 Replacing PG Origin Sensor Cable 5 Remove PG Origin Sensor Cable from PG
　 ● Tools & Jigs & Maintenance part Origin Sensor.
Name No. Remarks A : PG Origin Sensor Cable
PG Origin Sensor Cable Assy DG-43315 Exploded View Cursor

products A
㨀㧵㧼
This section describes the procedure to replace the maintenance part,PG Origin
Sensor Cable.
6 Replace PG Origin Sensor Cable.
In this section, it is reffered to as PG Origin Sensor Cable.

procedure.


3 Remove PG Origin Sensor Cable from CR

Board.
J12
4 Remove PG Origin Sensor Cable from the

clamps on the path.
3.8.8 Replacing PG Origin Sensor Cable 123

3.8.9 Replacing Cutter Holder Assy 6 Remove the screws (2 pieces) retaining Cutter
Holder Assy. B

flat washer M3ｘ8
Cutter Holder Adjusting Jig DG-45003 Exploded View Other B : Cutter Holder Assy
products A

7 Remove Cutter Holder Assy From Carriage.
3.8.3 Removing CR Board Cover 8 Set dedicated Jig on mounting position.
A : Cutter Holder Adjusting Jig

3 Remove P_EDGE Sensor and Cutter
B : Cutter Holder Assy
B
Solenoid from CR Board.
3.8.6 Replacing P_EDGE Sensor
4 Remove P EDGE Sensor and Cutter Solenoid

from the clamps on the path. A
5 Remove Spring from Height Adjusting Lever.
A : Height Adjustment Lever 9 Push Cutter Holder Assy down lightly to

B : Height Adjustment Lever Spring tighten the screws.
B A : Pan-head screw with spring washer and

flat washer M3ｘ8
A A

procedure.
3.8.9 Replacing Cutter Holder Assy 124

3.8.10 Replacing Cutter Solenoid Assy 5 Push the tab of Lock Kicker with a driver, etc.
　 ● Tools & Jigs & Maintenance part to remove Lock Kicker.
Name No. Remarks A : the tab of Lock Kicker

B : Lock Kicker
Cutter Solenoid Assy DF-42234 Exploded View Cursor
Cutter Solenoid Spring Assy DF-49062 Exploded View Cursor B
A
products
slotted screwdriver -


3.8.2 Removing Carriage Cover B

4 Remove Cutter Holder Assy. 6 Remove the screw retaining Cutter Cap.
A
7 Remove Plunger.

flat washer M3ｘ6 B
B : Cutter Cap
C
C : Plunger（Solenoid Spring)
8 Replace Plunger.
NOTE
When replacing Cutter Solenoid spring
itself, replace it at this stage.To
reassemble the unit, reverse the removal
procedure.
3.8.10 Replacing Cutter Solenoid Assy 125

9 Push the tab of Lock Kicker with a driver, etc.

B
11 Replace Cutter Solenoid Assy.
to remove Cutter Solenoid Assy.
A : Cutter Solenoid Assy NOTE

B : the tab of Cutter Holder When installing the cutter solenoid, note
C : Driver .etc A the following.
• Joint the cutter cap and the CR lock
kicker, push down the cutter cap and
the CR lock kicker together to install
C
them onto the cutter holder.
• Make sure to join the cutter cap and the
10 Remove Cutter Solenoid Cable from Cutter CR lock kicker.Otherwise, when
Solenoid. turning the power ON, the carriage
cannot move from the origin point to
A : Connecting point the left.
A
NOTE
Cutter solenoid and Cutter Solenoid
Cable are connected in the post header
assembly. Do not lose the post header
assembly.
3.8.10 Replacing Cutter Solenoid Assy 126

3.8.11 Replacing Cutter Solenoid Cable 5 Remove Cutter Solenoid Cable from Cutter
　 ● Tools & Jigs & Maintenance part Solenoid.
Name No. Remarks A : Connecting point

A
Cutter SOL Cable Assy DG-43318 Exploded View Cursor
products
㨀㧵㧼
This section describes the procedure to replace the maintenance part, Cutter SOL
NOTE
Cable Assy.
n this section, it is reffered to as Cutter Solenoid Cable. Cutter solenoid and Cutter Solenoid
Cable are connected in the post header
assembly. Do not lose the post header
assembly.

6 Replace Cutter Solenoid Cable.

3 Remove Cutter Solenoid Cable from CR
Board.
procedure.
J15
4 Remove Cutter Solenoid Cable from the

clamps on the path.
3.8.11 Replacing Cutter Solenoid Cable 127

3.8.12 Replacing Mini Latch

5 Remove Mini Latch from sheet metal, pushing
　 ● Tools & Jigs & Maintenance part the tab of Mini Latch.
B
Name No. Remarks A : Mini Latch（receiver） A
Mini Latch S Assy DG-44689 Exploded View Cursor B : tab
C : removing direction C
products
B
㨀㧵㧼
This section describes the procedure to replace the maintenance part, Mini Latch S
Assy.In this section, it is reffered to as Mini Latch. 6 Replace Mini Latch.

procedure.

3 Remove the screws (2 pieces) retaining Mini

Latch.
B
A : Countersunk head screw M2.5ｘ4
B : Mini Latch
4 Remove Mini Latch.
3.8.12 Replacing Mini Latch 128

3.8.13 Replacing Roller Arm Assy

Name No. Remarks

Roller Arm Assy DF-49065 Exploded View Cursor
(2) L side
Phillips screwdriver No.2 Generic - 1 Release the Carriage Lock.

products 3.8.1 Releasing Carriage Lock
longnose pliers -

(1) R side 3.8.2 Removing Carriage Cover
1 Release the Carriage Lock. 3 Remove CR Board Cover.

3.8.1 Releasing Carriage Lock 3.8.3 Removing CR Board Cover
2 Remove Carriage Cover. 4 Remove Cutter Holder Assy.

3.8.2 Removing Carriage Cover 3.8.3 Removing CR Board Cover
3 Replacing Cursor Roller Spring. From this point on, do the same work as
the (1) R side.
A : Cursor Roller Spring B
A : longnose pliers
CAUTION
The tension of the spring is strong.
In the case of removal, the spring should A
jump out and be careful not injured.
4 Remove Cursor Roller Arm.

（Pull it out to forward.）
A : Cursor Roller Arm

A
5 Remove Roller Arm Assy.
3.8.13 Replacing Roller Arm Assy 129

3.8.14 Replacing Valve head

1 Install Valve head cleaning jig on the new
Valve head Assy. Connect Valve head cleaning jig 1
(1) Pour Cleaning fluid into the new Valve Head and let it settle for a while.
Make sure that the filter (silver part) side of
(2) Replace the faulty Valve head Assy. Valve head is connected to the Valve head
cleaning jig 1side.
(1) Pouring Cleaning liquid A : Valve head A
B
B : part of silver
C : Valve head cleaning jig1
Name No. Remarks D : Valve head cleaning jig2 Connect Valve head cleaning jig 2
Valve Head Cleaning Kit（VJ Ink） DG-41787 Exploded View Other
dedicated Cleaning fluid - Operation Manual C
NOTE
Solenoid head Assy used for VJ-628 is shipped with Cleaning liquid inside for the
purposes of inspection and quality assurance. Therefore, before replacing it, you will
need to clean it using dedicated Cleaning liquid.
CAUTION
• Make sure to pour Cleaning liquid into the new Valve head. 2 Attach the dedicated cleaning cartridge to the
If ink is charged before Cleaning liquid is poured in, Valve head might get top of the Valve head cleaning jig 1.
damaged. A : Cleaning fluid cartridge
• Be careful not to get Cleaning liquid in your eyes.If Cleaning liquid gets in your B : Valve head cleaning jig1 A
eye, immediately wash your eye with running water for over 15 minutes and C : Valve head cleaning jig2 C
see your ophthalmologist.
B
㨀㧵㧼
A B
For the following procedure, Valve head
cleaning jigs are separated into two parts
and called Valve head cleaning jig 1 and
2, for the sake of convenience.
A : Valve head cleaning jig1

B : Valve head cleaning jig2
3.8.14 Replacing Valve head 130

3 Pull Pump of Syringe attached to Valve head 7 Remove Valve head cleaning tools from Valve
cleaning jig 2 and inflow about 3cc of Cleaning head.
liquid into the cylinder of Syringe.
CAUTION
NOTE
• When removing the tube, make sure to
Air should not be included in the 3cc. cover the tip of it with a Polynit wiper,
Make sure that there is 3cc of Cleaning etc so that Cleaning liquid does not spit
liquid only when pulling the pump of out of the removed tube.
Injector. Make sure to use a clean Polynit wiper
with no ink attached. If a foreign
substance on the Polynit wiper
adheres on the tube, it may cause Print
4 Turn Valve head upside down to let Cleaning head malfunction.
liquid settle in Valve head.
• Be careful not to get Cleaning liquid in
your eyes. If Cleaning liquid gets in
CAUTION your eye, immediately wash your eye
with running water for over 15 minutes
• Do not hold the transparent films on the and see your ophthalmologist.
sides of Valve head. Cleaning liquid
inside Valve head inflows into the tube.
• Do not damage the transparent films
on the sides of Valve head.
5 Remove the cleaning cartridge from the Valve

head cleaning jig1.
6 Remove the cleaning liquid from the Valve

head by pulling the syringe pump.
NOTE
Step 6 above is only for avoiding any
leakage. You do not need to empty the
Valve head completely.

(2) Replacing Valve Head

NOTE
Name No. Remarks （ABCDEFGH)
#%& (
Valve Head Assy DG-41543 Exploded View Head Base
O Ring M6 DF-46671
$') *
products
3 Turn Connector Valve Heads (8 pieces) 45
slotted screwdriver - degrees, and pull it out.
B
ball point hexagonal wrench(2.5mm) - A : Connector Valve Head
B : Fitting
longnose pliers - A
Plastic bag Can be omitted
1 Perform ink discharge operation to discharge

ink entirely from ink path.
5.6.9 Longstore Menu
4 Remove Joint Screw, O RIng and Connector
Valve Head.
NOTE
A : Joint Screw
″
After ink discharge operation, make sure A C
that Ink cartridge is pulled out. B : O Ring B
C : Fitting D
D : Connector Valve Head
2 Mark on all the Joint screws.
5 Install a new O Ring around the tip of Ink

Tube.
6 Push the O Ring with Connector Valve Head
to connect the Joint Screw and Connector C
Valve Head. B
A
A : Connector Valve Head
B : O ring
C : Joint screw

NOTE
• Not to reuse O ring.Change new one.
• Before installing O ring, dip it to
dedicated cleaning fluid.
7 It refers to 3.8.15 Replacing Head and

remove Valve Head from Head.
8 Install Valve Head to Head.

3.8.15 Replacing Head Install them in
the same direction
9 It refers to 3.8.15 Replacing Head and

install Head.

procedure.
11 Charge Ink.
5.5 Ink Charging Menu

3.8.15 Replacing Head CAUTION

　 ● Tools & Jigs & Maintenance part • During operation, make sure not to touch the nozzle surface of Head or let foreign
substances adhere.
Name No. Remarks
• Print head Assy has been adjusted. Do not disassemble it.
IA5540 Head Assy DG-43988 Exploded View　CR（Head Base） • Do not touch board and tape cable which are already assembled on print head.
Moreover, do not touch around tape cable when assembling head cover.
products Head Board‫ޓ‬
Tape wire
ball point hexagonal wrench(2.5mm) - Head Nozzle
Longnose pliers - • Before replacing the board or plugging/unplugging FFC, unplug Power cable and
leave it for a while. If operating with Power cable still plugged, Board may be
Plastic bag Can be omitted
damaged or operators may get an electric shock by standby electricity.
• Before plugging FFC, check FFC terminal (to see the corner of the terminal is not
㨀㧵㧼 crooked and reinforcement is not peeled off).
• This section describes the procedure to replace the maintenance part, Head • When plugging/unplugging FFC, do it vertically to the connector.
Assy.In this section, it is reffered to as Head. If plugged/unplugged obliquely, it may damage, shunt, or disconnect the
terminals inside the connector, and may damage the elements on the board.
• Ink pipings are as shown below.
• Make sure to plug FFC all the way.
• After plugging, make sure that FFC and connector terminal are aligned and that
4 color 6 color 7 color 8 color FFC is not plugged obliquely.
KC C Y K M Y Lm K M Y Lm K M Y Lm
K YMM C Lc Cl Cl C Lc WhWh C Lc WhMt 1 Perform ink discharge operation to discharge

NOTE
After ink discharge operation, make sure
that Ink cartridge is pulled out.

3 Release Carriage Lock.

3.8.15 Replacing Head 134

4 Remove Carriage Cover. 7 Turn Connector Valve head (8 pieces) 45

3.8.2 Removing Carriage Cover degrees, release the lock, and pull it out.
5 Loosen the screw retaining Head Push Plate A : Connector Valve Head
Spring A
A : Head Push Plate Spring

B : Pan-head screw with spring washer and
flat washer M3ｘ6
B A
㨀㧵㧼
After pulling out connector Valve head
6 Mark on all the Joint screws. from print head, put them into the plastic
bag to prevent the ink from dripping.
8 Raise the notch of Head adjustment cam to

the top.
NOTE
A
（ABCDEFGH)
#%& (
$') *

9 Remove the screwsw (4 pieces) retaining 13 Remove Valve Heads.

Head Base.
A : Valve head Pinch it with longnose
pliers and pull out
B
A : Hexagon Socket Pan Flat Head M3ｘ6
B : Head Base
A CAUTION
• Do not hold the transparent films on the A
sides of Valve head.The ink inside of
SValve head is discharged.
• Do not damage the transparent films
on the sides of Solenoid head Assy.
10 Remove Head (Head base is attached.). • To avoid leakage of the remaining ink,
place a waste cloth under the removed
11 Remove Head FFC (4 pieces) from Head. Valve head or put Valve head into a
plastic bag.
A : Head B
B : Head FFC
A
14 Replace Print Head.
CAUTION
Be careful not to damage Head board,
12 Pull Head cover vertically and remove it. Head nozzles, and Head FFC connector.
A : Head cover
B : Tab
A

15 Swap Head Rank sticker with the sticker for 18 Reassemble Head FFC.
the new Head.
CAUTION
NOTE
• Do not let FFC terminal section get
• Remove the old seal from a head cover dirty, or let ink from the head surface
and stick it on the removed printhead. ‪‧
touch it.
…‧“““
• Be careful for ink not to adhere to a • Be careful not to damage the nozzle
“
 “””“ “ 
““ …‧
““  
“›
seal.There is a possibility that it may surface with FFC.

become impossible to read a • Before plugging FFC, check FFC
character. terminal (to see the corner of the
• Remove a seal from a new print head terminal is not crooked and
and stick on a head cover. reinforcement is not peeled off).
• When plugging/unplugging FFC, do it
““ …‧
‪‧‹“… ››
“
“ 
““   vertically to the connector.
…‧“““
 “
If plugged/unplugged obliquely, it may
damage, shunt, or disconnect the
terminals inside the connector, and
may damage the elements on the
board.
• Make sure to plug FFC all the way.
16 Install Valve head to Head. • After plugging, make sure that FFC
Install them in
and connector terminal are aligned and
the same direction that FFC is not plugged obliquely.
19 Put Head back to the fixing position of Head

mounting plate.
NOTE
Do not screw on Print head at this point.
17 Assemble Head Cover.

20 Reassemble Connector Valve Head.

21 Adjust so that Head Push Plate Spring is Insert a slotted screwdriver

24 Tighten the screws (4 pieces) retaining Head
horizontal. and adjust it. Base.
B
B : Head Base
A

procedure.
22 Make sure that the notch of Head Adjustment
Cam is raised to the top. 26 Perform various adjustments.
4.2 Adjustment Item
23 Adjust the fixing position of Head.

Adjust so that the circular
hole is positioned in front
of the slotted hole.
Insert a slotted screwdriver

to push Head in.

3.8.16 Replacing Head FFC

　 ● Tools & Jigs & Maintenance part 3.8.3 Removing CR Board Cover
Name No. Remarks

5 Remove Head FFC from CR board.
Head FFC Assy DG-44687 Exploded View CR Board A
A : Head FFC
products
ball point hexagonal wrench(2.5mm) -
㨀㧵㧼
This section describes the procedure to replace the maintenance part, Head FFC
Assy.n this section, it is reffered to as Head FFC.
6 Loosen the screw retaining Head Push Plate
Spring
CAUTION A : Head Push Plate Spring

• Before replacing the board or plugging/unplugging FFC, unplug Power cable and B : Pan-head screw with spring washer and
leave it for a while. If operating with Power cable still plugged, Board may be flat washer M3ｘ6
B A
damaged or operators may get an electric shock by standby electricity.
• When handling board, do not touch on-board devices with bare hands.
• Before plugging FFC, check FFC terminal (to see the corner of the terminal is not
crooked and reinforcement is not peeled off).
• When plugging/unplugging FFC, do it vertically to the connector.
If plugged/unplugged obliquely, it may damage, shunt, or disconnect the 7 Raise the notch of Head adjustment cam to
terminals inside the connector, and may damage the elements on the board. the top.
• Make sure to plug FFC all the way. After plugging, make sure that FFC and
connector terminal are aligned and that FFC is not plugged obliquely.
A



3.8.16 Replacing Head FFC 139

8 Remove the screwsw (4 pieces) retaining

Head Base.
B
B : Head Base
A
9 Remove Head (Head base is attached.).
10 Remove Head FFC (4 pieces) from Head.

A : Head B
B : Head FFC
A
11 Replace Head FFC.

Folding Direction　Head FFC

procedure.
NOTE
When attach Head to the original location,
refer to 3.8.15 Replacing Head.
3.8.16 Replacing Head FFC 140

3.8.17 Replacing Carriage Assy

6 Remove the screw retaining Head FGCable.
A
A : Head FG Cable
Name No. Remarks B : Pan-head screw with spring washer and
Carriage Assy DG-44688 Exploded View Head Base flat washer M3ｘ8
7 Remove Head FG Cable from the clamps on
Cutter Holder adjusting Jig DG-45003 Exploded View Other the path.
B
PG adjusting Jig (1.1/1.3) DG-43193 Exploded View Other
products
Ball point hexagonal wrench(2.5mm) -
8 Remove all the cables from CR Board.
Stainless bat - 3.8.4 Replacing CR Board
Polyknit Wiper -
Bubble Wrap -
9 Remove the removed cables from the clamps
on the path.
dedicated cleaning fluid - Operation Manual
10 Remove CR Board.
1 Perform ink discharge operation to discharge NOTE

Removed CR board is placed after an
Bubble Wrapping.
NOTE
After ink discharge operation, make sure 11 Pave Poly-knit wipers in stainless pan and fill
that Ink cartridge is pulled out. with cleaning fluid (dedicated cleaning fluid). B
A : Stainless pan
B : Poly-knit wiper
3 Move Carriage to the opposite side of Platen. A



3.8.17 Replacing Carriage Assy 141

12 Mark on AlL Fitting Screw. 14 Loosen the screw (1 pieces) retaining Head
Push Plate Spring.

B : Head Push Plate Spring
A
NOTE
15 Raise the notch of Head adjustment cam to
the top.
（ABCDEFGH)
#%& (
A
$') *
13 Turn Connector Valve Head 45 degrees,

release the lock, and pull it out.
16 Remove screws (4 pieces) retaining Head
A : Connector Valve Head base.
A
B
flat washer M3ｘ6
B : Head Base A
㨀㧵㧼
After pulling out Connector Valve Head 17 Remove Print head (with Head base still
from print head, put them into the plastic attached).
bag to prevent the ink from dripping.

18 Put the nozzle surface of the removed Print 22 Remove Cutter Holder Assy.
head facing down and carefully place it on top 3.8.9 Replacing Cutter Holder Assy
of the Poly-knit wiper in a stainless pan.
23 Loosen the adjusting screw (1 piece), and the
loosen tension of CR Belt.
B
B : CR Belt
19 Remove CR encoder cable from th clamps on

the path.
B
A : Clamp
A 24 Remove CR Belt from Cursor.
B : Cable
C: A : Cursor B
B : CR Belt
20 Remove the screws (3 pieces) retaining CR A

Board Base to Cursor.

B : CR Board Base
21 Remove CR Board Base from Cursor.
CAUTION
CR Board Base is removed while Steel
Bare etc. are attached.
As load should not be applied to Steel
bare etc. , place it on a bubble wrap.

25 Remove Carriage Assy from Y rail in NOTE

following steps. Side View
• When removing Carriage Assy from Y 䋨Origin side䋩
Cursor Roller
• Tightly hold cursor roller arm on both rail, be careful no to scratch T fence.
sides of Carriage Assy and CR cursor • Rotate Carriage Assy, and remove it
side arm with fingers to compress from Y Rail.
cursor arm spring and remove • Since the tension of Cursor arm spring Y Rail
Carriage Assy from Y rail. is strong, be careful when removing it.
• Remove the both side of cursor roller • When removing carriage Assy , be
from Y rail. careful not to damage cursor roller with Cursor Roller
• Remove Carriage Assy from Y rail. Y rail.
• When placing the removed Carriage Pinch Roller Arm to
Assy down, make sure that Cursor remove from Y Rail
roller does not touch the floor.
Y Rail
26 Replace Carriage Assy.

procedure.
NOTE
It refers to 3.8.15 Replacing Headand
install Head.

4.2 Adjustment Item

3.8.18 Replacing Head FG Assy 6 Replace Head FG Assy.

Name No. Remarks procedure.
Head FG Assy DF-49018 Exploded View Head Base
products



4 Remove Cutter Holder Assy.

3.8.9 Replacing Cutter Holder Assy
5 Removing the screws (2 pieces) retaining

Head FG Assy.
A : Pan-head screw with spring washer and A

flat washer M3ｘ6
B : Head FGAssy
3.8.18 Replacing Head FG Assy 145

3.9 Replacing Cable Guide section VJ628XE-M-00
3.9 Replacing Cable Guide section 4 Remove Clamp Bare (7 pieces).

Release the hook
with a slotted screwdriver
3.9.1 Replacing Steel Bare A : Stell Bare
B : Clamp Bare
　 ● Tools & Jigs & Maintenance part B
Name No. Remarks NOTE
Steel Bare Assy DG-44704 Exploded View Cable Guide Work, while you press down Steel Bare by
hand. There is a possibility that it may be
Phillips screwdriver No.2 Generic - A
injured by Steel Bare being over.
products
slotted screwdriver（precision） Generic -

products 5 Remove the screws (2 pieces) retaining Bare
Fixing Materials.
CAUTION
A : Tapping screw M3ｘ14　P Tight cup B
Work not to cut a hand etc. with Steel Bare, wearing gloves. B : Bare Fixing Materials
A
A
㨀㧵㧼
This section describes the procedure to replace the maintenance part, Steel Bare
Assy.In this section, it is referred to as Steel Bare.
6 Remove Bare Fixing Material with Ink Tubes
and FFCs attached to it.（refer to the right
images)
1 Remove Top Cover.
A : Bare Fixing Material

A
3 Remove the screws (3 pieces) retaining Steel
Bare. B

flat washer M3ｘ8
B : Steel Bare
3.9.1 Replacing Steel Bare 146

7 Remove the screw retaining Steel Bare.

B
flat washer M3ｘ8 A
B : Steel Bare
8 Replace Steel Bare.

procedure.
3.9.1 Replacing Steel Bare 147

3.9.2 Replacing Tube Guide Film Assy

5 Remove the clamp that is the nearest to
Release the hook
　 ● Tools & Jigs & Maintenance part Carriage. with a slotted screwdriver
Name No. Remarks A : Steel Bare
B : Clamp_Bare B
Tube Guide Film Assy DG-44705 Exploded View Cable Guide
products NOTE
Work, while you press down Steel Bare by
slotted screwdriver（precision） Generic - A
products
CAUTION
Work not to cut a hand etc. with Steel Bare, wearing gloves. 6 Remove the screws (2 pieces) retaining CR
FFC Fixing Plate.
A
A : CR_FFC Fixing Plate
B : Tapping screw M3ｘ8 P Tight cup
㨀㧵㧼
C : Tapping screw M3ｘ6 S Tight cup
This section describes the procedure to replace the maintenance part, Tube Guide B
Film Assy.In this section, it is reffered to as Tube Guide Film.
C
1 Remove Top Cover.

7 Remove CR_FFC Fixing Plate.

8 Remove Tube Guide Film from CR Board
Base. A
A : Tube Guide Film

3 Remove CR Board Cover. B : CR Board Base
4 Remove the screws (3 pieces) retaining Steel B

Bare. B

flat washer M3ｘ8
B : Steel Bare
3.9.2 Replacing Tube Guide Film Assy 148

9 Remove Clamp Bare and then remove Tube

Film. Release the hook
A : Tube Film
B : Clamp Bare B
㨀㧵㧼
One place should work at a time. After
A
attaching again the Clamp Bare of the
part which removed Tube Film, the next
part should work.
10 Remove the screws (2 pieces) retaining Bare

Fixing Material.
A : Tapping screw M3ｘ14　P Tight cup B

B : Bare Fixing Material
A
A
11 Remove Tube Film.

A : Tube Film
12 Replace Tube Guide Film.

procedure.
3.9.2 Replacing Tube Guide Film Assy 149

3.9.3 Replacing CR FFC

5 Remove the clamp that is the nearest to
Release the hook
　 ● Tools & Jigs & Maintenance part Carriage. with a slotted screwdriver
Name No. Remarks A : Steel Bare
B : Clamp Bare B
CR FFC Assy DG-44703 Exploded View Cable Guide
products CAUTION
slotted screwdriver（precision） -
A
CAUTION injured by Steel Bare being over.
Work not to cut a hand etc. with Steel Bare, wearing gloves.

FFC Fixing Plate.
㨀㧵㧼 A
A : CR_FFC Fixing Plate
This section describes the procedure to replace the maintenance part,CR FFC Assy.
In this section, it is reffered to as CR FFC.
B
1 Remove Top Cover. C

2 Release the Carriage Lock. 7 Remove CR FFC Fixing plate.

8 Remove CR FFC from CR Board.
3 Remove CR Board Cover. A
3.8.1 Releasing Carriage Lock A : CR_FFC
4 Remove the screws (3 pieces) retaining Steel

Bare. B

flat washer M3ｘ8
B : Steel Bare
3.9.3 Replacing CR FFC 150

9 Remove CR_FFC from CR Board Base. 13 Remove the screws retaining Bare Fixing
A Material.
A : CR_FFC
B : CR Board Base A : Tapping screw M3ｘ14　P Tight cup B
B : Bare Fixing Material
A
A
B
10 Temporary tighten the screws (3 pieces) 14 Remove CR_FFC from Bare Fixing Material.
retaining Steel Bare. B
A : Bare Fixing Material
A
A : Pan-head screw with spring washer and B : CR_FFC
flat washer M3ｘ8
B : Steel Bare
A B
11 Remove Clamp Bare. 15 Remove CR FFC from the clamps on the

path.
12 Remove Tube Film from Clamp FFC. A
16 Remove CR FFC from MAIN Board.
A : Clamp_FFC
A
B : Clamp_Bare A : CR_FFC
NOTE
B
One place should work at a time. After
attaching again the Clamp Bare of the
part which removed CR_FFC, the next
part should work.
17 Refer to the instructions and bend the new

CR_FFC for installation.
Folding Direction　CR FFC

procedure.
3.9.3 Replacing CR FFC 151

3.9.4 Replacing Ink Tube

　 ● Tools & Jigs & Maintenance part ink entirely from ink path.
Name No. Remarks
VJ Tube 3-4(2m) DG-42723 Exploded View Cable Guide NOTE
Phillips screwdriver No.2 Generic - After ink discharge operation, make sure
products that Ink cartridge is pulled out.
Tube Cutter -
slotted screwdriver（precision） -
dedicated cleaning fluid - Operation manual 2 Remove Top Cover.
㨀㧵㧼
This section describes the procedure to replace the maintenance part,VJ tube 3-4 3.2.1 Removing Top Cover
Black (3m), VJ tube 3-4 Black (2m) and VJ tube 3-4 Black (1m).
In this section, it is referred to as Ink tube. 4 Release the Carriage Lock.

NOTE 3.8.3 Removing CR Board Cover
• If you replace some ink tubes at once, choose either of the followings to avoid the
tube reconnection confusion; 6 Remove Carriage Cover.
• Replace one by one. 3.8.2 Removing Carriage Cover
• Mark the tubes.
• Cut Ink tube (maintenance part) at an appropriate length before use. When 7 Remove Head FFC from CR Board.
A
cutting, use Tube cutter and make sure that the cut surface is flat. If it is not flat,
A : Head FFC
it may cause ink leakage.
• Insert Ink tube straight into Fitting. Do not rotate and insert it. Doing so may
damage the inside of Ink tube and cause ink leakage.
OK NG
3.9.4 Replacing Ink Tube 152

8 Remove the screws (3 pieces) retaining Steel 12 Remove the screw (1 piece) retaining Tube
Bare. B FFC Mounting Material.
A : Pan-head screw with spring washer and A : Tube FFC Mounting Material
flat washer M3ｘ8 B : Tapping screw M3ｘ8 S Tight cup
B : Steel Bare
A B
A
9 Remove the clamp that is the nearest to 13 Remove Tube FFC Mounting Material from
Carriage. Release the hook CR Cable Mounting Material.
A : Steel Bare A : CR_FFC Mounting Material
B : Clamp Bare B B : CR Cable Mounting Plate
CAUTION A B
A
14 Mark on all the Fitting Screws.

FFC Fixing Plate.
A
A : CR_FFCFixing Plate
B
C NOTE
#%& (
11 Remove CR_FFC Fixing Plate. （ABCDEFGH)
$') *

NOTE 4 Remove Ink Tube from L Fitting (the back side

The replacement work after this is different every Ink slot. of Cartridge Holder).
A : Ink Tube B
B : L Fitting
(1) Ink Slot 1/2/5/6/7/8
A
1 Remove Ink Tube from L Fitting.

A : L Fitting
B : Ink Tube
B
NOTE
The inside cartridge differs in a A
A connection method.
A : Mini Fitting
B : Ink Tube (60mm)
B
C : L Fitting
2 Remove Ink Tube from Clamp Tubes (7 C
pieces). B
A : Clamp Tube
B : Ink Tube 5 Replace Ink Tube.
NOTE 6 To reassemble unit, reverse the removal

procedure.
One place should work at a time. After A
attaching again the Clamp of the part
which removed Ink Tube, the next part 7 Charge Ink.
should work. 5.5 Ink Charging Menu
3 Remove Ink Tube from the clamps on the

path.

(2) Ink Slot 3/4 (2-b)Circulation Pump (L Joint)
(2-a)Head 1 Remove Ink tube from T fitting.

A : T fitting A
1 Remove Ink tube from T fitting. B : Ink tube
A : T fitting A
B
B : Ink tube 㨀㧵㧼
length
B
㨀㧵㧼 Ink Slot 3: 1245ｍｍ
length Ink Slot 4: 1200ｍｍ
G nozzle:40ｍｍ
H nozzle: 50ｍｍ
2 Remove Ink Tube from Clamp Tubes (7
pieces). B
2 Remove Ink tube from L joint. A : Clamp Tube
B : Ink Tube
A : L joint
B : Ink tube B
NOTE
One place should work at a time. After A
attaching again the Clamp of the part
A which removed Ink Tube, the next part
should work.
3 Replace Ink tube. 3 Remove Ink tube from the L joint of Circulation
Pump. A
procedure. A : L joint B
B : Ink tube
5 Charge Ink.
5.5 Ink Charging Menu 4 Replace Ink tube.

procedure.
6 Charge Ink.

(2-c)Circulation pump （T fitting） (2-d)Circulation pump peripheral
1 Remove Ink tube from T fitting. 1 Remove Snapper hose clip from Circulation
A pump.
A : T fitting
A : Snapper hose clip A A
B : Ink tube
B : Ink tube
㨀㧵㧼
NOTE
length
Circulation pump3: 1570ｍｍ • Snapper hose clips are re-applied, B B
B make sure not to lose it.
Circulation pump4: 1510ｍｍ
• When replacing step 4 “E”, the works of
step 1 and 2 are not needed.
2 Remove Ink Tube from Clamp Tubes (7

pieces). B
2 Remove Ink tube from Circulation pump.
A : Clamp Tube when replacing A or B

B : Ink Tube
3 Remove Ink tube from L joint.
B
A
NOTE A : Ink tube (30mm) D
One place should work at a time. After A B : Ink tube (20ｍｍ)

attaching again the Clamp of the part C : L joint
which removed Ink Tube, the next part
should work. when replacing “E”
E C
4 Remove Ink tube (20mm) from T fitting from T
fitting and L joint.
3 Remove Ink tube from the T fitting of
Circulation pump. D : T fitting
B
E : Ink tube (20mm)
A : T fitting
B : Ink tube
5 Replace Ink tube.
4 Replace Ink tube.
6 Charge Ink.
5 Charge Ink. 5.5 Ink Charging Menu
5.5 Ink Charging Menu A
7 Charge Ink.
6 Charge Ink.

3.10 Replacing Maintenance VJ628XE-M-00
3.10 Replacing Maintenance 4 Remove Waste Fluid Tubes (2 pieces) from

Waste Fluid Pump.
3.10.1 Replacing Waste Fluid Pump
5 Remove the screws (2 pieces) retaining B
A
　 ● Tools & Jigs & Maintenance part Waste Fluid Pump.

flat washer M3ｘ10
Diaphragm Pump Assy DG-43907 Exploded View Maintenance
B : Waste Fluid Tube
Phillips screwdriver No.2 Generic - （φ3ｘ5）
products
6 Replace Waste Fluid Pump.

NOTE
Since ink may drip, work covering with a waste clothes etc. downward. 7 To reassemble unit, reverse the removal
procedure.
㨀㧵㧼
This section describes the procedure to replace the maintenance part, Diaphragm
Pump Assy.
In this section, it is referred to as Waste Fluid Pump.

2 Move Carriage to the left side of Origin.

3 Remove Pump Motor Cable from Waste Fluid

Pump.
A : Connecting point
3.10.1 Replacing Waste Fluid Pump 157

3.10.2 Replacing Pump Motor Cable

6 Remove Pump Motor Cable from MAIN
J31
Name No. Remarks
Vacuum FAN Relay 2 Assy DF-48995 Exploded View Maintenance
products
㨀㧵㧼
This section describes the procedure to replace the maintenance part, Vacuum FAN
Relay 2 Assy. 7 Replacing Pump Motor Cable.
In this section, it is referred to as Pump Motor Cable.
procedure.
2 Remove Top Cover.


4 Remove Pump Motor Cable from Waste Fluid

Pump.
A : Connecting point
5 Remove Pump relay cable from the clamps on

the path.
3.10.2 Replacing Pump Motor Cable 158

3.10.3 Replacing Wiper

NOTE
When reassembling the Wiper, pay JGCFRQKPV
Name No. Remarks attention to the following.
Cleaner Head Assy DF-49687 • Do not touch the Wiper with bare
Exploded View　Maintenance
hands.
Phillips screwdriver No.2 Generic - • Make sure that the Wiper gets no dust
products or oil.
Tweezers -
• Install the Wiper so that the point of the
Wiper is located to the observer’s right
㨀㧵㧼 side.
This section describes the procedure to replace the maintenance part,Cleaner Head
Assy.
In this section, it is referred to as Wiper. 4 To reassemble unit, reverse the removal
procedure.

2 Move Carriage to the opposite side of Platen.

3 Remove the wiper by tweezers and so on.

JQQM
3.10.3 Replacing Wiper 159

3.10.4 Replacing Wiper Solenoid Cable

NOTE
Wiper solenoid and Wiper solenoid Cable
Name No. Remarks are connected in the post header
assembly. Please do not lose the post
Wiper SOL Cable Assy DG-44723 Exploded View Maintenance
header assembly.
products
㨀㧵㧼 5 Remove the Wiper solenoid cable from the

clamps on the path.
In this section describes the procedure to replace the maintenance part, Wiper SOL
Cable Assy. In this section, it is referred to as Wiper solenoid cable.
6 Remove the Wiper solenoid cable from the
Main board Assy.
J29

3 Remove Top Cover.

4 Remove Wiper Solenoid Relay Cable from procedure.
Wiper Solenoid. DCEMUKFGQH/CKPVGPCPEG
A : the cable of Wiper Solenoid

B : Connecting point
A
3.10.4 Replacing Wiper Solenoid Cable 160

3.10.5 Replacing Wiper Solenoid

NOTE
Solenoid and Media thickness detection
Name No. Remarks sensor relay cable are connected in the
post header assembly. Please do not lose
Wiper Solenoid SDC630KG DG-41090 Exploded View Maintenance
the post header assembly
products
longnose pliers for removing a spring pin
5 Remove the screws (2 pieces) retaining Wiper

NOTE holding plate.
Since ink may drip, work covering with a waste clothes etc. downward.
A : Wiper holding plate
B : Tapping screw M3 x 6 S tight cup
B
㨀㧵㧼
This section describes the procedure to replace the maintenance part, Wiper A
Solenoid SDC630KG.
In this section, it is referred to as Wiper Solenoid.
6 Remove Wiper holder plate (Wiper Assy).

3.2.2 Removing Side Cover 7 Remove the screws(2 pieces) retaining Wiper
Solenoid.
2 Remove Top Cover.
3.2.1 Removing Top Cover B
flat washer M3ｘ5
B : Wiper Solenoid
A
4 Remove Wiper Solenoid Relay Cable from
Wiper Solenoid. DCEMUKFGQH/CKPVGPCPEG
A : the cable of Wiper Solenoid

B : Connecting point
A
3.10.5 Replacing Wiper Solenoid 161

8 Remove the spring, washer and spring pin

from plunger. C A
A : Plunger
B : Spring pin
C : Spring
D : Washer
D
B
NOTE
Spring, washer and spring pin will be
reused. Take care not to lose them.
9 Replace it with new Wiper Solenoid.

procedure.
3.10.5 Replacing Wiper Solenoid 162

3.10.6 Replacing Cap Head Assy

5 Remove Cap Tubes (3 pieces) from Cap Head
　 ● Tools & Jigs & Maintenance part Assy.
Name No. Remarks

6 Remove Cap Head Assy from Maintenance A
Slide Base.
Cap Head Assy DG-41179 Exploded View Maintenance B
A : Cap Head Assy
Phillips screwdriver No.2 Generic - B : Cap Tube
products C : Cap Spring C
NOTE NOTE
Since ink may drip, work covering with a waste clothes etc. downward. Cap Spring and the Cap tubes will be re-
used.

procedure.
NOTE
3 Remove cap tube (4 pieces) from the joint (2 When connecting cap tube and pump,
pieces). pay attention not to mix up connections.
If not connected to the corresponding, ink
A : Joint may leak.
B : Cap tube B
4 Remove while pressing the cap head Assy, so

as to rotate in the direction of the arrow.
3.10.6 Replacing Cap Head Assy 163

3.10.7 Replacing Maintenance Assy

4 Remove the screw (1 piece) retaining the right
　 ● Tools & Jigs & Maintenance part side of Maintenance Slide Base.
B
Name No. Remarks A : Maintenance Slide Base
VJ628 Periodic Maintenance Kit DG-44737 Exploded View Maintenance B : Tapping screw M3ｘ6　S Tight cup

products
A
NOTE
Since ink may drip, work covering with a waste clothes etc. downward. 5 Remove screw (1 piece) retaining the left side
of Maintenance slide base.
(Remove it by shifting Slide Base S in the B
direction of red arrow. )
㨀㧵㧼
This section describes the procedure to replace the maintenance part,VJ628 A : Slide base S
Periodic Maintenance Kit (Maintenance Assy and Wiper). B : Tapping screw M3ｘ6　S Tight cup
A
(1) Maintenance Assy
6 Replacing Maintenance Assy.
procedure.
(2) Wiper
3 Remove cap tube (2 pieces) from the joint.
For replacing Wiper peripheral, see the procedure of replacing Wiper solenoid.
3.10.5 Replacing Wiper Solenoid
A : Joint
B : Cap tube
B
3.10.7 Replacing Maintenance Assy 164

3.10.8 Replacing Waste Fluid Tank

4 Remove Waste Fluid Tank Holder.
Name No. Remarks NOTE
Waste Fluid Tank Unit Assy DG-45368 Exploded View　Maintenance Since ink may drip, work covering with a
waste clothes etc. downward.
products
5 Replace Waste Fluid Tank.

㨀㧵㧼
This section describes the procedure to replace the maintenance part, Waste Fluid 6 To reassemble unit, reverse the removal
Tank Unit Assy. procedure.
In this section, it is referred to as Waste Fluid Tank.



Waste Fluid Tank Holder.
A : Waste Fluid Tank Holder

B : Tapping screw M3ｘ6 S Tight cup
3.10.8 Replacing Waste Fluid Tank 165

3.11 Replacing IH VJ628XE-M-00
3.11 Replacing IH 5 Remove the screws (x 2) retaining Circulation

pump (x 2). A
　 ● Tools & Jigs & Maintenance part flat washer M3x10
B : Circulation pump
Name No. Remarks
Phillips screwdriver No.2 Generic - B
products
Flat-shaped ratchet driver -
1 Remove Top cover 6 Remove Circulation pump.

3.2.1 Removing Top Cover Put the Circulation pump in a state in which
the ink tube no load.
2 Remove R side cover.
3.2.2 Removing Side Cover NOTE
When it takes a load for an ink tube, there
3 Remove the cables from Pump stay.
is a risk that ink leaks from a connecting
A : Cables point.
B : Pump stay
7 Remove the screws (x 4) retaining Pump stay.

B B
A : Pump stay
A B : Tapping screw M3ｘ6 S Tight cup
B
4 Remove Circulation pump relay cable from

Circulation pump. A B
Pump1
A : Circulation pump1
B : Circulation pump2 A
B
Pump2
8 Remove Pump stay.

procedure.
3.11.1 Removing Pump stay 166

3.11.2 Removing Heater Board Stay

Name No. Remarks

products
1 Remove Top cover

2 Remove L side cover.

3 Remove all the cables from HEATER DRIVE

Board.
4 Remove the removed cables from the clamps.
A : clamp

Heater Board Stay.
A : Tapping screw M3ｘ6　S Tight cup

B : Heater Board Stay
A B
6 Remove Heater Board Stay.
7 取付けは、取外しと逆の手順で行います。
3.11.2 Removing Heater Board Stay 167

3.11.3 Replacing Cartridge Holder

4 Remove the cable for exchange (2 sets each) JUNCTION Board R
　 ● Tools & Jigs & Maintenance part from JUNCTION Board.
3.5.11 Replacing JUNCTION Board
Name No. Remarks
I/C Holder Assy1 DG-45562 Exploded View　IH R
Exploded View　IH L
I/C Holder Assy2 DG-45563
products
slot 1 BK
(I/C Holder Assy1) J8 J16
dedicated fluid - Operation Manual
slot 2 BLU
㨀㧵㧼
This section describes the procedure to replace the maintenance part,I/C Holder slot 3 RED
Assy.In this section, it is referred to as Cartridge Holder.
slot 4 YEL
1 Perform ink discharge operation to discharge JUNCTION Board L

NOTE
2 Removing Side Cover (R or L).

slot 5 YEL
(I/C Holder Assy4) J11
3
J19
Removing Pump Stay.
3.11.1 Removing Pump stay slot 6 RED
BLU
NOTE slot 7
side. slot 8 BK
3.11.3 Replacing Cartridge Holder 168

5 Remove the removed cables from the clamps 10 Remove IH Cap and Twist Spring from
on the path. Cartridge Holder. A
6 Removing Heater Board Stay. A : Cartridge Holder

3.11.2 Removing Heater Board Stay B : IH Cap
C : Twist Spring C
NOTE
This procedure is needed for replacing L-
side. B
11 Replace Cartridge Holder.

7 Loosen Joint Screw and then remove L Fitting
from Cartridge Holder. 12 Assemble the removed IH Cap and Twist
Spring to Cartridge Holder.
A : Joint Screw B
B : L Fitting 13 Assemble Cartridge Holder to Cartridge
Base.
A : Tapping screw M3ｘ12S Tight cup
A
Cartridge Holder to Cartridge Base.

14 Attach the new O ring to the removed fitting,
and connect it to cartridge holder with the Joint
A screw.
NOTE
• Replace O ring attached to Fitting with
New one.
9 Remove Cartridge Holder.
• Attach O ring after dipping in dedicated
cleaning fluid.

procedure.
3.11.3 Replacing Cartridge Holder 169

3.11.4 Replacing INK ID Board Assy

　 ● Tools & Jigs & Maintenance part Cartridge Holder to Cartridge Base.
Name No. Remarks A : Tapping screw M3ｘ12S Tight cup

INK ID Board Assy DF-43968 Exploded View　IH R/IH L
A
products

Holder Pressure Spring (2 pieces).
2 Removing Pump Stay. C B
A : Holder Pressure Spring
B : P Tight cupM3ｘ6
NOTE
C : INK ID Board Assy
side. 7 Remove Holder Pressure Spring.
8 Remove INK ID Board Assy.

A
3 Removing Heater Board Stay.

3.11.2 Removing Heater Board Stay 9 Remove INK ID Cable Assy from INK ID Board
Assy. B
NOTE
A : INK ID Cable Assy
B : INK ID Board Assy
side.
4 Loosen the joint screw and remove the ink

A
tube (fitting) from Cartridge holder.
A : Joint Screw B
B : L Fitting
10 Replace INK ID Board Assy.
procedure.
3.11.4 Replacing INK ID Board Assy 170

3.11.5 Replacing Holder Pressure Spring

4 Loosen the joint screw and remove the ink
　 ● Tools & Jigs & Maintenance part tube (fitting) from Cartridge holder.
Name No. Remarks A : Joint Screw B

Holder Pressure Spring DF-43967 B : L Fitting
Exploded View　IH R
Exploded View　IH L
products
A
㨀㧵㧼
The replacement procedure is common to both R side and L side.
Cartridge Holder to Cartridge Base.
The procedure described here is that of R side.

A

NOTE 6 Remove the screws (2 pieces) retaining

This procedure is needed for replacing R- Holder Pressure Spring (2 pieces). B
C
side.
A : Holder Pressure Spring
B : P Tight cupM3ｘ6
C : INK ID Board Assy
3 Removing Heater Board Stay.
3.11.2 Removing Heater Board Stay
A
NOTE
side.
7 Replace Holder Pressure Spring.

procedure.
3.11.5 Replacing Holder Pressure Spring 171

3.11.6 Replacing HEATER DRIVE Board

Name No. Remarks

AC JUNCTION Board Assy DG-44710 Exploded View IH L
products
㨀㧵㧼
This section describes the procedure to replace the maintenance part,AC
JUNCTION Board Assy.
In this section, it is referred to as HEATER DRIVE Board.

2 Remove all the cables from HEATER DRIVE

Board.

HEATER DRIVE Board. A
A : Cup screw M3x6 Zn-CM2
B : HEATER DRIVE Board
4 Replace HEATER DRIVE Board.
3.11.6 Replacing HEATER DRIVE Board 172

3.11.7 Replacing AC JUNC CNT Cable Assy

Name No. Remarks

AC JUNC CNT Cable Assy DG-44711 Exploded View IH L
Phillips Screwdriver No.2 generic -
product
1 Remove Top Cover.


3 Remove JUNC CNT Cable Assy from

HEATER DRIVE Board.
A : AC JUNC CNT Cable Assy

B : HEATER DRIVE Board
B

path.
5 Remove JUNC CNT Cable Assy from MAIN

Board.
-
6 Replace AC JUNC CNT Cable Assy.
3.11.7 Replacing AC JUNC CNT Cable Assy 173

3.11.8 Replacing Circulation pump

5 Remove the cable of Circulation pump from
　 ● Tools & Jigs & Maintenance part the clamps on the path.
Name No. Remarks

6 Remove the snapper hose clips from
Diaphragm pump Assy DG-43907 Exploded View Circulation pump Circulation pump.
A A
Phillips Screwdriver No.2 generic - A : Snapper hose clip
product B : Ink tube
㨀㧵㧼 NOTE
B B
This section describes the procedure to replace the maintenance part, Diaphragm Snapper hose clips are re-applied, make
pump Assy. sure not to lose it.
In this section, it is referred to as Circulation pump.
7 Remove Ink tubes from Circulation pump.

8 Remove the screws (x 2) retaining Circulation
pump. A
NOTE flat washer M3x10
B : Circulation pump
B
2 Remove Top Cover.

3.2.1 Removing Top Cover 9 Replace Circulation pump.
3 Removing R Side Cover. 10 To reassemble unit, reverse the removal

3.2.2 Removing Side Cover procedure.
4 Remove the Circulation pump relay cable for

replacement from Circulation pump. A B
Pump1
A : Circulation pump1
B : Circulation pump2
Pump2
3.11.8 Replacing Circulation pump 174

3.11.9 Replacing Circulation Pump Relay Cable

5 Remove the circulation pump relay cable from
　 ● Tools & Jigs & Maintenance part the main board.
Name No. Remarks

Circulation Pump Relay Cable Assy DG-45567 Exploded View “Circulation Pump”
Phillips Screwdriver No.2 generic -
product
-
㨀㧵㧼
6 Replace the circulation pump relay cable.

㨀㧵㧼
This section describes the procedure to replace the maintenance part, Circulation 7 To reassemble unit, reverse the removal
Pump Relay Cable Assy.. procedure.
In this section, it is referred to as Circulation pump Relay Cable Assy.
1 Remove Top Cover.


3 Remove the circulation pump relay cable.

A B
A : Circulation Pump1 Pump1
B : Circulation Pump2
Pump2
4 Remove the circulation pump relay cable from

3.11.9 Replacing Circulation Pump Relay Cable 175

VJ628XE-M-00
4 Adjustment 4.3.16 Initializing activation............................................. 223

4.1 Introduction ...................................................................177
4.3.17 Version Information ............................................. 224
4.2 Adjustment Item ............................................................177
4.3.18 Switch to Board Manager Mode .......................... 225
4.3 Working with MUTOH Service Assistance Software..179
4.3.19 Maintenance Panel.............................................. 226
4.3.1 Parameter Backup ...............................................180
4.3.20 Terminating Application ....................................... 228
4.3.2 Jigs and Tools ......................................................181
4.4 X Speed Reduction Belt Tension Adjustment ........... 229
4.3.3 Required Environment .........................................182
4.4.1 Adjustment Procedure ......................................... 229
4.3.4 Updating Date and Time ......................................196
4.5 PF Encoder Position Adjustment................................ 230
4.3.5 Editing Media Type ..............................................197
4.5.1 Adjustment Procedure ......................................... 230
4.3.6 Acquiring and Saving Error Log ...........................199
4.6 CR Belt Tension Adjustment ....................................... 231
4.3.7 Updating main firmware .......................................201
4.6.1 Adjustment procedure ......................................... 231
4.3.8 Receiving Backup Parameters .............................202
4.7 Head Adjustment .......................................................... 232
4.3.9 Sending Backup Parameter .................................203
4.7.1 Head Alignment (Horizontal Slant) ...................... 232
4.3.10 Board Replacement Wizard .................................204
4.7.2 Head Alignment (Vertical Slant) .......................... 235
4.3.11 Diagnostic Mode ..................................................210
4.8 Head Height Adjustment.............................................. 238
4.3.12 Acquiring Printer Identification Data.....................217
4.8.1 Adjustment Procedures ....................................... 238
4.3.13 Sending Authorization code .................................218
4.3.14 Referring Set Up Information ...............................219
4.3.15 Reffering Adjustment Parameter ..........................221
176
4.1 Introduction Table 4-1 Adjustment Item(Continued)(Continued)
Part replaced or Adjust Adjustment item Reference

This chapter provides information on necessary adjustment items and procedure. ment
adjusted
order
4.2 Adjustment Item CR Motor 1 CR speed reduction belt "4.6CR Belt Tension
adjustment Adjustment
This section describes the adjustment items required in part replacement procedures.
When you adjust or replace any of the maintenance parts listed in “Table 4-1 Adjustment Item 2 Reset of Life counter 6.3.4 Counter
List”, you must always adjust the printout quality using the self-diagnosis function referring to Initialization Menu
Table 4-1“Adjustment Item List”.
3 Uni-D/Bi-D adjustment "5.6.5Uni-D/ Bi-D
Adjustment Menu
Table 4-1 Adjustment Item
4 Side margin adjustment "5.6.7Margin adjustment
Part replaced or Adjust Adjustment item Reference Menu
adjusted ment
order 5 Test printing "5.6.8Test Printing Menu
Print head 1 Head cleaning "5.6.9Longstore Menu PF Motor 1 X speed reduction belt "4.4X Speed Reduction
adjustment Belt Tension Adjustment
2 Head rank input "(2)Head Rank
(including initial ink charge) "5.5Ink Charging Menu 2 Test printing "5.6.8Test Printing Menu
3 Head nozzle check "5.6.2Head Nozzle Check 3 Reset of Life counter 6.3.4 Counter
Menu Initialization Menu
4 Head height adjustment "4.8Head Height P_EDGE Sensor 1 P_EDGE Sensor sensitivity "5.6.1Rear/ Edge Sensor
Adjustment adjustment Adjustment
5 Head slant check "5.6.4Head Slant Check 2 Side margin adjustment "5.6.7Margin adjustment
Menu Menu
"4.7Head Adjustment
P_REAR Sensor 1 P_Rear Sensor sensitivity "5.6.1Rear/ Edge Sensor
6 Uni-D/Bi-D adjustment "5.6.5Uni-D/ Bi-D adjustment Adjustment
Adjustment Menu
PF Encoder 1 PF encoder inspection "5.4.5Encoder Menu
7 Test printing "5.6.8Test Printing Menu
8 Reset of head unit life counter "5.9.1Parameter
Initialization Menu T Fence 1 CR encoder inspection "5.4.5Encoder Menu
MAIN Board 1 Differs depending on the 4.3 Working with MUTOH 2 Uni-D / Bi-D Adjustment "5.6.5Uni-D/ Bi-D
status of MAIN Board. Service Assistance Software Adjustment Menu
3 Side margin adjustment "5.6.7Margin adjustment

Menu
177
4.2 Adjustment Item VJ628XE-M-00
Table 4-1 Adjustment Item(Continued)(Continued)
Part replaced or Adjust Adjustment item Reference

adjusted ment
order
CR Return Pulley 1 CR belt tention adjustment "4.6CR Belt Tension

Adjustment
2 Uni-D/Bi-D adjustment "5.6.5Uni-D/ Bi-D

Adjustment Menu
3 Side adjustment "5.6.7Margin adjustment

Menu
Carriage Assy 1 PG height adjustment "4.8Head Height

Adjustment
2 CR encoder inspection "5.4.5Encoder Menu
3 Paper Edge Sensor Assy "5.6.1Rear/ Edge Sensor

sensitivity adjustment Adjustment
4 Sequential printing endurance "5.11.9General

operation check Endurance Menu
5 Margin adjustment "5.6.7Margin adjustment

Menu
6 Head nozzle check "5.6.2Head Nozzle Check

Menu
7 Head slant adjustment "5.6.4Head Slant Check

Menu
8 Uni-D/ Bi-D adjustment "5.6.5Uni-D/ Bi-D

Adjustment Menu
178
4.3 Working with MUTOH Service Assistance Software VJ628XE-M-00
4.3 Working with MUTOH Service Assistance

Software
This section explains operation using "MUTOH Service Assistance".
“MUTOH Service Assistance“ is abbreviated as “MSA“ hereinafter.
Installation and download of parameters and firmware installation are performed through the
network using dedicated network software (MSA).
CAUTION
• Never disclose how to replace MSA for Technician (explained later) in "MUTOH
Service Assistance" to users because the software has a function regarding
printer security.
• Each function of "MUTOH Service Assistance" works on the premise that the
serial number is entered. If it is not entered, register it again using Board
replacement wizard.
"4.3.10Board Replacement Wizard
NOTE
• This manual is edited based on MUTOH Service Assistance Ver.4.0.5
• Use the most recent version of MSA for the printer.
179
4.3.1 Parameter Backup

The NVRAM (Flash-ROM) installed on the MAIN board Assy stores various parameters for
the system operation.
The available backup parameters are as follows.
• Panel setting parameters

• Mechanism adjustment parameters
• Main board-unique adjustment parameters
㨀㧵㧼
The MAIN board-unique adjustment parameters cannot be erased or modified.
If the MAIN board Assy is found to need replacement during maintenance operations, make
sure to back up the parameters. The backup data can be used to restore the original system
status, omitting some adjustment steps.
"4.3.8Receiving Backup Parameters

"4.3.9Sending Backup Parameter
4.3.1 Parameter Backup 180

4.3.2 Jigs and Tools

The following jigs and tools are required for MUTOH Service Assistance.
• Windows PC:
• With one of the following installed:Windows 98 / Windows 98 SE / Windows Me /
Windows 2000 / Windows XP/ Windows Vista / Windows 7
• Equipped with network interface connector (RJ-45) (10M/100M Ethernet I/F)
• Dedicated network software (MUTOH Service Assistance) is already installed
• Network interface cable (crossover cable *For hub connection, straight cable)
4.3.2 Jigs and Tools 181

4.3.3 Required Environment (3) Setting Exceptions in Windows Firewall Setting

Before starting work, set up the following environment. If you use Windows Vista or later as the OS, you need to add MSA to the exceptions list for
Windows Firewall.
(1) Installing MUTOH Service Assistance

1 Insert the MSA installed CD-ROM in the CD-ROM drive of the PC, and open from "My
NOTE
Computer". • This procedure is for Windows Vista.
2 Drag and drop the "MUTOH Service Assistance" folder to the desktop to copy the files. • If you use virus security software other than Windows Firewall, you may need to
change settings for that software. Contact the software vendor for correct settings
and procedures.
(2) Creating a Shortcut
To make it simple to start the "MUTOH Service Assistance", create a shortcut on the desktop.
1 Click the Start button and then click [Control Panel].
1 Open the "MUTOH Service Assistance" folder on the desktop. • The “Control Panel” window will be displayed.
2 Right-click the [MUTOH Service 2 Click "Allow a program through

Assistance.exe] in the folder, and Windows Firewall”.
select [Send To]-[Desktop (create
shortcut)].
3 Shortcut to MUTOH Service Assistance icon is created on the desktop.
4.3.3 Required Environment 182

3 When the “Windows Firewall 6 Make sure that MSA.exe is added

Settings” window is displayed, and click the “OK” button.
select the “Exceptions” tab and
click the “Add program...” button. • The Windows Firewall
Settings window will be
displayed.
7 Confirm that MSA.exe is added in

the “Windows Firewall Settings”
4 When the “Add a Program” window and click the “OK” button.
window is displayed, click the
“Browse...” button. • Complete the setting.
5 When the “Browse” window is

displayed, select Mutoh Service
Assistance.exe where the Mutoh
Service Assistance is installed
and click the “Open” button. 1

(4) Confirming Startup of the "MUTOH Service Assistance"
1 Double-click the [Shortcut to Mutoh Service

Assistance.exe], and check that the
application starts correctly.
At the first startup, it shall be started in
English mode.
(5) Connecting Printer and Computer

1 Turn OFF both the printer and computer.
2 Insert Connector of Network interface cable into Network interface connector located in
the back of the printer.
Network Interface connector
3 Connect the other connector of Network interface cable to your PC.
NOTE
When connecting a printer to a computer one-on-one, use a cross cable. When
connecting the printer and computer via a hub, use a straight cable.
If possible, set the printer away from Network and directly connect to the host
computer with a cross cable.

(6) Starting the printer

When using MSA, the printer must be started in the relevant mode depending on the function
you use.
NOTE
When the printer’s set up mode is inappropriate to the MSA function, an error
message appears. When an error message is displayed, restart the printer in the
mode described in the next table.
PR: Printer mode

BM: Board manager mode
PR/BM: Any mode can be used
Function of MSA set up mode

"4.3.5Editing Media Type BM
"4.3.6Acquiring and Saving Error Log PR
"4.3.7Updating main firmware BM
"4.3.8Receiving Backup Parameters PR/BM
"4.3.9Sending Backup Parameter BM
"4.3.10Board Replacement Wizard BM
"4.3.11Diagnostic Mode PR
"4.3.12Acquiring Printer Identification Data BM
"4.3.13Sending Authorization code BM
"4.3.14Referring Set Up Information PR
"4.3.15Reffering Adjustment Parameter PR
"4.3.19Maintenance Panel BM

(6-a)Starting Printer Mode • When it starts from Jig panel

Start up printer in Printer mode (Normal mode).
Press [Power] key to start Printer mode. 1 When printer is in operation status or in
diagnosis menu display status, press [Power]
key to OFF.
(6-b)Board Manager Mode
2 While holding down [<] key on Operation
Start up printer in board manager mode. panel, press [Power] key to turn OFF.
Follow the steps below to start up in board manager mode.
[Board Manager Mode] is displayed on LCD
• When it starts from an operation panel panel. Releasing the [<] key will display
[Waiting for command].
1 When printer is in operation status or in
Power key
Backward feed
Multi key
diagnosis menu display status, press Power
key to OFF.
2 Press Power key to ON.
3
Forward feed
If data LED and error LED light up, pressing

the multi-key is continued.
NOTE
㨀㧵㧼 Data LED Error LED
If the [Waiting for command] is not displayed, follow the steps below.
If Data LED and Error LED repeat lighting
If any IP address other than default address is displayed on Board, release [<] key
and putting out lights by turns, it means
to change display to [IP192.168.xxx.xxx] (depending on the set address) on LCD
having started in board manager mode.
panel. In this case, display the default IP (IP192.168.1.253) or the set IP address
using the [+] key or [-] key, and press [Enter] key. [Waiting for command] will then
appears.
NOTE
• It starts in the state that the IP address of the user mode is set.
• Self Diagnose function and Maintenance mode 2 cannot start from an operation
panel.

(7) Printer IP Address Check NOTE

Printer IP address can be confirmed from either printer mode or board manager mode. Follow When “Set 23: IP address“ etc. does not appears, set up from “Menu 5: Easy Setup“
the steps below. to display IP address and others.
『Operation Manual』
(7-a)Printer IP Address Check in Printer Mode
1 Start up the printer in printer mode.

(7-b)Checking the printer IP address in Board manager mode
2 Press [Menu] on Operation panel.
1 Start up printer in board manager mode.
2 While Power light is on, press any key

other than [Power] key.
㹵㹟㹧㹲㹧㹬㹥ࠉ㹤㹭㹰ࠉ㹡㹭㹫㹫㹟㹬㹢
IP address and sub net masks can be * key
checked on the LCD monitor of 㹇㹎ࠉࠉ㸻㸯㸷㸰㸬㸯㸴㸶㸬㸮㸮㸯㸬㸰㸳㸱
Operation panel.
Backward feed * key
㹋㸿㹑㹉㸻㸰㸳㸳㸬㸰㸳㸳㸬㸰㸳㸳㸬㸮㸮㸮
* key
Forward feed * key: any key other than [Power] key
3 After LCD panel displays “Menu1:Setup>", confirm IP address, sub net mask, default NOTE
gateway by following steps.
When Network interface card is not
㹋㹣㹬㹳㸯㸸ࠉࠉࠉࠉࠉࠉࠉࠉ㹑㹣㹲㹳㹮㸼 recognized because of its damage
or contact failure, LCD display 㹵㹟㹧㹲㹧㹬㹥ࠉ㹤㹭㹰ࠉ㹡㹭㹫㹫㹟㹬㹢
changes as shown in the right
figure. * key
[-] 㹌㹭ࠉ㹌㹣㹲㹵㹭㹰㹩ࠉ㹇㹬㹲㹣㹰㹤㹟㹡㹣
* key
[+] [-]
[Enter] * key: any key other than [Power] key
Displays IP Address
[Cancel]
[+] [-]
[Enter]
Displays Subnet Mask
[Cancel]
[+] [-]
[Enter]
Displays Default Gateway
[Cancel]
[+]

(8) Computer IP Address Setting

4 When printer IP address is
“192.168.1.253“, enter any value of
(8-a)Connecting with Crossover Cable "192.168.1.1" to 192.168.1.252" or
When directly connecting computer and printer, follow the steps as below. "192.168.1.254" in [IP address].
When this numerical value
of the printer is “231”, input
*When printer IP address is changed Set the same numerical
any value from 1 to 230 or
232 to 254.
NOTE to any other value, enter its value up value as the printer.
to third dotted quad (third comma) in

The following explains the procedure to set up on Windows XP keeping printer
computer IP address field and enter
default IP address, “192.168.1.253”
different value for only last dotted
quad.
1 From the [Control Panel], open

[Network Connections].
2 Right-click [Local Area Connection]
and select [Properties].
3 Double-click [Internet Protocol (TCP/

IP)].
5 Click [OK] to finish setting.

(8-b)Connecting with Straight Cable

4 When printer IP address is
When connecting computer and printer with straight cable (through hub, like LAN), follow the “192.168.123.231“, enter any value
steps below. from "192.168.123.1 to
192.168.123.230" or
"192.168.123.232 to When this numerical value
NOTE
192.168.123.254" in [IP address]. of the printer is “231”, input
any value from 1 to 230 or
The following explains the procedure to set up on Windows XP with printer IP *In this case, IP address must be
Set the same numerical
value as the printer.
232 to 254.
address, “192.168.123.231”. different from other PC IP address

connected on the same hub
1 From [Control Panel], open

[Network Connections].
2 Right-click [Local Area Connection]
and select [Properties].
3 Double-click [Internet Protocol

(TCP/IP)].
5 Click [OK] to finish setting.

(9) Confirming Startup of the "MUTOH Service Assistance" No. Contents

4 Editing Use type
1 Double-click the [Shortcut to MUTOH
Service Assistance.exe], and check 5 Acquring or Saving “ Error Log”.
that the application starts correctly.
At the first startup, it shall be started 6 Updating “Main F/W”.
in English mode. 7 Updating Blower Heater F/W”.
2 Automatic printer model selection is 8 Acquring “Individual Code”(ink / mpi files).

started.
9 Sending authorization code (.ulk file) sent by MUTOH Industries
（It displays IP address set by MSA.） authorized dealer to a printer.
• When [Cancel] is clicked, it 10 Acquiring Setup information from a printer by a text file.
appears the main window at the
time of communication indefinite. 11 Acquiring Maintenance information (.mnt file) from a printer.
• At the first startup, it shall be 12 Terminating the MSA.
started in English mode.
3 After having chosen printer model,

main window appears. 㨀㧵㧼
1 2
3 • Following main window is
displayed when it cannot
4 communicate with a printer. 1 2
5 3
When [connection error] is
6
displayed, refer 4
7 to "2.3.7Problems in Using
5
8 MUTOH Service Assistance
9
10
11
12 No. Contents
1 Setting IP address.
Changing language.
Selecting printer model automatically.
2 Confirming MSA version.
No. Contents
3 Displaying “disconnect”.
1 Setting IP address, Selecting language, Automatic printer
model selection 4 Browsing “Error Log”.(It cannot be acquired from a printer.)
2 Confirming version of MSA. 5 Terminating the MSA.
3 Displaying chosen printer model name.

(10)IP address setting

This section describes the procedure to set up IP address for MSA.
When indicated IP address is different from printer IP address, change IP address to match
the printer IP address.
NOTE
The IP address default value for printer and MSA is set to “192.168.1.253“. When the
default value is used, the following setting in not needed.
Follow the steps below to set the IP address.
1 Select [Setup (S)] - [Option (O)] on the

main window.
2 Input the IP address in the field with red

mark. IP address is the same with
computer’s.
When IP address is changed, [Automatic

model selection confirmation] window
appears.
㨀㧵㧼
Double click “IP Address”, it is set to default value”192.268.1.253”.
3 Click [Yes] to use Automatic selection.
Model name shall be changed to the

name of the connected printer model.
*This window appears only when IP

address is changed.

(11)Language setting
Menu and message can be shown in either English or Japanese which can be selected.
Change shall be activated when program is restarted.
Follow the steps below to change language.
1 Select [Setup (S)] - [Language (L)]

form the main window.
2 Click [OK] on [Confirmation of

language switching] window.
Application shall be terminated

automatically.
NOTE
• When English mode is selected, [Setup(S)] on menu changes to “Setup (S)”.
• The language displayed at the initial startup of MSA depends on the language
setting of your OS.(When the language setting of your OS is set to a language
other than Japanese, MSA is displayed in English.)

(12)Switching to Technician Mode

4 Enter User ID and Password.
MUTOH Service Assistance is in MSA for User (User mode) at the time of start-up. Switch it Then click [Login].
to MSA for Technician (Technician mode) when performing maintenance operations.
CAUTION
Do NOT disclose the procedure to switch Technician mode to the user.
This mode is approved to use only by maintenance engineers.
1 On User mode main window, click CAUTION

[Help] - [Version].
Login name and password is not disclosed in this manual.
Contact MUTOH INDUSTRIES dealer.
[Version information] window
appears.
5 The main screen of Technician mode

will be displayed.
2 Double-click the MUTOH logo (1) and
then the MSA icon (2).
Then click [OK]. 2
3 Double click [MUTOH].

Login window will be displayed.
NOTE
• Even from the main window of a model indeterminate state, it is possible to switch
to the Technician mode, the features available in the Technician mode is limited.
• When User mode is started by an English mode, Technician mode is also started
by an English mode.When language mode is changed from [setting (S)]-
[Language(L)] in Technician mode, login operation is needed again.
• The function which MSA supports between a printer and PC is dependent on the
starting mode of the printer.
• At the time of clicking each button of the main window, when starting mode is not
suitable, a warning message is displayed.

㨀㧵㧼
Change the size of Main window
In [Setup Information] window,

you can refer to the following:
- Setup information of the printer Lists up the information acquired
- Setup information of the printer from the parameter file.
read by the saved parameters
Saves the listed information as
plain text.
Lists up the information acquired

from the printer.
Clears the listed information.
Changes the font of the listed

information.
(It is available on the page “Setup List”.)
User Type list :

Confirming only the User Type settings.
In [Adjustment Parameters] window,

you can refer to the following:
- Printer adjustment parameters Moreover, if it is in the state where setup
- Printer adjustment parameters information was referred to, the contents
by the saved parameters of a setting of arbitrary user definitions
can be checked by the combo box "for a listing."
If "all" is chosen, all the user definitions
will be indicated by list.
(It is available on the page “Setup List”).

Displaying the list of settings.

(13)Optional Function for Technician Mode

5 Confirm IP address is the same with
In Technician mode, the following can be done from “Option” window. printer IP address in IP address field.
• Selecting appropriate model manually After confirmation, click [OK].

• Check and confirmation of MSA IP address
If an IP address that is different from
that of the printer is displayed, change it
NOTE to the same IP address as the printer,
MSA has a function to automatically recognize model so that manual model select and then click on “OK”.
function is normally not required.
Manual function is limited to use especially when installing the new firmware in a
Board without any firmware in it.
1 Start [MUTOH Service Assistance.exe]

from shortcut on desktop window.
2 Switch to Technician mode.

"(12)Switching to Technician Mode
3 From main window, select[Setup(S)] -

[Option(O)].
4 Select appropriate model name from

drop-down menu for “Model name”.
After model is selected, model-specific

functions are operable.

4.3.4 Updating Date and Time

NOTE
This section explains the operating procedure which updates the date and time of a printer
When an error message is displayed during updating, if it clicks [OK], it will return
using MSA.
to a main window.
NOTE
Before this procedure, make sure to prepare the following: 4 Once transmission has completed,
• Set up the printer, computer and MSA. the「Date and time update」window
"4.3.3Required Environment
is displayed.Click [OK] to close the
window.
• Start the printer on Board manager mode.
"(6)Starting the printer
• Change to Technician mode on MSA. 5 Make sure that the time displayed on the panel of the printer has been changed.
"(12)Switching to Technician Mode "5.4.9Time Check Menu
1 Click [Date and Time Update]on main

window.
2 Click ［OK］to send the systematic

of the computer to the printer, as the
data of year, month, day, and time.
NOTE
After clicking [OK], if any communication errors occur such as wrong IP address or
unplugged LAN cable, an error message appears. If any setting errors occur such
as inappropriate model name selection, serial number registration is not finished
or incorrect one is registered, an warning message appears.
In both cases, communication with printer shall be interrupted.
Click [OK] to return to main menu.
3 Once transmission has started, the

「Progress」window is displayed.
4.3.4 Updating Date and Time 196

4.3.5 Editing Media Type 4 When acquisition starts, [Process dialog]

This section describes the procedure to customize media name for user. window appears.
NOTE
Before this procedure, make sure to prepare the following: 5 After media names are acquired, [Media
• Set up the printer, computer and MSA. type download] window appears.
"4.3.3Required Environment Click [OK] to return to [Media type
• Start the printer on Board manager mode. download] window.
• Change to Technician mode on MSA.
6 Edit user media name ① . After editing
completed, click [Upload] ② .
1 Click [Media Type Edit]on main window.
*UP to 10 characters can be entered.
Delete unwanted character by entering
space. “\(back slash)” and “~ (tilde)”
2 When [Media Type Edit] window appears,
cannot be entered. 1
click [Download].
Click [Cancel] to return to the main

window.
7 On [Media type upload] click [OK].
Media name update starts.
3 When [Media type download] window

appears, click [OK].
4.3.5 Editing Media Type 197

NOTE
as inappropriate model name selection, serial number registration is not finished or
incorrect one is registered, an warning message appears.
Click [OK] to return to main window.
8 When Update starts, [Process dialogue]

window appears.
NOTE
to a main window.
9 Confirm completion of update on [Media

type upload] window, click [OK].
Return to [Media Type Edit] window.
4.3.5 Editing Media Type 198

4.3.6 Acquiring and Saving Error Log

3 On [Confirmation of error log
This section describes how to acquire and save error log on printer accessed to Technician download] window, click [OK].
mode.
NOTE
Acquiring and saving error log can be processed form printer mode or Manager
mode.
NOTE
Before this procedure, make sure to prepare the following:
• Set up the printer, computer and MSA. After clicking [OK], if any communication errors occur such as wrong IP address or
"4.3.3Required Environment unplugged LAN cable, an error message appears. If any setting errors occur such
(1) Acquring Error Log

4 While downloading error log,
1 Click [Error Log Download]on main [Communication situation] window
window. appears.
2 Click on [Error log download].
NOTE
to a main window.
5 After completion of acquiring failure

record information, [ Error log
download ] window appears.
Click 「OK」.
NOTE
You can also get the data by selecting [Operation] - [Download] from [Error log
download] window.
4.3.6 Acquiring and Saving Error Log 199

(2) Referring Error Log

6 After completion of acquiring failure
record information, [Error log
download] window appears. 1 Click on [Error log download]
Window.
If there is no failure record in printer,
[<No data>] appears on [Error log Also form［File］-［Open］is the same.
download] window.
7 If saving the data, click on [Error

2 Click appropriate failure record
log download] window.
information file (*.hst) ① and click [Open]
②.
1
3 Record data appears on [Error log

download] window.
㨀㧵㧼
You can also save the data by selecting [File] - [Save as] from [Error log download]
window.
8 On [Save as] window, enter desired file

name ① and click [Save] ② .
The File extension will be *hst.

㨀㧵㧼
㨀㧵㧼 In the case of the format error of the specified Error log file, an error message is
displayed.
* When saving Error log as a text 1 2 Moreover, when there is no history data in the specified Error log, it is displayed on
file, choose "Textdata (*. txt)."
a list as < no data>."
4.3.6 Acquiring and Saving Error Log 200

4.3.7 Updating main firmware 3 On [Main F/W update], click [OK].

The following describes the procedure to update main side firmware accessed to Technician
mode without replacing Main board Assy. *Press [Cancel] to return to the main
window.
NOTE
• Set up the printer, computer and MSA.
• Start the printer on Board manager mode. NOTE
"(6)Starting the printer After clicking [OK], if any communication errors occur such as wrong IP address or
• Change to Technician mode on MSA. unplugged LAN cable, an error message appears. If any setting errors occur such
"(12)Switching to Technician Mode as inappropriate model name selection, serial number registration is not finished or
1 Click [Main F/W Update] on main Click [OK] to return to main window.
window.
2 Select and click target install file (*jfl) to 4 While firmware transfer is in process,
transfer ① and click [Open] ② . [Communication situation] window
1 appears.
* Press [Cancel] to return to the main
window. *Press [Stop] to stop transfer and return
to the main window.
5 After [Transfer completed] window

appears, click [OK] to close.
NOTE CAUTION
F/W used for updating should use the file saved on the PC locally. When “Main F/W update” windows appears on step 5, only transfer of install file from
It may be unable to update, if the file saved in the USB memory etc. is used. MSA for Technician to printer is terminated but program installation to printer is not
terminated. DO NOT turn off the printer unless installation to printer is terminated.
After program installation completes, Main board buzzer rings 3 times.
4.3.7 Updating main firmware 201

4.3.8 Receiving Backup Parameters 4 On [Parameter download ]

This section describes the procedure to receive backup parameter from the printer by using window, click [OK] to close the
Technician mode. window.
NOTE
Saving backup parameter and main board inheritance information acquisition can be
processed both from printer mode and board manager mode. 5 Enter any file name and click
[Save] on [Save the download
Before this procedure, make sure to prepare the following: parameter save] window. (File
shall be saved in “.prm” extension
form automatically.)
• Change to Technician mode on MSA. *File name can be anything.
"(12)Switching to Technician Mode ** Click [Cancel] to return to the
previous window without saving.
1 Click [Parameter Download] on main

window.
2 Click [OK] on [Parameter Download]

window to start receiving backup
parameters.
NOTE
3 While receiving Parameters,

[Progress] window appears.
4.3.8 Receiving Backup Parameters 202

4.3.9 Sending Backup Parameter NOTE

This section describes the procedure to send backup parameters by using Technician mode. After clicking [OK], if any communication errors occur such as wrong IP address or
unplugged LAN cable, an error message appears. If any setting errors occur such as
inappropriate model name selection, serial number registration is not finished or
NOTE incorrect one is registered, an warning message appears.
Before this procedure, make sure to prepare the following: In both cases, communication with printer shall be interrupted.
• Set up the printer, computer and MSA. Click [OK] to return to main window.
4 When parameter sending is in
process, [Progress] window appears.
*Click [Cancel] to return to the main
window without saving.
1 Click [Parameter Upload (prm)] on
main window.
2 The [Selection of parameter file to be 5 Click [OK] on [Parameter upload].

uploaded] window appears.
Select and click appropriate

parameter file and click [Open] to
send.
* Any extension except *.prm is

invalid.
**Click [Cancel] to stop sending and

return to the main window.
NOTE
If clicking [Open] to select any file not saved in *.prm extension file, an error message
appears and return tothe main window.
3 Click [OK] on “Parameter upload“.
4.3.9 Sending Backup Parameter 203

4.3.10 Board Replacement Wizard 5 Confirm the printer model for board
This section describes Board replacement wizard which support replacing MAIN board Assy. replacement ① . 1
Then click ［OK］② .
NOTE
2
• About mounting alternative MAIN board, refer to "3.5.10Replacing MAIN Board
• When completing Board replacement wizard normally, Printer Identification DATA
is saved automatically at the end of the wizard.Make sure to upload saved mpi file 6 After displaying Board replacement wizard window, work by messages.
to MB-web server, then update the Printer Identification DATA.
If you fail to update, printer user does not receive services such as Smart/C.
NOTE
• Install the latest firmware using the latest MSA.
Work contents are different by the conditions of malfunction board and alternative
board. "(1)Flow Chart of Board Replacement Wizard
1 Start up the printer in board manager mode.
"(6-b)Board Manager Mode
2 Connect PC to the printer.
"(8)Computer IP Address Setting
Title
NOTE Display operating index
sequentially.
When using Board replacement wizard, set the Ip address of PC to [192.168.1.1] and
set the IP address of printer to[192.168.1.253].
3 Start up the MSA in Technician mode.

4 Select the［Board Replacement Wizard].
NOTE The message and the button

according to present work
• Before selecting [Board replacing are displayed one by one.
wizard], it is necessary that the printer
model for board replacement is selected
in MSA.
After Establishing the communication with faulty board,displaying the information of the board.
• After confirming the printer model for
board replacement is correct on [Printer
model] of [Option] of [Setup], selected
[Board replacement wizard]. 7 After finishing the wizard, doing various adjustment works to complete the replacing
• On the same window, confirm that [LAN MAIN board Assy.
setting ] is set to [192.168.1.253]. "(2)List of adjustment operations after replacing the board for each board replacement
• Confirm that the printer is running in pattern
board manager mode.
4.3.10 Board Replacement Wizard 204

(1) Flow Chart of Board Replacement Wizard

［Board Replacement wizard］is selected
IS MSA communicate
NO
with faulty board?
YES
Wizard Window A
Saving (*prm)
Replacing MAIN board Replacing MAIN board
YES YES
Is F/W installed ？ Is F/W installed ？
Wizard Window B
NO NO
Does F/W update NO Does F/W update

NO
or reinstall? or reinstall?
YES YES
Installing MAIN F/W Installing MAIN F/W Installing MAIN F/W Installing MAIN F/W Wizard Window C
Is Backup NO Is Backup
NO
DATA (*prm) saved ? DATA (*prm) saved ?
YES YES Wizard Window D
Sending (*prm) Sending (*prm) Sending (*prm) Sending (*prm)
Serial Number reregistration Serial Number reregistration

Wizard Window E
Aquiring（*mpi) Aquiring（*mpi) Aquiring（*mpi) Aquiring（*mpi) Aquiring（*mpi) Aquiring（*mpi)
Wizard Window F
Wizard End Wizard End Wizard End Wizard End Wizard End
Board Replacement
Pattern
① ② ③ ④ ⑤ ⑥
"(2)List of adjustment operations after replacing the board for each board replacement pattern

(2) List of adjustment operations after replacing the board for each board replacement pattern
Board replacement pattern
sequen Adjustment Items Refer to ① ② ③ ④ ⑤ ⑥

ce
1 Requiring Printer Identification DATA (mpi file） "4.3.12Acquiring Printer Identification Data －－ ● ● ● ●
2 Resending Authorization code (ulk file） "4.3.13Sending Authorization code －－ ● ● ● ●
3 Updating (*mpi) on the MB-web Printer Activation guide ● ● ● ● ● ●
4 Resetting Smart/C Printer Activation guide －－ ● ● ● ●
5 Inputting Head rank "(2)Head Rank －－－ ● － ●
6 Adjusting Paper edge sensor "5.6.1Rear/ Edge Sensor Adjustment ● ● ● ● ● ●
7 Adjusting Paper Rear Sensor "5.6.1Rear/ Edge Sensor Adjustment ● ● ● ● ● ●
8 Setting Ink-NOT Filled Flag "(5)Charge Flg －－－ ● － ●
9 Confirming Head nozzles "5.6.2Head Nozzle Check Menu ● ● ● ● ● ●
10 Adjusting Uni-D/Bi-D "5.6.5Uni-D/ Bi-D Adjustment Menu －－－ ● － ●
11 Adjusting Top & Side "5.6.7Margin adjustment Menu －－－ ● － ●
12 Test Printing "5.8Sample printing Menu ● ● ● ● ● ●
● : Need to work　／　－ : Need not work

(3) Wizard window （according to Flow chart)
(3-a)Wizard Window A
Board replacement pattern Board replacement window （Title） work contents NOTE
① ② ③ ④ ⑤ ⑥
● ● ● ● ● ● Click 1H[W . -
Introduction
It diagnose whether it can communicate with faulty board. -

Diagnosis of the faulty board After settings, click 1H[W .
- Do not turn off the printer.

Diagnosing the faulty board
● ● - - - - Is MSA communicate with faulty board? → When YES:

Click 䣉䣧䣶䢢䣲䣴䣯 , After acquring, click 1H[W . -
A Data back up of the faulty board
After completing Back up, proceed to "(3-b)Wizard window B. Do not turn off the printer.
Making the faulty board data back up
- - ● ● ● ● IS MSA communicate with faulty board? → When NO:

Click 䎵䏈䏗䏕䏜 when reconfirming the communication with the faulty Display Yellow window.
Diagnosis of the faulty board
board.
Click 1H[W when not performing the above work.
Proceed to "(3-b)Wizard window B

(3-b)Wizard window B
① ② ③ ④ ⑤ ⑥
● ● ● ● ● ● Replace MAIN board. Do not turn off the PC.
Attachment and diagnosis of the alteranative board
After replacing, Click 1H[W .
Diagnoses whether main F/W is installed. Do not turn off the printer.
Diagnosing the alternative board
B - ● - - ● ● Is F/W installed? → If YES:

When reinstalling or updating main F/W, click 䎵䏈䎐䏌䏑䏖䏗䏄䏏䏏 . Display Green window.
Proceed to "(3-c)Wizard window C.
Click 䎶䏎䏌䏓 when not performing the above work.

Proceed to "(3-d)Wizard windowD.
● - ● ● - - Is F/W installed? → If NO:

Proceed to "(3-c)Wizard window C.
(3-c)Wizard window C
① ② ③ ④ ⑤ ⑥
● ● ● ● ● ● After Clicking 5HIHU to select main F/W, clicking 1H[W to When main F/W is not installed,
Installation of main F/W
start installing. clicking 1H[W without selecting
C main F/W. Proceed to "(3-
d)Wizard windowD
②⑤⑥ are only
After completing, proceed to "(3-d)Wizard windowD. Do not turn off the printer.
䎵䏈䎐䏌䏑䏖䏗䏄䏏䏏 is selected. Installing the main F/W

(3-d)Wizard windowD
① ② ③ ④ ⑤ ⑥
● ● - - - - Click 1H[W to send ”.prm”. -
Sending of the back up data
D - - ● ● ● ● When there is ".prm" data saved before, click 4GUVQTG to send it. When 䎶䏎䏌䏓 is clicked, the
When there is no ".prm" data saved, click 䎶䏎䏌䏓 . ".prm" data is not sent.
"(3-e)Wizard window E
● ● ● - ● - After sending the ".prm" data, proceed to "(3-f)Wizard window F Do not turn off the printer.
(3-e)Wizard window E
① ② ③ ④ ⑤ ⑥
- - - - ● ● Click 1H[W to register the serial number. Register the same serial number
E R-registration of the serial number as the faulty board.
After registering the "serial number", proceed to "(3-f)Wizard window F. Do not turn off the printer.
Registering the serial number
(3-f)Wizard window F
① ② ③ ④ ⑤ ⑥
● ● ● ● ● ● After the wizard ends, click 䣉䣧䣶䢢䣲䣴䣯 to acquire the ".mpi" data. -
F Termination
After acquiring the ".mpi" data, perform various adjustments.
"(2)List of adjustment operations after replacing the board for each
board replacement pattern

4.3.11 Diagnostic Mode

This section describes the procedure to use diagnostic mode on Technician mode.
Each function can be monitored on each window and those windows can be
displayed at the same time.
NOTE
1 Click [Diagnostic Mode] on main

window.
2 Click appropriate function to monitor.

window.
3 Click "Maintenance Information Save" to

save maintenance information.
"(5)Saving the maintenance
information EOLQNLQJ㸸1RUPDO
6KRZLQJ6WDWXV EOLQNLQJ㸸&URVVHG
EOLQNLQJ㸸$EQRUPDO
NOTE
The monitoring information is acquired every time seconds from the printer through
the「Remort Panel」.When a communication error has occurred, the
communication status changes to red, and an error message [Communication error]
is displayed.
4.3.11 Diagnostic Mode 210

(1) Ink System Monitoring

Click [Ink system monitor] on [Remote panel] to indicate the condition of connected printer ink
system.

No. Part name

1 Ink color indication
2 Sub tank condition
3 2-way valve condition
4 Condition of cartridge
Green: Cartridge exists
Red : No Cartridges
5 Display the existence of Smart chip card.
Green: Normal
Red : Ink near End
6 Head Temperature (C = Celsius, F = Fahrenheit)
7 Cancel monitoring
NOTE
Grayed out when some sensors are malfunctioning and their monitoring information
is invalid.
Also grayed out when the function does not apply to the model.

(2) Smart chip monitoring

No. content
Click [Smart chip monitoring] on [Remote panel] window to indicate the condition of the
1 Error status No errors
connected printer cartridge.
Recoverable error (the target item is displayed in yellow)
1 2 Non-recoverable error (the error number is displayed)
Not supported

Cartridge is not inserted

Format Check OK: Normal、NG: Abnormal
Format -
Color Indicating inserted cartridge color
（When the cleaning cartridge inserted, the display is gray.)
Cartridge type -
Ink kind -
Ink Kind Ex -
3 4 Capacity(ml) -
Consume (ml) -
Company code -
Serial No -
Insert count -
Empty Flag Display “On” or “Off”.
2 Displaying no message when the cartridges are not installed.
3 Indicating an ink cartridge of wrong color is inserted in the cartridge slot.
4 Cancel monitoring.
NOTE
• Grayed out when some sensors are malfunctioning and their monitoring
information is invalid.
Also grayed out when the function does not apply to the model.
• When the monitoring information is invalid due to smart chip read error, etc, [NG]
is displayed in [Format Check], and [ - ]is displayed in other items.

(3) Head Temperature Transition Monitoring

Head temperature transition of the connected printer can be monitored.
[Head temperature transition] graphs vary depending on the number of the print heads.
No. Part name

1 Displays the head temperature at every 3 seconds for 5
minutes.
2 Displays the current head temperature (C).
3 Stops monitoring.

(4) Head Temperature Transition Logging (4-a)Logging setting

Head temperature transition of the connected printer can be monitored. Select Logging setting menu to open the Logging setting window.
[Head temperature transition] graphs vary depending on the number of the print heads.
2
1 1
3
2
4 5 6 3
No. Part name 4

1 Logging details are displayed.
Measuring counter
Starting date No. Part name
Time
1 Set up the destination folder to save logging data.
Interval
2 Enter the time for logging.
2 Make settings for logging.
3 Enter the interval of logging.
3 Displays the transition of head temperatures.
4 Save the setting.
4 Start logging.
5 Stop logging.
㨀㧵㧼
6 Stop logging, and close the logging window.
Logging data is sorted by head and saved in plain text format.

(4-b)Logging method 6 Measuring counter starts counting up.

First, set the conditions in the Logging setting menu.
"(4-a)Logging setting 㨀㧵㧼
The logging data is saved in the designated folder every time it is logged in. Even
1 Check the time and interval.
when logging is interrupted by clicking the [Finish] or [Cancel] button, the logging
2 Press the Start button. data up to that point is saved.
1
7 When more than the set time has passed, a message box is displayed to confirm the end
of logging.
㨀㧵㧼 8 Click OK to go back to the Head temperature transition logging window and confirm the
logging data in the save folder.
If the logging data save folder is not set before pressing Start button, an error
message is displayed.
㨀㧵㧼
3 The message box is displayed to confirm the start of logging. The saved file name for the logging data is “Head_*_Tmp_Log.txt” (* is the head
Click [OK]. number).
4 Logging starts.
2 1
5 Logging starts date is registered.

(5) Saving the maintenance information

5 After saving the data, the "Save
maintenance information" message
1 Make sure that monitoring is done
box is displayed.
normally.
Click [OK] to return to the "Remote
2 Click [Maintenance Info. Save]. panel" window.
3 Click [OK] to start acquiring the

maintenance information.
* Click [Cancel] to return to the

"Remote panel" window.
NOTE
Monitoring is stopped temporarily while the maintenance information is saved.
4 After acquiring the information, the

"Name and save" window is
displayed.
The serial number of the printer and

the date are set as default, but you
can change it.
Specify the location to save the

data and click [Save].
Click [Cancel] to return to the main

window.
㨀㧵㧼
The extension is ".mnt".

4.3.12 Acquiring Printer Identification Data 4 When data acquisition completes,

This section describe the procedure to acquire printer identification data. [Individual code download] window
Printer identification data file shall be used to issue authorization code file by MUTOH appears.
INDUSTRIES dealer.
*Click [OK] to appear 「Save the
individual code」window
NOTE
Before this procedure, make sure to prepare the following: 5 On [Save the individual code] window,
select where to save and enter name
and click [Save] to save printer
identification data file .
*Saved file extension is *.ink.
"(12)Switching to Technician Mode **Click [Cancel] to return to the main
window without saving.
1 Click [Individual Code Download] on

main window.
NOTE
2 Click [OK] on [Individual code download]
to start. Saved printer identification information file shall be used to issue authorization code
file.
*Click [Cancel] to return to main window MUTOH will issue the authentication code file depending on the printer identification
without acquiring printer identification information file.
data.
NOTE
unplugged LAN cable, an error message appears. If any setting errors occur such as
inappropriate model name selection, serial number registration is not finished or
3 When printer identification data

acquisition is in process, [Progress
dialog] window appears.
4.3.12 Acquiring Printer Identification Data 217

4.3.13 Sending Authorization code

3 Click [OK] on [Authorization code
This section describes the procedure to send authorization code file from computer to printer upload] to start sending authorization
by using Technician mode. Authorization code file will be issued based on the printer code file.
identification information file sent to MUTOH via email.
window without sending.
NOTE
Before this operation, prepare the following:
• Before sending authorization code, save authorization code file (*.ulk) from NOTE
MUTOH INDUSTRIES dealer in any folder. After clicking [OK], if any communication errors occur such as wrong IP address
• Set up the printer, computer and MSA. or unplugged LAN cable, an error message appears. If any setting errors occur
"4.3.3Required Environment such as inappropriate model name selection, serial number registration is not
• Start the printer on Board manager mode. finished or incorrect one is registered, an warning message appears.
"(6)Starting the printer In both cases, communication with printer shall be interrupted.
• Change to Technician mode on MSA. Click [OK] to return to main window.
4 When authorization code file sending is

1 Click [Authorization Code Upload] on in process, a progress dialog appears.
main window.
2 Select and click authorization code file

from saved folder and click [Open] . NOTE
*Click [Cancel] to return to the main • When an error occurs while transmitting the
window. authentification code, an error message is
displayed. Click the [OK] button of the error
message to return to the main window.
• When the printer supports activation and is
locked, the 「Activation」window is
displayed. It is also possible to execute
activation.
NOTE
When inappropriate file is selected clicked to open, error message appears and
return to the main window. 5 When sending completes, [Authorization
code upload] window appears. Click [OK]
to return to the main window.
4.3.13 Sending Authorization code 218

4.3.14 Referring Set Up Information 3 Setup information is displayed under a

This section describes the procedure to refer printer set up information using Technician setup information acquisition tab page
mode. after the completion of acquisition of setup
information from a backup parameter.
Since a "Set up list download" window is
NOTE displayed after that, click [OK] and it
Before this procedure, make sure to prepare the following: checks the listed setup information.
"4.3.3Required Environment 4 Acquired set up information shall be
indicated under the tab named [Set up
information].
• Change to Technician mode on MSA. To save the file as plain text, click .
*Set up information is same detail with the
one acquired in [Print setup parameters].
(1) Acquiring Setup Information from Backup Parameter (*.prn) to Reference
1 Click on “Set up List”.
NOTE
Backup parameter file shown on the window shall be saved whether tab is switched
over to others. When another parameter file is acquired or saved parameter file is
open, the detail shall be renewed.
2 On [Select backup parameter file] window, 　
click to select backup parameter file ① ,

1
then click [Open] ② .

window.
NOTE
If you select an inappropriate file (such as a file which has as extension other than
*.prn, etc and click [Open]. an error message is displayed and the display returns
to the main window.
4.3.14 Referring Set Up Information 219

(2) Acquiring Setup Information from Printer to Reference

5 Acquired set up information shall be
indicated under the tab named [Set up
1 On [Setup List], click . information].
To save the file as plain text, click .
*Set up information is same detail with the

one acquired in [Print setup parameters].
2 Click [OK] on [Setup list download] to start.

window without acquiring set up
information. NOTE
• The serial number of a printer, a model name, the version of various F/W and
at the time of the date of acquisition of setup information are displayed.
• The information acquired by "Setup List" is displayed on a "Setup info." tab
NOTE page.
• Only "Media Setup" currently displayed on the "Setup info." tab page is listed by
After clicking [OK], if any communication errors occur such as wrong IP address
the "Media Setup" tab page.
or unplugged LAN cable, an error message appears. If any setting errors occur
such as inappropriate model name selection, serial number registration is not • Backup parameter file shown on the window shall be saved whether tab is
finished or incorrect one is registered, an warning message appears. switched over to others. When another parameter file is acquired or saved
parameter file is open, the detail shall be renewed.
3 When set up information acquisition is in

process, a progress dialog appears.
4 Setup information is displayed under a

setup information acquisition tab page after
the completion of acquisition of setup
information from a printer. Since a "Set up
list download" window is displayed after
that, click [OK] and it checks the listed
setup information.
4.3.14 Referring Set Up Information 220

4.3.15 Reffering Adjustment Parameter

3 Adjustment parameter is displayed
under a Adjust parameter tab page after
NOTE the completion of acquisition of
Adjustment parameter from a Backup
Before this procedure, make sure to prepare the following: parameter. Since a "Adjustment
• Set up the printer, computer and MSA. parameter download" window is
"4.3.3Required Environment displayed after that, click [OK] and it
• Start the printer on Board manager mode. checks the listed setup information.
• Change to Technician mode on MSA. 4 Acquired adjustment parameter shall
be indicated under the tab named
[Adjust parameter].

(1) Acquiring Adjustment Parameter from Backup parameter (*prm) to
*Set up information is same detail with
reference the one acquired in [Print setup
parameters].
1 Click on [Adjust Parameters]. "5.8Sample printing Menu
NOTE
• The serial number of Printer, model name and FilePath are displayed.
• At the time of acquisition date and various F/W version are not displayed.
2 Click to select backup parameter file
on [Select backup parameter file] • Adjustment parameter file shown on the window shall be saved whether tab is
window ① , then click [Open] ② . 1 switched over to others. When another parameter file is acquired or saved
parameter file is open, the detail shall be renewed.
window.
NOTE
When inappropriate file (such as file extension is different from *.prn) is selected clicked to
open, error message appears and return to the main window.
4.3.15 Reffering Adjustment Parameter 221

(2) Acquiring Adjustment parameter from printer to reference

5 Acquired set up information shall be
indicated under the tab named [Adjust
1 Click on [Adjust Parameter].
parameter].
*Set up information is same detail with

the one acquired in [Print setup
2 Click [OK] on [Adjustment parameters parameters].
download] to start. "5.8Sample printing Menu
*Click [Cancel] to return to main window

without adjustment parameter
acquisition.
㨀㧵㧼
• The serial number of Printer, model name and various F/W version are
NOTE displayed.
After clicking [OK], if any communication errors occur such as wrong IP address or • The contents based on an adjustment parameter are displayed.
unplugged LAN cable, an error message appears. If any setting errors occur such • Adjustment parameter file shown on the window shall be saved whether tab is
as inappropriate model name selection, serial number registration is not finished or switched over to others. When another parameter file is acquired or saved
incorrect one is registered, an warning message appears. parameter file is open, the detail shall be renewed.
3 When adjustment parameter

acquisition is in progress, a progress
dialog appears.
4 Adjustment parameter is displayed

under a Adjust parameter tab page after
the completion of acquisition of
Adjustment parameter from a printer.
Since a "Adjustment parameter
download" window is displayed after
that, click [OK] and it checks the listed
setup information.
4.3.15 Reffering Adjustment Parameter 222

4.3.16 Initializing activation

CAUTION
When using the printer whose activation is initialized in the "Inactivation",
NOTE
activation is required again.
Before this procedure, make sure to prepare the following: Do not use activation lock unnecessarily.
1 Click [Inactivation] on the main window.
2 The "Inactivation" message box is

displayed.
Click [OK] to transfer the PC system
time as year-month-day-time format
data to the printer.
* Click [Cancel] to return to the main

window.
NOTE
After clicking [OK], if there is some communication error such as wrong IP address
or unplugged LAN cable, an error message is displayed. If there is some setting
error such as an appropriate model is not selected, or the serial number is not
registered or wrong, a warning message is displayed. Either case, the
communication with the printer is interrupted.
Click [OK] on each window to return to the main window.
3 After initializing, the "Inactivation"

message box is displayed.
Click [OK] to return to the main window.
4.3.16 Initializing activation 223

4.3.17 Version Information

This section describes the procedure to confirm version information of this application.
1 Click to select [Help] - [Version (V)] on the

main window.
2 Confirm information on [Version

information] window, then click [OK] to
return to main window.
4.3.17 Version Information 224

4.3.18 Switch to Board Manager Mode

This chapter describes how to switch to Board Manager Mode from Printer Mode.
1 Click [Board Manager Mode] from the

MSA main menu.
2 The "Progress Dialog" will appear.
NOTE
If the printer is not in Printer Mode, the
message box will appear and the
switching process is stopped.
3 If the printer is in Printer Mode, the

message shown at right will appear. Click
[OK] to start to switch to Board Manager
Mode.
4 The "Progress Dialog" will appear.
NOTE
If any error occurs while switching to
Board Manager Mode, the error
message will appear.
Click [OK] to go back to the main
menu.
5 When the switching has successfully

completed, the message shown at right
will appear.Click [OK] to go back to the
main menu.
4.3.18 Switch to Board Manager Mode 225

4.3.19 Maintenance Panel

4 When the printer is successfully switched to
This chapter describes how to operate the Maintenance Panel. the mode you selected, the complete
message will appear as shown at right.Click
(1) How to start the Maintenance Panel [OK] to go back to the Maintenance Panel.
NOTE
㨀㧵㧼
Check that the printer is in Board Manager Mode.
When selecting Maintenance Mode 2,
the complete message for Maintenance
Mode 2 will appear.
1 Click [Maintenance Panel].
2 The Maintenance Panel will appear.

CAUTION
The LCD display on the Maintenance
Panel is updated.Then, the
Maintenance Panel becomes available.
3 Click [Boot Mode] and choose either [Self-

Diagnosis Mode] or [Maintenance Mode 2].
Then, choose language.
CAUTION
• The Maintenance Panel is not available
until the PC is properly connected to the
printer after the mode selection.
• The selected language is reflected in
the Maintenance Panel until the printer
is powered off. The initial language
setting is reflected in the printer.
4.3.19 Maintenance Panel 226

(2) Maintenance Panel Display and Operation
Choose Self-Diagnosis Mode/ Exit the Maintenance Panel

Maintenance Mode 2 and
choose language.
Display the Help Window
Display the communication
status with the printer.
Recv:Printer information
receiving status The button operation can be
Send:Button input sending changed by clicking:
status
Short Long
Recv/Send: 10cnt
(press) (press)
Green Light:
Communication Success
Red Light:
Long (press)：Press the button
Communication Failed
for 2 seconds.
10 cnt：
Send a short-press button
Clicking button to operate the
input 10 times to the printer.
Maintenance Panel.
Right-clicking stops the operation.
The Stop button is implemented

only for the Maintenance Panel to
stop the operation of Long (press)
and 10cnt .
The keyboard operation is also available as below:
HOME／Space key
ESC key
↑key →key
←key ↓key
Backspace／Delete key Enter key
Long (press):Press [Shift] key and keyboard key.

10cnt:Press [Ctrl] key and keyboard key.
4.3.19 Maintenance Panel 227

4.3.20 Terminating Application

This section describes the procedure to terminate this application.
1 Click [Exit] on the main window or Click [×]

on the right top corner of the window to
terminate this application.
*Detail in [Setup] - [Option] shall be saved

and shall be effected when the application
starts next time.
㨀㧵㧼
• Only when [Exit] is clicked, [Exit]

message box appeared.
• When MSA starts next time, user mode shall be on. To switch the mode to
Technician mode, proceed log in operation again.
4.3.20 Terminating Application 228

4.4 X Speed Reduction Belt Tension Adjustment VJ628XE-M-00
4.4 X Speed Reduction Belt Tension Adjustment 4 To adjust X speed Reduction Belt, refer to the
This section describes the procedure to adjust X reduction belt. following procedure.
After replacing X reduction belt such as PF motor removal, adjust X speed reduction belt
• Hook Tension Gauge on PF Motor
tension.
mounting Plate.
（See the figure below.）
4.4.1 Adjustment Procedure • Pull Tension Gauge
horizontally.Fully tighten the
　 ● Tools & Jigs screws(4 pieces) which were lightly
tighten in the step 10 at 34.3N±3.4N
Name Remark
（3500 ｇ ±350 ｇ） indicated on the
Phillips screwdriver No.2 generic product scale.
Tension gauge generic product NOTE

for measuring Max 40N (4,080gf)
Do NOT hook Tension Gauge directly on
PF Motor. Doing so may damage PF
Motor Assy.
1 Remove Side maintenance cover L.
"3.2.2Removing Side Cover
2 Loosen the screws (4pieces) retaining PF 5 From this point on, reverse the removal
Motor Mounting Plate. procedure.
B
A : X speed reduction belt
B : Pan head screw with spring washer and C
flat washer M4ｘ8
C : PF Motor mounting plate
B A
3 Make sure that X Speed Reduction Belt, refer

to the following procedure. OK NG
4.4.1 Adjustment Procedure 229

4.5 PF Encoder Position Adjustment VJ628XE-M-00
4.5 PF Encoder Position Adjustment 4 Turn the PF encoder scale around once to
check that the scale does not swing toward the
This section describes the procedure to adjust the PF Encoder.
speed reduction pulley from the center of the
After replacing PF encoder, adjust PF Encoder position. encoder gap. If it swings, adjust the PF
encoder position again.
4.5.1 Adjustment Procedure
NOTE
　 ● Tools & Jigs
There is no problem even if the scale hits
Name Remarks
the slit guide when turned around.
Phillips screwdriver No.2 Generic products
1 Remove L Side Cover. 5 To reassemble unit, reverse the removal

procedure.
2 Loosen the screws retaining PF encoder.
A : Pan head screw with spring washer and

flat washer M4ｘ8
B : PF Encoder A
NOTE
B
Align so that the PF encoder scale is
placed in the gap of the PF encoder Assy,
and then tighten the screw.
3 Align so that the PF encoder scale is placed in

the gap of the PF encoder.
PF Encoder
Scale
Slit Guide Speed Reduction

Pulley side
PF Encoder
4.5.1 Adjustment Procedure 230

4.6 CR Belt Tension Adjustment VJ628XE-M-00
4.6 CR Belt Tension Adjustment 3 After adjustment, apply threadlockert to the

This section describes the procedure to adjust the tension of the CR belt. screw head of the CR tension mounting shaft
When you have removed and installed the CR belt, adjust the CR belt tension. not to loosen it.
A : Round head screw M4ｘ30

4.6.1 Adjustment procedure B : applying point A
B
Name Remarks
Phillips screwdriver No.2 Generic Products
Thread locker Three bond1401 4 To reassemble unit, reverse the removal
procedure.
1 Remove L Side Cover.

2 Tighten the CR tension mounting shaft, and

align the left side (viewed from the front of the
printer) of the graduation alignment pointer
with the center line of graduations on the
driven pulley base.
A : CR tension adjustment screw C

B : Graduation A
B
C : Graduation alignment pointer
NOTE
Alignment pointer
To align the graduation alignment pointer
with the center line of driven pulley base,
align the left side (viewed from the front of
the printer) of the pointer with the center
line as shown below.
Alignment pointer
Align them like this
Printer main body side
4.6.1 Adjustment procedure 231

4.7 Head Adjustment VJ628XE-M-00
4.7 Head Adjustment 1 Remove R Side Cover.

4.7.1 Head Alignment (Horizontal Slant)
2 Release Carriage lock.
This section describes the procedure to adjust the head slant in the horizontal direction. "3.8.1Releasing Carriage Lock
When you have removed and installed the print head, such as for print head replacement,
always adjust the head slant following the steps below. 3 Remove Carriage cover.
"3.8.2Removing Carriage Cover
Name Remark
Phillips screwdriver No.2 generic product
hex wrench generic product
（2.5mm） For screws retaining Head base, with shaft length of 150mm
or longer and not L-shaped
Loupe generic product
For confirming Adjust pattern
Penlight generic product
For confirming Adjust pattern
NOTE
• Using the adjustment pattern when setting 8 colors.
• Adjustment procedure is the same as 4 color setting, 6 color setting and 8 color
setting.
• Adjust the horizontal height of the head alignment before adjusting the vertical
alignment slant of head alignment.
• In this procedure, the print head will be aligned in the directions (horizontal slant)
shown below.
• Designation of the head nozzles are as follows.
㸿㹁㹂㹄
㹀㹃㹅㹆
4.7.1 Head Alignment (Horizontal Slant) 232

4 Start the printer in the self-diagnosis function mode and print the check patterns in "Head Slant: Slant 1." "5.6.4Head Slant Check Menu
Using the adjustment pattern when setting 8 colors.
Print the Adjustment pattern

Origin side
According to the width of media,
following adjustment pattern is printed on three
places or less.
Paper feed direction

㹁㹦㹣㹡㹩ࠉ㸱㸸㸿㹢㹨㹳㹱㹲㹫㹣㹬㹲
[Enter]
㸿㹢㹨㸬ࠉ㸲㸸㹆㹣㹟㹢㹑㹪㹟㹬㹲 for checking Vertical slant for checking Horizontal slant
[Enter]
㹆㹣㹟㹢㹑㹪㹟㹬㹲㸸㹑㹪㹟㹬㹲㸯 20mm
[Enter]
㸿㹢㹨㹳㹱㹲㹫㹣㹬㹲ࠉ㹎㹰㹧㹬㹲
after printing
Check the Slant 1 (Horizontal) at Connecting points㸦Refer to the following and an enlargement.㸧
Check Head slant1 (Horizontal)
1 passࠉUni-D/Bi-D
PF:360dpiࠉCR:360dpi
for checking horizontal slant:
ࠉIn combination with A/C, A/E, A/G, B/D, B/F and B/H print the
pattern. (CW printing)
ࠉ320cps,VSD1,Small dot
Nozzle BࠉࠉHࠉࠉBࠉࠉBࠉࠉFࠉࠉBࠉࠉBࠉࠉDࠉࠉBࠉࠉAࠉࠉGࠉࠉAࠉࠉAࠉࠉEࠉࠉAࠉࠉAࠉࠉCࠉࠉA
connecting point enlargement : nozzle A and C

(1)Check the position of Black and each color
In ͆good͇, No need for adjustments.
In ͆poor͇, it adjust respectively and be set to
͆good͇.
Refer to the ͆Step 5͇or later.
(2) Repeat printing and adjustment until a result good poor poor
becomes ͆good͇.

5 Loosen the screws (4 pieces) retaining Head 8 Print check pattern again to check head slant
base. (horizontal height) is appropriate.
step 5
9 When head slant is not correct, repeat step 5
B : Head base to step 9.
A
C : Head mounting plate
A
C
procedure.
6 Shift Notch to adjust the head.
NOTE
• 1 notch is counted as it clicks. The print position moves upward/downward by

half a dot per 1 notch.
A nozzle (Black) lines will be
shifted upward.
A nozzle (Black) lines will be

shifted downward.
7 Tighten the loosened screws (4 pieces) in step

6.

4.7.2 Head Alignment (Vertical Slant)

3 Remove Carriage cover.
This section describes the procedure to adjust the head slant (Vertical Slant). "3.8.2Removing Carriage Cover
After operation such as head replacement, you might need to adjust the head slant. When
needed, adjust the head slant following the steps below. After an operation such as head
replacement, adjust the head slant following the steps below.
Name Maintenance Part Remarks

No.
Phillips screwdriver No.2 Generic products -
Hex Wrench Generic products -
(2.5mm)
Loupe Generic products -
dedicated media - MUTOH recommended media
Penlight Generic products for check the adjustment pattern
NOTE
• Using the adjustment pattern when

setting 8 colors.
• Adjustment procedure is the same as 4
color setting and 5 color setting.
• Adjust the horizontal height of the head
alignment before adjusting the vertical
alignment slant of head alignment.
"5.6.4Head Slant Check Menu
• In this procedure, the print head will be
aligned in the directions (vertical slant)
shown below.

2 Release Carriage lock.

"3.8.1Releasing Carriage Lock
4.7.2 Head Alignment (Vertical Slant) 235

4 Start the printer in the self-diagnosis function mode and print the check patterns in "Head Slant: Slant 1." "5.6.4Head Slant Check Menu
㨀㧵㧼
Adjustment patterns of Head alignment (horizontal height) and (vertical) are printed when printing the adjustment pattern of "Head Slant: Slant1".
Printing direction
Print Adjustment pattern According to the width of media, Origin side

following adjustment pattern is printed on three
㹁㹦㹣㹡㹩ࠉ㸲㸸㸿㹢㹨㹳㹱㹲㹫㹣㹬㹲 places or less.
[Enter]
for checking Vertical slant for checking Horizontal slant
㸿㹢㹨㸬ࠉ㸲㸸㹆㹣㹟㹢㹑㹪㹟㹬㹲
[Enter]
㹆㹣㹟㹢㹑㹪㹟㹬㹲㸸㹑㹪㹟㹬㹲 20mm
[Enter]
DIWHUSULQWLQJ
Check the Slant 2 (Vertical) at Connecting points㸦Refer to the following and an enlargement.㸧
Check Head Slant 2 (Vertical)
TIP
1 passࠉUni-D/Bi-D
for checking horizontal slant:
ࠉNozzle A,C,E and G print the pattern. (CW/CCW printing)
Nozzle
Connecting point (Enlargement)㸸Ex. Black

(1) Check wheter Connecting state of state of state of
Vertical Slant good Vertical Slant poor Vertical Slant poor
points are one row.
In ͆JRRG͇, No need for adjustments. The connecting points The lines of CW The lines of CW
In “SRRU͇, it adjusts, respectively and of CW printing and printing and CCW printing and CCW
be set to “JRRG”. CCW printing are printing are not straight. printing are not straight.
Refer to the following page for printed vertically in
the adjustment method. CCW CW a straight line. CCW CW CCW CW

(1) Adjustment Procedure
5 Loosen the screws (2 pieces) retaining Head

Base Mounting Plate.
A : Hexagon socket head cap screw with

spring washer and flat washer
M3ｘ8　Ni-3
B : Head Base Mounting Plate
A
B
6 After adjusting Head Base Mounting Plate,

tighten the screws (2 pieces).
A : Hexagon socket head cap screw with

spring washer and flat washer
M3ｘ8　Ni-3
B : Head Base Mounting Plate
A
B
7 Print the confirmation pattern again to check if

Head slant (vertical) is appropriately adjusted.
"5.6.4Head Slant Check Menu
8 If Head slant is still not adjusted, repeat

printing and adjusting.

procedure.

4.8 Head Height Adjustment VJ628XE-M-00
4.8 Head Height Adjustment 5 Reverse the direction of the jig and adjust the
This section describes the procedure to check Carriage height (distance from the platen). opposite side of the head with the same
procedure.
4.8.1 Adjustment Procedures 6 When Print head does not go through 1.1mm
Heightens Heightens
step or go through 1.3mm, loosen the screws
　 ● Tools & Jigs & Maintenance Parts
(1 piece each on the right and left sides) that
Name No. Remarks retain the head adjustment cam located on the
right and left sides of the carriage, and adjust
Phillips screwdriver No.2 Generic - the head height.
product
• Move the cam upward: Heighten the head Lowers Lowers
PG Adjusting Jig (1.1/1.3) DG-43193 -
height.
• Move the cam downward : Heighten the
head height.
NOTE
2 Release Carriage lock. The heights of right and left cams are
"3.8.1Releasing Carriage Lock separately changed.After changing the
height, refer to the steps 4to 6 and make
3 Place the Head height adjustment Jig on sure to use Head height adjustment Jig to
Platen. check that the heights of the right and left
cams are appropriate. Head adjustment cam
4 Check that Carriage can pass through a gap
above the 1.1mm part of the Head height
checking Jig and cannot pass through a gap
above the 1.3mm part.
7 Apply the Thread locker on the Head
adjustment cam to fix the head height.

Slide Jig on Platen from the procedure.
both sides and check.
L R
Jig
2NCVGP
*GCF
Head Protector
1.4mm
Check the head height by whether
1.3mm Head Height Adjustment Jig
Print head goes through protruding
portions on both sides.
4.8.1 Adjustment Procedures 238

VJ628XE-M-00
5 Self Diagnosis Function 5.4.8 Head Waveform Menu......................................... 267
5.4.9 Time Check Menu ............................................... 268

5.1 Introduction ...................................................................241
5.5 Ink Charging Menu ....................................................... 269
5.2 Preparation ....................................................................242
5.6 Adjustment Menu ......................................................... 270
5.2.1 Preparations on Machine .....................................242
5.6.1 Rear/ Edge Sensor Adjustment ........................... 271
5.2.2 Starting Up ...........................................................243
5.6.2 Head Nozzle Check Menu................................... 273
5.3 Operations in Self-Diagnosis Mode.............................248
5.6.3 Skew Check Menu............................................... 275
5.3.1 Operating Self-Diagnosis Mode ...........................248
5.6.4 Head Slant Check Menu...................................... 276
5.3.2 Diagnosis Items in Self-Diagnosis Menu..............249
5.6.5 Uni-D/ Bi-D Adjustment Menu ............................. 290
5.3.3 Reset Waste Ink Counter .....................................250
5.6.6 Bi-D Copy ............................................................ 304
5.3.4 Error Message Display .........................................251
5.6.7 Margin adjustment Menu ..................................... 305
5.4 Test Menu.......................................................................252
5.6.8 Test Printing Menu .............................................. 306
5.4.1 Memory Size Menu ..............................................253
5.6.9 Longstore Menu .................................................. 307
5.4.2 Version Menu .......................................................254
5.6.10 Software Counter Initialization Menu................... 308
5.4.3 Operation Panel Menu .........................................255
5.6.11 Feed Pitch Check Menu ...................................... 309
5.4.4 Sensor Menu........................................................256
5.6.12 Solid Print Menu .................................................. 310
5.4.5 Encoder Menu......................................................258
5.7 Cleaning Menu ............................................................. 311
5.4.6 Fan Menu .............................................................259
5.8 Sample printing Menu .................................................. 312
5.4.7 Record Menu........................................................260
239
VJ628XE-M-00
5.9 Parameter Menu ............................................................314 5.14.1 Sensor ................................................................. 343
5.9.1 Parameter Initialization Menu...............................315 5.14.2 Check .................................................................. 344
5.9.2 Parameter Update Menu......................................317 5.15 Speed mode .................................................................. 345
5.10 Servo Setting Menu.......................................................329
5.11 Endurance Running Menu............................................330
5.11.1 CR Motor Endurance Menu .................................331
5.11.2 PF Motor Endurance Menu ..................................332
5.11.3 Cutter Menu .........................................................333
5.11.4 Pump endurance Menu........................................334
5.11.5 CPump endurance Menu .....................................335
5.11.6 Head Lock Menu ..................................................336
5.11.7 Wiper Endurance Menu .......................................337
5.11.8 Print Head Endurance (Nozzle Print) Menu .........338
5.11.9 General Endurance Menu ....................................339
5.11.10Endurance Running Check Menu .......................340
5.12 Media Feed Menu ..........................................................341
5.13 Media Initial Menu .........................................................342
5.14 Heater .............................................................................343
240
5.1 Introduction
This chapter provides information on the self-diagnosis function.
The self-diagnosis function adjusts the printing accuracy. It is used in the manufacturing
process, adjustment, and maintenance.
The self-diagnosis function is implemented in the system firmware. All functions are available
from Operation panel.
"(2) Jig panel
㨀㧵㧼
This manual is created based on firmware Ver.1.00.
241
5.2 Preparation VJ628XE-M-00
5.2 Preparation
Before you can use the self-diagnosis function, you must make the machine ready to call up
the self-diagnosis menu.
5.2.1 Preparations on Machine

Before starting up the self-diagnosis function, prepare the following.
(1) Setting Media

Set roll media for adjustment.
NOTE
For adjustment, use a MUTOH recommended media.
(2) Connecting Power Cable

Connect Power cable to the machine’s inlet Assy and insert Power plug into an outlet.
WARNING
Make sure to supply power directly from a power supply outlet (AC 100 V to 120 V
or AC 220 V to 240 V). Avoid using outlets that other appliances are plugged into.
Doing so generates heat in the printer and may cause fire.
5.2.1 Preparations on Machine 242

5.2.2 Starting Up
5 Double-click the [Shortcut to MUTOH
Service Assistance.exe], and check that the
NOTE application starts correctly.
When using the self-diagnostic function of VJ-628X, there are the following two English mode.
methods.
• Using Panel Window in MSA
(1) Usage of Maintenance Panel (MSA) 6 Automatic printer model selection is started.
• Using Jig Panel Assy (9) Confirming Startup of the "MUTOH
(2) Connecting Jig Panel Assy Service Assistance"
7 After having chosen printer model, main

(1) Usage of Maintenance Panel (MSA) window appears.
(1-a)Usage of Maintenance Panel Window
1 Turn OFF the printer.
2 Insert Connector of Network interface cable

into Network interface connector located in
8 On User mode main window, click [Help] -

3 Press Power key to ON.
Power key Multi key
[Version].
4 If data LED and error LED light up, pressing [Version information] window appears.
㨀㧵㧼
If Data LED and Error LED repeat
lighting and putting out lights by turns, it
means having started in board manager Data LED Error LED
mode.
5.2.2 Starting Up 243

9 Double-click the MUTOH logo (1) and then 13 Click [Maintenance Panel].
the MSA icon (2).
Then click [OK].

2 14 [Maintenance Panel] window will be
displayed.
1

(1-b)How to start the Maintenance Panel

11 Enter User ID and Password. 1 Click [Boot Mode] and choose either [Self-
Then click [Login].
Then, choose language.
CAUTION
• The Maintenance Panel is not
available until the PC is properly
connected to the printer after the
12 The main screen of Technician mode will be mode selection.
displayed.
• The selected language is reflected in
the Maintenance Panel until the
printer is powered off.
The initial language setting is
reflected in the printer.

(1-c)Maintenance Panel Display and Operation

2 When the printer is successfully switched to
the mode you selected, the complete
message will appear as shown at right.Click 㨀㧵㧼
[OK] to go back to the Maintenance Panel. 5.3 Operations in Self-Diagnosis Mode
Choose Seltf-Diagnosis Mode/ Exit the Maintenance Panel.

CAUTION Maintenance Mode 2 and
choose language.
• The LCD display on the Display the Help window.
Maintenance Panel is updated. Display the communication
status with the printer.
• The Maintenance Panel becomes Recv：Printer information
available after the proper connection receiving status
The button operationcan be
Send：Button input sending
status changed by clicking.
Recv/Send
Green Light： Short Long
Communication Success (press) (press) 10cnt
Red Light：
Long (press)：
Press [Shift]key and keyboard
Clicking button to operate the key
Maintenance Panel. 10cnt：
Press [Ctrl] key and keyboard
Right-clicking stops the operation. key
The [STOP] button is implemented

stop the operation of
Long (press) ant 10cnt .
The keyboard operation is also available as below.
HOME／Space key
ESC key
↑key → key
← key ↓key
Press [Shift] key and keyboard key:[Long (press)]

Press [Ctrl] key and keyboard key :[10cnt]

(2) Connecting Jig Panel Assy

7 Remove Top Cover.
NOTE
• When starting Self-diagnostic function or Maintenance mode 2, it is necessary to 8 Connect the Panel FFC to the connector J33
connect Jig Panel Assy (maintenance parts) to the MAIN Board of the printer. of MAIN Board.
(Jig panel Assy is not enclosed by the printer.)
• Prepare Jig Panel Assy and Phillips screwdriver No.2. CAUTION
(refer to the following table)
　 ● Tools & Jigs & Maintenance part • Before plugging FFC, check the J33
condition of FFC terminals (that the
Name No. Remarks corners of the terminals are not
crooked and reinforcing plate is not
Jig Panel Assy DG-44954 the followings are enclosed
peeled).
Panel FFC
Panel Unit • Plug/unplug FFC perpendicularly to
Panel Sheet the connector. Never plug/unplug it
obliquely. If plugged obliquely, it may
Phillips screwdriver No.2 Generic - damage/shorten/break terminals in
product connectors, causing a breakdown of
on-board devices.
• Make sure to plug FFC all the way in
the connector. After plugging it, make
3 When the printer is an operating state, turn
Power key Multi key
sure that FFC and the connector
the power key OFF. terminals are not misaligned
sideways and that FFC is not plugged
obliquely.
9 Connect Panel FFC to Panel Unit.

Data LED Error LED
4 Remove Power Cable.
5 Turn the power key ON.
NOTE
It is the work for making it discharge.
6 Turn the power key OFF.

(2-a)Starting Up the Self Diagnosis Mode
NOTE
• You need a jig panel (operation panel) for self diagnosis function.
• You need to display self diagnosis menu on the operation panel to use self
diagnosis functions.
The self-diagnosis menu is completely independent from the normal operation
mode or setup menu display mode. Switch to the self-diagnosis menu display
mode, following the steps below:
1 While pushing three of the[-]key to Jig panel, [+] key

and [>] the key at the same time; Push [Power] key.
Self diagnosis menu is displayed.

5.3 Operations in Self-Diagnosis Mode VJ628XE-M-00
5.3 Operations in Self-Diagnosis Mode 3 To save the modified value, press [Enter] key on
Operation panel.
This section explains how to operate in the self-diagnosis mode as well as providing the list
of available diagnosis items.
NOTE
If you press [Cancel] key, instead of [Enter] key,
5.3.1 Operating Self-Diagnosis Mode the modification is not stored.
Follow the flow shown below to operate the self-diagnosis mode.
㨀㧵㧼
For more detailed operation procedure, refer to the flow chart of the applicable
diagnosis items.
4 To quit the diagnosis, press [Cancel] key on
1 Press [<] key or [>] key on Operation panel to select Operation panel.
*The system returns to an upper hierarchy of the
the item to be diagnosed, and press [Enter] key.
diagnosis menu.
• The selected item is accepted.
• If the item has a sub menu, the sub menu is
displayed.
5 To exit the self-diagnosis menu, press [Power] key.

2 When the LCD monitor on Operation panel indicates
a setting value, the value can be modified.
Press [+] key or [-] key on Operation panel to modify
the value.
5.3.1 Operating Self-Diagnosis Mode 248

5.3.2 Diagnosis Items in Self-Diagnosis Menu >@

[Enter]
The self-diagnosis menu includes the following diagnosis items. 㹁㹦㹣㹡㹩ࠉ㸯㸸㹒㹣㹱㹲 Test Menu
[Cancel]
>!@
Diagnosis item Contents Reference 㹁㹦㹣㹡㹩ࠉ㸰㸸㹇㹬㹩㹁㹦㹟㹰㹥㹣 InkCharge Menu
Test Display the following items on Operation "5.4 Test Menu 㹁㹦㹣㹡㹩ࠉ㸱㸸㸿㹢㹨㹳㹱㹲㹫㹣㹬㹲 Adjustment Menu
panel.
Memory size 㹁㹦㹣㹡㹩ࠉ㸲㸸㹁㹪㹣㹟㹬㹧㹬㹥 Cleaning Menu
Firmware version
㹁㹦㹣㹡㹩ࠉ㸳㸸㹎㹰㹧㹬㹲 Print Menu
Panel
Sensor 㹁㹦㹣㹡㹩ࠉ㸴㸸㹎㹟㹰㹟㹫㹣㹲㹣㹰 Parameter Menu
Encoder
Fan 㹁㹦㹣㹡㹩ࠉ㸵㸸㹑㹣㹰㹴㹭 Servo Menu
History
Head waveform 㹁㹦㹣㹡㹩ࠉ㸶㸸㹃㹬㹢㹳㹰㹟㹬㹡㹣 Endurance Menu
Time Check
㹁㹦㹣㹡㹩ࠉ㸷㸸㹋㹣㹢㹧㹟㹄㹣㹣㹢 PaperFeed Menu
InkCharge Performs initial cleaning of Print head and ink "5.5 Ink Charging
charging. Menu 㹁㹦㹣㹡㹩㸯㸮㸸㹎㹟㹮㹣㹰㹇㹬㹧㹲㹧㹟㹪 PaperInitial Menu
Adjustment Head Adjustment, Sensor Position, "5.6 Adjustment

㹁㹦㹣㹡㹩㸯㸯㸸㹆㹣㹟㹲㹣㹰 Heater Menu
Sensitivity adjustment Menu
㹁㹦㹣㹡㹩㸯㸰㸸㹑㹮㹣㹣㹢㹋㹭㹢㹣 SpeedMode Menu
Cleaning Performs cleaning of Print head. "5.7 Cleaning Menu
Print Performs printing of the following items: "5.8 Sample printing

Adjustment pattern ALL Menu
Parameter ALL
Error history
S/C Log
Parameter Performs the setting and initialization of the "5.9 Parameter
adjustment parameter. Menu
Servo Performs setting for Servo motor. "5.10 Servo Setting

Menu
Endurance Performs endurance running of the printer "5.11 Endurance

mechanism. Running Menu
MediaFeed The media is fed forward and backward, and "5.12 Media Feed
then cut. Menu
MediaInitial Performs media detection setting. "5.13 Media Initial

Menu
Heater The status of the sensors related to the "5.14 Heater

heater is displayed on the panel.
SpeedMode Set the print speed for user mode. "5.15 Speed mode
5.3.2 Diagnosis Items in Self-Diagnosis Menu 249

5.3.3 Reset Waste Ink Counter

When the waste ink, generated from printing and cleaning, reaches the upper limit of the
waste ink tank, “WasteInkTank Full” will be displayed on the panel and the printer will stop
operating to prevent overflowing.
To start operating the printer, empty the tank and then press [Enter] to reset the value of
waste ink counter.
㹕㹟㹱㹲㹣㹇㹬㹩㹒㹟㹬㹩ࠉ㹄㹳㹪㹪
The messages are displayed altermately
every 2 seconds.
㹐㹣㹱㹣㹲㹁㹭㹳㹬㹲㹣㹰㸫㸼ࠉ㹃㹬㹲㹣㹰
[Enter]
Reset the value of waste ink counter and restart printer operation.
NOTE
Make sure to empty the tank before pressing [Enter].
Even if the waste ink still remains in the tank, the counter can be reset once you
press the key.
5.3.3 Reset Waste Ink Counter 250

5.3.4 Error Message Display

Following error messages will appear on the jig panel when any of such error occurs during
ink sequences (ink charging, discharging, cleaning or longstore) or pattern printing. For how
to handle the errors, see "Operation Manual" or 2.2 Troubleshooting with Error Messages
Messages Contents
Front cover is open.
㹁㹭㹴㹣㹰ࠉ㹍㹮㹣㹬
The media is not loaded.

㹊㹣㹴㹣㹰ࠉ㹓㹮
All cartridges are not inserted.

㹙㸿㹊㹊㹛㹌㹭㹁㹟㹰㹲㹰㹧㹢㹥㹣
The cartridge of ［　］is not

㹙㸯㹛㹌㹭㹁㹟㹰㹲㹰㹧㹢㹥㹣 inserted.
Ink of all cartridges has run out.

㹙㸿㹊㹊㹛㹇㹬㹩ࠉ㹃㹬㹢
Ink of [ ] has run out.

㹙㸯㹛㹇㹬㹩ࠉ㹃㹬㹢
IC chip cannot be read.

㹙㸿㹊㹊㹛ࠉ㹑㸭㹁ࠉ㹐㹣㹟㹢㹃㹰㹰
Ink cartridge is inserted into a

㹙㸿㹊㹊㹛ࠉ㹑㸭㹁ࠉ㹁㹭㹪㸬㹃㹰㹰 wrong Ink cartridge slot.
This type of ink cannot be used for

㹙㸰㹛ࠉ㹑㸭㹁ࠉ㹇㹬㹩ࠉ㹃㹰㹰 this printer.
An improper Ink cartridge is

㹙㸱㹛ࠉ㹑㸭㹁ࠉ㹁㹭㹢㹣㹃㹰㹰 inserted.
IC chip is broken.
㹙㸲㹛ࠉ㹀㹰㹭㹩㹣㹬ࠉ㹁㹦㹧㹮
A remaining amount of Smart/C

㹑㹫㹟㹰㹲㸭㹁ࠉ㹃㹫㹮㹲㹷 has run out.
5.3.4 Error Message Display 251

5.4 Test Menu VJ628XE-M-00
5.4 Test Menu Diagnosis item Contents Reference
This menu displays the following items on Operation Panel. Record Used to check the following records. Used to "5.4.7 Record
initialize the serious error record. Menu
Diagnosis item Contents Reference • Maintenance record

• Serious error record
Ram Capacity Displays the size of memories installed on the MAIN "5.4.1 Memory
• Initialize Serious error record
board. Size Menu
• Confirming Printing information
Version Displays the following items on Operation panel: "5.4.2 Version • Confirming Operating Time
Firmware version Menu
• Confirming S/C Log
Backup parameter version
Setting of dip switches of MAIN board • Initializing S/C Log
Revision of MAIN board Head Signal Used to check the head-driving waveform. "5.4.8 Head
Company code Waveform Menu
Serial No.
TimeCheck Confirming operating RTC (real time clock). "5.4.9 Time
Panel Used to check the operations of Operation panel "5.4.3 Operation Check Menu
keys, LED. Panel Menu
[Cancel]
Sensor Displays the status of the following sensors: "5.4.4 Sensor 㹁㹦㹣㹡㹩ࠉ㸯㸸㹒㹣㹱㹲
CR origin sensor Menu [Enter]
Cover sensor >@
Lever sensor [Enter]
㹒㹣㹱㹲ࠉ㸯㸸㹐㹟㹫ࠉ㹁㹮㹟㹡㹧㹲㹷 Ram Capacity menu
Media edge AD sensor [Cancel]
Media rear AD sensor >!@
Head Gap sensor 㹒㹣㹱㹲ࠉ㸰㸸㹔㹣㹰㹱㹧㹭㹬 Version menu
Head thirmistor sensor
Head Trans istor Thermistor Sensor1/2 㹒㹣㹱㹲ࠉ㸱㸸㹎㹟㹬㹣㹪 Operation Panel menu
Cartridge Not ( 8)
㹒㹣㹱㹲ࠉ㸲㸸㹑㹣㹬㹱㹭㹰 Sensor menu
Ink Not (8)
INK ID (8) 㹒㹣㹱㹲ࠉ㸳㸸㹃㹬㹡㹭㹢㹣㹰 Encoder menu
Cutter solenoid Check
Wiper solenoid Check 㹒㹣㹱㹲ࠉ㸴㸸㹄㹟㹬 Fan menu
Encoder Displays the detected values from the following "5.4.5 Encoder 㹒㹣㹱㹲ࠉ㸵㸸㹐㹣㹡㹭㹰㹢 Record menu
encoders: Menu
CR encoder 㹒㹣㹱㹲ࠉ㸶㸸㹆㹣㹟㹢ࠉ㹑㹧㹥㹬㹟㹪 Head Signal menu
PF encoder
㹒㹣㹱㹲ࠉ㸷㸸㹒㹧㹫㹣㹁㹦㹣㹡㹩 TimeCheck menu
Fan Used to check if the following fans operate normally "5.4.6 Fan Menu
by turning them ON and OFF:
Vacuum Fan
Cooling fan (24V) Assy (for MAIN board)

5.4.1 Memory Size Menu

This menu is used to display the size of memories installed on MAIN board on Operation
panel.
[Cancel]
㹁㹦㹣㹡㹩ࠉ㸯㸸㹒㹣㹱㹲
[Enter]
[Cancel]
㹒㹣㹱㹲ࠉ㸯㸸㹐㹟㹫ࠉ㹁㹟㹮㹟㹡㹧㹲㹷
[Enter]
㹐㹟㹫ࠉ㹁㹟㹮㹟㹡㹧㹲㹷ࠉࠉ㸰㸳㸴㹋㹀
5.4.1 Memory Size Menu 253

5.4.2 Version Menu

This menu is used to display the following items on Operation panel.
• Firmware version
• Backup parameter version
• Setting of dip switches of MAIN board
• Revision of MAIN board
• Company code
• Serial No.
㨀㧵㧼
The following is a supplement explanation about display contents.
• Settings for the DIP switch on the MAIN board are displayed as follows:
• ON: 0, OFF: 1
• Switch No.1: LSB
• Switch No.2: MSB
• When Serial No. is not set , the following window is displayed.
㨂㨑㨞㧦㧿㨑㨞㨕㧚‫ޓ‬㧺㨛㨠‫ޓ‬㧿㨑㨠
[Enter]
[Cancel]
㹒㹣㹱㹲ࠉ㸰㸸㹔㹣㹰㹱㹧㹭㹬
[Enter]
>@
[Enter]
㹔㹣㹰㸸㹄㹧㹰㹫ࠉࠉࠉ㸯㸬㸮㸮 F/W version
[Cancel]
>!@
㹔㹣㹰㸸㹎㹟㹰㹟㹫㹣㹲㹣㹰ࠉࠉࠉ㸯㸬㸮㸮 Backup parameter version
㹔㹣㹰㸸㹂㹧㹮㹑㹕ࠉࠉࠉࠉࠉࠉࠉ㸮㹶㸮㸱 Setting of DIP switches

of MAIN Board
㹔㹣㹰㸸㹀㹭㹟㹰㹢ࠉ㹐㹣㹴ࠉࠉࠉࠉࠉ㸯㸯 Revision of MAIN board
㹔㹣㹰㸸㹁㹭㹫㹮㹟㹬㹷㹁㹭㹢㹣ࠉ㸮㸮㸯 Company code
㹔㹣㹰㸸㹑㹣㹰㹧㸬ࠉ㹆㹏㸯㹓㸮㸮㸮㸮㸮㸮 Serial No.
5.4.2 Version Menu 254

5.4.3 Operation Panel Menu (1) Operation Panel Key Check

Check the operation panel (jig panel) keys and LED operation. When you press a key on Operation panel, the name of the key is displayed on LCD. To exit
Operation panel key check, press [Cancel] key twice.
㨀㧵㧼
(2) LED Check
Names for the panel keys and LED parts are as follows.
For LED check, the LED is lit in the order of the numbers shown in the left illustration.
Jig Panel Operation Panel The LCD displays the name of LED that is currently illuminated.
1 2
[Cancel] [Enter]
5
㹒㹣㹱㹲ࠉ㸱㸸㹎㹟㹬㹣㹪
7 H
[Enter]
3 9
4
8 >@ Operation Panel Key Check
6 [Enter]
A 11 10 㹎㹟㹬㹣㹪㸯㸸㹉㹣㹷
C [Cancel]
㹎㹟㹬㹣㹪㸸㹉㹣㹷ࠉࠉࠉࠉࠉࠉ㸽㸽㸽㸽㸽
E F >!@ 㸦twice㸧 LED Check
B G 㹎㹟㹬㹣㹪㸰㸸㹊㹁㹂 ‫ڦڦڦڦڦڦڦڦڦڦڦڦڦڦڦڦڦڦڦڦ‬
D
LCD Check
㹎㹟㹬㹣㹪㸱㸸㹊㹃㹂
㹊㹃㹂ࠉࠉࠉࠉࠉࠉࠉࠉࠉࠉࠉ㹎㹭㹵㹣㹰
No. LED part names No. Panel Key name
1 Power A Menu
2 Error B Cancel
3 High C Plus
4 Low D Minus
5 Take Up E Pre
6 Auto Cut F Next
7 Long G Enter
8 Normal H Tact
9 Short - -
10 Error - -
11 Data - -
5.4.3 Operation Panel Menu 255

5.4.4 Sensor Menu 㹁㹦㹣㹡㹩ࠉ㸯㸸㹒㹣㹱㹲

[Enter]
This menu is used to display the sensor status on Operation panel.
[Cancel]
If the displayed sensor status does not match the actual machine status, replace or adjust the 㹒㹣㹱㹲ࠉ㸲ࠉ㸸㹑㹣㹬㹱㹭㹰
relevant sensor. [Enter]
>@
No. Sensor name Status in Reference 㹑㹣㹬㸬㸯㸸㹁㹐ࠉ㹍㹰㹧㹥㹧㹬ࠉࠉ㹍㹤㹤
display >!@
1 CR Origin ON/OFF The state of CR Origin Sensor is displayed. 㹑㹣㹬㸬㸰㸸㹁㹭㹴㹣㹰ࠉࠉࠉࠉࠉ㹍㹮㹣㹬
2 Cover Open/ The state of Front cover is displayed. 㹑㹣㹬㸬㸱㸸㹊㹣㹴㹣㹰ࠉࠉࠉࠉࠉ㹂㹭㹵㹬

Close
㹑㹣㹬㸬㸲㸸㹃㹢㹥㹣㸿㹂ࠉࠉࠉࠉࠉࠉࠉ㸲
3 Lever Up/ The position of Pressuring Lever is displayed.
Down 㹑㹣㹬㸬㸳㸸㹐㹣㹟㹰㸿㹂ࠉࠉࠉࠉࠉࠉࠉ㸲
4 Edge AD (P_EDGE 0 to 255 The sensitivity of P_EDGE sensor is displayed. 㹑㹣㹬㸬㸴㸸㹆㹣㹟㹢㹑㹪㹧㹢㹣ࠉࠉ㹊㹭㹵

sensor)
㹑㹣㹬㸬㸵㸸㹆㹣㹟㹢ࠉࠉࠉࠉࠉࠉ㸰㸳r㹁
5 Rear AD 0 to 255 The sensitivity of P_REAR sensor is displayed.
(P_REAR sensor) 㹑㹣㹬㸬㸶㸸㹒㹰㹟㹬㹱㸬㸯ࠉࠉࠉ㸰㸳r㹁
6 Head Slide Low/ The height of Head is displayed.
㹑㹣㹬㸬㸷㸸㹒㹰㹟㹬㹱㸬㸰ࠉࠉࠉ㸰㸳r㹁
High
7 Head The temperature of the Head is displayed. 㹑㹣㹬㸬㸯㸮㸸㹇㸬㹌㹒㸯㸰㸱㸲㸳㸴㸵㸶
** ℃
8 Trans.1 (Head ** ℃ The temperature of the transistor of Head (MAIN 㹑㹣㹬㸬㸯㸯㸸㹇㸬㹃㹂㸯㸰㸱㸲㸳㸴㸵㸶
transistor thermistor board) is displayed.
1) 㹑㹣㹬㸬㸯㸰㸸㹇㸬㹇㹂㸯㸰㸱㸲㸳㸴㸵㸶
[Enter]
9 Trans.2 (Head Cutter Solenoid
** ℃ 㹑㹣㹬㸬㸯㸱㸸㹁㹳㹲㹑㹭㹪㹣㹬㹭㹧㹢
[Cancel] Check Menu
transistor thermistor
㹑㹣㹬㸬㸯㸲㸸㹕㹧㹮㹣㹰㹑㹭㹪㹣㹬㹭㹧㹢 Wiper Solenoid
2)
Check Menu
10 I.NOT 12345678 The existence of an ink cartridge is displayed.
11 I.END 12345678 The existence of ink is displayed.
12 I.ID 12345678 The slot which has read the smart chip card is
displayed.
13 Cut Solenoid check - Checking the operation of the Cutter Solenoid.
14 WiperSolenoid - Checking the operation of the Wiper Solenoid.
check
5.4.4 Sensor Menu 256

(1) Cutter Solenoid Check

Check the up/down operations of Cutter Solenoid.
㧯㨔㨑㨏㨗‫ޓ‬㧝㧦㨀㨑㨟㨠
[Enter]
㨀㨑㨟㨠‫ޓ‬㧠㧦㧿㨑㨚㨟㨛㨞
[Enter]
㧿㨑㨚㧚㧝㧟㧦㧯㨡㨠㧿㨛㨘㨑㨚㨛㨕㨐
[Enter] [Cancel]
(It will be in Down state.)
㧿㨛㨘㨑㧚‫ޓ‬㧰㨛㨣㨚‫ޓ‬㧙㧪‫ޓ‬㧱㨚㨠㨑㨞
[Cancel] [Enter]
㧿㨛㨘㨑㧚‫ޓ‬㨁㨜‫ޓޓޓ‬㧙㧪‫ޓ‬㧯㨍㨚㨏㨑㨘
(2) Wiper Solenoid Check

Check the up/down operations of Wiper Solenoid.
㧯㨔㨑㨏㨗‫ޓ‬㧝㧦㨀㨑㨟㨠
[Enter]
㨀㨑㨟㨠‫ޓ‬㧠㧦㧿㨑㨚㨟㨛㨞
[Enter]
㧿㨑㨚㧚㧝㧠㧦㨃㨕㨜㨑㨞㧿㨛㨘㨑㨚㨛㨕㨐
[Enter] [Cancel]
(It will be in Down state.)
㧿㨛㨘㨑㧚‫ޓ‬㧰㨛㨣㨚‫ޓ‬㧙㧪‫ޓ‬㧱㨚㨠㨑㨞
[Cancel] [Enter]
㧿㨛㨘㨑㧚‫ޓ‬㨁㨜‫ޓޓޓ‬㧙㧪‫ޓ‬㧯㨍㨚㨏㨑㨘
5.4.4 Sensor Menu 257

5.4.5 Encoder Menu

This menu is used to display the detected values from the following encoders:
• CR encoder
• PF encoder
NOTE
For the encoder-detected values, the encoder pulse numbers are displayed in
hexadecimal number.
• Encoder values are displayed as follows.
・CR Encoder: approximately 35.28μｍ
・PF Encoder: approximately 2.73μｍ
[Enter]
[Cancel]
㹒㹣㹱㹲ࠉ㸳㸸㹃㹬㹡㹭㹢㹣㹰
[Enter]
>@
㹃㹬㹡㹭㹢㹣㹰㸸ࠉ㹁㹐ࠉࠉࠉࠉࠉ㸮㸮㸮㸮
>!@
㹃㹬㹡㹭㹢㹣㹰㸸ࠉ㹎㹄ࠉࠉࠉࠉࠉ㸮㸮㸮㸮
5.4.5 Encoder Menu 258

5.4.6 Fan Menu

This menu is used to check if the following fans operate normally by turning them ON and
OFF:
• Vacuum FAN
• Cooling FAN (24V) Assy (for MAIN board)
NOTE
• The “Cooling fan” on the Panel indicates Cooling FAN (24V) Assy (for MAIN
board).
• While the power is on, Cooling FAN is always on.
• Depending on the type of FAN, the operation after the [Enter] key is pressed
differes as below.
Name While Power is After [Enter] is After [Cancel] is

ON pressed pressed
Vacuum Fan OFF ON OFF
Cooling FAN ON OFF ON
[Cancel] [Enter]
㹒㹣㹱㹲ࠉ㸴㸸㹄㹟㹬
[Enter]
>@
[Enter] 9DFXXP)DQ2Q
㹄㹟㹬㸯㸸㹔㹟㹡㹳㹳㹫ࠉ㹄㹟㹬 ࠕ㹁㹟㹬㹡㹣㹪ࠖࠉ㹃㹌㹂
[Cancel]
>!@ &RROLQJ)DQOff
[Enter]
㹄㹟㹬㸰㸸㹁㹭㹭㹪㹧㹬㹥ࠉ㹄㹟㹬 ࠕ㹁㹟㹬㹡㹣㹪ࠖࠉ㹃㹌㹂
[Cancel]
5.4.6 Fan Menu 259

5.4.7 Record Menu

This menu is used to check the following record. In addition, it initializes serious error record.
Initiallizing Record and S/C Log.
• Maintenance record
• Serious error record
• Printing Information
• Operation Time
• S/C Log
Also Maintenance record and S/C Log will be initialized.
[Enter]
[Cancel]
㹒㹣㹱㹲ࠉ㸵㸸㹐㹣㹡㹭㹰㹢
[Enter]
>@
㹐㹣㹡㹭㹰㹢㸯㸸㹋㹟㹧㹬㹲㹣㹬㹟㹬㹡㹣 Maintenance Record
>!@
㹐㹣㹡㹭㹰㹢㸰㸸㹃㹰㹰㹭㹰 Serious error Record
Initialization of the
㹐㹣㹡㹭㹰㹢㸱㸸㹃㹰㹰㹭㹰ࠉ㹇㹬㹧㹲㸬 serious communication
Confirmation of
㹐㹣㹡㹭㹰㹢㸲㸸㹎㹰㹧㹬㹲 Printing Information
Confirmation of
㹐㹣㹡㹭㹰㹢㸳㸸㹍㹮㹣㸬㹒㹧㹫㹣 Operation Time
Confirmation of
㹐㹣㹡㹭㹰㹢㸴㸸㹑㸭㹁ࠉ㹊㹭㹥 S/C Log.
Initialization of
㹐㹣㹡㹭㹰㹢㸵㸸㹑㸭㹁ࠉ㹊㹭㹥㹇㹬㹧㹲㸬 S/C Log
5.4.7 Record Menu 260

(1) Maintenance Record from left page to left page

>!@ >@
㨀㧵㧼
Average amount of the discharged
㹄㹧㹰㹣ࠉ㹃㸸ࠉࠉࠉࠉࠉࠉࠉࠉࠉࠉࠉࠉ㸮
• The number of ink discharge is the average value of the total discharge number ink from Row E
divide by 180 per 1 nozzle. 㹄㹧㹰㹣ࠉ㹄㸸ࠉࠉࠉࠉࠉࠉࠉࠉࠉࠉࠉࠉ㸮 Average amount of the discharged

ink from Row F
• The ink discharge number is shown in the units of mega dot.
㹄㹧㹰㹣ࠉ㹅㸸ࠉࠉࠉࠉࠉࠉࠉࠉࠉࠉࠉࠉ㸮 Average amount of the discharged
ink from Row G
㹄㹧㹰㹣ࠉ㹆㸸ࠉࠉࠉࠉࠉࠉࠉࠉࠉࠉࠉࠉ㸮 Average amount of the discharged

ink from Row H
㹒㸬㹄㹧㹰㹣ࠉ㸿㸸ࠉࠉࠉࠉࠉࠉࠉࠉࠉࠉ㸮 Accumulate amount of the discharged
[Enter] ink from Row A
㹒㹣㹱㹲ࠉ㸵㸸㹐㹣㹡㹭㹰㹢 Accumulate amount of the discharged
㹒㸬㹄㹧㹰㹣ࠉ㹀㸸ࠉࠉࠉࠉࠉࠉࠉࠉࠉࠉ㸮
ink from Row B
[Enter]
[Cancel]
㹐㹣㹡㹭㹰㹢㸯㸸㹋㹟㹧㹬㹲㹣㹬㹟㹬㹡㹣㹒㸬㹄㹧㹰㹣ࠉ㹁㸸ࠉࠉࠉࠉࠉࠉࠉࠉࠉࠉ㸮 Accumulate amount of the discharged
ink from Row C
[Enter]
>@ 㹒㸬㹄㹧㹰㹣ࠉ㹂㸸ࠉࠉࠉࠉࠉࠉࠉࠉࠉࠉ㸮 Accumulate amount of the discharged
ink from Row D
Number of printing
㹎㹰㹧㹬㹲㹌㹳㹫㹠㹣㹰㸸ࠉࠉࠉࠉࠉࠉࠉ㸮 (Including inside pattern) 㹒㸬㹄㹧㹰㹣ࠉ㹃㸸ࠉࠉࠉࠉࠉࠉࠉࠉࠉࠉ㸮 Accumulate amount of the discharged
ink from Row E
>!@
Accumulate amount of the discharged
Number of 㹒㸬㹄㹧㹰㹣ࠉ㹄㸸ࠉࠉࠉࠉࠉࠉࠉࠉࠉࠉ㸮
㹁㹐ࠉ㹋㹭㹲㹭㹰㸸ࠉࠉࠉࠉࠉࠉࠉࠉࠉࠉ㸮 CR Motor activation
Unit㸸Operation count ink from Row F
(OriginЍOpposite side
of Origin, Opposie side Accumulate amount of the discharged
㹒㸬㹁㹐ࠉ㹋㹭㹲㹭㹰㸸ࠉࠉࠉࠉࠉࠉࠉࠉ㸮 accumulation number of
of OriginЍOrigin) 㹒㸬㹄㹧㹰㹣ࠉ㹅㸸ࠉࠉࠉࠉࠉࠉࠉࠉࠉࠉ㸮 ink from Row G
CR Motor activation
Accumulate amount of the discharged
㹎㹄ࠉ㹋㹭㹲㹭㹰㸸ࠉࠉࠉࠉࠉࠉࠉࠉࠉࠉ㸮 Number of PF Motor activation (Unit㸸10m) 㹒㸬㹄㹧㹰㹣ࠉ㹆㸸ࠉࠉࠉࠉࠉࠉࠉࠉࠉࠉ㸮 ink from Row H
Number of the cleaning

㹒㸬㹎㹄ࠉ㹋㹭㹲㹭㹰㸸ࠉࠉࠉࠉࠉࠉࠉࠉ㸮 accumulation number of 㹁㹪㹣㹟㹬㹧㹬㹥㸸ࠉࠉࠉࠉࠉࠉࠉࠉࠉࠉ㸮 (Including ink filling or economy ink charge)
PF Motor activation (Unit㸸10m)
operation time of Pump Motor activation 㹕㹧㹮㹣㹰㸸ࠉࠉࠉࠉࠉࠉࠉࠉࠉࠉࠉࠉࠉ㸮 Number of the wiping
㹎㹳㹫㹮㸸ࠉࠉࠉࠉࠉࠉࠉࠉࠉࠉࠉࠉࠉࠉ㸮 (Unit: second)
accumulation time of Pump Motor Operation count of the Wipe Solenoid
㹒㸬㹎㹳㹫㹮㸸ࠉࠉࠉࠉࠉࠉࠉࠉࠉࠉࠉࠉ㸮㹕㹧㹮㹣㹰㹑㹭㹪㸬㸸ࠉࠉࠉࠉࠉࠉࠉࠉࠉ㸮
activation (Unit: second)
Cut Number
㹁㹮㹳㹫㹮㸯㸸ࠉࠉࠉࠉࠉࠉࠉࠉࠉࠉࠉࠉ㸮 operation time of Circulation Pump 1 Motor 㹁㹳㹲㹌㹳㹫㹠㹣㹰㸸ࠉࠉࠉࠉࠉࠉࠉࠉࠉ㸮
activation (Unit: second)
accumulation time of Circulation Pump 1 Operation of the Cut Solenoid
㹒㸬㹁㹎㹳㹫㹮㸯㸸ࠉࠉࠉࠉࠉࠉࠉࠉࠉࠉ㸮㹁㹳㹲ࠉ㹑㹭㹪㹣ࠉ㸸ࠉࠉࠉࠉࠉࠉࠉࠉࠉ㸮
Motor activation (Unit: second)
operation time of Circulation Pump Motor 2 Amount of Waste Ink
㹁㹎㹳㹫㹮㸰㸸ࠉࠉࠉࠉࠉࠉࠉࠉࠉࠉࠉࠉ㸮 activation (Unit: second)
㹕㹟㹱㹲㹣ࠉ㹇㹬㹩㸸ࠉࠉࠉࠉࠉࠉࠉࠉࠉ㸮
(Unit: ml)
accumulation time of Circulation Pump

㹒㸬㹁㹎㹳㹫㹮㸰㸸ࠉࠉࠉࠉࠉࠉࠉࠉࠉࠉ㸮 Motor 2 activation (Unit: second)
㹄㹧㹰㹣ࠉ㸿㸸ࠉࠉࠉࠉࠉࠉࠉࠉࠉࠉࠉࠉ㸮 ink from Row A (Unit: Mdots)

㹄㹧㹰㹣ࠉ㹀㸸ࠉࠉࠉࠉࠉࠉࠉࠉࠉࠉࠉࠉ㸮 ink from Row B

㹄㹧㹰㹣ࠉ㹁㸸ࠉࠉࠉࠉࠉࠉࠉࠉࠉࠉࠉࠉ㸮 ink from Row C

㹄㹧㹰㹣ࠉ㹂㸸ࠉࠉࠉࠉࠉࠉࠉࠉࠉࠉࠉࠉ㸮 ink from Row D
to right page from right page

(2) Serious Error Record (3) Error Initialization

This menu is used to display serious error record on Operation panel. This menu is used to initialize the serious error record.
NOTE
• The serious error history does not include CPU error. [Enter]
• The serious error history menu indicates up to 64 history of items. 㹒㹣㹱㹲ࠉ㸵㸸㹐㹣㹡㹭㹰㹢
[Enter]
㹐㹣㹡㹭㹰㹢㸱㸸㹃㹰㹰㹭㹰ࠉ㹇㹬㹧㹲㸬
㧯㨔㨑㨏㨗‫ޓ‬㧝㧦㨀㨑㨟㨠 [Enter]
[Enter] [Cancel]
㹇㹬㹧㹲㹧㹟㹪㹧㹸㹣ࠉ㹍㹉㸽
㨀㨑㨟㨠‫ޓ‬㧣㧦㧾㨑㨏㨛㨞㨐 After initializing [Enter]
[Enter] 㹇㹬㹧㹲㹧㹟㹪㹧㹸㹣ࠉ㹎㹟㹰㹟㹫㹣㹲㹣㹰
[Cancel]
After displaying [Enter]
㧾㨑㨏㨛㨞㨐㧞㧦㧱㨞㨞㨛㨞
[Enter] 㹓㹬㹲㹭㹳㹡㹦㹣㹢ࠉ㹎㹟㹰㹟㹫
=?
㧱㨞㨞‫ޓ‬㧝㧦‫ޓޓޓޓޓ‬㧴㧱㧭㧰‫ޓ‬㨀㧱㧹㧼
= ?
㧱㨞㨞‫ޓ‬㧞㧦‫ޓޓޓޓޓޓ‬㧼㧲‫ޓ‬㧹㧻㨀㧻㧾
㧱㨞㨞‫ޓ‬㧟㧦‫ޓޓޓޓޓޓ‬㧼㧲‫ޓ‬㧹㧻㨀㧻㧾
㧱㨞㨞‫ޓ‬㧠㧦‫ޓޓޓޓ‬㧯㧾‫ޓ‬㧯㨁㧾㧾㧱㧺㨀
=?
㧱㨞㨞㧢㧠㧦‫ޓޓޓޓޓޓ‬㧯㧾‫ޓ‬㧹㧻㨀㧻㧾
= ?

(4) Printing Information (4-a)Number

Check printing information (number of printed copies of each print mode, print area, and Check the number of printed copies of each print mode.
number of printed copies of each effect). The inner pattern will not be accumulated.
[Cancel]
㹎㹰㹧㹬㹲㸯㸸㹌㹳㹫
[Enter]
㹁㹦㹣㹡㹩ࠉ㸯㸸㹒㹣㹱㹲 [Enter]
[Enter]
[<]
㹒㹣㹱㹲ࠉ㸵㸸㹐㹣㹡㹭㹰㹢 Total Number
㹒㹭㹲㹟㹪ࠉ㹌㹳㹫㸸ࠉ㸮
[Enter] 㸦Not including inside pattern㸧
[Cancel] [>]
㹐㹣㹡㹭㹰㹢㸲㸸㹎㹰㹧㹬㹲
㹄㹟㹱㹲ࠉ㹬㹳㹫㸸ࠉࠉࠉࠉࠉࠉࠉࠉࠉࠉ㸮
[Enter]
>@
[Enter] 㹄㹧㹬㹣ࠉ㹬㹳㹫㸸ࠉࠉࠉࠉࠉࠉࠉࠉࠉࠉ㸮
㹎㹰㹧㹬㹲㸯㸸㹌㹳㹫 Number Menu
[Cancel]
>!@ 㹑㸬㹄㹧㹬㹣ࠉ㹬㹳㹫㸸ࠉࠉࠉࠉࠉࠉࠉࠉ㸮
㹎㹰㹧㹬㹲㸰㸸㸿㹰㹣㹟 Area Menu
㹍㹲㹦㹣㹰ࠉ㹬㹳㹫㸸ࠉࠉࠉࠉࠉࠉࠉࠉࠉ㸮 Other mode shown above
㹎㹰㹧㹬㹲㸱㸸㹃㹤㹤㹣㹡㹲 Effect Menu
㨀㧵㧼
Displayed as a decimal.

(4-b)Area
Check the number of printed copies of each effect.
[Cancel]
㹎㹰㹧㹬㹲㸰㸸㸿㹰㹣㹟
[Enter@
[Enter]
[<]
㹒㹭㹲㹟㹪ࠉ㹟㹰㹣㹟㸸ࠉࠉࠉࠉࠉࠉࠉࠉ㸮 Total䠄䟝䠅
[>]
㹄㹟㹱㹲ࠉ㹟㹰㹣㹟㸸ࠉࠉࠉࠉࠉࠉࠉࠉࠉ㸮
㹄㹧㹬㹣ࠉ㹟㹰㹣㹟㸸ࠉࠉࠉࠉࠉࠉࠉࠉࠉ㸮
㹑㸬㹄㹧㹬㹣ࠉ㹟㹰㹣㹟㸸ࠉࠉࠉࠉࠉࠉࠉ㸮
㹍㹲㹦㹣㹰ࠉ㹟㹰㹣㹟㸸ࠉࠉࠉࠉࠉࠉࠉࠉ㸮 Other mode shown above䚷䠄䟝䠅

(4-c)Effect from left page to left page

Check the number of printed copies of each print effect.
㧲㨕㨚㨑㧒㧲㨡㨦㨦㧟㧦‫ޓޓޓޓޓޓޓޓ‬㧜
[Cancel]
㧲㨕㨚㨑㧒㧲㨡㨦㨦㧠㧦‫ޓޓޓޓޓޓޓޓ‬㧜
㹎㹰㹧㹬㹲㸱㸸㹃㹤㹤㹣㹡㹲
[Enter]
[Enter] 㧲㨕㨚㨑㧒㧲㨡㨦㨦㧡㧦‫ޓޓޓޓޓޓޓޓ‬㧜
>@
㹌㹭㹬㹣㸯㸸ࠉࠉࠉࠉࠉࠉࠉࠉࠉࠉࠉࠉࠉ㸮㧲㨕㨚㨑㧒㧲㨡㨦㨦㧢㧦‫ޓޓޓޓޓޓޓޓ‬㧜
>!@
㧲㨕㨚㨑㧒㧲㨛㨓㧝㧦‫ޓޓޓޓޓޓޓޓޓ‬㧜
㹌㹭㹬㹣㸰㸸ࠉࠉࠉࠉࠉࠉࠉࠉࠉࠉࠉࠉࠉ㸮
㧲㨕㨚㨑㧒㧲㨛㨓㧞㧦‫ޓޓޓޓޓޓޓޓޓ‬㧜
㹌㹭㹬㹣㸱㸸ࠉࠉࠉࠉࠉࠉࠉࠉࠉࠉࠉࠉࠉ㸮
㧲㨕㨚㨑㧒㧲㨛㨓㧟㧦‫ޓޓޓޓޓޓޓޓޓ‬㧜
㹕㹟㹴㹣㸯㸸ࠉࠉࠉࠉࠉࠉࠉࠉࠉࠉࠉࠉࠉ㸮
㧭㧙㧿㧚㧲㧒㨃㧦‫ޓޓޓޓޓޓޓޓޓޓޓ‬㧜 A-Super Fine&Wave
㹕㹟㹴㹣㸰㸸ࠉࠉࠉࠉࠉࠉࠉࠉࠉࠉࠉࠉࠉ㸮
㧮㧙㧿㧚㧲㧒㨃㧦‫ޓޓޓޓޓޓޓޓޓޓޓ‬㧜 B-Super Fine&Wave
㹕㹟㹴㹣㸱㸸ࠉࠉࠉࠉࠉࠉࠉࠉࠉࠉࠉࠉࠉ㸮
㹄㹭㹥㸯㸸ࠉࠉࠉࠉࠉࠉࠉࠉࠉࠉࠉࠉࠉࠉ㸮
㹄㹭㹥㸰㸸ࠉࠉࠉࠉࠉࠉࠉࠉࠉࠉࠉࠉࠉࠉ㸮 (5) Operation Time

㹄㹭㹥㸱㸸ࠉࠉࠉࠉࠉࠉࠉࠉࠉࠉࠉࠉࠉࠉ㸮 Check the accumulated operation time of each activation mode.
㹄㹳㹸㹸㸯㸸ࠉࠉࠉࠉࠉࠉࠉࠉࠉࠉࠉࠉࠉ㸮
㹄㹳㹸㹸㸰㸸ࠉࠉࠉࠉࠉࠉࠉࠉࠉࠉࠉࠉࠉ㸮 [Enter]
㹄㹳㹸㹸㸱㸸ࠉࠉࠉࠉࠉࠉࠉࠉࠉࠉࠉࠉࠉ㸮 [Enter]
[Cancel]
㹕㹭㹵㸯㸸ࠉࠉࠉࠉࠉࠉࠉࠉࠉࠉࠉࠉࠉࠉ㸮㹐㹣㹡㹭㹰㹢㸳㸸㹍㹮㹣㸬㹒㹧㹫㹣
[Enter]
㹕㹭㹵㸰㸸ࠉࠉࠉࠉࠉࠉࠉࠉࠉࠉࠉࠉࠉࠉ㸮
>@
㹕㹭㹵㸱㸸ࠉࠉࠉࠉࠉࠉࠉࠉࠉࠉࠉࠉࠉࠉ㸮㹒㹭㹲㹟㹪㸸ࠉࠉࠉࠉࠉࠉࠉࠉࠉࠉ㸮㹫㹧㹬 All mode (Total)
㹄㹧㹬㹣㸤㹕㹟㹴㹣㸯㸸ࠉࠉࠉࠉࠉࠉࠉࠉ㸮 >!@
㹌㹭㹰㹫㹟㹪㸸ࠉࠉࠉࠉࠉࠉࠉࠉࠉ㸮㹫㹧㹬 User mode
㹄㹧㹬㹣㸤㹕㹟㹴㹣㸰㸸ࠉࠉࠉࠉࠉࠉࠉࠉ㸮
㹂㹧㹟㹥㸬㸸ࠉࠉࠉࠉࠉࠉࠉࠉࠉࠉ㸮㹫㹧㹬 Self Diagnois mode
㹄㹧㹬㹣㸤㹕㹟㹴㹣㸱㸸ࠉࠉࠉࠉࠉࠉࠉࠉ㸮
㹋㹟㹧㹬㹲㹣㸬㸸ࠉࠉࠉࠉࠉࠉࠉࠉ㸮㹫㹧㹬 Maintenance mode 2
㹄㹧㹬㹣㸤㹄㹳㹸㹸㸯㸸ࠉࠉࠉࠉࠉࠉࠉࠉ㸮
㹄㹧㹬㹣㸤㹄㹳㹸㹸㸰㸸ࠉࠉࠉࠉࠉࠉࠉࠉ㸮

(6) S/C Log

Check the Smart chip log.
It Displays up to error 24.
[Enter]
[Enter]
[Cancel]
㹐㹣㹡㹭㹰㹢㸴㸸㹑㸭㹁ࠉ㹊㹭㹥
[Enter]
>@
㹃㹰㹰ࠉ㸯㸸㹀㹰㹭㹩㹣㹬㸰ࠉ㹁㹟㹰㹲㸬㸯
>!@
㹃㹰㹰ࠉ㸰㸸㹀㹰㹭㹩㹣㹬㸱ࠉ㹁㹟㹰㹲㸬㸰
>@
㹃㹰㹰㸰㸲㸸㹀㹰㹭㹩㹣㹬㸯㸰㹁㹟㹰㹲㸬㸲
>!@
(7) Initialization of S/C Log

Initialize the Smart chip log.
[Enter]
[Enter]
㹐㹣㹡㹭㹰㹢㸵㸸㹑㸭㹁ࠉ㹊㹭㹥㹇㹬㹧㹲㸬
[Enter]
[Cancel]
[Cancel] [Enter]
㹇㹬㹧㹲㹧㹟㹪㹧㹸㹣ࠉ㹎㹟㹰㹟㹫㹣㹲㹣㹰
㹓㹬㹲㹭㹳㹡㹦㹣㹢ࠉ㹎㹟㹰㹟㹫

5.4.8 Head Waveform Menu 㹁㹦㹣㹡㹩ࠉ㸯㸸㹒㹣㹱㹲

This menu is used to check the head-driving waveform. [Cancel] [Enter]
This is a function that is not normally used in maintenance work. 㹒㹣㹱㹲ࠉ㸶㸸㹆㹣㹟㹢ࠉ㹑㹧㹥㹟㹬㹪
[Enter]
NOTE >@ >@

[Enter]
• Nozzles can be selected A to H and ALL. 㹆㹣㹟㹢㹑㹧㹥㹬㹟㹪㸸ࠉ㹔㹑㹂㸯㸫㹊
• The number of shots can be selected in a range from 1 to 655. 㹆㹣㹟㹢㹑㹧㹥㹬㹟㹪㸸ࠉ㹔㹑㹂㸯㸫㹋
>@ >@
• Magnification can be selected from the x1, x100, x10000, x1000000.
• During DRIVE (waveform output), the [Cancel] key is invalid. 㹆㹣㹟㹢㹑㹧㹥㹬㹟㹪㸸ࠉ㹔㹑㹂㸯㸫㹑㹌㹭㹸㹸㹪㹣㸸ࠉࠉࠉࠉࠉࠉࠉࠉࠉࠉࠉ㸿
• When the number of waveform output is larger than 65535 shots, waveform is 㹆㹣㹟㹢㹑㹧㹥㹬㹟㹪㸸ࠉ㹔㹑㹂㸱㸫㹊
output in units of 65535 shots. (Temperature is corrected by waveform output
unit.) 㹆㹣㹟㹢㹑㹧㹥㹬㹟㹪㸸ࠉ㹔㹑㹂㸱㸫㹋
㹆㹣㹟㹢㹑㹧㹥㹬㹟㹪㸸ࠉ㹔㹑㹂㸱㸫㹑㹌㹭㹸㹸㹪㹣㸸ࠉࠉࠉࠉࠉࠉࠉࠉࠉ㸿㹊㹊
㹆㹣㹟㹢㹑㹧㹥㹬㹟㹪㸸ࠉ㹔㹑㹂㸲㸫㹊
㹆㹣㹟㹢㹑㹧㹥㹬㹟㹪㸸ࠉ㹔㹑㹂㸲㸫㹋
㹆㹣㹟㹢㹑㹧㹥㹬㹟㹪㸸ࠉ㹔㹑㹂㸲㸫㹑
㹆㹣㹟㹢㹑㹧㹥㹬㹟㹪㸸㹎㹭㹵㹣㹰㸫㹄㹊
㹆㹣㹟㹢㹑㹧㹥㹬㹟㹪㸸㹌㹭㹰㹫㹟㹪㹄㹊
[Enter]
[Cancel]
㹌㹭㹸㹸㹪㹣㸸ࠉࠉࠉࠉࠉࠉࠉࠉࠉࠉࠉ㸿
[Enter]
㹑㹦㹭㹲ࠉ㹁㹭㹳㹬㹲㸸ࠉࠉࠉࠉࠉࠉࠉ㸯
[Enter]
㹑㹦㹭㹲㹐㹟㹲㹧㹭㸸ࠉࠉࠉࠉࠉ㸯㸮㸮
[Enter]
ࠉ㹂㹐㹇㹔㹃
[after driving]
5.4.8 Head Waveform Menu 267

5.4.9 Time Check Menu

Check the date which is managed by RTC (Real Time Clock) on MAIN borad.
You can only check it in Self-diagnosis function. To setup, use Mutoh Service Assistance.
[Cancel]
[Enter]
[Cancel]
㹒㹣㹱㹲㸷㸸㹒㹧㹫㹣ࠉ㹁㹦㹣㹡㹩
[Enter]
[Enter]
㸰㸮㸯㸳㸭㸮㸯㸭㸰㸳ࠉ㸯㸶㸸㸰㸯
5.4.9 Time Check Menu 268

5.5 Ink Charging Menu VJ628XE-M-00
5.5 Ink Charging Menu [Cancel]

㹁㹦㹣㹡㹩ࠉ㸰㸸㹇㹬㹩㹁㹦㹟㹰㹥㹣
In the ink charging menu, you can execute the initial wash of Print head and ink charge. [Enter]
The charging items are as follows: [<]

[Enter]
㹇㹬㹩㹁㹦㹟㹰㹥㹣㸯㸸㹌㹭㹰㹫㹟㹪 ᕥグ(NOTE)ࡢሙྜ
࢖ࣥࢡࢡ࣑࢔࣡ࢭタᐃ
NOTE [>] ࣓ࢽ࣮ࣗࢆ⾲♧
In the following conditions, "Ink Config." menu appears to specify the ink 㹇㹬㹩㹁㹦㹟㹰㹥㹣㸰㸸㹊㹧㹲㹲㹪㹣
configuration after "InkCharge1:Normal" is performed:
- Ink has not been charged yet.
after charging
- "Parameter" > "Update" > "Ink Config." is "Auto" (the ink color configuration 㹇㹬㹩㹁㹦㹟㹰㹥㹣 panel displays ͆InkCharge1/2͇
　 parameter has not been specified yet).
[<]
[Cancel]
The initial ink charge will start after the ink configuration is specified. 㹇㹬㹩ࠉ㹁㹭㹬㹤㹧㹥㸬㸸㹕ࠉ㸶㹁㹭㹪㹭㹰
(10) Ink Config.. [>]
㹇㹬㹩ࠉ㹁㹭㹬㹤㹧㹥㸬㸸ࠉࠉ㸲㹁㹭㹪㹭㹰
Charging item Contents 㹇㹬㹩ࠉ㹁㹭㹬㹤㹧㹥㸬㸸ࠉࠉ㸴㹁㹭㹪㹭㹰
Normal Initial INK charge 㹇㹬㹩ࠉ㹁㹭㹬㹤㹧㹥㸬㸸㹕ࠉ㸵㹁㹭㹪㹭㹰

Little Economy INK charge
[Enter] when ͆W 8Color͇ is selected
[Enter]/[Cancel] [<]
㹑㹣㹲ࠉ㹲㹭ࠉ㹕ࠉ㸶㹁㹭㹪㹭㹰㸽ࠉࠉ㹌㹭
[Cancel] [>]
㹑㹣㹲ࠉ㹲㹭ࠉ㹕ࠉ㸶㹁㹭㹪㹭㹰㸽ࠉ㹗㹣㹱
[Enter]
㹓㹮㹢㹟㹲㹧㹬㹥ࠉ㹎㹟㹰㹟㹫㹣㹲㹣㹰 after updating

5.6 Adjustment Menu VJ628XE-M-00
5.6 Adjustment Menu Diagnosis Contents Reference

item
This menu is used to align the printing position and correct the media feed operation.
Longstore Prints out adjustment pattern ALL, adjustment "5.6.9 Longstore
• This menu is used to align the printing position and correct the media feed operation. parameters ALL, serious error history and S/C Log. Menu
When replacing Head, perform head wash (after this, turn off the power and replace
CountClear Clears various software counters. "5.6.10 Software
Head), head nozzle check, UniD adjustment, BiD adjustment, Side margin
Counter Initialization
adjustment, Test pattern printing.
Menu
• If the print position is shifted by changing the height of the head, perform Bi-D print
alignment. SendPitch Checks whether there is an error in feed amount per "5.6.11 Feed
band from the printing results. Pitch Check Menu
Diagnosis Contents Reference
FillPattern Checks fill printing (Select color, nozzle and printing "5.6.12 Solid
item
direction.) Print Menu
Rear/Edge Automatically adjusts the sensor sensitivity for Media "5.6.1 Rear/
[Cancel]
detection. Edge Sensor 㹁㹦㹣㹡㹩ࠉ㸱㸸㸿㹢㹨㹳㹱㹲㹫㹣㹬㹲
[Enter]
Adjustment
[Enter]
NozzleChk Checks whether the ink is normally discharged from "5.6.2 Head >@
Head nozzles from the printing results. Nozzle Check Menu [Enter]
㸿㹢㹨㸬ࠉ㸯㸸㹐㹣㹟㹰㸭㹃㹢㹥㹣 Rear/Edge sensor check menu
[Cancel]
CheckSkew Performs media feed and detects the degree of skew "5.6.3 Skew >!@
in media feed by Sensor. Check Menu 㸿㹢㹨㸬ࠉ㸰㸸㹌㹭㹸㹸㹪㹣㹁㹦㹩 Head nozzle check menu
HeadSlant Checks Print head slant (horizontal and vertical "5.6.4 Head 㸿㹢㹨㸬ࠉ㸱㸸㹁㹦㹣㹡㹩㹑㹩㹣㹵 Head skew check menu
direction) from the printing results. Mechanical Slant Check Menu
adjustment must be performed as necessary. 㸿㹢㹨㸬ࠉ㸲㸸㹆㹣㹟㹢㹑㹪㹟㹬㹲 Head Slant check menu
Uni/ Bi Low Print with the head height set at Low, and perform "5.6.5 Uni-D/ Bi-
㸿㹢㹨㸬ࠉ㸳㸸㹓㹬㹧㸭㹀㹧㸭ࠉ㹊㹭㹵 Uni-D/Bi-D adjustment menu Low
the following adjustment. D Adjustment Menu
• Misalignment between the heads and 㸿㹢㹨㸬ࠉ㸴㸸㹀㹧㹂ࠉ㹁㹭㹮㹷 BiD Copy menu
nozzle lines (Uni-D CW/CCW)
㸿㹢㹨㸬ࠉ㸵㸸㹓㹬㹧㸭㹀㹧㸭ࠉ㹆㹧㹥㹦 Uni-D/Bi-D adjustment menu High
• Bidirectional printing position
Margin menu
Uni/ Bi Copy Copy the adjustment values for the Uni/Bi Low items "5.6.6 Bi-D Copy 㸿㹢㹨㸬ࠉ㸶㸸㹋㹟㹰㹥㹧㹬
to those of the High adjustment values.
㸿㹢㹨㸬ࠉ㸷㸸㹒㹣㹱㹲㹎㹰㹧㹬㹲 Test Print menu
Uni/ Bi High Print with the head height set at High, and perform "5.6.5 Uni-D/ Bi-
the following adjustment. D Adjustment Menu 㸿㹢㹨㸬㸯㸮㸸㹊㹭㹬㹥㹱㹲㹭㹰㹣 Longstore menu
• Misalignment between the heads and Softwware counter Initialization

㸿㹢㹨㸬㸯㸯㸸㹁㹭㹳㹬㹲㹁㹪㹣㹟㹰
nozzle lines (Uni-D CW) menu
• Bidirectional printing position 㸿㹢㹨㸬㸯㸰㸸㹑㹣㹬㹢㹎㹧㹲㹡㹦 Feed Amount check menu
Margin Adjusts Top, bottom, and side margins. "5.6.7 Margin 㸿㹢㹨㸬㸯㸱㸸㹄㹧㹪㹪㹎㹟㹲㹲㹣㹰㹬 Fill pattern menu
adjustment Menu
TestPrint Prints out adjustment pattern ALL, adjustment "5.6.8 Test

parameters ALL, serious error history and S/C Log. Printing Menu

5.6.1 Rear/ Edge Sensor Adjustment (1) Calibration
㨀㧵㧼㨀㧵㧼
• Automatically Adjusting AD values of P_REAR sensor and P_EDGE sensor to • After adjusting AD values of P_REAR sensor and P_EDGE sensor to proper
proper values. values, panel displays results.
• After adjusting, measuring AD values when paper is not set. • When abnormal termination, panel displays the VR values that is final state of
Confirming threshold that is used to judge whether paper is set. adjusting process.
• Measuring AD values of Edge sensor at four positions of Platen.
㹑㹣㹲ࠉ㹋㹣㹢㹧㹟
After setting paper, push [Enter] key
㹁㹦㹣㹡㹩ࠉ㸱㸸㸿㹢㹨㹳㹱㹲㹫㹣㹬㹲 Abnormal termination
[Enter] 㹁㹟㹪㹧㹠㹰㹟㹲㹧㹬㹥㹁㹟㹪㹧㹠㹰㹟㹲㹧㹭㹬ࠉ㹃㹰㹰㹭㹰

[Cancel]
㸿㹢㹨㸬ࠉ㸯㸸㹐㹣㹟㹰㸭㹃㹢㹥㹣 [Enter]
[Enter] [Cancel]
>@
[Enter]
㹐㹣㹟㹰㸭㹃㹢㹥㹣㸸㹁㹟㹪㹧㹠㹰㹟㹲㹣 Calibration menu >@NH\
[Cancel]
>!@ 㹐㹣㹟㹰ࠉ㹔㹐ࠉ㸰㸳㸳㸭㸿㹂ࠉ㸯㸷㸮㸭㹊 VR xxx / AD xxx / x
㹐㹣㹟㹰㸭㹃㹢㹥㹣㸸㹑㹣㹬㹱㹧㹬㹥 Sensing platen menu >!@NH\ GAIN㸸Sensor gaining
㹃㹢㹥㹣ࠉ㹔㹐ࠉ㸰㸳㸳㸭㸿㹂ࠉ㸯㸷㸮㸭㹊 setting (0 to 255)
㹐㹣㹟㹰㸭㹃㹢㹥㹣㸸㹇㹬㹮㹳㹲 Input menu AD㸸Sensor reflecting
value (0 to 255)
VR㸸Sensor setting
Push [Enter] or [Cancel] during [Edge VR] display
value (0 to 255)
㹐㹣㹫㹭㹴㹣ࠉ㹋㹣㹢㹧㹟
After removing a media, push [Enter] key
㹋㹣㹟㹱㹳㹰㹧㹬㹥
After measuring
>@NH\
㹐㹣㹟㹰ࠉࠉ㸳㸶ࠉ㸭ࠉࠉࠉ㸳ࠉ㸭ࠉࠉ㸯㸮 THRࠉ㸭ࠉOFFࠉ㸭ࠉP_NOT
>!@NH\ THRࠉ 㸸threshold value to
judge a media setting or not
㹃㹢㹥㹣ࠉࠉ㸶㸰ࠉ㸭ࠉࠉࠉ㸳ࠉ㸭ࠉࠉ㸯㸮
ࠉOFFࠉ 㸸sensor reflecting value
when sensor LED is OFF
Push [Enter] or [Cancel] during [EdgeXXX㸭XXX㸭XXX] display ࠉP_NOT㸸sensor reflecting value
when removing a paper
㸿㹂㹈ࠉ㸯㸸㹐㹣㹟㹰㸭㹃㹢㹥㹣㹑㹣㹬㸬
5.6.1 Rear/ Edge Sensor Adjustment 271

(2) Measuring Platen reflecting value (Sensing Platen) (3) Input
㨀㧵㧼 NOTE
• Measuring AD values of Edge sensor at four positions of Platen. • Do not usually use this function.
• Measuring AD values at the four positions as shown below, and the AD values is • Use only in:
displayed on the panel. When any problems are occurred at paper recognition, while adjusting the sensor
at Calibration.
Origin side When adjustment is needed for using environment (environment light , media type
㨄㨄㧠‫ޓޓޓޓޓޓޓޓޓ‬㨄㨄㧟‫ޓޓޓޓޓޓޓޓޓޓޓ‬㨄㨄㧞‫ޓޓޓޓޓޓޓޓޓޓޓޓ‬㨄㨄㧝 and so on) of user.
Platen • You can Set the sensor parameter manually which was adjusted automatically at
Calibration.
• Setting values are displayed immediately.
㹐㹣㹫㹭㹴㹣ࠉ㹋㹣㹢㹧㹟 AD (Sensor reflecting value) : 0 to 255
After removing paper push [Enter] key
㹋㹣㹟㹱㹳㹰㹧㹬㹥
[Enter]
㸿㹢㹨㸬ࠉ㸯㸸㹐㹣㹟U㸭㹃㹢㹥㹣㹑㹣㹬㸬
㹃㹢㹥㹣ࠉ㹖㹖㸲ࠉ㹖㹖㸱ࠉ㹖㹖㸰ࠉ㹖㹖㸯 [Enter]
[Cancel]
㹐㹣㹟㹰㹃㹢㹥㹣㸸㹇㹬㹮㹳㹲
[Enter] or [Cancel] When saving setting values,
[Enter]
push [Enter] key while
㸿㹢㹨㸬ࠉ㸯㸸㹐㹣㹟㹰㸭㹃㹢㹥㹣㹑㹣㹬㸬 >@ displaying͆Edge VR͇
㹐㹣㹟㹰㹔㹐ࠉࠉ㸸㸰㸳㸳ࠉࠉ㸿㹂㸸㸰㸳㸳
>!@
㹐㹣㹟㹰㹅㸿㹇㹌㸸㹊ࠉࠉࠉࠉ㸿㹂㸸㸰㸳㸳
㹃㹢㹥㹣㹔㹐ࠉࠉ㸸㸰㸳㸳ࠉࠉ㸿㹂㸸㸰㸳㸳
㹃㹢㹥㹣㹅㸿㹇㹌㸸㹊ࠉࠉࠉࠉ㸿㹂㸸㸰㸳㸳
Setting by 㹔㹐ࠉࠉ㸸㸮㹼㸰㸳㸳
ࠕ㸩ࠖ/ࠕ㸫ࠖKey 㹅㸿㹇㹌㸸㹊㹼㹆
5.6.1 Rear/ Edge Sensor Adjustment 272

5.6.2 Head Nozzle Check Menu 㨀㧵㧼

This menu is used to check if Head nozzles can discharge ink correctly from the printing • The following pattern will be printed.
results. • The letters and arrow will not be printed.
• Adjustment pattern is different in 4 colors, 6 colors and 8 colors.
㨀㧵㧼
PHGLDIHHGLQJ
SULQWLQJ
• CW : In this manual, it indicates the direction from origin to opposite side of the
origin.
• CCW : In this manual, it indicates the direction from opposite side of the origin to 4 color
origin.
To check Head nozzles, follow the procedure below.
1 Set media as necessary.

Nozzles H G+H G F E+F E D C+D C B A+B A H G F E D C B A
• After media is set, the machine prints out head nozzle check patterns in the Color M M M Y Y Y C C C K K K M M Y Y C C K K
following modes:
6 color (G and H are using Cleanig fluid, so they are not discharged.)
• 1 pass, Uni-D
• PF: 360 dpi
• CR: 360 dpi
• 320cps
• VSD4, Large dot
2 Nozzle check pattern will be printed. Nozzles F E D C B A F E D C B A
Color Lm Lc Y M C K Lm Lc Y M C K
W 8 color
[Enter]
[Cancel]
㸿㹢㹨㸬ࠉ㸰㸸㹌㹭㹸㹸㹪㹣
㹑㹣㹲ࠉ㹎㹟㹮㹣㹰 If media is not set

6HWSDSHU
Nozzles H G F E D C B A H G F E D C B A
㸿㹢㹨㹳㹱㹲㹫㹣㹬㹲ࠉ㹎㹰㹧㹬㹲 Dispkay during adjustment printing
Color Mt Wh Lm Lc Y M C K Mt Wh Lm Lc Y M C K
>!@ W 7 color
press [Enter]
㹌㹭㹸㹸㹪㹣㹁㹦㹩㸸㹁㹪㹣㹟㹬㹧㹬㹥 to Cleaning menu
>@
[Enter]
㹌㹭㹸㹸㹪㹣㹁㹦㹩㸸㹎㹰㹧㹬㹲
Nozzles H G F E D C B A H G F E D C B A
Color Mt Wh Lm Lc Y M C K Mt Wh Lm Lc Y M C K
5.6.2 Head Nozzle Check Menu 273

3 If any abnormal conditions are found in the ink discharge status of Head nozzles, perform
cleaning.
[Enter]
[Cancel]
㸿㹢㹨ࠉࠉ㸰㸸㹌㹭㹸㹸㹪㹣㹁㹦㹩
[Enter]
㹑㹣㹲ࠉ㹋㹣㹢㹧㹟 If media is not set

Set Media
㸿㹢㹨㹳㹱㹲㹫㹣㹬㹲ࠉ㹎㹰㹧㹬㹲 Display during adjustment printing
>!@
㹌㹭㹸㹸㹪㹣㹁㹦㹩㸬㸸㹁㹪㹣㹟㹬㹧㹬㹥
>@
㹌㹭㹸㹸㹪㹣㹁㹦㹩㸬㸸㹎㹰㹧㹬㹲 [Enter] When Printing is selected
[Enter] When Cleaning is selected
>!@
After finishing cleaning,
㹁㹪㹣㹟㹬㸯㸸㹑㹦㹭㹰㹲 adjustment pattern is printed
automatically.
>@
㹁㹪㹣㹟㹬㸰㸸㹌㹭㹰㹫㹟㹪
㹁㹪㹣㹟㹬㸱㸸㹊㹭㹬㹥
[Cancel]
[Enter]
㹁㹪㹣㹟㹬㹧㹬㹥
4 After cleaning, print out head nozzle check patterns again.
5.6.2 Head Nozzle Check Menu 274

5.6.3 Skew Check Menu

Feed the paper to check the skew size using Sensor.
When you select this item from the Adjustment Menu, the printer feeds the loaded media
(specified amount) and checks difference of the media edge positions before and after the
media feed detected by Sensor.
NOTE
Before performing skew check, ensure that the media is set correctly.
The printer determines the media setting reference position during the first detection
of media left edge. Therefore, the media that is not set correctly may cause errors as
below:
• Media error occurs during skew check and printer operation stops.
• During media initial operation after power is turned on, "Undefined Paper" is
frequently displayed.
• When the skew result is beyond ±9.99mm, +9.99mm or -9.99mm is displayed.
㹁㹦㹣㹡㹩ࠉ㸱㸸㹒㹣㹱㹲
[Enter]
[Cancel] [Enter]
㹒㹣㹱㹲ࠉ㸱㸸㹁㹦㹣㹡㹩㹑㹩㹣㹵
[Enter]
Set by [+]/[-] key
㹋㹣㹢㹧㹟㹑㹪㹟㹬㹲㸸ࠉࠉࠉࠉࠉ㸯㸬㸮㹫 0.1 to 10.0㹫(0.1㹫
increments)
[Enter]
㹑㹣㹲ࠉ㹋㹣㹢㹧㹟 If a media is not set

after setting a media
㹃㹶㹡㸬ࠉ㹑㹩㹣㹵
Paper edge detection finishes normally
㹑㹩㹣㹵㹐㹣㹱㹳㹪㹲㸸ࠉࠉ㸩㸮㸬㸮㸯㹫㹫
5.6.3 Skew Check Menu 275

5.6.4 Head Slant Check Menu

Check the Head slant (Horizontal direction, vertical direction) from the print result.
Perform mechanical adjustment as required.
Since there are eight nozzle lines per Head, adjustment has to be done so that each nozzle
line's slope is even.
㨀㧵㧼
• Uni-D (Uni-Direction) indicates uni-directional printing.
• Bi-D (Bi-Direction) indicates bi-directional printing.
The items for head slant is as follow
Items Contents
Head Slant : Slant1 • Head slant check horizontal direction (left/
right)
• Printing method
1Pass, UniD/BiD, CR 360dpi, PF 360dpi
320cps, VSD1, Small
Head Slant : Slant 2 • Head slant check vertical direction
• Printing method
1Pass, UniD/BiD, CR 360dpi, PF 360dpi
320cps, VSD1, Small
NOTE
• When printing "Head slant: Slant1" adjustment pattern, the pattern for Head slant
check vertical direction is also printed.
• The adjustment pattern printed in “Head Slant : Slant 1” is used and adjustment
of head slant (vertical direction) is possible.
5.6.4 Head Slant Check Menu 276

(1) “Head slant: slant 1”

(1-a)Confirming horizontal direction (left / right) (4-color setting)
Print Adjustment pattern

Origin side
㹁㹦㹣㹡㹩ࠉ㸱㸸㸿㹢㹨㹳㹱㹲㹫㹣㹬㹲 following adjustment pattern is printed on
three places or less.

[Enter]
for checking for checking
[Enter]
Vertical slant Horizontal slant
㹆㹣㹟㹢㹑㹪㹟㹬㹲㸸㹑㹪㹟㹬㹲㸯
[Enter]
20mm
㸿㹢㹨㹳㹱㹲ࠉ㹆㹣㹟㹢ࠉ㹅㹟㹮
after printing [Enter]
Check the Slant (Horizontal) at Connecting points (Refer to the following and an enlargement.)
Check Head Slant 1 (Horizontal)
㹒㹇㹎
1passࠉUni-D/Bi-D
Check the slant (Horizontal):
ࠉFor CW printing, the nozzles combination are, from the media
origin side, A/C, A/E, B/D, B/F, and B/H.
ࠉ320cps, VSD1, Small dot
BࠉࠉHࠉࠉBࠉࠉBࠉࠉFࠉࠉBࠉࠉBࠉࠉDࠉࠉBࠉࠉAࠉࠉGࠉࠉAࠉࠉAࠉࠉEࠉࠉAࠉࠉAࠉࠉCࠉࠉA Nozzle
Connecting point enlargement㸸Ex. Nozzle A,C

(1) Check th eposition of Black and each color.
ࠉIn ͆‫͇ۑ‬, No need for adjustments.
In ͇͆, it adjust, respectively and be set to
͆‫͇ۑ‬. Refer to the
͆4.7.1ࠕHead Alignment (Horizontal Slant)͇
(2) Repeat printing and adjustment

until a result becomes ͆‫͇ۑ‬.

(1-b)Confirming vertical direction (4-color setting)

According to the width of media, Origin side
following adjustment pattern is printed on

[Enter] three places or less.
[Enter]
[Enter]
20mm
Check the Vertical Slant at Connecting points (Refer to the following and an enlargement.)
Check Head Slant (Vertical)
TIP
1passࠉUni-D/Bi-D
Check the slant (Vertical):
ࠉFor CW/CCW printing, the nozzles combination are, from the
media origin side, A, C, E, and G.
Nozzle
connecting point enlargement㸸Ex. Nozzle A

(1) Check th eposition of 㹉 and each color.
͆4.7.2ࠕHead Alignment (Vertical Height)͇


(1-c)Confirming horizontal direction (left / right) (6-color setting)

Origin side
㹁㹦㹣㹡㹩ࠉ㸱㸸㸿㹢㹨㹳㹱㹲㹫㹣㹬㹲 following adjustment pattern is prnted
on three places or less.
Media feed direction

[Enter]
[Enter] for checking Vertical slant for checking Horizontal slant
[Enter] 20mm
Check Head Slant (Horizontal)
TIP
1pass Uni-D/Bi-D
Check the slant (Horizontal) :
origin side, A/C, A/E, B/D and B/F.
Nozzle BࠉࠉFࠉࠉBࠉࠉBࠉࠉDࠉࠉBࠉࠉAࠉࠉEࠉࠉAࠉࠉAࠉࠉCࠉࠉA

͆4.7.1ࠕHead Adjustment (Horizontal Slant)͇


(1-d)Confirming vertical direction (6-color setting)

Origin side
㹁㹦㹣㹡㹩ࠉ㸱㸸㸿㹢㹨㹳㹱㹲㹫㹣㹬㹲 According to the width of media,
following adjustment pattern is printed on
[Enter]
three places or less.

[Enter]
[Enter]
20mm
Check the Vertical Slant at Connecting points (Refer to the following and an enlargement.)
TIP
1passࠉUni-D/Bi-D
media origin side, A, C, and E.
Nozzle

͆4.7.2ࠕHead Adjustment (Vertical)͇ࠋ


(1-e)Confirming horizontal direction (left / right) (white 8-color setting)

Origin side
[Enter] following adjustment pattern is prnted

[Enter] for checking for checking
[Enter]
20mm
TIP
1pass Uni-D/Bi-D
origin side, A/C, A/E, A/G, B/D, B/F and B/H.



(1-f)Confirming vertical direction (white 8-color setting)

Origin side
following adjustment pattern is prnted
[Enter]

[Enter]
[Enter]
20mm
Check the Slant (Vertical) at Connecting points (Refer to the following and an enlargement.)
TIP
1passࠉUni-D/Bi-D
Nozzle



(1-g)Confirming horizontal direction (left / right) (white 7-color setting)

Origin side
[Enter] following adjustment pattern is prnted

[Enter] for checking for checking
[Enter]
20mm
TIP
1pass Uni-D/Bi-D
origin side, A/C, A/E, A/G, B/D, B/F and B/H.



(1-h)Confirming vertical direction (white 7-color setting)

Origin side
following adjustment pattern is prnted
[Enter]

[Enter]
[Enter]
20mm
Check the Slant (Vertical) at Connecting points (Refer to the following and an enlargement.)
TIP
1passࠉUni-D/Bi-D
Nozzle



(2) “Head Slant: Slant2”

Confirm the vertical slant check of the print head from the printed result. Follow the procedures below to check the head slant.
(2-a)4-color setting

1.Print the head adjustment pattern (Vertical slant) connecting point 2
Origin
㹁㹦㹣㹡㹩ࠉ㸱㸸㸿㹢㹨㹳㹱㹲㹫㹣㹬㹲 PP side
[Enter] pattern 2
㸿㹢㹨㸬ࠉ㸰㸸㹆㹣㹟㹢㹑㹪㹟㹬㹲 PP
[Enter]
㹆㹣㹟㹢㹑㹪㹟㹬㹲㸸㹑㹪㹟㹬㹲㸰
[Enter] pattern 1
After the Head height is set to Low. CCW
after 㸿㹢㹨㹳㹱㹲㹫㹣㹬㹲ࠉ㹎㹰㹧㹬㹲
printing
TIP
1passࠉUni-D/Bi-D
PF:360dpiࠉCR:360dpi CW
pattern1:For printing. in the order of ABCDEFGH.

ࠉ320cps,VSD4,Large dot, CW/CCW
pattern2:For printing, in the order of ACEG.
ࠉ320cps,VSD1,Small dot, CW/CCW
2. Check the connecting point 1 of the pattern 1. ձ ղ ճ

ձࠉAdjustment is not required.
ղࠉMove the head base mounting plate down.
connecting point 1
ճࠉMove the head base mounting plate up.
For details of adjustment procedure

4.7.2 Head Adjustment (Vertical Slant)
‫ۑ‬
3. Check the connecting point 2 of the pattern 2. connecting point 2 ձ ղ ճ


‫ۑ‬
4. After performing mechanical adjustment, the head adjustment (vertical slant) pattern is printed again.
5. Repeat steps 1 to 3 until the result of the connecting points becomes ͆‫͇ۑ‬.

(2-b)6-color setting

Origin
[Enter] pattern 2
[Enter]
[Enter] pattern 1
printing
TIP
1passࠉUni-D/Bi-D
pattern1:For printing. in the order of ABCDEF.

pattern2:For printing, in the order of ACE.

connecting point 1

‫ۑ‬


‫ۑ‬

(2-c)White 8-color setting

Origin
[Enter] pattern 2
[Enter]
[Enter] pattern 1
printing
TIP
1passࠉUni-D/Bi-D


connecting point 1

‫ۑ‬


‫ۑ‬

(2-d)White 7-color setting

Origin
[Enter] pattern 2
[Enter]
[Enter] pattern 1
printing
TIP
1passࠉUni-D/Bi-D


connecting point 1

‫ۑ‬


‫ۑ‬

㨀㧵㧼
Printing Method for Head Slant Check Pattern 2
(The figure below describes the printing method as 8-color. CW/CCW printing
sequence is similar for 4-color/6-color/8-color/7-color.)
Nozzles in use
ࠉ 4 color/8 color:A,C,E,G
CW Print Origin side
ࠉ 6 color:A,C,E
media feed direction

1. Printed by the order of nozzle
A,C,E,G from the origin side.
G E C A
1/360inch
2. The media is fed (1/360inch).
CCW Print
3. Printed by the order of nozzle
G,E,C,A from the opposite side
of origin.
ࠉ (There is one dot overlapping
the first printed pattern.
(Enlarged image)
1/360
㻌㻌㻌㼕㼚㼏㼔 1/180
㻌㻌㻌㼕㼚㼏㼔
CCW CW

5.6.5 Uni-D/ Bi-D Adjustment Menu Table 5-1 Uni-D/Bi-D adjustment items(continued)
This menu is used to adjust the gap of the nozzle rows and perform the print position of the Panel contents
bi-directional printing. Bi-D ALL Bi-D ALL adjustment of all items
• For the gap of the nozzle rows, check the printing results of the Uni-D
adjustment check patterns and adjust gaps. Table 5-2 The details of the adjustment item
• For the print position of the bi-directional printing, check the printing results of Adjustment 1st sub Contents Refer to
the Bi-D adjustment check patterns and adjust the positions. Item item
NOTE Uni-D Setup Enter the adjusted value for "(5-a) Uni-D Setup
each line when adjusting the
• “Uni-D (Uni-Direction)” stands for a print of one-way direction. misalignment of other lines
• “Bi-D (Bi-Direction) ” stands for a print of two-way direction. between the reference line.
• Since the characteristics of the print head, only one adjuted value can be applied Adjusted value input unit:
for all nozzles. 720dpi
• CPS (Characters Per Second) is the unit for printing speed. Print Print out Adjust pattern with "(1) Uni-D Print
• Print the pattern using only line C (Cyan, odd-numbered lines) and enter the set the current adjusted value
value. and check the misalignment
• If ALL is selected, all the possible combination of the the wave form (VSD1/VSD3/ between the reference line
VSD4) and speed (320cps/400cps) are used. and other lines.
• When you select High, the panel display changes from “Low" to “High". Bi-D Setup Enter the misalignment "(5-c) Bi-D ALL Setup
degree of bidirectional
.
printing of the reference line.
Table 5-1 Uni-D/Bi-D adjustment items
Print1 Print out the patterns with "(2) Bi-D Print 1
Panel contents the current parameters and
the patterns with the current
Uni-D 320 VSD1 CW adjustment with 320cps, VSD1 parameters ±2, ±4, ±6, and
Uni-D 320 VSD3 CW adjustment with 320cps, VSD3 ±8 (one vertical line with
each parameter).
Uni-D 320 VSD4 CW adjustment with 320cps, VSD4 Check the degree of
misalignment.
Uni-D 400 VSD1 CW adjustment with 400cps, VSD1
Print2 Print out the patterns with "(3) Bi-D Print 2
Uni-D 400 VSD3 CW adjustment with 400cps, VSD3 the current parameters and
Uni-D 400 VSD4 CW adjustment with 400cps, VSD4 check the degree of
misalignment.
Bi-D 320 VSD1 Bi-D adjustment with 320cps, VSD4
Bi-D ALL Setup Enter the misalignment "(5-b) Bi-D Setup
Bi-D 320 VSD3 Bi-D adjustment with 320cps, VSD2 degree of bidirectional
printing of the reference
Bi-D 320 VSD4 Bi-D adjustment with 320cps, VSD3 line.(all Bi-D items)
Bi-D 400 VSD1 Bi-D adjustment with 400cps, VSD1 Print3 Print out the current "(5-c) Bi-D ALL Setup
parameters of all Bi-D items
and check the current
Bi-D 400 VSD4 Bi-D adjustment with 400cps, VSD4 misalignment.
5.6.5 Uni-D/ Bi-D Adjustment Menu 290

㹁㹦㹣㹡㹩ࠉ㸳㸸㸿㹢㹨㹳㹱㹲㹫㹣㹬㹲
[Enter]
㸿㹢㹨㸬ࠉ㸳㸸㹓㹬㹧㸭㹀㹧ࠉࠉ㹊㹭㹵
NOTE
[Enter] Only when selecting Uni/Bi Lo, the media thickness entry
window is displayed.The value entered here is used as the
default for the media thickness in user mode.
㹋㹣㹢㹧㹟ࠉ㹒㹦㹩㸸ࠉࠉࠉࠉ㸯㸵㸮㹳㹫
Press [+] or [-] key to change the adjustment values.
Adjustment range㸸80㹼2800ȣm
Entry unit㸸10ȣm
adjustment range㸸10ȣm
[Enter] Default : 170ȣm㸦media thickness used in the factory)
[>] [<]
[Enter]
㹊㹭㹵ࠉ㸯㸸㹓㹬㹧㹂ࠉ㸱㸰㸮ࠉ㹔㹑㹂㸯
[<]
㹊㹭㹵ࠉ㸰㸸㹓㹬㹧㹂ࠉ㸱㸰㸮ࠉ㹔㹑㹂㸱㹓㹬㹧㹂ࠉ㸱㸰㸮ࠉ㹔㹑㹂㸯㸸㹑㹣㹲㹳㹮
[<]
㹊㹭㹵ࠉ㸱㸸㹓㹬㹧㹂ࠉ㸱㸰㸮ࠉ㹔㹑㹂㸲
㹓㹬㹧㹂ࠉ㸱㸰㸮ࠉ㹔㹑㹂㸯㸸㹎㹰㹧㹬㹲
㹊㹭㹵ࠉ㸲㸸㹓㹬㹧㹂ࠉ㸲㸮㸮ࠉ㹔㹑㹂㸯
㹊㹭㹵ࠉ㸳㸸㹓㹬㹧㹂ࠉ㸲㸮㸮ࠉ㹔㹑㹂㸱 (1) Uni-D㸦Print) (5-a) Uni-D㸦Setup)
㹊㹭㹵ࠉ㸴㸸㹓㹬㹧㹂ࠉ㸲㸮㸮ࠉ㹔㹑㹂㸲
[Enter]
㹊㹭㹵ࠉ㸵㸸㹀㹧㹂ࠉࠉ㸱㸰㸮ࠉ㹔㹑㹂㸯
㹊㹭㹵ࠉ㸶㸸㹀㹧㹂ࠉࠉ㸱㸰㸮ࠉ㹔㹑㹂㸱
[<]
㹊㹭㹵ࠉ㸷㸸㹀㹧㹂ࠉࠉ㸱㸰㸮ࠉ㹔㹑㹂㸲
㹀㹧㹂ࠉ㸱㸰㸮ࠉ㹔㹑㹂㸯㸸㹑㹣㹲㹳㹮
㹊㹭㹵㸯㸮㸸㹀㹧㹂ࠉࠉ㸲㸮㸮ࠉ㹔㹑㹂㸯 [>]
㹀㹧㹂ࠉ㸱㸰㸮ࠉ㹔㹑㹂㸯㸸㹎㹰㹧㹬㹲㸯
㹊㹭㹵㸯㸯㸸㹀㹧㹂ࠉࠉ㸲㸮㸮ࠉ㹔㹑㹂㸱
㹀㹧㹂ࠉ㸱㸰㸮ࠉ㹔㹑㹂㸯㸸㹎㹰㹧㹬㹲㸰
㹊㹭㹵㸯㸰㸸㹀㹧㹂ࠉࠉ㸲㸮㸮ࠉ㹔㹑㹂㸲
(5-b) Bi-D(Setup) (2) Bi-D(Print1) (3) Bi-D(Print2)
[Enter]
㹊㹭㹵㸯㸱㸸㹀㹧㹂ࠉࠉ㸿㹊㹊
[<]
㹀㹧㹂ࠉ㸿㹊㹊㸸㹑㹣㹲㹳㹮
[>]
㹀㹧㹂ࠉ㸿㹊㹊㸸㹎㹰㹧㹬㹲㸱
(5-c) Bi-D ALL (Setup) (4) Bi-D (Print3)

(1) Uni-D Print
NOTE
Adjustment patterns differ depending on the setting (TypeA or TypeB).
(12)Uni/Bi Ptn
[Enter]
㸿㹢㹨㸬ࠉ㸳㸸㹓㹬㹧㸭㹀㹧ࠉ㹊㹭㹵 Select from Low or High

[Enter]
㹊㹭㹵㸰㸸㹓㹬㹧㹂ࠉ㸱㸰㸮ࠉ㹔㹑㹂㸱 Select from 1 to 6
[Enter]
㹓㹬㹧㹂ࠉ㸱㸰㸮ࠉ㹔㹑㹂㸱㸸㹎㹰㹧㹬㹲 Select from Print or Setup

[Enter]
[Cancel]
㹑㹣㹲ࠉ㹋㹣㹢㹧㹟 When paper is not set

[Cancel]
㸿㹢㹨㹳㹱㹲ࠉ㹆㹣㹟㹢ࠉ㹅㹟㹮 When the head heights differ
after setting the head height
When the temperature is below the
[Cancel]
㹕㹟㹰㹫㹧㹬㹥ࠉ㹓㹮㸸㹎㹰㹣ࠉࠉ㸱㸶ࢎ㹁 temperature set in user mode:
Hold down [Cancel] to warm up, and
after warming up then start printing
㸿㹢㹨㹳㹱㹲㹫㹣㹬㹲ࠉ㹎㹰㹧㹬㹲 An adjustment pattern is printed
after printing

1 Prints out adjustment pattern (the following is the example of Uni-D 320 VSD3)
6-color setting
Type A
㨀㧵㧼 Uni-Lo
Dot diameter: Medium 320cps
VSD3
Nozzle: Print the pattern in the order of A to H from the origin side
base line: 4-color:C-Cyan/6-color, 8-color: C-Magenta
Print direction: CW, 1 Pass F E D C B A
4-color setting Type B F E D C B A
Type A
Uni-Lo
Uni-Lo
320cps D
320cps
VSD3
VSD3
b

([SUHVVWKHQR]]OH
H G F E D C B A
ZKLFKPDGHSULQWV
Type B white 8-color setting

H G F E D C B A
Type A
Uni-Lo
Uni-Lo D 320cps
320cps VSD3
VSD3

H G F E D C B A
b
Item carried out is printed

Panel Menu ࠉ: printed ࠉࠉࠉ
UniD320 VSD1 ࠉ: Uni-Lo/Hi 320cps VSD1 Type B H G F E D C B A
UniD320 VSD3 ࠉ: Uni-Lo/Hi 320cps VSD3
UniD400 VSD3 ࠉ: Uni-Lo/Hi 400cps VSD3 Uni-Lo
UniD400 VSD4 ࠉ: Uni-Lo/Hi 400cps VSD4 320cps
(Lo or Hi is printed in a part in Lo/Hi.)
VSD3

a: media feed direction
b: adjust the setting value so that these points match

white 7-color setting

Type A
Uni-Lo
320cps
VSD3

H G F E D C B A
Type B H G F E D C B A
Uni-Lo
320cps
VSD3

2 If connecting points above do not match, enter adjust values under ‘setup’.
"(5-a) Uni-D Setup
3 After entering the adjustment values, prints out adjustment pattern again and check.
4 Repeat steps 1 through 3 until connecting points match.

(2) Bi-D Print 1
NOTE
(12)Uni/Bi Ptn
[Enter]
㸿㹢㹨㸬ࠉ㸳㸸㹓㹬㹧㸭㹀㹧ࠉ㹊㹭㹵 Select from Low or High

[Enter]
㹊㹭㹵㸵㸸㹀㹧㹂ࠉ㸱㸰㸮ࠉ㹔㹑㹂㸯 Select from 7 to 12
[Enter]
㹀㹧㹂ࠉ㸱㸰㸮ࠉ㹔㹑㹂㸯㸸㹎㹰㹧㹬㹲㸯 Select from Print or Setup
[Cancel]

[Cancel]
When the temperature is below the
[Cancel] temperature set in user mode:
㹕㹟㹰㹫㹧㹬㹥ࠉ㹓㹮㸸㹎㹰㹣ࠉࠉ㸱㸶ࢎ㹁 Hold down [Cancel] to warm up, and
after printing

1 Prints out adjustment pattern. (the following is the example of Bi-D 320 VSD1)
dot diameter: Medium 6-color/white 8-color/white 7-color setting
Nozzle:print using only C (4-color:Cyan, 6/7/8-color: Magenta)
Print direction:CW, CCW Type A Bi-Lo
320cps
VSD1
㨀㧵㧼
For details on how to print, refer to the following page.
-8 -6 -4 -2 C +2 +4 +6 +8
Type B
4-color setting
-8 -6 -4 -2 C +2 +4 +6 +8
Type A Bi-Lo
320cps D Bi-Lo
VSD1 320cps
VSD1
b

-8 -6 -4 -2 C +2 +4 +6 +8
Type B
2 When the above connection points do not match, enter the adjustment value in Setup
-8 -6 -4 -2 C +2 +4 +6 +8 menu.
(5-b)Bi-D Setup
D
Bi-Lo
320cps
3 After entering the adjustment value, print the adjustment pattern again and check.
VSD1 4 A Repeat steps 1 to 3 until each connection point matches.

b

Panel Menuࠉ : printed ࠉࠉࠉ
BiD320 VSD1 ࠉ: Bi-Lo/Hi 320cps VSD1
(Lo or Hi is printed in a part in Lo/Hi.)
a:Media feed direction

b:Check the set value in which the connecting points match.

㨀㧵㧼
Printing Method for Bi-D Adjustment.The figure below describes the printing method as 8-color.(Similar method is applied to 4-color/6-color/7-color/8-color.)
The printing pass number differs as below:
- VSD1 - 400cps: 10 pass
- Other than VSD1 - 400cps: 5 pass.
<Other than VSD1-400cps> origin side <VSD1-400cps> orign
CW Print CW Print
-8 -6 -4 -2 C +2 +4 +6 +8 -8 -6 -4 -2 C +2 +4 +6 +8
medi afeed direction

1 pass 1 pass
㸦CW㸧㸦CW㸧

CCW Print CCW Print

-8 -6 -4 -2 C +2 +4 +6 +8 -8 -6 -4 -2 C +2 +4 +6 +8
2 pass 2 pass
㸦CCW㸧㸦CCW㸧

CCW Print CCW Print

-8 -6 -4 -2 C +2 +4 +6 +8 -8 -6 -4 -2 C +2 +4 +6 +8
3 pass 3 pass
㸦CCW㸧㸦CCW㸧

CCW Print CCW Print

-8 -6 -4 -2 C +2 +4 +6 +8
4 pass 4 pass to 9 pass (CCW)

㸦CCW㸧 ࠉSimiliarly, print in order of +4, +2, 0, -2, -4 and -6.

CCW Print CCW Print

-8 -6 -4 -2 C +2 +4 +6 +8 -8 -6 -4 -2 C +2 +4 +6 +8
5 pass 10 pass
㸦CCW㸧㸦CCW㸧


(3) Bi-D Print 2
NOTE
(12)Uni/Bi Ptn
[Enter]
㸿㹢㹨㸬ࠉࠉ㸳㸸㹓㹬㹧㸭㹀㹧ࠉ㹊㹭㹵 Select from Low or High

[Enter]
㹊㹭㹵㸵㸸㹀㹧㹂ࠉ㸱㸰㸮ࠉ㹔㹑㹂㸯 Select from 7 to 12
[Enter]
㹀㹧㹂ࠉ㸱㸰㸮ࠉ㹔㹑㹂㸯㸸㹎㹰㹧㹬㹲㸰 Select from Print1,Print2 or Setup
[Cancel]

[Cancel]
[Cancel] When the temperature is below the
Hold down [Cancel] to warm up, and then
after warming up start printing
after printing

1 Prints out adjustment pattern. (the following is the example of Bi-D 320 VSD1)
6-color setting
Dot diameter : Middle Type A
Nozzle : Print the pattern in the order of A to H from the origin side (base line: C-Cyan) Bi-Lo
Print direction : CW, CCW 320cps
VSD3

㨀㧵㧼
F E D C B A
For details on how to print, refer to the following page.
Type B F E D C B A
4-color setting
Type A
Bi-Lo Bi-Lo
320cps D 320cps
VSD1 VSD3
b
([SUHVVWKHQR]]OH
ZKLFKPDGHSULQWV H G F E D C B A
Type B white 7-color setting

H G F E D C B A Type A
Bi-Lo
320cps
Bi-Lo D
VSD3
320cps
VSD1
H G F E D C B A

b

Panel Menuࠉ : printed ࠉࠉࠉ
BiD400 VSD1 ࠉ: Bi-Lo/Hi 400cps VSD1 Bi-Lo
BiD400 VSD4 ࠉ: Bi-Lo/Hi 400cps VSD4 320cps
(Lo or Hi is printed in a part in Lo/Hi.) VSD3

a:Media feed direction.

b:Check the set value in which the connecting points match.

white 8-color setting 㨀㧵㧼

Type A Details of printing
Bi-Lo
320cps origin side
VSD3 CW Print
H G F E D C B A


H G F E D C B A
1 pass
㸦CW㸧
Nozzle C

Bi-Lo CCW Print H G F E D C B A

320cps
VSD3 2 pass
㸦CCW㸧
print in the order of line A
to H from the origin point

menu.
(5-a)Uni-D Setup
3 After entering the adjustment value, print the adjustment pattern again and check
4 Repeat steps 1 to 3 until each connection point matches

(4) Bi-D Print 3
㨀㧵㧼
When only Bi-D ALL is selected.
[Enter]
㸿㹢㹨㸬ࠉࠉ㸳㸸㹓㹬㹧㸭㹀㹧ࠉ㹊㹭㹵 Select from Low or High
[Enter]
㹊㹭㹵㸯㸱㸸㹀㹧㹂ࠉ㸿㹊㹊
[Enter]
㹀㹧㹂ࠉ㸿㹊㹊㸸㹎㹰㹧㹬㹲㸱 Select from Print1,Print2 or Setup
[Cancel]

[Cancel]

[Cancel] When the temperature is below the
Hold down [Cancel] to warm up, and
1 Prints out adjustment pattern.

• Prints all items of the (3)Bi-D Print 2 adjustment pattern.
Dot diameter: Medium

Nozzle: Print the pattern in the order of A to H.
Adjustment pattern: Refer to (3)Bi-D Print 2
menu.
(5-a)Uni-D Setup
3 After entering the adjustment value, print the adjustment pattern again and check.
4 Repeat steps 1 to 3 until each connection point matches.

(5) Setup menu (5-b)Bi-D Setup

Select the Setup menu for parameter, and then press [Enter] to renew the parameter.
㨀㧵㧼
㨀㧵㧼 The default values for Bi-D adjustment is as follows:
The default value is set to values that are suited for Mutoh ink. Item default Item default
values values
Enter setting values from panel. BiD Low 320 VSD1 -40 BiD High 320 VSD1 -78
320 VSD3 -42 320 VSD3 -92
(5-a)Uni-D Setup
320 VSD4 -36 320 VSD4 -81
400 VSD1 -53 400 VSD1 -100
㨀㧵㧼
The default values for Uni-D adjustment is set to all "0" regardless of 400 VSD3 -54 400 VSD3 -114
carriage speed and head height. 400 VSD4 -47 400 VSD4 -100
Inputting Uni-D adjustment value (when Uni-D 320 VSD1 is selected) Inputting Bi-D adjustment value (when Bi-D 320 VSD4 is selected)
㹊㹭㹵ࠉ㸯㸸㹓㹬㹧࣮㹂ࠉ㸱㸰㸮ࠉ㹔㹑㹂㸯
[Enter] 㹊㹭㹵ࠉ㸷㸸㹀㹧࣮㹂ࠉ㸱㸰㸮ࠉ㹔㹑㹂㸲
㹓㹬㹧࣮㹂ࠉ㸱㸰㸮ࠉ㹔㹑㹂㸯㸸㹑㹣㹲㹳㹮 [Enter]
[Enter]
[Enter] 㹀㹧࣮㹂ࠉ㸱㸰㸮ࠉ㹔㹑㹂㸲㸸㹑㹣㹲㹳㹮
[Enter] [Enter]
㹓㹬㹧㹂㸱㸰㸮ࠉ㹔㸯ࠉ㸡㸯ࠉ㸿㸸ࠉࠉࠉ㸮
[Enter] >@ Press [+] or [-] key to change
the setting values.
㹓㹬㹧㹂㸱㸰㸮ࠉ㹔㸯ࠉ㸡㸯ࠉ㹀㸸ࠉࠉࠉ㸮㹀㹧㹂ࠉ㸱㸰㸮ࠉ㹔㹑㹂㸲ࠉ㸡㸯㸸ࠉࠉࠉ㸮 adjustment unit㸸1 / 2880 inch
>!@ >!@ >@ adjustment range㸸-400㹼400
#1㸸Head Gap Low
㹓㹬㹧㹂㸱㸰㸮ࠉ㹔㸯ࠉ㸡㸯ࠉ㹂㸸ࠉࠉࠉ㸮㹀㹧㹂ࠉ㹃㹌㹂 #2㸸Head Gap Low
㹓㹬㹧㹂㸱㸰㸮ࠉ㹔㸯ࠉ㸡㸯ࠉ㹃㸸ࠉࠉࠉ㸮
͆C͇ is not printed, beacause
the position is reffered as the basis
㹓㹬㹧㹂㸱㸰㸮ࠉ㹔㸯ࠉ㸡㸯ࠉ㹄㸸ࠉࠉࠉ㸮 when adjusting.
#1㸸Head Gap Low
㹓㹬㹧㹂㸱㸰㸮ࠉ㹔㸯ࠉ㸡㸯ࠉ㹅㸸ࠉࠉࠉ㸮 #2㸸Head Gap High
㹓㹬㹧㹂㸱㸰㸮ࠉ㹔㸯ࠉ㸡㸯ࠉ㹆㸸ࠉࠉࠉ㸮 Press [+] or [-] key to change

the setting values.
adjustment unit㸸
㹓㹬㹧㹂ࠉ㹃㹌㹂 1 / 720 inch=approx. 35ȣm
adjustment range㸸-100㹼100

(5-c)Bi-D ALL Setup
NOTE
You can adjut all the setting value in Bi-D ALL.
Bi-D all adjustment value
㹊㹭㹵㸯㸱㸸㹀㹧㹂ࠉ㸿㹊㹊
[Enter]
㹀㹧㹂ࠉ㸿㹊㹊㸸㹑㹣㹲㹳㹮
[Enter] [<]
[Enter]
㹀㹧㹂ࠉ㸱㸰㸮ࠉ㹔㹑㹂㸯ࠉ㸡㸯㸸ࠉ㸫㸳㸮
[>]
㹀㹧㹂ࠉ㸱㸰㸮ࠉ㹔㹑㹂㸱ࠉ㸡㸯㸸ࠉ㸫㸲㸰
㹀㹧㹂ࠉ㸱㸰㸮ࠉ㹔㹑㹂㸲ࠉ㸡㸯㸸ࠉ㸫㸰㸷
㹀㹧㹂ࠉ㸲㸮㸮ࠉ㹔㹑㹂㸯ࠉ㸡㸯㸸ࠉ㸫㸲㸯
Press [+] or [-] key to change
㹀㹧㹂ࠉ㸱㸰㸮ࠉ㹔㹑㹂㸱ࠉ㸡㸯㸸ࠉ㸫㸲㸯 the setting values.
adjustment unit㸸
1 / 2880 inch=approx. 8.8ȣm
㹀㹧㹂ࠉ㸱㸰㸮ࠉ㹔㹑㹂㸲ࠉ㸡㸯㸸ࠉ㸫㸲㸰 adjustment range㸸-400㹼400
#1㸸Head Gap Low
㹀㹧㹂ࠉ㹃㹌㹂 #2㸸Head Gap Low
After entering the adjustment value, print the adjustment pattern again and check.

5.6.6 Bi-D Copy

Copy the adjustment values for all items of BiD Low to those of the BiD High adjustment
values.
㨀㧵㧼
The values corrected based on Bi-D Low adjustment values are used as High
adjustment values.
(Uni-D adjustment values are not corrected.)
[Enter]
㸿㹢㹨㸬ࠉ㸴㸸㹀㹧㸫㹂ࠉ㹁㹭㹮㹷
[Cancel]
[Enter]
㹁㹭㹮㹷ࠉ㹊㹭㹵ࠉ㹎㹟㹰㹟㹫㹣㹲㹣㹰㸽
[Enter] Copy it when push down

ࠉࠉࠉࠉAfter completing
5.6.6 Bi-D Copy 304

5.6.7 Margin adjustment Menu 3 Check the printed margin adjustment patterns for the measurement.
1 : Top margin (Front sensor position)
Perform printing and cut the media. Enter the distance between the front sensor heads, cutter 2 : Bottom margin (Rear sensor position)
heads, and edge sensor heads (print start position), and then adjust the top, bottom, and side 3 : Side margin (Print start position)
margins. Measure each margins with a scale and so on.
㨀㧵㧼
Bottom margin
media feeding direction

Default values are as it is the following table.
Item default
Side margin
values
TopMargin 40.0mm
BottomMargin 5.0mm
SideMargin 5.0mm
㹁㹦㹣㹡㹩ࠉ㸱㸸㸿㹢㹨㹳㹱㹲㹫㹣㹬㹲 Top margin

[Enter]
㸿㹢㹨㸬㸷㸸㹋㹟㹰㹥㹧㹬
[Cancel]
[Enter]
㹕㹟㹧㹲ࠉ㹤㹭㹰ࠉ㹟ࠉ㹵㹦㹧㹪㹣 Indication during media cut and the media

detection
After printing
4 Enter each measured values as the parameter.Prints put the margin adjustment pattern
again.
㹕㹟㹧㹲ࠉ㹤㹭㹰ࠉ㹟ࠉ㹵㹦㹧㹪㹣 Indication during media cut and the media
5
detection
Measure the followings on the print result and check that the print margins are adjusted.
[<]
㹒㹭㹮㹋㹟㹰㹥㹧㹬㸸ࠉࠉࠉࠉ㸲㸮㸬㸮㹫㹫
Set by 0.1mm increments using 1:Top margin
+/- key
[>] Top margin 䠖35.0mm~45.0mm 2:Bottom margin
Bottom margin䠖 0.0mm~10.0mm 3:Side margin
㹀㹭㹲㹲㹭㹫㸸ࠉࠉࠉࠉࠉࠉࠉࠉ㸳㸬㸮㹫㹫 SIde margin䠖 0.0mm~10.0mm
㹑㹧㹢㹣㹋㹟㹰㹥㹧㹬㸸ࠉࠉࠉࠉ㸳㸬㸮㹫㹫
At "Side margin"
Press [Enter] ,and
6 If the margins are not adjusted, repeat (2) to (5).
storing an input level

2 After media is set, the printer prints out band feed correction adjustment patterns in the
following modes.
• Black, 1 pass, Uni-D, 360 dpi, 320cps, VSD4, Large dot
5.6.7 Margin adjustment Menu 305

5.6.8 Test Printing Menu 3 Press [Enter] key on Operation panel to start the selected test printing.
This menu is used to print out the following items. [Cancel]

㸿㹢㹨㸬ࠉ㸷㸸㹒㹣㹱㹲㹎㹰㹧㹬㹲
Item Contents [Enter]
[<]
Adjust ALL Prints adjustment patterns.
㹎㹰㹧㹬㹲㸯㸸㸿㹢㹨㹳㹱㹲ࠉ㸿㹊㹊
Parameter ALL Prints each adjustment parameter setting value. [>]
㹎㹰㹧㹬㹲㸰㸸㹎㹟㹰㹟㹫㹣㹲㹣㹰㸿㹊㹊
Log Info. Prints the serious error history.
S/C Log Info. Prints S/C Log history. 㹎㹰㹧㹬㹲㸱㸸㹊㹭㹥ࠉ㹧㹬㹤㹭
㹎㹰㹧㹬㹲㸲㸸㹑㸭㹁ࠉ㹊㹭㹥ࠉ㹇㹬㹤㹭㸬㹑㹣㹲ࠉ㹋㹣㹢㹧㹟
NOTE $IWHUDPHGLDVHW
[Enter]
If you have not registered the serial number of the machine, you must enter the
number before you can start the parameter ALL printing.
㸿㹢㹨㹳㹱㹲㹆㹣㹟㹢ࠉ㹅㹟㹮 Head height in the case of High

㨀㧵㧼㸦In Low after a change㸧
When the temperature is below the temperature set
This menu provides the same functions with "5.8 Sample printing Menu. 㹕㹟㹰㹫㹧㹬㹥ࠉ㹓㹮㸸㹎㹰㹣ࠉ㸱㸶ࢎ㹁 in user mode.
[Cancel] 㸦After Warming up completing㸧 Press [Cancel] to cancel the wait control for
warming up and start printing.
The test printing procedure is as follows.
㸦After Printing㸧
1 Set media as necessary. 㸿㹢㹨㹳㹱㹲㹆㹣㹟㹢ࠉ㹅㹟㹮 Head height in the case of Low
2 After media is set, the machine prints out the following test printings: 㸦In High after a change㸧
When the temperature is below the temperature set
㹕㹟㹰㹫㹧㹬㹥ࠉ㹓㹮㸸㹎㹰㹣ࠉ㸲㸯ࢎ㹁 in user mode.
• Adjust ALL: Prints adjustment patterns. [Cancel] 㸦After Warming up completing㸧
Press [Cancel] to cancel the wait control for
warming up and start printing.
• Parameter ALL: Prints each adjustment parameter setting value. 㸿㹢㹨㹳㹱㹲㹫㹣㹬㹲ࠉ㹎㹰㹧㹬㹲
• Log Info.: Prints the serious error history and smart chip log. 㸦After Printing㸧
• S/C Log Info. : Prints S/C Log history. 㹎㹰㹧㹬㹲㸯㸸㸿㹢㹨㹳㹱㹲ࠉ㸿㹊㹊
5.6.8 Test Printing Menu 306


This menu is used to clean Ink tube and Print head with Clean liquid.
The actual procedure for cleaning of Ink tube and Print head is as follows.
1 Press [Enter] key on Operation panel to determine the Longstore Menu.

2 Remove Cleaning cartridges.
3 Discharge Ink liquid.
4 Install Cleaning cartridges.
5 Charge Cleaning liquid.
6 Remove Cleaning cartridges,discharge Cleaning liquid.
[Enter]
㸿㹢㹨㸬㸯㸮㸸㹊㹭㹬㹥㹱㹲㹭㹰㹣
[Enter]
㹐㹣㹫㹭㹴㹣ࠉ㹁㹟㹰㹲㹰㹧㹢㹥㹣㹱
After having remove all cartridges
㹇㹬㹱㹣㹰㹲ࠉ㹁㹪㹣㹟㹬㹧㹬㹥㹁㹟㹰㹲㸬
Install Cleaning cartridges
㹆㹣㹟㹢ࠉ㹁㹪㹣㹟㹬㹧㹬㹥
Automatically starting discharge Cleaning liquid.
㹐㹣㹫㹭㹴㹣ࠉ㹁㹟㹰㹲㹰㹧㹢㹥㹣㹱
After having remove Cleaning cartridges
㹆㹣㹟㹢ࠉ㹁㹪㹣㹟㹬㹧㹬㹥
Automatically starting discharge Cleaning liquid.
After cleaning is completed.
5.6.9 Longstore Menu 307

5.6.10 Software Counter Initialization Menu

This menu is used to initialize various software counters.
NOTE
The counters are initialized before delivery.Do not initialize them during
maintenance.
The software counters that can be initialized through this menu are as follows.
Counters to be initialized default

values
Cumulative print timer 0
Ink consumption counter (each cartridge) 0
Ink amount count in the cap 0
Waste ink count 0
Use not-filled flag 0
Not-filled flag 1
Use First Start up flag 1
User definition first choice flag 0xFFFFFFF
Plug replacement count of 1L adapter 0
Debug Bit 0
Dot control counter OFF
Pressing [Enter] key on Operation panel in the “Counter Reset?” screen performs the
software counter initialization.
㹙Enter㹛
㸿㹢㹨㸬㸯㸯㸸㹁㹭㹳㹬㹲㹁㹪㹣㹟㹰
㹙Enter㹛
㹁㹭㹳㹬㹲㹣㹰ࠉ㹐㹣㹱㹣㹲㸽
㹙Enter㹛
㹕㹟㹧㹲ࠉ㹤㹭㹰ࠉ㹟ࠉ㹵㹦㹧㹪㹣
After Initializing
5.6.10 Software Counter Initialization Menu 308

5.6.11 Feed Pitch Check Menu 4 Prints out with 320cps, VSD4, Large.
This menu used to check whether there is as error in media feed amount for one band by
reviewing a sample printing.There are no adjustment items. 㨀㧵㧼
Print about 1000mm.
To check the feed pitch, follow the procedure below.

2 Select “Adj : SendPitch. Feed amount
for 1 band
3

Select media feed amount for one band.
㹁㹤㹣㹡㹩ࠉ㸱㸸㸿㹢㹨㹳㹱㹲㹫㹣㹬㹲
㹙Enter㹛
㸿㹢㹨㸬㸯㸰㸸㹑㹣㹬㹢㹎㹧㹲㹡㹦
㹙Enter㹛
>@
㹎㹧㹲㹡㹦㸯㸸㸯㸰㸬㸵㹫㹫㹙Enter㹛
>!@
㹎㹧㹲㹡㹦㸰㸸ࠉ㸴㸬㸱㸳㹫㹫
㹎㹧㹲㹡㹦㸱㸸ࠉ㸱㸬㸯㸵㸳㹫㹫
㹎㹧㹲㹡㹦㸲㸸ࠉ㸯㸬㸳㸶㸵㸳㹫㹫
㹎㹧㹲㹡㹦㸳㸸㹅㹰㹧㹲ࠉ㹊㹣㹬㹥㹲㹦
Finish printing (*1) or [Cancel]
㸿㹢㹨㸬㸯㸰㸸㹑㹣㹬㹢㹎㹧㹲㹡㹦
(*1)Priniting finishes after printing about 1m.
5.6.11 Feed Pitch Check Menu 309

5.6.12 Solid Print Menu • Printing mode: 320cps, VSD4, Large dot
• A printed pattern is as follows:
This menu is used to perform solid nozzle print check (color selection, nozzle selection and
print direction) selection are available. Solid printing
Paper feeding direction

5mm
*The order of printing is as follows:
Specified color nozzles of both series A and B 20mm
A series & B series
only B series
only A series Nozzles for series B only
Nozzles for series A only

[Enter]
5mm
㸿㹢㹨㸬㸯㸱㸸㹄㹧㹪㹪㹎㹟㹲㹲㹣㹰㹬
[Enter]
>@
㹁㹭㹪㹭㹰㸸㹉 Press [>] or [<] key to select

color to check.
>!@
㹁㹭㹪㹭㹰㸸㹁
㹁㹭㹪㹭㹰㸸㹗
㹁㹭㹪㹭㹰㸸㹋
[Enter]
>@
Press [>] or [<] key to slect
㹌㹭㹸㹸㹪㹣㸸㸿㹊㹊 using nozzles to to check.
>!@
ALL : All nozzles
ODD : Odd numbered nozzles
㹌㹭㹸㹸㹪㹣㸸㹍㹂㹂
EVEN : Even numbered nozzles
㹌㹭㹸㹸㹪㹣㸸㹃㹔㹃㹌
[Enter]
>@
Press [>] or [<] key to select
㹂㹧㹰㸸㹁㹕
printing direction to check.
>!@ CW : Print by CW scanning
CCW : Print by CCW scanning
㹂㹧㹰㸸㹁㹁㹕
5.6.12 Solid Print Menu 310

5.7 Cleaning Menu VJ628XE-M-00
5.7 Cleaning Menu

This menu is used to clean Print head.
There is the next diagnosis item on the cleaning menu.
Diagnosis item Description

Short Cleaning Short
Normal Cleaning Normal
Long Cleaning Long
㨀㧵㧼
After cleaning, operation panel displays the selected cleaning menu.
[Cancel]
㹁㹦㹣㹡㹩ࠉ㸲㸸㹁㹪㹣㹟㹬㹧㹬㹥
[Enter] >@
㹒㹧㹫㹣㸯㸸㹑㹦㹭㹰㹲
>!@
㹒㹧㹫㹣㸰㸸㹌㹭㹰㹫㹟㹪
㹒㹧㹫㹣㸱㸸㹊㹭㹬㹥
[Enter]
㹁㹪㹣㹟㹬㹧㹬㹥

5.8 Sample printing Menu VJ628XE-M-00
5.8 Sample printing Menu Diagnosis item Contents
This menu is used to print out a sample printing. Parameter ALL Prints out the following adjustment parameters.
Rear sensor VR/GAIN
Edge sensor VR/GAIN
Diagnosis item Contents Head rank
UniD adjustment value
Adjust ALL The following contents are printed. BiD adjustment value
1. Model name/Serial No./year/month/day/time Margin adjustment value
2. Nozzle check pattern Company code
normal/Horizontal line/Vertical line (CW)/Vertical Periodical cleaning
line(CCW)
Servo parameter
3. Head Slant Slant1
Log info. Prints the serious error history and smart chip log.
4. Head Slant Slant2
5. UniD 320 VSD1 Low S/C Log info. Prints the smart chip Log.
6. UniD 320 VSD3 Low
7. UniD 320 VSD4 Low NOTE
8. BiD 320 VSD1 Low If you have not registered the serial number of the machine, you must enter the
9. BiD 320 VSD3 Low number before you can start the Parameter ALL printing.
10. BiD 320 VSD4 Low
11. UniD 400 VSD1 Low
12. UniD 400 VSD3 Low 㨀㧵㧼
13. UniD 400 VSD4 Low This menu is the same function as the "5.6.8 Test Printing Menu
17. the above 5 to 10 (PG-High)
18. the above 11 to 16(PG-Low)
NOTE
When a speed mode is "Low", the part of 400 is
printed with 240.

5.8 Sample printing Menu VJ628XE-M-00
[Cancel]
㹁㹦㹣㹡㹩ࠉ㸳㸸㹎㹰㹧㹬㹲
[Enter]
[<]
[>] [Enter]
㹎㹰㹧㹬㹲㸰㸸㹎㹟㹰㹟㹫㹣㹲㹣㹰㸿㹊㹊㸿㹢㹨㹳㹱㹲㹎㹟㹰㹟㹫㹎㹰㹧㹬㹲
[Enter]
㹎㹰㹧㹬㹲㸱㸸㹊㹭㹤ࠉ㹇㹬㹤㹭㸬 [Enter]
㹎㹰㹧㹬㹲㸲㸸㹑㸭㹁ࠉ㹊㹭㹥ࠉ㹇㹬㹤㹭㸬
㹑㹣㹲ࠉ㹋㹣㹟㹢㹧㹟
㸿㹢㹨㹳㹱㹲㹆㹣㹟㹢ࠉ㹅㹟㹮 Head height in the case of High
㸦Set Head height to Low㸧

When the temperature is below the temperature
㹕㹟㹰㹫㹧㹬㹥ࠉ㹓㹮㸸㹎㹰㹣ࠉ㸱㸶ࢎ㹁 set in user mode.
[Cancel] 㸦After warming up is complete㸧 warming up and start printing.
㸿㹢㹨㹳㹱㹲㹆㹣㹟㹢ࠉ㹅㹟㹮 Head height in the case of Low
㸦Set Head height to high㸧

When the temperature is below the temperature
㹕㹟㹰㹫㹧㹬㹥ࠉ㹓㹮㸸㹎㹰㹣ࠉ㸲㸯ࢎ㹁 set in user mode.
[Cancel] 㸦After warming up is complete㸧 warming up and start printing.

5.9 Parameter Menu VJ628XE-M-00
5.9 Parameter Menu

This menu is used to set the adjustment parameter and perform initialization.
The parameter menu is includes the following items.
Diagnosis item Contents Reference

Initialize Initializes the adjustment parameters. "5.9.1 Parameter
Initialization Menu
Update Updates the adjustment parameters. "5.9.2 Parameter

Update Menu
[Cancel]
㹁㹦㹣㹡㹩ࠉ㸴㸸㹎㹟㹰㹟㹫㹣㹲㹣㹰
[Enter] >@
[Enter]
㹎㹟㹰㹟㹫㸯㸸㹇㹬㹧㹲㹧㹟㹪㹧㹸㹣 Parameter Initialization Menu
[Cancel]
>!@
㹎㹟㹰㹟㹫㸰㸸㹓㹮㹢㹟㹲㹣 Parameter Update Menu
NOTE
To backup the parameter or recover the backup parameter, start up the printer with
“Board Manager Mode” and use the printer with Mutoh Service Assistance installed
on, via LAN cable.
4.3 Working with MUTOH Service Assistance Software

5.9.1 Parameter Initialization Menu (1) Uni-D/Bi-D initialization Menu

This menu is used to initialize the adjustment parameters.The parameters that can be This menu is used to initialize the Uni-D/Bi-D adjustment parameter Uni-D/ Bi-D.
initialized through this menu are as follows.
㹎㹟㹰㹟㹫㸯㸸㹇㹬㹧㹲㹧㹟㹪㹧㹸㹣
• Uni-D/ Bi-D parameter, Margin,Servo, Print head, Wiper, CR motor, PF motor, Pump, [>]
Circulation Pump, Cutter, Waste ink counter 㹇㹬㹧㹲㸬ࠉ㸯㸸㹓㹬㹧㸭㹀㹧ࠉ㹊㹭㹵
• Initialization of all items
㹇㹬㹧㹲㸬ࠉ㸰㸸㹓㹬㹧㸭㹀㹧ࠉ㹆㹧㹥㹦
㹁㹦㹣㹡㹩ࠉ㸴㸸㹎㹟㹰㹟㹫㹣㹲㹣㹰 [Cancel] [<]
[Enter]
[Enter]
After initializing [<]
㹎㹟㹰㹟㹫㸯㸸㹇㹬㹧㹲㹧㹟㹪㹧㹸㹣 [Enter]
Low / 㹊㹭㹵ࠉ㸯㸸㹓㹬㹧㹂ࠉ㸱㸰㸮ࠉ㹔㹑㹂㸯
High
[Enter] [>]
>@
[Enter]
㹊㹭㹵ࠉ㸰㸸㹓㹬㹧㹂ࠉ㸱㸰㸮ࠉ㹔㹑㹂㸱
㹇㹬㹧㹲㸬ࠉ㸯㸸㹓㹬㹧㸭㹀㹧ࠉ㹊㹭㹵 Shifts to Uni/Bi-Low/High initialization Menu
㹊㹭㹵ࠉ㸱㸸㹓㹬㹧㹂ࠉ㸱㸰㸮ࠉ㹔㹑㹂㸲
>!@
㹇㹬㹧㹲㸬ࠉ㸰㸸㹓㹬㹧㸭㹀㹧ࠉ㹆㹧㹥㹦㹊㹭㹵ࠉ㸲㸸㹓㹬㹧㹂ࠉ㸲㸮㸮ࠉ㹔㹑㹂㸯
[Enter]
㹇㹬㹧㹲㸬ࠉ㸱㸸㹋㹟㹰㹥㹧㹬㹇㹬㹧㹲㹧㹟㹪㹧㹸㹣ࠉ㹍㹉㸽㹊㹭㹵ࠉ㸳㸸㹓㹬㹧㹂ࠉ㸲㸮㸮ࠉ㹔㹑㹂㸱

[Enter]
㹇㹬㹧㹲㸬ࠉ㸲㸸㹑㹣㹰㹴㹭㹊㹭㹵ࠉ㸴㸸㹓㹬㹧㹂ࠉ㸲㸮㸮ࠉ㹔㹑㹂㸲
㹇㹬㹧㹲㸬ࠉ㸳㸸㹆㹣㹟㹢㹊㹭㹵ࠉ㸵㸸㹀㹧㹂ࠉࠉ㸱㸰㸮ࠉ㹔㹑㹂㸯
[Cancel]
㹇㹬㹧㹲㸬ࠉ㸴㸸㹕㹧㹮㹣㹰㹓㹬㹲㹭㹳㹡㹦㹣㹢ࠉ㹎㹟㹰㹟㹫㹊㹭㹵ࠉ㸶㸸㹀㹧㹂ࠉࠉ㸱㸰㸮ࠉ㹔㹑㹂㸱
㹇㹬㹧㹲㸬ࠉ㸵㸸㹁㹐ࠉ㹋㹭㹲㹭㹰㹊㹭㹵ࠉ㸷㸸㹀㹧㹂ࠉࠉ㸱㸰㸮ࠉ㹔㹑㹂㸲
㹇㹬㹧㹲㸬ࠉ㸶㸸㹎㹄ࠉ㹋㹭㹲㹭㹰 Back to top menu unless parameter is not initialized 㹊㹭㹵㸯㸮㸸㹀㹧㹂ࠉࠉ㸲㸮㸮ࠉ㹔㹑㹂㸯
㹊㹭㹵ࠉ㸶㸸㹀㹧㹂ࠉࠉ㸱㸴㸮ࠉ㹔㹑㹂㸯
㹇㹬㹧㹲㸬ࠉ㸷㸸㹎㹳㹫㹮㹊㹭㹵㸯㸯㸸㹀㹧㹂ࠉࠉ㸲㸮㸮ࠉ㹔㹑㹂㸱
㹇㹬㹧㹲㸬㸯㸮㸸㹁㹎㹳㹫㹮㸯㹊㹭㹵㸯㸰㸸㹀㹧㹂ࠉࠉ㸲㸮㸮ࠉ㹔㹑㹂㸲
㹇㹬㹧㹲㸬㸯㸯㸸㹁㹎㹳㹫㹮㸰㹊㹭㹵㸯㸱㸸㹓㹬㹧㹂ࠉ㸿㹊㹊
㹇㹬㹧㹲㸬㸯㸰㸸㹁㹳㹲㹲㹣㹰 [Enter]
㹊㹭㹵㸯㸲㸸㹀㹧㹂ࠉ㸿㹊㹊
Back to servo initialization menu
㹇㹬㹧㹲㸬㸯㸱㸸㹕㹟㹱㹲㹣ࠉ㹇㹬㹩
㹇㹬㹧㹲㹧㹟㹪㹧㹸㹣ࠉ㹍㹉㸽 [Cancel]
㹇㹬㹧㹲㸬㸯㸲㸸㸿㹊㹊 [Enter]
[Cancel] or after initialization
[Enter]
5.9.1 Parameter Initialization Menu 315

(2) Servo initialization Menu

This menu is used to initialize the Servo settings.
[<]
㹑㹣㹰㹴㹭㸯㸸㸿㹊㹊
[Enter]
[>]
㹑㹣㹰㹴㹭㸰㸸㸱㸰㸮㹡㹮㹱ࠉࠉ㹁㹕
㹑㹣㹰㹴㹭㸱㸸㸱㸰㸮㹡㹮㹱ࠉ㹁㹁㹕
㹑㹣㹰㹴㹭㸲㸸㸲㸮㸮㹡㹮㹱ࠉࠉ㹁㹕
㹊㹭㹵ࠉ㸶㸸㹀㹧㹂ࠉࠉ㸱㸴㸮ࠉ㹔㹑㹂㸯
㹑㹣㹰㹴㹭㸳㸸㸲㸮㸮㹡㹮㹱ࠉ㹁㹁㹕
㹇㹬㹧㹲㹧㹟㹪㹧㹸㹣ࠉ㹍㹉㸽 [Cancel]
[Enter]
㹇㹬㹧㹲㹧㹟㹪㹧㹸㹣ࠉ㹎㹟㹰㹟㹫㹣㹲㹣㹰 [Cancel] or after initialization
[Enter]
5.9.1 Parameter Initialization Menu 316

5.9.2 Parameter Update Menu (1) Rear/Edge Sensor

This menu is used to update the adjustment parameters. The parameters that can be updates Enter the set values of Rear/Edge sensors.
through this menu are as follows.
[Cancel]
㹓㹮㹢㹟㹲㹣ࠉ㸯㸸㹐㹣㹟㹰㹃㹢㹥㹣㹑㹣㹬㹱㹭㹰
Rear/Edge sensor, Head rank, Uni-D/Bi-D, Margin, Charge flg, DebugBit, Dot control,
[Enter]
Heater flag, Ink Type, Ink combination, Periodic cleaning, Uni/Bi pattern, Media thickness
>@
㹐㹣㹟㹰㹔㹐ࠉࠉ㸸㸰㸳㸳ࠉࠉ㸿㹂㸸㹖㹖㹖 Press [+] or [-] key to change
NOTE the setting values.
>!@ ࠉVR : 0㹼255
The updated parameters will not be stored in the flash memory unless the system GAIN : L/H
㹐㹣㹟㹰㹅㸿㹇㹌㸸㹊ࠉࠉࠉࠉ㸿㹂㸸㹖㹖㹖
power is turned OFF.
㹃㹢㹥㹣㹔㹐ࠉࠉ㸸㸰㸳㸳ࠉࠉ㸿㹂㸸㹖㹖㹖
㹁㹦㹣㹡㹩ࠉ㸴㸸㹎㹟㹰㹟㹫㹣㹲㹣㹰㹃㹢㹥㹣㹅㸿㹇㹌㸸㹊ࠉࠉࠉࠉ㸿㹂㸸㹖㹖㹖
[Enter]
[Enter]
[Cancel]
㹎㹟㹰㹟㹫㸰㸸㹓㹮㹢㹟㹲㹣
When parameter is changed
[Enter] [Cancel]
㹓㹮㹢㹟㹲㹣ࠉ㹎㹟㹰㹟㹫㹣㹲㹣㹰㸽
>@
[Enter] [Enter]
After updating
㹓㹮㹢㹟㹲㹣ࠉ㸯㸸㹐㹣㹟㹰㸭㹃㹢㹥㹣 5HDU(GJHVHQVRU0HQX
[Cancel] 㹓㹮㹢㹟㹲㹧㹬㹥ࠉ㹎㹟㹰㹟㹫㹣㹲㹣㹰
>!@
㹓㹮㹢㹟㹲㹣ࠉ㸰㸸㹆㹣㹟㹢㹐㹟㹬㹩 +HDG5DENLQSXW0HQX 㹓㹬㹲㹭㹳㹡㹦㹣㹢ࠉ㹎㹟㹰㹟㹫
㹓㹮㹢㹟㹲㹣ࠉ㸱㸸㹓㹬㹧㸭㹀㹧ࠉ㹊㹭㹵 Uni-/Bi Low Update 0HQX
㹓㹮㹢㹟㹲㹣ࠉ㸲㸸㹓㹬㹧㸭㹀㹧ࠉ㹆㹧㹥㹦 Uni-/Bi High Update 0HQX
㹓㹮㹢㹟㹲㹣ࠉ㸳㸸㹋㹟㹰㹥㹧㹬 0DUJLQ8SGDWH0HQX
㹓㹮㹢㹟㹲㹣ࠉ㸴㸸㹁㹦㹟㹰㹥㹣ࠉ㹄㹪㹥 &KDUJHIOJ8SGDWH0HQX
㹓㹮㹢㹟㹲㹣ࠉ㸵㸸㹂㹣㹠㹳㹥㹀㹧㹲 Debug Bit8SGDWH0HQX
㹓㹮㹢㹟㹲㹣ࠉ㸶㸸㹂㹭㹲㹁㹲㹰㹪㸬 'RW&WUO Update Menu
㹆
㹓㹮㹢㹟㹲㹣ࠉ㸷㸸㹆㹣㹟㹲㹣㹰ࠉ㹄㹪㹥 +HDWHUIOJ8SGDWH0HQX
㹓㹮㹢㹟㹲㹣㸯㸮㸸㹇㹬㹩ࠉ㹒㹷㹮㹣ࠉ ,QN7\SH8SGDWH0HQX
㹓㹮㹢㹟㹲㹣㸯㸯㸸㹇㹬㹩ࠉ㹁㹭㹬㹤㹧㹥㸬 ,QN&RQILJXODWLRQ8SGDWH0HQX
㹓㹮㹢㹟㹲㹣㸯㸰㸸㹎㹣㹰㹧㹭㹢㹧㹡ࠉ㹁㹊 3HULRGLF&OHDQLQJ0HQX
㹓㹮㹢㹟㹲㹣㸯㸱㸸㹓㹬㹧㸭㹀㹧ࠉ㹎㹲㹬 8QL%L3DWWHUQ0HQX
㹓㹮㹢㹟㹲㹣㸯㸲㸸㹒㹦㹧㹡㹩㹬㹣㹱㹱 0HGLDWKLFNQHVV0HQX
5.9.2 Parameter Update Menu 317

(2) Head Rank NOTE

This menu is used to update the head rank parameters. • When entering the head rank, once the eight-digit number is entered, it will
The head rank is used to determine Print head driving voltage and correct the head proceed to the next screen.
temperature. • The sticker of head rank information is attached to the part shown below.
After head rank is entered, the shifts to the Ink Charge Menu.
• When the ink is not charged and ’Ink Config.’ setting is ‘Auto’, after updating the
head rank, press [Enter] key on ‘Ink Charge [Enter]’ to display the following menu.
[Enter]
[Enter]
[<]
[Cancel]
㹎㹟㹰㹟㹫㸰㸸㹓㹮㹢㹟㹲㹣㹇㹬㹩ࠉ㹁㹭㹬㹤㹧㹥㸬㸸㹕ࠉ㸶㹁㹭㹪㹭㹰
[Enter] [>]
㹓㹮㹢㹟㹲㹣㸰㸸㹆㹣㹟㹢㹐㹟㹬㹩㹇㹬㹩ࠉ㹁㹭㹬㹤㹧㹥㸬㸸ࠉࠉ㸲㹁㹭㹪㹭㹰
[Cancel]
㹇㹬㹩ࠉ㹁㹭㹬㹤㹧㹥㸬㸸ࠉࠉ㸴㹁㹭㹪㹭㹰
㹇㹂㸫㸯㸭㸱㸸㸯㸵㹃㸵㸨㸨㸨㸨
㹇㹬㹩ࠉ㹁㹭㹬㹤㹧㹥㸬㸸㹕ࠉ㸵㹁㹭㹪㹭㹰
㹇㹂㸫㸰㸭㸱㸸㸷㸶㸶㸶㸨㸨㸨㸨 Input numbers using [+]/[-]
Press the [Enter] key to switch digits [Enter] (when ͆W 8 Color͇ is selected)
㹇㹂㸫㸱㸭㸱㸸㸯㸷㸮㸷㸨㸨㸨㸨 Press the [>] or [<] key to switch pages
[Enter] [Enter]/[Cancel] [<]
㹑㹣㹲ࠉ㹲㹭ࠉ㹕ࠉ㸶㹁㹭㹪㹭㹰㸽ࠉࠉ㹌㹭
㹆㹣㹟㹢ࠉ㹇㹂ࠉ㹇㹬㹮㹳㹲ࠉ㹃㹰㹰㹭㹰㸟
[Cancel] When it is right [Cancel] [>]
When it is wrong.
㹓㹮㹢㹟㹲㹣ࠉ㹎㹟㹰㹟㹫㹣㹲㹣㹰㸽㹑㹣㹲ࠉ㹲㹭ࠉ㹕ࠉ㸶㹁㹭㹪㹭㹰㸽ࠉ㹗㹣㹱
[Enter]
[Enter]
㹓㹮㹢㹟㹲㹧㹬㹥ࠉ㹎㹟㹰㹟㹫㹣㹲㹣㹰
After update
Initial ink charge will not be executed.
㹇㹬㹩ࠉ㹁㹦㹟㹰㹥㹣㹙㹃㹬㹲㹣㹰㹛 Head ID will be updated. after updating
[Cancel]
[Enter]
㹙㸿㹊㹊㹛㹌㹭ࠉ㹁㹟㹰㹲㹰㹧㹢㹥㹣 When ink cartridges are not inserted.
㹙㸿㹊㹊㹛㹌㹭ࠉ㹁㹟㹰㹲㹰㹧㹢㹥㹣 When ink cartridges are not inserted.
after inserting ink cartridges
After Inserting the ink cartridges
㹙㸿㹊㹊㹛㹇㹬㹩ࠉ㹃㹫㹮㹲㹷 When in k is empty.
㹙㸿㹊㹊㹛㹇㹬㹩ࠉ㹃㹫㹮㹲㹷 When ink is empty.
after replacing ink cartridges
After Inserting the ink cartridges
㹇㹬㹩ࠉ㹁㹦㹟㹰㹥㹣 Ink Charging
㹇㹬㹩ࠉ㹁㹦㹟㹰㹥㹣 Ink Charging after charging
After charging
㹓㹮㹢㹟㹲㹣㸰㸸㹆㹣㹟㹢㹐㹟㹬㹩

(3) Uni-D/Bi-D 㧯㨔㨑㨏㨗‫ޓ‬㧢㧦㧼㨍㨞㨍㨙㨑㨠㨑㨞

Uni-D/Bi-D adjustment parameters are updated. [Enter]
The following are the setting items for the Uni-D/Bi-D adjustment parameters menu. 㧼㨍㨞㨍㨙㧞㧦㨁㨜㨐㨍㨠㨑
[>]
NOTE 㧵㨚㨕㨠㧚‫ޓ‬㧦㨁㨚㨕㧛㧮㨕‫ޓޓޓ‬㧸㨛㨣
When a speed mode is "Low", the part of 400 is printed with 240.
㧵㨚㨕㨠㧚‫ޓ‬㧞㧦㨁㨚㨕㧛㧮㨕‫ޓޓ‬㧴㨕㨓㨔
[<]
[Cancel] [Enter]
Panel Contents [<]
[Enter]
Low/ 㧸㨛㨣‫ޓ‬㧝㧦㨁㨚㨕㧰‫ޓ‬㧟㧞㧜‫ޓ‬㨂㧿㧰㧝
Uni-D 320 VSD1 CW adjustment with 320cps, VSD1 High
When Uni-D is selected
[>]
㧸㨛㨣‫ޓ‬㧞㧦㨁㨚㨕㧰‫ޓ‬㧟㧞㧜‫ޓ‬㨂㧿㧰㧟
㧸㨛㨣‫ޓ‬㧟㧦㨁㨚㨕㧰‫ޓ‬㧟㧞㧜‫ޓ‬㨂㧿㧰㧠
㧸㨛㨣‫ޓ‬㧠㧦㨁㨚㨕㧰‫ޓ‬㧠㧜㧜‫ޓ‬㨂㧿㧰㧝
㧸㨛㨣‫ޓ‬㧡㧦㨁㨚㨕㧰‫ޓ‬㧠㧜㧜‫ޓ‬㨂㧿㧰㧟
Bi-D 320 VSD1 Bi-D adjustment with 320cps, VSD1 㧸㨛㨣‫ޓ‬㧢㧦㨁㨚㨕㧰‫ޓ‬㧠㧜㧜‫ޓ‬㨂㧿㧰㧠
[Enter]
Bi-D 320 VSD3 Bi-D adjustment with 320cps, VSD3 㧸㨛㨣‫ޓ‬㧣㧦㧮㨕㧰‫ޓޓ‬㧟㧞㧜‫ޓ‬㨂㧿㧰㧝 When Bi-D is selected
Bi-D 320 VSD4 Bi-D adjustment with 320cps, VSD4 㧸㨛㨣‫ޓ‬㧤㧦㧮㨕㧰‫ޓޓ‬㧟㧞㧜‫ޓ‬㨂㧿㧰㧟
Bi-D 400 VSD1 Bi-D adjustment with 400cps, VSD1 㧸㨛㨣‫ޓ‬㧥㧦㧮㨕㧰‫ޓޓ‬㧟㧞㧜‫ޓ‬㨂㧿㧰㧠

㧸㨛㨣㧝㧜㧦㧮㨕㧰‫ޓޓ‬㧠㧜㧜‫ޓ‬㨂㧿㧰㧝
㧸㨛㨣㧝㧝㧦㧮㨕㧰‫ޓޓ‬㧠㧜㧜‫ޓ‬㨂㧿㧰㧟
㧸㨛㨣㧝㧞㧦㧮㨕㧰‫ޓޓ‬㧠㧜㧜‫ޓ‬㨂㧿㧰㧠

(3-a)When Uni-D is selected (3-b)When Bi-D is selected
㨀㧵㧼㨀㧵㧼
The default values for Uni-D adjustment is set to all "0" regardless of Default values are as it is the following table.
carriage speed and head height.
Item default Item default
values values
When Uni-D320 VSD1 is selected.
BiD Low 320 VSD1 -40 BiD High 320 VSD1 -78
320 VSD3 -42 320 VSD3 -92
㹁㹦㹣㹡㹩ࠉ㸵㸸㹎㹟㹰㹟㹫㹣㹲㹣㹰
[Enter] 320 VSD4 -36 320 VSD4 -81
400 VSD1 -53 400 VSD1 -100
[Enter]
㹓㹮㹢㹟㹲㹣ࠉ㸱㸸㹓㹬㹧㸭㹀㹧ࠉ㹊㹭㹵 400 VSD3 -54 400 VSD3 -114

[Enter] 400 VSD4 -47 400 VSD4 -100
㹊㹭㹵㸯㸸㹓㹬㹧࣮㹂ࠉ㸱㸰㸮ࠉ㹔㹑㹂㸯
[Cancel] [Enter] [<] When Bi-D 320 VSD4 is selected.
㹓㹬㹧㹂㸱㸰㸮ࠉ㹔㸱ࠉ㸡㸯ࠉ㸿㸸ࠉࠉࠉ㸮
[>]
㹁㹦㹣㹡㹩ࠉ㸵㸸㹎㹟㹰㹟㹫㹣㹲㹣㹰
㹓㹬㹧㹂㸱㸰㸮ࠉ㹔㸱ࠉ㸡㸯ࠉ㹀㸸ࠉࠉࠉ㸮
"C" is not printed, beacause [Enter]
the position is reffered as the basis
㹓㹬㹧㹂㸱㸰㸮ࠉ㹔㸱ࠉ㸡㸯ࠉ㹂㸸ࠉࠉࠉ㸮 when adjusting.
[Enter]
㹓㹬㹧㹂㸱㸰㸮ࠉ㹔㸱ࠉ㸡㸯ࠉ㹃㸸ࠉࠉࠉ㸮
㹓㹮㹢㹟㹲㹣ࠉ㸲㸸㹓㹬㹧㸭㹀㹧
㹓㹬㹧㹂㸱㸰㸮ࠉ㹔㸱ࠉ㸡㸯ࠉ㹄㸸ࠉࠉࠉ㸮 Press [+] or [-] key to change [Enter]
the setting values.
Adjustment unit㸸
㹊㹭㹵㸯㸮㸸㹀㹧㹂ࠉࠉ㸱㸰㸮ࠉ㹔㹑㹂㸲
㹓㹬㹧㹂㸱㸰㸮ࠉ㹔㸱ࠉ㸡㸯ࠉ㹅㸸ࠉࠉࠉ㸮
1 / 720 inch=approx. 35ȣm
Adjustment range㸸-100㹼100
[Cancel] [Enter] Press [>] or [<] key to change
㹓㹬㹧㹂㸱㸰㸮ࠉ㹔㸱ࠉ㸡㸯ࠉ㹆㸸ࠉࠉࠉ㸮 the setting values.
㹀㹧㹂㸱㸰㸮ࠉ㹔㹑㹂㸲ࠉ㸡㸯㸸ࠉࠉࠉࠉ㸮 Adjustment unit㸸
1 / 2880 inch=approx. 8.8ȣm
[Enter] [Enter]
[Cancel] Adjustment range㸸-400㹼400
㹓㹮㹢㹟㹲㹣ࠉ㹎㹟㹰㹟㹫㹣㹲㹣㹰㸽 When setting value is changed, [Cancel]
display the message. 㹓㹮㹢㹟㹲㹣ࠉ㹎㹟㹰㹟㹫㹣㹲㹣㹰㸽 When setting value is changed,
[Enter] display the message.
After updating [Enter]
㹓㹮㹢㹟㹲㹧㹬㹥ࠉ㹎㹟㹰㹟㹫㹣㹲㹣㹰 After updating

(4) Margin
Updates Margin parameters.
㨀㧵㧼
Default values are as it is the following table.
Item default
values
TopMargin 40.0mm
BottomMargin 5.0mm
SideMargin 5.0mm
[Enter]
[Enter]
㹓㹮㹢㹟㹲㹣㸳㸸㹋㹟㹰㹥㹧㹬
[Enter]
㹒㹭㹮㹋㹟㹰㹥㹧㹬㸸ࠉࠉࠉࠉ㸲㸮㸬㸮㹫㹫 35.0mm㹼45.0mm
[Enter]
㹀㹭㹲㹲㹭㹫㹋㹟㹰㹥㹧㹬㸸ࠉࠉ㸳㸬㸮㹫㹫 0.0mm㹼10.0mm
[Enter]
㹑㹧㹢㹣㹋㹟㹰㹥㹧㹬㸸ࠉࠉࠉࠉ㸳㸬㸮㹫㹫 0.0mm㹼10.0mm
[Enter]
[Cancel] When setting value is changed,
㹓㹮㹢㹟㹲㹣ࠉ㹎㹟㹰㹟㹫㹣㹲㹣㹰㸽 display the message.
[Enter]
After updating

(5) Charge Flg NOTE

Update the ink parameters. The setting items are as follows. When reset the parameters, ink cartridges should be inserted.
• When the ink is not charged and ’Ink Config.’ setting is ‘Auto’, updating the ‘User/
Diagnosis item Initial washing Initial filling Init: Charge’ to display the following menu.
User/Init : Not Charge × × 㹓㹱㹣㹰㸭㹇㹬㹧㹲㸸ࠉࠉࠉࠉ㹁㹦㹟㹰㹥㹣

press [Enter] after changing the setting
User/ : Charge ○ × [<]
[Cancel]
User/Init : Charge ○ ○ 㹇㹬㹩ࠉ㹁㹭㹬㹤㹧㹥㸬㸸ࠉࠉ㸶㹁㹭㹪㹭㹰
[>]
㹁㹦㹣㹡㹩ࠉ㸴㸸㹎㹟㹰㹟㹫㹣㹲㹣㹰㹇㹬㹩ࠉ㹁㹭㹬㹤㹧㹥㸬㸸ࠉࠉ㸲㹁㹭㹪㹭㹰
[Enter]
㹇㹬㹩ࠉ㹁㹭㹬㹤㹧㹥㸬㸸ࠉࠉ㸴㹁㹭㹪㹭㹰
[Enter] [Enter] (when 8 Color is selected)
㹓㹮㹢㹟㹲㹣ࠉ㸴㸸㹁㹦㹟㹰㹥㹣ࠉ㹄㹪㹥
[Enter]/[Cancel] [<]
[Enter]
Press [+] or [-] key to change 㹑㹣㹲ࠉ㹲㹭ࠉ㸶㹁㹭㹪㹭㹰㸽ࠉࠉࠉࠉ㹌㹭
㹓㹱㹣㹰㸭㹇㹬㹧㹲㸸㹌㹭㹲ࠉ㹁㹦㹟㹰㹥㹣
the setting values. [Cancel] [>]
͆User/ : Charge͇
㹑㹣㹲ࠉ㹲㹭ࠉ㸶㹁㹭㹪㹭㹰㸽ࠉࠉࠉ㹗㹣㹱 [Enter]
[Enter] ͆User/Init:Not Charge͇
͆User/Init: Charge͇
[Cancel] When parameter is changed
㹓㹮㹢㹟㹲㹣ࠉ㹎㹟㹰㹟㹫㹣㹲㹣㹰
[Enter]
after updating the ͆Use/Init͇and ͆Ink comfig.͇
㹓㹬㹲㹭㹳㹡㹦㹣㹢ࠉ㹎㹟㹰㹟㹫 After updating
㹓㹮㹢㹟㹲㹣㸰㸸㹆㹣㹟㹢㹐㹟㹬㹩
㹓㹮㹢㹟㹲㹣ࠉ㸵㸸㹁㹦㹟㹰㹥㹣ࠉ㹄㹪㹥

(6) Debug Bit Update

This menu is used to update the debug bit. [Enter]
The debug bit is used for testing. 㹎㹟㹰㹟㹫㸰㸸㹓㹮㹢㹟㹲㹣
[Enter]
NOTE 㹓㹮㹢㹟㹲㹣ࠉ㸵㸸㹂㹣㹠㹳㹥㹀㹧㹲
This menu is not used for maintenance operation. [Cancel] [Enter] [<]
㹂㹀ࠉ㹂㸯㸳㸫㹂㸶㸸ࠉࠉ㸨㸮㸮㸮㸮㸮㸮㸮 Enter a single binary value (0 or 1).

Set value can be changed by the [+]/[-] key.
[>] Shift the cursor by the [Enter] key.
㨀㧵㧼㹂㹀ࠉ㹂㸯㸳㸫㹂㸶㸸ࠉࠉ㸮㸨㸮㸮㸮㸮㸮㸮
The debug bit is displayed in binary digits. The setting values and initial values at the 㹂㹀ࠉ㹂㸯㸳㸫㹂㸶㸸ࠉࠉ㸮㸮㸨㸮㸮㸮㸮㸮
time of shipping are as follows:
• At the time of shipping D15-D8: 00000000, D7-D0: 00000000 㹂㹀ࠉ㹂㸯㸳㸫㹂㸶㸸ࠉࠉ㸮㸮㸮㸨㸮㸮㸮㸮
• Initial value D15-D8: 00000000, D7-D0: 00000000
㹂㹀ࠉ㹂㸯㸳㸫㹂㸶㸸ࠉࠉ㸮㸮㸮㸮㸨㸮㸮㸮
㹂㹀ࠉ㹂㸯㸳㸫㹂㸶㸸ࠉࠉ㸮㸮㸮㸮㸮㸨㸮㸮
㹂㹀ࠉ㹂㸯㸳㸫㹂㸶㸸ࠉࠉ㸮㸮㸮㸮㸮㸮㸨㸮
㹂㹀ࠉ㹂㸯㸳㸫㹂㸶㸸ࠉࠉ㸮㸮㸮㸮㸮㸮㸮㸨
㹂㹀ࠉ㹂㸵ࠉ㸫㹂㸮㸸ࠉࠉ㸨㸮㸮㸮㸮㸮㸮㸮
㹂㹀ࠉ㹂㸵ࠉ㸫㹂㸮㸸ࠉࠉ㸮㸨㸮㸮㸮㸮㸮㸮
㹂㹀ࠉ㹂㸵ࠉ㸫㹂㸮㸸ࠉࠉ㸮㸮㸨㸮㸮㸮㸮㸮
㹂㹀ࠉ㹂㸵ࠉ㸫㹂㸮㸸ࠉࠉ㸮㸮㸮㸨㸮㸮㸮㸮
㹂㹀ࠉ㹂㸵ࠉ㸫㹂㸮㸸ࠉࠉ㸮㸮㸮㸮㸨㸮㸮㸮
㹂㹀ࠉ㹂㸵ࠉ㸫㹂㸮㸸ࠉࠉ㸮㸮㸮㸮㸮㸨㸮㸮
㹂㹀ࠉ㹂㸵ࠉ㸫㹂㸮㸸ࠉࠉ㸮㸮㸮㸮㸮㸮㸨㸮
㹂㹀ࠉ㹂㸵ࠉ㸫㹂㸮㸸ࠉࠉ㸮㸮㸮㸮㸮㸮㸮㸨
[Enter]
[Cancel]
When setting value is changed,
display the message.
[Enter]
After updating

(7) DotCtrl From left page

From left page To left page
Setup the waveform and dot size when printing.
When OFF is set, they are determined automatically to match printing. 㹂㹭㹲㹁㹲㹰㹪㸬㸸ࠉ㹔㹑㹂㸱㸫㸱㸰㸮㸫㹊
㹂㹭㹲㹁㹲㹰㹪㸬㸸ࠉ㹔㹑㹂㸱㸫㸱㸰㸮㸫㹋
㨀㧵㧼
This is not used for maintenance operation. 㹂㹭㹲㹁㹲㹰㹪㸬㸸ࠉ㹔㹑㹂㸱㸫㸱㸰㸮㸫㹑
• L:Large, M:Medium, S :Small, V:Variable
㹂㹭㹲㹁㹲㹰㹪㸬㸸ࠉ㹔㹑㹂㸱㸫㸱㸰㸮㸫㹔
• When Variable dots are specified, printing is performed as 2 bit/1 dot.
Therefore, when printing the 1 bit/dot data, the printing result is reduced to half 㹂㹭㹲㹁㹲㹰㹪㸬㸸ࠉ㹔㹑㹂㸱㸫㸲㸮㸮㸫㹊ࠉ
the size (in the CR direction).
㹂㹭㹲㹁㹲㹰㹪㸬㸸ࠉ㹔㹑㹂㸱㸫㸲㸮㸮㸫㹋
㹂㹭㹲㹁㹲㹰㹪㸬㸸ࠉ㹔㹑㹂㸱㸫㸲㸮㸮㸫㹑
[Enter] 㹂㹭㹲㹁㹲㹰㹪㸬㸸ࠉ㹔㹑㹂㸱㸫㸲㸮㸮㸫㹔
㹂㹭㹲㹁㹲㹰㹪㸬㸸ࠉ㹔㹑㹂㸲㸫㸱㸰㸮㸫㹊
[Enter]
㹓㹮㹢㹟㹲㹣ࠉ㸶㸸㹂㹭㹲㹁㹲㹰㹪㸬㹂㹭㹲㹁㹲㹰㹪㸬㸸ࠉ㹔㹑㹂㸲㸫㸱㸰㸮㸫㹋
[Enter]
[-] 㹂㹭㹲㹁㹲㹰㹪㸬㸸ࠉ㹔㹑㹂㸲㸫㸱㸰㸮㸫㹑
[Enter]
㹂㹭㹲㹁㹲㹰㹪㸬㸸ࠉࠉࠉࠉࠉࠉࠉࠉ㹍㹄㹄
㹂㹭㹲㹁㹲㹰㹪㸬㸸ࠉ㹔㹑㹂㸲㸫㸱㸰㸮㸫㹔
[+]
㹂㹭㹲㹁㹲㹰㹪㸬㸸ࠉ㹔㹑㹂㸯㸫㸱㸰㸮㸫㹊㹂㹭㹲㹁㹲㹰㹪㸬㸸ࠉ㹔㹑㹂㸲㸫㸲㸮㸮㸫㹊ࠉ
㹂㹭㹲㹁㹲㹰㹪㸬㸸ࠉ㹔㹑㹂㸯㸫㸱㸰㸮㸫㹋㹂㹭㹲㹁㹲㹰㹪㸬㸸ࠉ㹔㹑㹂㸲㸫㸲㸮㸮㸫㹋
㹂㹭㹲㹁㹲㹰㹪㸬㸸ࠉ㹔㹑㹂㸯㸫㸱㸰㸮㸫㹑㹂㹭㹲㹁㹲㹰㹪㸬㸸ࠉ㹔㹑㹂㸲㸫㸲㸮㸮㸫㹑
㹂㹭㹲㹁㹲㹰㹪㸬㸸ࠉ㹔㹑㹂㸯㸫㸱㸰㸮㸫㹔㹂㹭㹲㹁㹲㹰㹪㸬㸸ࠉ㹔㹑㹂㸲㸫㸲㸮㸮㸫㹔
㹂㹭㹲㹁㹲㹰㹪㸬㸸ࠉ㹔㹑㹂㸯㸫㸲㸮㸮㸫㹊
[Enter]
㹂㹭㹲㹁㹲㹰㹪㸬㸸ࠉ㹔㹑㹂㸯㸫㸲㸮㸮㸫㹋 [Cancel]
㹓㹮㹢㹟㹲㹣ࠉ㹎㹟㹰㹟㹫㹣㹲㹣㹰㸽 When setting value is changed,
display the message.
㹂㹭㹲㹁㹲㹰㹪㸬㸸ࠉ㹔㹑㹂㸯㸫㸲㸮㸮㸫㹑 [Enter]
$IWHUXSGDWLQJ
㹂㹭㹲㹁㹲㹰㹪㸬㸸ࠉ㹔㹑㹂㸯㸫㸲㸮㸮㸫㹔
To right page From right page To right page
㹓㹮㹢㹟㹲㹣ࠉ㸷㸸㹂㹭㹲㹁㹲㹰㹪

(8) Heater Flg

Heater flag is updated.
NOTE
• If you set it to “Heater flag Off”, the heater is not warmed up during adjustment
printing or standby mode.
• Heater flag settings are not saved;
If you turn the power off and back on again, the setting is reset to “Heater flag Off”.
[Enter]
[Enter]
㹓㹮㹢㹟㹲㹣ࠉ㸷㸸㹆㹣㹟㹲㹣㹰ࠉ㹄㹪㹥
[Enter] [-]
㹆㹣㹟㹲㹣㹰ࠉ㹄㹪㹥㸸ࠉࠉࠉࠉࠉࠉࠉ㹍㹬
[+]
㹆㹣㹟㹲㹣㹰ࠉ㹄㹪㹥㸸ࠉࠉࠉࠉࠉࠉ㹍㹤㹤
[Enter]
When parameter is not changed
[Cancel]
[Enter]
After updating

(9) Ink Type

Check the ink type you want to use.
NOTE
You can only check the ink type; you cannot change the ink type here.
[Enter]
[Enter]
[Enter]
㹓㹮㹢㹟㹲㹣㸯㸮㸸㹇㹬㹩ࠉ㹒㹷㹮㹣
[Cancel] [Enter]
㹇㹬㹩ࠉ㹒㹷㹮㹣㸸ࠉࠉࠉ㹔㹈㸫㹋㹑㹇㹌㹉
㹇㹬㹩ࠉ㹒㹷㹮㹣㸸ࠉࠉࠉ㹐㹈㸫㹄㹅㹇㹌㹉
㹇㹬㹩ࠉ㹒㹷㹮㹣㸸ࠉࠉ㹐㹈㸫㹄㹅㸰㹇㹌㹉
㹇㹬㹩ࠉ㹒㹷㹮㹣㸸ࠉࠉ㹔㹈㸫㹂㹎㹑㹇㹌㹉
㹇㹬㹩ࠉ㹒㹷㹮㹣㸸ࠉࠉ㹔㹈㸫㹂㹎㹑㹇㹌㹉
㹇㹬㹩ࠉ㹒㹷㹮㹣㸸ࠉࠉࠉࠉ㹐㹈㸶㸮㹂㹑㸯
㹇㹬㹩ࠉ㹒㹷㹮㹣㸸ࠉࠉࠉࠉࠉ㹐㹈㸶㸮㹂㹂

(10)Ink Config.. (11)PeriodicCL

This menu is used to update Ink configuration. Of the automatic cleaning function is effective, and set the invalidity.
NOTE Setting Contents

You can only check the ink configuration; you cannot change the ink type here. Auto An automatic cleaning function is effective.
Manual An automatic cleaning function is invalid
[Enter]
㨀㧵㧼
• Default: Auto (Automatic)
[Enter]
• Panel menu setting of the user modes is unrelated setting.
㹓㹮㹢㹟㹲㹣㸯㸯㸸㹇㹬㹩ࠉ㹁㹭㹬㹤㹧㹥㸬 [Enter]
[Cancel] [Enter]
㹇㹬㹩ࠉ㹁㹭㹫㹤㹧㹥㸬㸸ࠉࠉࠉࠉ㸿㹳㹲㹭㹁㹦㹣㹡㹩ࠉ㸴㸸㹎㹟㹰㹟㹫㹣㹲㹣㹰
[Enter]
㹇㹬㹩ࠉ㹁㹭㹬㹤㹧㹥㸬㸸ࠉࠉ㸲㹡㹭㹪㹭㹰㹎㹟㹰㹟㹫㸰㸸㹓㹮㹢㹟㹲㹣
[Enter]
㹇㹬㹩ࠉ㹁㹭㹬㹤㹧㹥㸬㸸ࠉࠉ㸴㹡㹭㹪㹭㹰
㹓㹮㹢㹟㹲㹣ࠉ㸯㸰㸸㹎㹣㹰㹧㹭㹢㹧㹡ࠉ㹁㹊
㹇㹬㹩ࠉ㹁㹭㹬㹤㹧㹥㸬㸸㹕ࠉ㸵㹡㹭㹪㹭㹰
[Enter] [<]ࠉ
㹇㹬㹩ࠉ㹁㹭㹬㹤㹧㹥㸬㸸㹕ࠉ㸶㹡㹭㹪㹭㹰㹎㹣㹰㹧㹭㹢㹧㹡ࠉ㹁㹊㸸ࠉࠉࠉࠉࠉ㸿㹳㹲㹭
[>]ࠉ
㹎㹣㹰㹧㹭㹢㹧㹡ࠉ㹁㹊㸸ࠉࠉࠉࠉࠉࠉ㹍㹤㹤ࠉࠉ
[Enter]
[Cancel]
[Enter]
After updating

(12)Uni/Bi Ptn (13)Thickness

Set the Uni/Bi patterns to print using the self diagnosis function. The standard of the media thickness used as the standard of a printer is set up. This media
The changes in the settings you make in this section affect the adjustment patterns printed thickness serves as an initial value of the media thickness of a user mode.
using UniD, BiD, BiD ALL, or Adjustment ALL.
㨀㧵㧼
㨀㧵㧼
When media thickness is changed, the image quality in a user mode is adjusted
Type A: Line pattern (default) automatically.
Type B: Line pattern + Block pattern
NOTE
[Enter] • set the setting values by [+] key / [-] key.
㹎㹟㹰㹟㹫㸰㸸㹓㹮㹢㹟㹲㹣 • setting range: 80 ～ 1300μm
[Enter] • unit: 10μm
㹓㹮㹢㹟㹲㹣ࠉ㸯㸱㸸㹓㹬㹧㸭㹀㹧㹎㹲㹬 • initial value: 170μm（This value is used at the time of printer manufacture.)
[Enter] [<]ࠉ
㹓㹬㹧㸭㹀㹧ࠉ㹎㹲㹬㸸ࠉࠉࠉࠉ㹒㹷㹮㹣㸿㧯㨔㨑㨏㨗‫ޓ‬㧢㧦㧼㨍㨞㨍㨙㨑㨠㨑㨞
[>]ࠉ ‫ޣ‬Enter‫ޤ‬
㹓㹬㹧㸭㹀㹧ࠉ㹎㹲㹬㸸ࠉࠉࠉࠉ㹒㹷㹮㹣㹀㧼㨍㨞㨍㨙㧞㧦㨁㨜㨐㨍㨠㨑
‫ޣ‬Enter‫ޤ‬
[Enter]
㨁㨜㨐㨍㨠㨑㧝㧠㧦㨀㨔㨕㨏㨗㨚㨑㨟㨟
[Cancel]
‫ޣ‬Enter‫ޤ‬
[Enter] 㨀㨔㨕㨏㨗㨚㨑㨟㨟㧦‫ޓޓޓޓ‬㧝㧣㧜㨡㨙
After updating ‫ޣ‬Enter‫ޤ‬
㹓㹮㹢㹟㹲㹧㹬㹥ࠉ㹎㹟㹰㹟㹫㹣㹲㹣㹰 When parameter is not changed
㨁㨜㨐㨍㨠㨑‫ޓ‬㧼㨍㨞㨍㨙㨑㨠㨑㨞㧫
‫ޣ‬Cancel‫ޤ‬ ‫ޣ‬Enter‫ޤ‬
After updating
㨁㨜㨐㨍㨠㨕㨚㨓‫ޓ‬㧼㨍㨞㨍㨙㨑㨠㨑㨞
㨁㨚㨠㨛㨡㨏㨔㨑㨐‫ޓ‬㧼㨍㨞㨍㨙

5.10 Servo Setting Menu VJ628XE-M-00
5.10 Servo Setting Menu The initial value for each item is shown below.
Item ＧＰＧＩ GLPI ＰＷＭ ωC
NOTE 320cps CW 0x4800 0x0080 228 13 45
Because this is a menu for evacuating problems of the printer (noise, vibration) and 320cps CCW 0x4800 0x0080 228 13 45
improving the image quality (measures for vertical unevenness), basically do not
change these parameters. 400cps CW 0x3000 0x0080 200 13 45
400cps CCW 0x3000 0x0080 200 13 45
The menu items for servo setting are as follows.
㹁㹦㹣㹡㹩ࠉ㸵㸸㹑㹣㹰㹴㹭
Servo setting items
[Enter] [<]
Items Contents
㹑㹣㹰㹴㹭㸯㸸㸱㸰㸮㹡㹮㹱ࠉࠉࠉࠉࠉ㹁㹕
320cps CW Servo setting of CR CW direction, 310.320cps [>]
320cps CCW Servo setting of CR CCW direction, 310.320cps 㹑㹣㹰㹴㹭㸰㸸㸱㸰㸮㹡㹮㹱ࠉࠉࠉࠉ㹁㹁㹕
400cps CW Servo setting of CR CW direction, 400cps 㹑㹣㹰㹴㹭㸱㸸㸲㸮㸮㹡㹮㹱ࠉࠉࠉࠉࠉ㹁㹕
400cps CCW Servo setting of CR CCW direction, 400cps 㹑㹣㹰㹴㹭㸲㸸㸱㸰㸮㹡㹮㹱ࠉࠉࠉࠉ㹁㹁㹕
Servo setting items [Enter]

㸦When selecting 320cps CW 㸧
Items Contents [<]
GP(Proportional gain) Proportional gain setting 㸱㸰㸮㹡㹮㹱ࠉ㹁㹕㸸㹅㹎

GI(Integral gail) Integral gain setting [>]
㸱㸰㸮㹡㹮㹱ࠉ㹁㹕㸸㹅㹇
GLPF(Low path filter) Low path filter setting
PWM(PWM scale) PWM scale setting 㸱㸰㸮㹡㹮㹱ࠉ㹁㹕㸸㹅㹊㹎㹄
ωC ωC setting 㸱㸰㸮㹡㹮㹱ࠉ㹁㹕㸸㹎㹕㹋ࠉ㹑㹡㹟㹪㹣
The minimum / maximum / count value for each item is shown below.
㸱㸰㸮㹡㹮㹱ࠉ㹁㹕㸸㹵㹁
[Enter]
Values of setting Items 㸦When selecting GP 㸧
Change the value (unit to count)
Items Min. Max. Count 㹅㹎㸸ࠉࠉࠉࠉࠉࠉࠉࠉࠉࠉࠉ㸮㹶㸴㸮㸮㸮 by pressing [+] or [-] key.
GP(Proportional gain) 0x2000 0x7800 0x200 [Enter]

[Cancel]
㹎㹟㹰㹟㹫㹣㹲㹣㹰ࠉ㹓㹮㹢㹟㹲㹣㸽 When parameter has been changed.
GI(Integral gail) 0x0002 0x0800 1
[Enter]
GLPF(Low path filter) 0 255 1 After updating
PWM(PWM scale) 10 15 1
ωC 30 60 5 㹓㹬㹲㹭㹳㹡㹦㹣㹢ࠉ㹎㹟㹰㹟㹫

5.11 Endurance Running Menu VJ628XE-M-00
5.11 Endurance Running Menu 㹁㹦㹣㹡㹩ࠉ㸶㸸㹃㹬㹢㹳㹰㹟㹬㹡㹣

[Enter]
This menu is used to perform endurance running of printer mechanicals. [<]
The endurance running menu includes the following items. [Enter]
㹊㹧㹤㹣㸯㸸㹁㹐ࠉ㹋㹭㹲㹭㹰 CR Motor endurance Menu
[Cancel]
[>]
Item Contents Reference
㹊㹧㹤㹣㸰㸸㹎㹄ࠉ㹋㹭㹲㹭㹰 PF Motor endurance Menu
CR Motor Performs Carriage stroke to perform the "5.11.1 CR Motor

endurance running of CR motor. Endurance Menu 㹊㹧㹤㹣㸱㸸㹁㹳㹲㹲㹣㹰 Cutter endurance Menu
PF Motor Performs media feeding operation to "5.11.2 PF Motor 㹊㹧㹤㹣㸲㸸㹎㹳㹫㹮 Pump endurance Menu
perform the endurance running of PF Endurance Menu

Motor. 㹊㹧㹤㹣㸳㸸㹁㹎㹳㹫㹮 Circulation Pump endurance Menu
Cutter Performs endurance running of Cutter. "5.11.3 Cutter Menu 㹊㹧㹤㹣㸴㸸㹆㹣㹟㹢ࠉ㹊㹭㹡㹩 Head Lock Menu
Pump Performs endurance running of Pump "5.11.4 Pump 㹊㹧㹤㹣㸵㸸㹕㹧㹮㹣㹰 Wiper Menu
Motor. endurance Menu
㹊㹧㹤㹣㸶㸸㹌㹭㹸㹸㹪㹣 Print Head Endurance
CPump Performs endurance running of (Nozzle Print) Menu
Circulation Pump Motor. 㹊㹧㹤㹣㸷㸸㹒㹭㹲㹟㹪ࠉ㹊㹧㹤㹣 General Endurance Menu
Head Lock Performs endurance running of Head "5.11.6 Head Lock Menu 㹊㹧㹤㹣㸯㸮㸸㹁㹦㹣㹡㹩 Endurance Running
lock. Check Menu
Wiper Turns ON/OFF Wiper. "5.11.7 Wiper

Endurance Menu
Nozzle Performs sequential printing to perform "5.11.8 Print Head

the endurance running of Print head. Endurance (Nozzle Print)
Menu
Total Life Performs endurance running on CR axis "5.11.9 General

(CR motor, Bearing, Tube, etc.) and PF Endurance Menu
axis (PF motor, etc.) simultaneously.
Check Confirms the number of endurance "5.11.10 Endurance
running cycles. Running Check Menu

5.11.1 CR Motor Endurance Menu ࢩࣥࢱࢍࣥ㸷㸸ࢱ࢖࢟ࣗ࢘

㹁㹦㹣㹡㹩ࠉ㸶㸸㹊㹧㹤㹣
This menu is used to perform carriage stroke to perform the endurance running of CR motor. [Enter]
The available settings are shown below. [Enter]/ 㹊㹧㹤㹣㸯㸸㹁㹐ࠉ㹋㹭㹲㹭㹰

[Cancel]
[Enter] by pressing [+] or [-] key.
Item Contents Values Remark 㹑㹮㹣㹣㹢ࠉ㹁㹕㸸ࠉࠉࠉࠉࠉ㸱㸰㸮㹡㹮㹱 CW-speed

[Enter]
Speed Set Carriage running speed (CW 310, 320, 400, Unit:cps 㹑㹮㹣㹣㹢ࠉ㹁㹁㹕㸸ࠉࠉࠉ㸱㸰㸮㹡㹮㹱
(CW, CCW) direction, CCW direction). 420 CCW-speed
[Enter]
travel distance
Width Travel distance of Carriage 400~757 mm 㹕㹧㹢㹲㹦㸸ࠉࠉࠉࠉࠉࠉࠉࠉ㸳㸮㸮㹫㹫 400mm~757mm
[Enter]
Life Count Set the number of endurance running -1, -
cycles. 1 to 10000 㹊㹧㹤㹣㹁㹭㹳㹬㹲㸸ࠉࠉࠉࠉࠉࠉࠉࠉ㸳㸮 Endurance Count
[Enter]
㹁㹭㹳㹬㹲㸸ࠉࠉࠉࠉࠉࠉࠉࠉࠉࠉࠉࠉ㸯㸮ࠉ Performing endurance

CAUTION Completing Endurance or [Cancel]
When performing the CR motor endurance running, install Ink cartridges. 㹃㹬㹢㸸ࠉࠉࠉࠉࠉࠉࠉࠉࠉࠉࠉࠉࠉࠉ㸳㸮
If the CR motor endurance running is performed without ink cartridges, ink inside the
tube may leak through the ink holder during Carriage movement.
NOTE
When a speed mode is "Low", the part of 400 is printed with 240.
㨀㧵㧼
• If the number of endurance running cycles is set to -1, Carriage continuously
repeats endurance running until it is canceled from Operation panel.
• The maximum counter value for endurance running cycles is 99999999 (up to 8-
digit number). If the number of cycles exceeds the maximum value, the counter
displays 99999999.
5.11.1 CR Motor Endurance Menu 331

5.11.2 PF Motor Endurance Menu

This menu is used to perform media feeding operation to perform the endurance running of
PF motor .
The available settings are shown below.
Set item Contents Set value Remark

Feed Amount Set the media feed 0.1 to 100 unit: mm
amount per endurance
running cycle.
LifeCount Set the number of -1, 1 to 10000 -
endurance running
cycles.
㨀㧵㧼
• The following table shows the motor transfer parameters to media feed amount.
Speed 35cps
Acceleration 0.05G
Deceleration 0.05G
• If the number of endurance running cycles is set to -1, the PF motor continuously
repeats endurance running until cancel input is given from Operation panel.
displays 99999999.
㹁㹦㹣㹡㹩ࠉ㸶㸸㹃㹬㹢㹳㹰㹟㹬㹡㹣
[Enter]
[Enter] / Change the value (unit to count)
[Cancel]
㹊㹧㹤㹣㸰㸸㹎㹄ࠉ㹋㹭㹲㹭㹰
by pressing [+] or [-] key.
[Enter]
Enter a media feed amount
㹄㹣㹣㹢ࠉ㸿㹫㹭㹳㹬㹲㸸ࠉࠉࠉ㸮㸬㸯㹫㹫 by using [+]/[-] key
Range : 0.1mm to 100.0 mm
[Enter]
㹊㹧㹤㹣ࠉ㹁㹭㹳㹬㹲㸸ࠉࠉࠉࠉࠉࠉࠉ㸳㸮 Endurance Count

[Enter]
㹁㹭㹳㹬㹲㸸ࠉࠉࠉࠉࠉࠉࠉࠉࠉࠉࠉࠉ㸯㸮 Performing endurance
After completing endurance or [Cancel]
㹃㹬㹢㸸ࠉࠉࠉࠉࠉࠉࠉࠉࠉࠉࠉࠉࠉࠉ㸳㸮ࠉ
5.11.2 PF Motor Endurance Menu 332

5.11.3 Cutter Menu 㹁㹦㹣㹡㹩ࠉ㸶㸸㹃㹬㹢㹳㹰㹟㹬㹡㹣

Media is cut as many times as specified with the specified cutting method. [Enter]
Refer to the following table for the set values of cutter endurance operations. 㹊㹧㹤㹣ࠉ㸱㸸㹁㹳㹲㹲㹣㹰
[Enter]
Set item Contents Set value Note [<]

Cut Set the cutting SingleCut-2steps - 㹁㹳㹲㸸㹑㹧㹬㹥㹪㹣㹁㹳㹲㸫㸰㹱㹲㹣㹮㹱 [Enter]
method. SingleCut-3steps
[>]
DoubleCut-2steps
DoubleCut-3steps 㹁㹳㹲㸸㹑㹧㹬㹥㹪㹣㹁㹳㹲㸫㸱㹱㹲㹣㹮㹱
CutPressure Set the pressure Low/High Low/High 㹁㹳㹲㸸㹂㹭㹳㹠㹪㹣㹁㹳㹲㸫㸰㹱㹲㹣㹮㹱

when cutting the
media/ 㹁㹳㹲㸸㹂㹭㹳㹠㹪㹣㹁㹳㹲㸫㸱㹱㹲㹣㹮㹱
Page size Set the media 50 to 3000 Unit: mm
feeding amount per
endurance [-]
operation. 㹁㹳㹲㹎㹰㹣㹱㹱㹳㹰㹣㸸ࠉࠉࠉࠉ㹊㹭㹵
Life count Set the number of -1, 1 to 10000 - [+]
endurance 㹁㹳㹲㹎㹰㹣㹱㹱㹳㹰㹣㸸ࠉࠉࠉ㹆㹧㹥㹦
operations.
[Enter] by pressing [+] /[-] key.
㹎㹟㹥㹣ࠉ㹑㹧㹸㹣㸸ࠉࠉࠉࠉࠉࠉ㸳㸮㹫㹫 50mm to 3000mm

[Enter]
㨀㧵㧼
㹊㹧㹤㹣㹁㹭㹳㹬㹲㸸ࠉࠉࠉࠉࠉࠉࠉࠉ㸳㸮 Endurance Count
• If the number of endurance running cycles is set to -1, Pump motor continuously [Enter]
repeats endurance running until [Cancel ]input is given from Operation panel. 㹒㹧㹫㹣ࠉ㹕㹟㹧㹲㸸ࠉࠉࠉࠉࠉࠉࠉ㸲㸮㹱 Check the Time wait
• The maximum counter value for endurance running cycles is 99999999 (up to 8- [Enter]
[Enter]/ 㹁㹭㹳㹬㹲㸸ࠉࠉࠉࠉࠉࠉࠉࠉࠉࠉࠉࠉ㸯㸮ࠉ Performing endurance
displays 99999999. [Cancel]
Completing endurance or [Cancel]
㹃㹬㹢㸸ࠉࠉࠉࠉࠉࠉࠉࠉࠉࠉࠉࠉࠉࠉ㸳㸮
5.11.3 Cutter Menu 333

5.11.4 Pump endurance Menu

This menu is used to perform endurance running for Pump. [Enter]
You can drive Pump motor according to your desired settings. 㹊㹧㹤㹣ࠉ㸲㸸㹎㹳㹫㹮
[Enter]
>@
㹎㹳㹫㹮㸸㹑㹳㹮㹣㹰㹆㹧㹥㹦 [Enter]
Set item Contents Set value
>!@
Running speed Set the running speed of Super high / High / Normal / 㹎㹳㹫㹮㸸㹆㹧㹥㹦
Pump. Low)
㹎㹳㹫㹮㸸㹌㹭㹰㹫㹟㹪
Life Count Set the number of -1, 1 to 10000
endurance running cycles. 㹎㹳㹫㹮㸸㹊㹭㹵

㨀㧵㧼 by pressing[+] /[-] key.
• If the number of endurance running cycles is set to -1, Pump motor continuously 㹊㹧㹤㹣㹁㹭㹳㹬㹲㸸ࠉࠉࠉࠉࠉࠉࠉࠉ㸳㸮 Endurance Count
repeats endurance running until [Cancel] input is given from Operation panel. [Enter]
• The maximum counter value for endurance running cycles is 99999999 (up to 8- [Enter] / 㹁㹭㹳㹬㹲㸸ࠉࠉࠉࠉࠉࠉࠉࠉࠉࠉࠉࠉ㸯㸮ࠉ Performing endurance
digit number). If the number of cycles exceeds the maximum value, the counter [Cancel]
displays 99999999. 㹃㹬㹢㸸ࠉࠉࠉࠉࠉࠉࠉࠉࠉࠉࠉࠉࠉࠉ㸳㸮
The movement sequences of the pump endurance are as follows.
1 Pump endurance running starts.

2 Rotates at the specified suction speed. This rotation is counted as one cycle.
Super high :10.0 s

High : 10.0 s
Normal: : 10.0 s
Low: : 10.0 s
3 The number of endurance is counted +1.Back to Step 2 above.
(Repeat the specified number of times.)
4 Pump endurance running ends.
5.11.4 Pump endurance Menu 334

5.11.5 CPump endurance Menu 㹁㹦㹣㹡㹩ࠉ㸶㸸㹃㹬㹢㹳㹰㹟㹬㹡㹣

This menu is used to perform endurance running for Circulation Pump. [Enter]
You can drive Circulation Pump motor according to your desired settings. 㹊㹧㹤㹣ࠉ㸳㸸㹁㹎㹳㹫㹮
[Enter]
[<]
The available settings are shown below. [Enter]
㹒㹷㹮㹣㸸㹎㹳㹫㹮㸯
[>]
Set item Contents Set value
㹒㹷㹮㹣㸸㹎㹳㹫㹮㸰
Type select a CPump. Pump1/Pump2/ALL
㹒㹷㹮㹣㸸㸿㹊㹊
Duty Set the running speed of High / Normal
CPump.
[<]
Life Count Set the number of -1, 1 to 10000 [Enter]
㹂㹳㹲㹷㸸㹆㹧㹥㹦
endurance running cycles.
[>]
㹂㹳㹲㹷㸸㹌㹭㹰㹫㹟㹪
㨀㧵㧼
• If the number of endurance running cycles is set to -1, Pump motor continuously
repeats endurance running until [Cancel] input is given from Operation panel. Endurance count
㹊㹧㹤㹣㹁㹭㹳㹬㹲㸸ࠉࠉࠉࠉࠉࠉࠉࠉ㸳㸮 Change the value (unit to count)
• The maximum counter value for endurance running cycles is 99999999 (up to 8- by pressing [+] or [-] key.
[Enter]
Performing endurance
displays 99999999. [Enter]/ 㹁㹭㹳㹬㹲㸸ࠉࠉࠉࠉࠉࠉࠉࠉࠉࠉࠉࠉ㸯㸮ࠉ
[Cancel]
After completing endurance or [Cancel]
The movement sequences of the circulation pump endurance are as follows.
1 Circulation Pump endurance running starts.

2 Rotates at the specified suction speed. This rotation is counted as one cycle.
High : 3.0 s
Normal: : 3.0 s
3 The number of endurance is counted +1.Back to Step 2 above.
(Repeat the specified number of times.)
4 Circulation Pump endurance running ends.
5.11.5 CPump endurance Menu 335

5.11.6 Head Lock Menu

This menu is used to perform endurance running of Carriage lock.
Head is locked/unlocked by the number of times set.

Number of Set the number of -1, 1 to 10000 -
endurance running endurance running
cycles cycles.
㨀㧵㧼
• If the number of endurance running cycles is set to -1, Head lock continuously
repeats endurance running until [Cancel] input is given from Operation panel.
displays 99999999.
[Enter]
㹊㹧㹤㹣ࠉ㸴㸸㹆㹣㹟㹢ࠉ㹊㹭㹡㹩 Change the value (unit to count)
[Enter] by pressing[+] /[-] key.
[Enter]
㹒㹧㹫㹣ࠉ㹕㹟㹧㹲㸸ࠉࠉࠉࠉࠉࠉࠉ㸲㸮㹱 Confirming Waiting time
[Enter] / 㹁㹭㹳㹬㹲㸸ࠉࠉࠉࠉࠉࠉࠉࠉࠉࠉࠉࠉ㸯㸮ࠉ Performing endurance

[Cancel] Completing endurance or [Cancel]
5.11.6 Head Lock Menu 336

5.11.7 Wiper Endurance Menu

This menu is used to perform endurance running of Carriage lock.
Head is locked/unlocked by the number of times set.
Set item Contents Set value Remarks

Number of endurance Set the number of -1 to 10000 -
running cycles endurance running
cycles.
㨀㧵㧼
• If the number of endurance running cycles is set to -1, Wiper continuously repeats
endurance running until [Cancel] input is given from Operation panel.
displays 99999999.
[Enter]
㹊㹧㹤㹣ࠉ㸵㸸㹕㹧㹮㹣㹰 Change the value (unit to count)

[Enter] by pressing[+] /[-] key.
[Enter]
㹒㹧㹫㹣ࠉ㹕㹟㹧㹲㸸ࠉࠉࠉࠉࠉࠉࠉ㸲㸮㹱 Confirming Waiting time
[Enter]
[Enter] / 㹁㹭㹳㹬㹲㸸ࠉࠉࠉࠉࠉࠉࠉࠉࠉࠉࠉࠉ㸯㸮ࠉ Performing endurance

[Cancel]
㹃㹌㹂㸸ࠉࠉࠉࠉࠉࠉࠉࠉࠉࠉࠉࠉࠉࠉ㸳㸮
5.11.7 Wiper Endurance Menu 337

5.11.8 Print Head Endurance (Nozzle Print) Menu

4 color setting
This menu is used to perform sequential printing to perform the endurance running of Print
head.
media feeding direction

Number of endurance Set the number of -1 to 10000 -
running cycles endurance running
cycles.
㨀㧵㧼
• If the number of endurance running cycles is set to -1, Print heads continuously
running times of the endurance
repeats endurance running until cancel input is given from Operation panel.
displays 99999999.
• printing method
speed: 320cps
wave form: VSD4
dot: Large
[Enter]
㹊㹧㹤㹣ࠉ㸶㸸㹌㹭㹸㹸㹪㹣
[Enter]
㹊㹧㹤㹣㹁㹭㹳㹬㹲㸸ࠉࠉࠉࠉࠉࠉࠉࠉ㸳㸮 Endurance Count Pressing [+] /[-] key.
[Enter]
㹁㹭㹳㹬㹲㸸ࠉࠉࠉࠉࠉࠉࠉࠉࠉࠉࠉࠉ㸯㸮ࠉ Performing endurance

[Enter] /
5.11.8 Print Head Endurance (Nozzle Print) Menu 338

5.11.9 General Endurance Menu 㹁㹦㹣㹡㹩ࠉ㸶㸸㹃㹬㹢㹳㹰㹟㹬㹡㹣

This menu is used to perform endurance running on the CR line (CR motor , Bearing, Tube, [Enter]
etc) and PF line (PF motor, etc) simultaneously. 㹊㹧㹤㹣ࠉ㸷㸸㹒㹭㹲㹟㹪

The available settings are shown below. [Enter]
Change the value by pressing[+] /[-] key.
㹑㹮㹣㹣㹢ࠉ㹁㹕㸸ࠉࠉࠉࠉࠉ㸱㸰㸮㹡㹮㹱 CW-speed(310/320/400/420)
Set item Contents Set value Note [Enter]
Speed CW Set Carriage running 310 / 320 / 400 / 420 Unit: cps 㹑㹮㹣㹣㹢ࠉ㹁㹁㹕㸸ࠉࠉࠉࠉ㸱㸰㸮㹡㹮㹱 CCW-speed(310/320/400/420)
Speed CCW speed (CW direction, [Enter]
CCW direction). 㹕㹧㹢㹲㹦㸸ࠉࠉࠉࠉࠉࠉࠉࠉ㸳㸮㸮㹫㹫 400mm to 757㹫㹫
Width Set the shift distance 400 to 757 Unit: mm [Enter]
of the carriage. 㹄㹣㹣㹢㸿㹫㹭㹳㹬㹲㸸ࠉࠉࠉࠉ㸮㸬㸯㹫㹫 Media feed amount(0.1 to 100mm)

[Enter]
Feed Amount Set the media feed 0.1 to 100.0 Unit: mm
㹊㹧㹤㹣㹁㹭㹳㹬㹲㸸ࠉࠉࠉࠉࠉࠉࠉࠉ㸫㸯 Endurance count
amount per
[Enter]
endurance running
cycle. 㹁㹭㹳㹬㹲㸸ࠉࠉࠉࠉࠉࠉࠉࠉࠉࠉࠉࠉ㸯㸮ࠉ
[Enter]/ Performing endurance running
LifeCount Set the number of -1, 1 to 10000 -
endurance running
cycles.
㨀㧵㧼
• In the general endurance menu, the following operations are performed as one
cycle of endurance running:
The counter indicates above-mentioned set number, and the count number
counts the same value as the only CR motor endurance, etc.
• Carriage stroking: 1 stroke
• Media feed: 1 cycle
• If the number of endurance running cycles is set to -1, Carriage and PF Motor
continuously repeat stroking until it is canceled from Operation panel.
displays 99999999.
5.11.9 General Endurance Menu 339

5.11.10 Endurance Running Check Menu

This menu is used to confirm the number of endurance running cycles.
The number of endurance running cycles is stored in NVRAM in the system. Therefore, even
if a serious error occurs during endurance running, you can confirm the number of the
performed cycles just before the occurrence of the serious error.
㹊㹧㹤㹣ࠉ㸷㸸㹁㹦㹣㹡㹩
[Enter]
[<]
[Enter]/ 㹁㹐ࠉ㹋㹭㹲㹭㹰㸸ࠉࠉࠉࠉࠉࠉࠉࠉࠉ㸳㸮
[Cancel]
[>]
㹎㹄ࠉ㹋㹭㹲㹭㹰㸸ࠉࠉࠉࠉࠉࠉࠉࠉࠉࠉ㸮
㹎㹅ࠉ㹋㹭㹲㹭㹰㸸ࠉࠉࠉࠉࠉࠉࠉࠉࠉࠉ㸮
㹎㹳㹫㹮㸸ࠉࠉࠉࠉࠉࠉࠉࠉࠉࠉࠉ㸯㸮㸮
㹁㹎㹳㹫㹮㸸ࠉࠉࠉࠉࠉࠉࠉࠉࠉࠉ㸰㸮㸮
㹆㹣㹟㹢ࠉ㹊㹭㹡㹩㸸ࠉࠉࠉࠉࠉࠉࠉࠉࠉ㸮
㹕㹧㹮㹣㹰㸸ࠉࠉࠉࠉࠉࠉࠉࠉࠉࠉࠉࠉࠉ㸮
㹌㹭㹸㹸㹪㹣㸸ࠉࠉࠉࠉࠉࠉࠉࠉࠉࠉࠉࠉ㸮
㹒㹭㹲㹟㹪㹊㹧㹤㹣㸸ࠉࠉࠉࠉࠉࠉࠉࠉ㸳㸮 Total endurance count
5.11.10 Endurance Running Check Menu 340

5.12 Media Feed Menu VJ628XE-M-00
5.12 Media Feed Menu

Feeds the set media (forward and backward).
Cuts the set media.
When it is before initialization of the machine, carry out initialization of the machine.
[-]key: front feed

[+]key: back feed
[Enter] key: hold the [Enter ]key down for 2 seconds
　　　　　　　（When ‘MediaInitial’ setting is set to ‘Off’, not to cut a media.)
If you continue pushing the [+]/[-]key, it feed consecutively.
[Cancel]
㹁㹦㹣㹡㹩㸷㸸㹋㹣㹢㹧㹟ࠉ㹄㹣㹣㹢 To continuously feed media, keep holding
down [+] or [-].
[Enter] Hold down [Enter] for 2 seconds to cut the
media.
㹄㹣㹣㹢㸸࣮㸭㸩ࠉࠉࠉ㹁㹳㹲㸸㹃㹬㹲㹣㹰 Media cut is not performed when the
media initialization is set to “OFF”
(5.13 Media Initial Menu).
㨀㧵㧼
This is the same function as the "5.12 Media Feed Menu

5.13 Media Initial Menu VJ628XE-M-00
5.13 Media Initial Menu

This menu is used to set the media detection.
Media detection default value for the standard mode (user mode) is used when starting
up the self diagnosis mode.
When it is set to Off, set the media width in the media width setting menu.
Setting items for the media detection menu are as follows:
Item Contents
Top & Width Media width and top edge of the media are detected.
Width Media width is detected.
Off Media detection Off.
㹁㹦㹣㹡㹩㸯㸮㸸㹋㹣㹢㹧㹟㹇㹬㹧㹲㹧㹟㹪
[Enter]
[-]
[Enter]
㹇㹬㹧㹲㸬㸸㹒㹭㹮㸤㹕㹧㹢㹲㹦 detecting the top of a media
and the width of a media
[+]
[Enter]
㹇㹬㹧㹲㸬㸸㹕㹧㹢㹲㹦 detecting the width of a media
㹇㹬㹧㹲㸬㸸㹍㹤㹤 [Enter]
Input media width

Press [+] or [-] key to change
㹕㹧㹢㹲㹦㸸ࠉࠉࠉࠉࠉࠉࠉࠉࠉ㸰㸯㸮㹫㹫 the value
[Enter]/ 210mm to 630mm
[Cancel]

5.14 Heater VJ628XE-M-00
5.14 Heater 5.14.1 Sensor

Check the following items for the heater. The status of the sensors related to the heater is displayed on the panel.
Setup item Contents 㹁㹦㹣㹡㹩㸯㸯㸸㹆㹣㹟㹲㹣㹰

[Enter]
Sensor Pre-heater thermistor (for abnormal temperature detection) [<]
Platen heater thermistor [Cancel]
㹆㹣㹟㹲㹣㹰㸯㸸㹑㹣㹬㹱㹭㹰 [Enter]
Check Check heater operation [>]
㹆㹣㹟㹲㹣㹰㸰㸸㹁㹦㹣㹡㹩
[Cancel]
㧯㨔㨑㨏㨗㧝㧝㧦㧴㨑㨍㨠㨑㨞
[<]
[Enter]
㸯㸸㹎㹪㹟㹲㹣㹬ࠉࠉࠉࠉ㸰㸳ࢎ㹁ࠉ㸯㸵㸵
[<]
[Enter] [>]
㧴㨑㨍㨠㨑㨞㧝㧦㧿㨑㨚㨟㨛㨞 Sensor Menu
[Cancel] 㸰㸸㹎㹰㹣ࠉࠉࠉࠉࠉࠉࠉ㸰㸳ࢎ㹁ࠉ㸯㸵㸵
[>]
㧴㨑㨍㨠㨑㨞㧞㧦㧯㨔㨑㨏㨗 Check Menu
5.14.1 Sensor 343

5.14 Heater VJ628XE-M-00
5.14.2 Check
Check if the heater works properly.
Set the target temperature as 45 degrees and control the heater temperature.This continues
until the cancel key is pressed.
When the target temperature has been reached, the control function works to keep the same
temperature.
㹁㹦㹣㹡㹩㸯㸯㸸㹆㹣㹟㹲㹣㹰
[Enter]
[<]
㹆㹣㹟㹲㹣㹰㸯㸸㹑㹣㹬㹱㹭㹰
[>]
[Cancel]
㹆㹣㹟㹲㹣㹰㸰㸸㹁㹦㹣㹡㹩 [Enter]
[<]
㹁㹦㹩㸸㹎㹪㹟㹲㹣㹬ࠉࠉ㸰㸳ࢎ㹁ࠉ㸯㸵㸵
[>]
㹁㹦㹩㸸㹎㹰㹣ࠉࠉࠉࠉࠉ㸰㸳ࢎ㹁ࠉ㸯㸵㸵
5.14.2 Check 344

5.15 Speed mode VJ628XE-M-00
5.15 Speed mode

Set the print speed for user mode.
Item Contents
Normal 320cps/400cps
Low 320cps/240cps
[Cancel]
㹁㹦㹣㹡㹩㸯㸰㸸㹑㹮㹣㹣㹢㹋㹭㹢㹣
[Enter]
[<]
㹑㹮㹣㹣㹢㹋㹭㹢㹣㸯㸸㹌㹭㹰㹫㹟㹪
[>]
㹑㹮㹣㹣㹢㹋㹭㹢㹣㸰㸸㹊㹭㹵
[Enter]
When parameter is changed.
[Cancel]
[Enter]
After updating
NOTE
● When set to “Low”
• Print speed is changed in user mode menu.
User Type - Type - Adjustment print - Custom adjustment print menu
• Confirmation pattern, Rough adjustment pattern, and Adjustment ALL pattern
are printed at 320cps/240cps.
• Rough adjustment pattern and Adjustment patterns D to F are printed at
240cps and then adjusted.
5.14.2 Check 345

VJ628XE-M-00
6 Maintenance Mode 2
6.1 Introduction ...................................................................347
6.2 Operations in Maintenance Mode 2 .............................348
6.2.1 Starting Up ...........................................................348
6.2.2 Operating Maintenance Mode 2...........................353
6.3 Maintenance Mode 2 Menu...........................................354
6.3.1 Reset Waste Ink Counter .....................................355
6.3.2 Error Message Display .........................................356
6.3.3 Indication Menu....................................................357
6.3.4 Counter Initialization Menu...................................366
6.3.5 Cleaning Menu .....................................................367
6.3.6 Counter Print Menu ..............................................368
6.3.7 Media Feed Menu ................................................369
346
6.1 Introduction
This chapter provides information on the maintenance mode 2.
The maintenance mode 2 provides the user with functions of displaying and initializing the life
counters. It is used in the manufacturing process, adjustment, and maintenance.
The maintenance mode 2 is implemented in the system firmware. All functions are available
from the operation panel.
8.2.2 Operation panel
347
6.2 Operations in Maintenance Mode 2 VJ628XE-M-00
6.2 Operations in Maintenance Mode 2 3 Press Power key to ON.

Power key Multi key
This section explains how to start up and operate the maintenance mode 2 as well as
provides the list of available diagnosis items.
4 If data LED and error LED light up, pressing
6.2.1 Starting Up
㨀㧵㧼
If Data LED and Error LED repeat
NOTE lighting and putting out lights by turns, it
When using the Maintenance Mode 2 function of VJ-628, there are the following two means having started in board manager Data LED Error LED
methods. mode.
• Using Panel Window in MSA
(1) Usage of Maintenance Panel (MSA)
• Using Jig Panel Assy 5 Double-click the [Shortcut to MUTOH
(2) Connecting Jig Panel Assy Service Assistance.exe], and check that the
application starts correctly.
English mode.
(1) Usage of Maintenance Panel (MSA)
(1-a)Usage of Maintenance Panel Window 6 Automatic printer model selection is started.

(9) Confirming Startup of the "MUTOH
Service Assistance"
1 Turn OFF the printer.
2 Insert Connector of Network interface cable 7 After having chosen printer model, main
into Network interface connector located in window appears.

8 On User mode main window, click [Help] - 12 The main screen of Technician mode will be
[Version]. displayed.
[Version information] window appears.
9 Double-click the MUTOH logo (1) and then

the MSA icon (2).
13 Click [Maintenance Panel].
2
Then click [OK].
1 14 [Maintenance Panel] window will be
displayed.
11 Enter User ID and Password.

Then click [Login].

(1-b)How to start the Maintenance Mode 2 (1-c)Maintenance Panel Display and Operation
1 Click [Boot Mode] and choose either [Self-

㨀㧵㧼
Then, choose language. 6.2 Operations in Maintenance Mode 2
CAUTION
• The Maintenance Panel is not Choose Seltf-Diagnosis Mode/ Exit the Maintenance Panel.
available until the PC is properly Maintenance Mode 2 and
choose language.
connected to the printer after the
Display the Help window.
mode selection. Display the communication
• The selected language is reflected in status with the printer.
Recv：Printer information
the Maintenance Panel until the receiving status
printer is powered off. Send：Button input sending The button operationcan be
changed by clicking.
The initial language setting is status
reflected in the printer. Recv/Send
Green Light： Short Long
Communication Success (press) (press) 10cnt
Red Light：
Long (press)：
2 When the printer is successfully switched to Clicking button to operate the
Press [Shift]key and keyboard
key
the mode you selected, the complete Maintenance Panel. 10cnt：
message will appear as shown at right.Click Press [Ctrl] key and keyboard
Right-clicking stops the operation. key
[OK] to go back to the Maintenance Panel.
The [STOP] button is implemented
stop the operation of
Long (press) ant 10cnt .
The keyboard operation is also available as below.
CAUTION
HOME／Space key
ESC key
• The LCD display on the
Maintenance Panel is updated. ↑key → key
• The Maintenance Panel becomes
← key ↓key
available after the proper connection
Press [Shift] key and keyboard key:[Long (press)]

Press [Ctrl] key and keyboard key :[10cnt]

(2) Connecting Jig Panel Assy

7 Remove Top Cover.
NOTE
• When starting Self-diagnostic function or Maintenance mode 2, it is necessary to 8 Connect the Panel FFC to the connector J33
connect Jig Panel Assy (maintenance parts) to the MAIN Board of the printer. of MAIN Board.
• Prepare Jig Panel Assy and Phillips screwdriver No.2. CAUTION
(refer to the following table)
　 ● Tools & Jigs & Maintenance part • Before plugging FFC, check the J33
condition of FFC terminals (that the
Name No. Remarks corners of the terminals are not
crooked and reinforcing plate is not
Jig Panel Assy DG-44954 the followings are enclosed
peeled).
Panel FFC
Panel Unit • Plug/unplug FFC perpendicularly to
Panel Sheet the connector. Never plug/unplug it
obliquely. If plugged obliquely, it may
Phillips screwdriver No.2 Generic - damage/shorten/break terminals in
product connectors, causing a breakdown of
on-board devices.
• Make sure to plug FFC all the way in
the connector. After plugging it, make
3 When the printer is an operating state, turn
Power key Multi key
sure that FFC and the connector
the power key OFF. terminals are not misaligned
sideways and that FFC is not plugged
obliquely.
9 Connect Panel FFC to Panel Unit.

Data LED Error LED
4 Remove Power Cable.
5 Turn the power key ON.
NOTE
It is the work for making it discharge.
6 Turn the power key OFF.

(2-a)Starting Up Maintenance Mode 2
NOTE
Before using the maintenance mode 2, make sure that the maintenance menu is
displayed on Jig panel.
To run the maintenance mode 2 menu, switch the display to the normal operation
status or setup menu display status.
1 While holding down [<] key, [Setting/Value-

] key and [>] key on Jig panel
simultaneously, press [Power] key.
The Jig panel displays the maintenance
mode 2 menu.

6.2.2 Operating Maintenance Mode 2 3 To save the changed setting, press [Enter] key on
Operation panel.
Before using the maintenance mode 2, make sure that the maintenance menu is displayed *The setting is saved and the next diagnosis item is
on Operation panel. displayed.
To run the maintenance menu, switch the display to the normal operation status or setup
menu display status.
NOTE
㨀㧵㧼 If you press [Cancel] key, or, [Setting/value +]

key or [Setting/value -] key, instead of [Enter]
For details of operating procedure, refer to the flow chart of each diagnosis item. key, the modification is not stored.
1 Press either [<] or [>] of Operation panel to select the

item to be diagnosed, and press [Enter] key.
• Determine the diagnosis item
4 To quit diagnosis, press [Cancel] key on Operation
• When the diagnosis item has a submenu, shift panel.
to the next hierarchy of menus. *The system returns to an upper hierarchy of the
diagnosis menu.
2 If the set value is displayed on the LCD of Operation

panel, the value can be changed.
Press either [Setting/value +] or
[Setting/value -] to change the value. 5 When quitting Self-diagnosis menu, press [Power]
key.
6.2.2 Operating Maintenance Mode 2 353

6.3 Maintenance Mode 2 Menu VJ628XE-M-00
6.3 Maintenance Mode 2 Menu

The maintenance mode 2 menu includes the following diagnosis items.
Diagnosis item Contents Reference

Indication Displays the life counter. 6.3.3 Indication Menu
InitCounter Initializes the life counter. 6.3.4 Counter

Initialization Menu
Cleaning Cleans Print heads. 6.3.5 Cleaning Menu
Print Prints the life counter. 6.3.6 Counter Print

Menu
MediaFeed Feeds media into the printer frontward 6.3.7 Media Feed Menu
or backward.
>@
[Enter]
㹋㹟㹧㹬㹲㹣㸯㸸㹇㹬㹢㹧㹡㹟㹲㹧㹭㹬 Indication Menu
[Cancel]
>!@
㹋㹟㹧㹬㹲㹣㸬㸰㸸㹇㹬㹧㹲㹁㹭㹳㹬㹲㹣㹰 InitCounter Menu
㹋㹟㹧㹬㹲㹣㸬㸱㸸㹁㹪㹣㹟㹬㹧㹬㹥 Cleaning Menu
㹋㹟㹧㹬㹲㹣㸬㸲㸸㹎㹰㹧㹬㹲 Print Menu
㹋㹟㹧㹬㹲㹣㸬㸳㸸㹋㹣㹢㹧㹟㹄㹣㹣㹢 MediaFeed Menu
6.2.2 Operating Maintenance Mode 2 354

6.3.1 Reset Waste Ink Counter

When the waste ink, generated from printing and cleaning, reaches the upper limit of the
waste ink tank, “WasteInkTank Full” will be displayed on the panel and the printer will stop
operating to prevent overflowing.
To start operating the printer, empty the tank and then press [Enter] to reset the value of
waste ink counter.
㹕㹟㹱㹲㹣㹇㹬㹩㹒㹟㹬㹩ࠉ㹄㹳㹪㹪
The messages are displayed altermately
every 2 seconds.
㹐㹣㹱㹣㹲㹁㹭㹳㹬㹲㹣㹰㸫㸼ࠉ㹃㹬㹲㹣㹰
[Enter]
Reset the value of waste ink counter and restart printer operation.
NOTE
Make sure to empty the tank before pressing [Enter].
Even if the waste ink still remains in the tank, the counter can be reset once you
press the key.
6.3.1 Reset Waste Ink Counter 355

6.3.2 Error Message Display

Following error messages will appear on the jig panel when any of such error occurs during
ink sequences (ink charging, discharging, cleaning or longstore) or pattern printing. For how
to handle the errors, see "Operation Manual" or 2.2Troubleshooting with Error Messages
Messages Contents
Front cover is open.
㹁㹭㹴㹣㹰ࠉ㹍㹮㹣㹬
The media is not loaded.

㹊㹣㹴㹣㹰ࠉ㹓㹮
All cartridges are not inserted.

㹙㸿㹊㹊㹛㹌㹭㹁㹟㹰㹲㹰㹧㹢㹥㹣
The cartridge of ［　］is not

㹙㸯㹛㹌㹭㹁㹟㹰㹲㹰㹧㹢㹥㹣 inserted.
Ink of all cartridges has run out.

㹙㸿㹊㹊㹛㹇㹬㹩ࠉ㹃㹬㹢
Ink of [ ] has run out.

㹙㸯㹛㹇㹬㹩ࠉ㹃㹬㹢
IC chip cannot be read.

㹙㸿㹊㹊㹛ࠉ㹑㸭㹁ࠉ㹐㹣㹟㹢㹃㹰㹰
Ink cartridge is inserted into a

㹙㸿㹊㹊㹛ࠉ㹑㸭㹁ࠉ㹁㹭㹪㸬㹃㹰㹰 wrong Ink cartridge slot.
This type of ink cannot be used for

㹙㸰㹛ࠉ㹑㸭㹁ࠉ㹇㹬㹩ࠉ㹃㹰㹰 this printer.
An improper Ink cartridge is

㹙㸱㹛ࠉ㹑㸭㹁ࠉ㹁㹭㹢㹣㹃㹰㹰 inserted.
IC chip is broken.
㹙㸲㹛ࠉ㹀㹰㹭㹩㹣㹬ࠉ㹁㹦㹧㹮
A remaining amount of Smart/C

㹑㹫㹟㹰㹲㸭㹁ࠉ㹃㹫㹮㹲㹷 has run out.

6.3.3 Indication Menu

This menu is used to display the life counters.
It consists of the following diagnosis items.
Diagnosis Contents Reference

item
Mainte. Total number of copies printed "6.3.3 Indication Menu
CR motor counter
CR motor counter(accumulation)
PF Motor counter
PF Motor counter (accumulation)
Pump counter
Pump counter (accumulation)
Circulation Pump1 counter
Circulation Pump2 counter (accumulation)
Circulation Pump1 counter
Circulation Pump2 counter (accumulation)
Head（A~H）discharge counter
Head（A~H）discharge counter
(accumulation)
Cleaning number
Number of Wiper use
Number of Wiper Solenoid downs
Number of Cut
Number of Cutter Solenoid downs
CRunlock position
Waste Ink
Print Number of copies printed per mode "6.3.4 Counter
Printed area per mode Initialization Menu
Number of copies printed by effect
Ope.Time Operating time per running mode "6.3.6 Counter Print
Menu
>@
[Enter]
㹇㹬㹢㹧㹡㹟㹲㹧㹭㹬㸯㸸㹋㹟㹧㹬㹲㹣㸬 Mainte. Menu
[Cancel]
>!@
㹇㹬㹢㹧㹡㹟㹲㹧㹭㹬㸰㸸㹎㹰㹧㹬㹲 Print Menu
㹇㹬㹢㹧㹡㹟㹲㹧㹭㹬㸱㸸㹍㹮㹣㸬㹒㹧㹫㹣 Ope.Time Menu
6.3.3 Indication Menu 357

(1) Mainte. Menu Diagnosis item Contents Unit

This menu is used to display the life counters.
T．Fire H Life counter of Head nozzles H line (accumulation) mega dot
Cleaning Number of cleanings times

Diagnosis item Contents Unit
Wiper Life counter of Wiper times
PrintNumber Total number of printed copies copy
Wiper Sol. Number of Wiper Solenoid downs times
CR Motor Life counter of CR motor sweeping count
CutNumber Number cutting times
T.CR Motor Life counter of CR motor (accumulation) sweeping count
CutterSol. Number of Cutter Solenoid downs times
PF Motor Life counter of PF motor 10m
UnlockPos. Displays unlock position 0.001mm
T.PF Motor Life counter of PF motor (accumulation) 10m
Waste Ink Displays the amount of Waste Ink nl
Pump Life of Pump Unit counter seconds
T.Pump Life of Pump Unit counter (accumulation) seconds

㨀㧵㧼
CPump1 Life of Circulation Pump Unit1 counter seconds
• Cleaning count does not rely on the cleaning type. (Including ink charge and
T.CPump1 Life of Circulation Pump Unit1counter (accumulation) seconds economy ink charge)
• CR motor is counted every time the print head moves sideways (left to right, right
CPump2 Life of Circulation Pump Unit2 counter seconds
to left).
T.CPump2 Life of Circulation Pump Unit2 counter (accumulation) seconds • Number of Pump wheel rotations: The conversion of the number of Pump wheel
rotations from the number of Wiper motor driving steps is as follows:
Fire A Life counter of Head nozzles A line mega dot
1 rotation of Pump wheel = 330 steps (2-phase excitation conversion)
Fire B Life counter of Head nozzles B line mega dot • Maximum value　　　　　　: 99999999（accumulation counter : 999999999）
Fire C Life counter of Head nozzles C line mega dot • over the Maximum value : 99999999（accumulation counter : 999999999）
Fire D Life counter of Head nozzles D line mega dot
Fire E Life counter of Head nozzles E line mega dot
Fire F Life counter of Head nozzles F line mega dot
Fire G Life counter of Head nozzles G line mega dot
Fire H Life counter of Head nozzles H line mega dot
T．Fire A Life counter of Head nozzles A line (accumulation) mega dot
T．Fire B Life counter of Head nozzles B line (accumulation) mega dot
T．Fire C Life counter of Head nozzles C line (accumulation) mega dot
T．Fire D Life counter of Head nozzles D line (accumulation) mega dot
T．Fire E Life counter of Head nozzles E line (accumulation) mega dot
T．Fire F Life counter of Head nozzles F line (accumulation) mega dot
T．Fire G Life counter of Head nozzles G line (accumulation) mega dot

from left page to left page

[Cancel]
㹇㹬㹢㹧㹡㹟㹲㹧㹭㹬㸯㸸㹋㹟㹧㹬㹲㹣㸬
[Enter] 㹒㸬㹄㹧㹰㹣ࠉ㹂㸸ࠉࠉࠉࠉࠉࠉࠉࠉࠉࠉ㸮
>@
㹒㸬㹄㹧㹰㹣ࠉ㹃㸸ࠉࠉࠉࠉࠉࠉࠉࠉࠉࠉ㸮
㹎㹰㹧㹬㹲㹌㹳㹫㹠㹣㹰㸸ࠉࠉࠉࠉࠉࠉࠉ㸮
>!@ 㹒㸬㹄㹧㹰㹣ࠉ㹄㸸ࠉࠉࠉࠉࠉࠉࠉࠉࠉࠉ㸮
㹁㹐ࠉ㹋㹭㹲㹭㹰㸸ࠉࠉࠉࠉࠉࠉࠉࠉࠉࠉ㸮
㹒㸬㹄㹧㹰㹣ࠉ㹅㸸ࠉࠉࠉࠉࠉࠉࠉࠉࠉࠉ㸮
㹒㸬㹁㹐ࠉ㹋㹭㹲㹭㹰㸸ࠉࠉࠉࠉࠉࠉࠉࠉ㸮
㹒㸬㹄㹧㹰㹣ࠉ㹆㸸ࠉࠉࠉࠉࠉࠉࠉࠉࠉࠉ㸮
㹎㹄ࠉ㹋㹭㹲㹭㹰㸸ࠉࠉࠉࠉࠉࠉࠉࠉࠉࠉ㸮
㹁㹪㹣㹟㹬㹧㹬㹥㸸ࠉࠉࠉࠉࠉࠉࠉࠉࠉࠉ㸮
㹒㸬㹎㹄ࠉ㹋㹭㹲㹭㹰㸸ࠉࠉࠉࠉࠉࠉࠉࠉ㸮
㹕㹧㹮㹣㹰㸸ࠉࠉࠉࠉࠉࠉࠉࠉࠉࠉࠉࠉࠉ㸮
㹎㹳㹫㹮㸸ࠉࠉࠉࠉࠉࠉࠉࠉࠉࠉࠉࠉࠉࠉ㸮
㹕㹧㹮㹣㹰ࠉ㹑㹭㹪㸬㸸ࠉࠉࠉࠉࠉࠉࠉࠉ㸮
㹒㸬㹎㹳㹫㹮㸸ࠉࠉࠉࠉࠉࠉࠉࠉࠉࠉࠉࠉ㸮
㹁㹳㹲㹌㹳㹫㹠㹣㹰㸸ࠉࠉࠉࠉࠉࠉࠉࠉࠉ㸮
㹁㹎㹳㹫㹮㸯㸸ࠉࠉࠉࠉࠉࠉࠉࠉࠉࠉࠉࠉ㸮
㹁㹳㹲㹲㹣㹰㹑㹭㹪㸬㸸ࠉࠉࠉࠉࠉࠉࠉࠉ㸮
㹒㸬㹁㹎㹳㹫㹮㸯㸸ࠉࠉࠉࠉࠉࠉࠉࠉࠉࠉ㸮
㹓㹬㹪㹭㹡㹩㹎㹭㹱㸬㸸ࠉࠉ㹖㸬㹖㹖㹖㹫㹫 unadjusted㸸x.xxxmm
other than unadjusted㸸99.999mm㹼
㹁㹎㹳㹫㹮㸰㸸ࠉࠉࠉࠉࠉࠉࠉࠉࠉࠉࠉࠉ㸮 ࠉࠉࠉࠉࠉࠉ -99.999mm
㹕㹟㹱㹲㹣ࠉ㹇㹬㹩㸸ࠉࠉࠉࠉࠉࠉࠉࠉࠉ㸮
㹒㸬㹁㹎㹳㹫㹮㸰㸸ࠉࠉࠉࠉࠉࠉࠉࠉࠉࠉ㸮
㹄㹧㹰㹣ࠉ㸿㸸ࠉࠉࠉࠉࠉࠉࠉࠉࠉࠉࠉࠉ㸮
㹄㹧㹰㹣ࠉ㹀㸸ࠉࠉࠉࠉࠉࠉࠉࠉࠉࠉࠉࠉ㸮
㹄㹧㹰㹣ࠉ㹁㸸ࠉࠉࠉࠉࠉࠉࠉࠉࠉࠉࠉࠉ㸮
㹄㹧㹰㹣ࠉ㹂㸸ࠉࠉࠉࠉࠉࠉࠉࠉࠉࠉࠉࠉ㸮
㹄㹧㹰㹣ࠉ㹃㸸ࠉࠉࠉࠉࠉࠉࠉࠉࠉࠉࠉࠉ㸮
㹄㹧㹰㹣ࠉ㹄㸸ࠉࠉࠉࠉࠉࠉࠉࠉࠉࠉࠉࠉ㸮
㹄㹧㹰㹣ࠉ㹅㸸ࠉࠉࠉࠉࠉࠉࠉࠉࠉࠉࠉࠉ㸮
㹄㹧㹰㹣ࠉ㹆㸸ࠉࠉࠉࠉࠉࠉࠉࠉࠉࠉࠉࠉ㸮
㹒㸬㹄㹧㹰㹣ࠉ㸿㸸ࠉࠉࠉࠉࠉࠉࠉࠉࠉࠉ㸮
㹒㸬㹄㹧㹰㹣ࠉ㹀㸸ࠉࠉࠉࠉࠉࠉࠉࠉࠉࠉ㸮
㹒㸬㹄㹧㹰㹣ࠉ㹁㸸ࠉࠉࠉࠉࠉࠉࠉࠉࠉࠉ㸮

(2) Print Menu

Confirming printing information.
Diagnosis item Contents
Num Displays the counter value of the number of printed copies per mode
Area Displays the counter value of the print area per mode
Effect Number of the printed copies per effect
[Cancel]
㧵㨚㨐㨕㨏㨍㨠㨕㨛㨚㧞㧦㧼㨞㨕㨚㨠
[Enter]
=?MG[
[Enter]
㧼㨞㨕㨚㨠㧝㧦㧺㨡㨙 Num Menu
[Cancel]
= ?MG[
㧼㨞㨕㨚㨠㧞㧦㧭㨞㨑㨍 Area Menu
㧼㨞㨕㨚㨠㧟㧦㧱㨒㨒㨑㨏㨠 Effect Menu

(2-a)Num
Check the number of printed copies per print mode. (Excluding the inner patterns.)
㨀㧵㧼
Maximum value : 99999999
When the count goes over the max. value: 99999999
Total num Displays the counter value of the total number of Copies
printed copies of all modes
Fast num Displays the counter value of the number of printed Copies
copies of “Fast”.
Fine num Displays the counter value of the number of printed Copies
copies of ”Fine”.
S.Fine num Displays the counter value of the number of printed Copies
copies of “S.Fine”
Other num Displays other counter values of the number of Copies

printed copies
[Cancel]
㹎㹰㹧㹬㹲㸰㸸㹌㹳㹫
[Enter]
[Enter]
>@
㹒㹭㹲㹟㹪ࠉ㹬㹳㹫㸸ࠉࠉࠉࠉࠉࠉࠉࠉࠉ㸮
>!@
㹄㹟㹱㹲ࠉ㹬㹳㹫㸸ࠉࠉࠉࠉࠉࠉࠉࠉࠉࠉ㸮
㹄㹧㹬㹣ࠉ㹬㹳㹫㸸ࠉࠉࠉࠉࠉࠉࠉࠉࠉࠉ㸮
㹑㸬㹄㹧㹬㹣ࠉ㹬㹳㹫㸸ࠉࠉࠉࠉࠉࠉࠉࠉ㸮
㹍㹲㹦㹣㹰ࠉ㹬㹳㹫㸸ࠉࠉࠉࠉࠉࠉࠉࠉࠉ㸮

(2-b)Area
Check the print area per print mode. (Excluding the inner patterns.)
㨀㧵㧼
Total area Displays the counter value of the total print area of ㎡
all modes
Fast area Displays the counter value of the print area of ㎡
“Fast”.
Fine num Displays the counter value of the print area of ㎡

”Fine”.
S.Fine num Displays the counter value of the print area of ㎡

S.Fine.
Other area Displays other counter values of the print area. ㎡
[Cancel]
㹎㹰㹧㹬㹲㸰㸸㸿㹰㹣㹟
[Enter]
[Enter]
>@
㹒㹭㹲㹟㹪ࠉ㹟㹰㹣㹟㸸ࠉࠉࠉࠉࠉࠉࠉࠉ㸮
>!@
㹄㹟㹱㹲ࠉ㹟㹰㹣㹟㸸ࠉࠉࠉࠉࠉࠉࠉࠉࠉ㸮
㹄㹧㹬㹣ࠉ㹟㹰㹣㹟㸸ࠉࠉࠉࠉࠉࠉࠉࠉࠉ㸮
㹑㸬㹄㹧㹬㹣ࠉ㹟㹰㹣㹟㸸ࠉࠉࠉࠉࠉࠉࠉ㸮
㹍㹲㹦㹣㹰ࠉ㹟㹰㹣㹟㸸ࠉࠉࠉࠉࠉࠉࠉࠉ㸮

(2-c)Effect Diagnosis item Contents Unit

Check the number of the printed copies per effect. (Excluding the inner patterns.)
Fine&Fuzz3 Number of printings in Fine&Fuzz3 copies
Fine&Fuzz4 Number of printings in Fine&Fuzz4

㨀㧵㧼
Displayed as a decimal. Fine&Fuzz5 Number of printings in Fine&Fuzz5
Maximum value : 99999999 Fine&Fuzz6 Number of printings in Fine&Fuzz6
Fine&Fog1 Number of printings in Fine&Fog1

None 1 Number of printings in None1 copies
A-S.F&W Number of printings in A-S.F&W
None2 Number of printings in None2
B-S.F&W Number of printings in B-S.F&W
None3 Number of printings in None3
Wave1 Number of printings in Wave1

Fog1 Number of printings in Fog1
Fuzz1 Number of printings in Fuzz1
Wow1 Number of printings in Wow1
Fine&Wave1 Number of printings in Fine&Wave1
Fine&Wavw2 Number of printings in Fine&Wave2
Fine&Wave3 Number of printings in Fine&Wave3


[Cancel] HTQONGHVRCIG VQNGHVRCIG

㧼㨞㨕㨚㨠㧟㧦㧱㨒㨒㨑㨏㨠
[Enter] 㧲㨕㨚㨑㧒㧲㨡㨦㨦㧟㧦‫ޓ‬㧜㧜㧜㧜㧜㧜㧜㧜
[Enter]
=?
㧺㨛㨚㨑㧝‫ޓޓޓޓޓޓ‬㧦㧜㧜㧜㧜㧜㧜㧜㧜㧲㨕㨚㨑㧒㧲㨡㨦㨦㧠㧦‫ޓ‬㧜㧜㧜㧜㧜㧜㧜㧜
= ?
㧲㨕㨚㨑㧒㧲㨡㨦㨦㧡㧦‫ޓ‬㧜㧜㧜㧜㧜㧜㧜㧜
㧺㨛㨚㨑㧞‫ޓޓޓޓޓޓ‬㧦㧜㧜㧜㧜㧜㧜㧜㧜
㧲㨕㨚㨑㧒㧲㨡㨦㨦㧢㧦‫ޓ‬㧜㧜㧜㧜㧜㧜㧜㧜
㧺㨛㨚㨑㧟‫ޓޓޓޓޓޓ‬㧦㧜㧜㧜㧜㧜㧜㧜㧜
㧲㨕㨚㨑㧒㧲㨛㨓㧝㧦‫ޓޓ‬㧜㧜㧜㧜㧜㧜㧜㧜
㨃㨍㨢㨑㧝‫ޓޓޓޓޓޓ‬㧦㧜㧜㧜㧜㧜㧜㧜㧜
㧲㨕㨚㨑㧒㧲㨛㨓㧞㧦‫ޓޓ‬㧜㧜㧜㧜㧜㧜㧜㧜
㨃㨍㨢㨑㧞‫ޓޓޓޓޓޓ‬㧦㧜㧜㧜㧜㧜㧜㧜㧜
㧲㨕㨚㨑㧒㧲㨛㨓㧟㧦‫ޓޓ‬㧜㧜㧜㧜㧜㧜㧜㧜
㨃㨍㨢㨑㧟‫ޓޓޓޓޓޓ‬㧦㧜㧜㧜㧜㧜㧜㧜㧜
㧭㧙㧿㧚㧲㧒㨃‫ޓޓޓޓ‬㧦㧜㧜㧜㧜㧜㧜㧜㧜 A-Super Fine&Wave
㧲㨛㨓㧝‫ޓޓޓޓޓޓޓ‬㧦㧜㧜㧜㧜㧜㧜㧜㧜
㧮㧙㧿㧚㧲㧒㨃‫ޓޓޓޓ‬㧦㧜㧜㧜㧜㧜㧜㧜㧜 B-Super Fine&Wave
㧲㨛㨓㧞‫ޓޓޓޓޓޓޓ‬㧦㧜㧜㧜㧜㧜㧜㧜㧜
㧲㨛㨓㧟‫ޓޓޓޓޓޓޓ‬㧦㧜㧜㧜㧜㧜㧜㧜㧜
㧲㨡㨦㨦㧝‫ޓޓޓޓޓޓ‬㧦㧜㧜㧜㧜㧜㧜㧜㧜
㧲㨡㨦㨦㧞‫ޓޓޓޓޓޓ‬㧦㧜㧜㧜㧜㧜㧜㧜㧜
㧲㨡㨦㨦㧟‫ޓޓޓޓޓޓ‬㧦㧜㧜㧜㧜㧜㧜㧜㧜
㨃㨛㨣㧝‫ޓޓޓޓޓޓޓ‬㧦㧜㧜㧜㧜㧜㧜㧜㧜
㨃㨛㨣㧞‫ޓޓޓޓޓޓޓ‬㧦㧜㧜㧜㧜㧜㧜㧜㧜
㨃㨛㨣㧟‫ޓޓޓޓޓޓޓ‬㧦㧜㧜㧜㧜㧜㧜㧜㧜
㧲㨕㨚㨑㧒㨃㨍㨢㨑㧝‫ޓ‬㧦㧜㧜㧜㧜㧜㧜㧜㧜
㧲㨕㨚㨑㧒㨃㨍㨢㨑㧞‫ޓ‬㧦㧜㧜㧜㧜㧜㧜㧜㧜
㧲㨕㨚㨑㧒㨃㨍㨢㨑㧟‫ޓ‬㧦㧜㧜㧜㧜㧜㧜㧜㧜
㧲㨕㨚㨑㧒㧲㨡㨦㨦㧝‫ޓ‬㧦㧜㧜㧜㧜㧜㧜㧜㧜
㧲㨕㨚㨑㧒㧲㨡㨦㨦㧞‫ޓ‬㧦㧜㧜㧜㧜㧜㧜㧜㧜
VQTKIJVRCIG HTQOTKIJVRCIG

(3) Ope.Time
Confirming Operation time.
㨀㧵㧼
Total Operation time of All modes. minutes
Normal Operation time of User mode.
Diag. Operation time of Self Diagnostic mode.
Mainte. Operation time of Maintenance mode 2.
[Cancel]
㹇㹬㹢㹧㹡㹟㹲㹧㹭㹬㸱㸸㹍㹮㹣㸬㹒㹧㹫㹣
[Enter] >@
㹒㹭㹲㹟㹪㸸ࠉࠉࠉ㸷㸷㸷㸷㸷㸷㸷㸷㹫㹧㹬
>!@
㹌㹭㹰㹫㹟㹪㸸ࠉࠉ㸷㸷㸷㸷㸷㸷㸮㸮㹫㹧㹬
㹂㹧㹟㹥㸸ࠉࠉࠉࠉࠉࠉࠉࠉࠉࠉ㸷㸮㹫㹧㹫
㹋㹟㹧㹬㹲㹣㸬㸸ࠉࠉࠉࠉࠉࠉࠉࠉ㸷㹫㹧㹫

6.3.4 Counter Initialization Menu [Cancel]

㹋㹟㹧㹬㹲㹣㸬㸰㸸㹇㹬㹧㹲㹁㹭㹳㹬㹲㹣㹰
This menu is used to initialize the life counters. [Enter]
>@
The parameters that can be initialized in this menu are as follows.
㹇㹬㹧㹲㸬ࠉ㸯㸸㹎㹰㹧㹬㹲ࠉ㹌㹳㹫 [Cancel]
>!@
Diagnosis item Contents 㹇㹬㹧㹲㸬ࠉ㸰㸸㹎㹰㹧㹬㹲㹇㹬㹤㹭㸬
Print Num total print counter.
㹇㹬㹧㹲㸬ࠉ㸱㸸㸿㹊㹊
Print Info. number of printed copies per mode, print area per mode, and the
number of printed copies per effect 㹇㹬㹧㹲㸬ࠉ㸲㸸㹁㹐ࠉ㹋㹭㹲㹭㹰
ALL Timer,Life counter,Mechanical counter,Mechanical adjustment 㹇㹬㹧㹲㸬ࠉ㸳㸸㹎㹄ࠉ㹋㹭㹲㹭㹰

values,Head ID.
㹇㹬㹧㹲㸬ࠉ㸴㸸㹆㹣㹟㹢ࠉ㹓㹬㹧㹲
Timer Timer.
㹇㹬㹧㹲㸬ࠉ㸵㸸㹕㹧㹮㹣㹰
CR Motor CR motor life counter.
PF Motor PF motor life counter. 㹇㹬㹧㹲㸬ࠉ㸶㸸㹎㹳㹫㹮
HeadUnit Head nozzle life counter 㹇㹬㹧㹲㸬ࠉ㸷㸸㹁㹎㹳㹫㹮㸯

Wiper Wiper life counter 㹇㹬㹧㹲㸬㸯㸮㸸㹁㹎㹳㹫㹮㸰
Pump Pump life counter
㹇㹬㹧㹲㸬㸯㸯㸸㹁㹳㹲㹲㹣㹰
CPump1 Circulation Pump1 life counter
㹇㹬㹧㹲㸬㸯㸰㸸㹓㹬㹪㹭㹡㹩ࠉ㹎㹭㹱㸬
CPump2 Circulation Pump2 life counter
㹇㹬㹧㹲㸬㸯㸱㸸㹕㹟㹱㹲㹣ࠉ㹇㹬㹩
Cutter Cutter life counter
[Enter]
Unlock Pos. the position of unlocking Head lock
>@
Waste Ink Waste Ink amount counter 㹇㹬㹧㹲㹧㹟㹪㹧㹸㹣㸽ࠉࠉࠉࠉࠉࠉࠉ㹌㹭 [Enter]/

[Cancel]
>!@
㹇㹬㹧㹲㹧㹟㹪㹧㹸㹣㸽ࠉࠉࠉࠉࠉࠉ㹗㹣㹱 [Enter]
6.3.4 Counter Initialization Menu 366

6.3.5 Cleaning Menu

This menu is used to clean Print head.
The Cleaning menu includes the following diagnosis items.
Diagnosis item Description

Short Performs short cleaning
Normal Performs Normal cleaning
Long Performs Long cleaning
[Cancel]
㹋㹟㹧㹬㹲㹣㸬㸱ࠉ㸸㹁㹪㹣㹟㹬㹧㹬㹥
[Enter] >@
㹁㹪㹣㹟㹬㹧㹬㹥㸯㸸㹑㹦㹭㹰㹲
>!@
㹁㹪㹣㹟㹬㹧㹬㹥㸰㸸㹌㹭㹰㹫㹟㹪
㹁㹪㹣㹟㹬㹧㹬㹥㸱㸸㹊㹭㹬㹥
[Enter]
㹁㹪㹣㹟㹬㹧㹬㹥 after cleaning
6.3.5 Cleaning Menu 367

6.3.6 Counter Print Menu

This menu is used to print the life counter values.
㹋㹟㹧㹬㹲㹣㸬㸲㸸㹎㹰㹧㹬㹲
[Enter]
㹃㹬㹲㹣㹰ࠉ㹎㹰㹧㹬㹲ࠉ㹑㹲㹟㹰㹲
[Enter]
after a media is set
㹋㹟㹧㹬㹲㹣㹬㹟㹬㹡㹣ࠉ㹎㹰㹧㹬㹲
6.3.6 Counter Print Menu 368

6.3.7 Media Feed Menu

Feeds the set media (forward and backward).
Cuts the set media.
When it is before initialization of the machine, carry out initialization of the machine.
[-]key: front feed

[+]key: back feed
[Enter] key: hold the [Enter ]key down for 2 seconds
　　　　　　　（When ‘MediaInitial’ setting is set to ‘Off’, not to cut a media.)
If you continue pushing the [+]/[-]key, it feed consecutively.
㹋㹟㹧㹬㹲㹣㸬㸳㸸㹋㹣㹢㹧㹟㹄㹣㹣㹢
[Cancel] [Enter]
[-] key㸸Front feed
㹄㹣㹣㹢㸸࣮㸭㸩ࠉࠉࠉ㹁㹳㹲㸸㹃㹬㹲㹣㹰
[+] key㸸Back feed
㨀㧵㧼
This is the same function as the 5.12 Media Feed Menu.
6.3.7 Media Feed Menu 369

VJ628XE-M-00
7 Maintenance
7.1 Introduction ...................................................................371
7.2 Periodical Services .......................................................372
7.2.1 Periodic Replacement Parts.................................373
7.2.2 Parts Which Require Inspection/Replacement.....374
7.3 Part Life Information .....................................................375
7.4 Jigs and Tools ...............................................................376
7.4.1 Required Tools.....................................................376
7.5 Lubrication/Bonding .....................................................378
7.6 Transportation of Product ............................................379
370
7.1 Introduction
This chapter provides information about the periodical services, part life, lubrication/bonding,
and transport.
WARNING
Before starting any maintenance work, always perform the following operations.
• Turn the printer power OFF.
• Remove Power cable from Power outlet.
Not doing so may cause electric shock or damage to the electric circuit.
• Unplug the cables connected to the printer.
Failure to do so could result in damage to the printer.
CAUTION
• Make sure there is sufficient space around the printer when performing
maintenance work.
• When servicing the machinery inside with some covers removed, pay special
attention not to be injured by the driving mechanisms.
• Maintenance must be done by two or more persons for the following work.
• When disassembling or reassembling the printer and Dedicated stand
• When packing the printer for transportation
7.1 Introduction P.7-371

7.2 Periodical Services VJ628XE-M-00
7.2 Periodical Services

This section describes the periodical services required for this printer.
The periodical services ensures stable plotting quality of the printer.
Perform periodical inspections according to “Periodic Replacement Parts “ and perform
cleaning and part replacement as necessary.
㨀㧵㧼
Operation Manual
Exploded View
372
7.2.1 Periodic Replacement Parts

The parts in the following table require replacement once per year.
Maintenance part name Maintenanc Remark

e part
numbers
VJ628 Periodic Maintenance DG-44737 Exploded View Maintenance
Kit
7.2 Periodical Services P.7-373

7.2.2 Parts Which Require Inspection/Replacement

Table 7-1 Periodical Inspection Part List
Part Timing Check point Action
Platen front surface Several Media dust accumulation Clean it.
times per Foreign objects
year Damages If ink deposits are
present, remove
them with a
dampened cloth and
wipe the area with a
clean dry cloth.
T fence Several Media dust accumulation Clean it.

(CR encoder times per Foreign objects
detection slit plate) year Damages If any damage is
found, replace the
part.
Paper rear sensor Several Media dust accumulation Clean it.
front surface times per Foreign objects
year
Daily maintenance Several Ink deposits If the stain is left, tell
check point by the times per Foreign objects the user to clean it
user year Damages periodically
(Platen, pressure according to the
roller, wiper, outer Daily cleaning explanation of the
surface of the print User’s Manual.
head) (Parts should be
replaced more often
if stain is left.)
Pressure roller Several Ink deposits Clean it.
times per Foreign objects
year Damages Refer to 7.5
Lubrication Lubrication/Bonding
for lubrication if
necessary.
7.2.2 Parts Which Require Inspection/Replacement 374

7.3 Part Life Information VJ628XE-M-00
7.3 Part Life Information

This section shows how to check the life of the service parts.
To know the life of the service parts, check the maintenance counter from the counter display
menu in the maintenance mode.
㨀㧵㧼
6.3.4 Counter Initialization Menu
Part life information of this printer is shown in the table below.
Part Life Warning How to Replacement Remark

expecta display restore parts
ncy
CR 4,370,0 Check Life [CR Counter At the first 3.6.1
motor 00 motor] clear warning: Replacing CR Motor
passes CR motor 3.6.11
CR following Replacing CR
movment belt Return Pulley Assy
pulley "3.9.4Replacin
(Check Ink tube g Ink TubeP.152
as well.) 3.9.3
At the next Replacing CR FFC
warning:
Replace CR
cable after above
parts is replaced.
PF motor 21Km Check Life [PF Counter Replace as 3.7.1
motor] clear necessary Replacing PF Motor
Print 6 × 109 Check Life Counter Replace as 3.8.15

head (6 [Head] clear necessary Replacing Head
thousan
d
million)
dots
Pump 300 Check Life Counter Replace as 3.10.1
Motor hours [Pump] clear necessary Replacing Waste
Check Life Fluid Pump
[CPump1]
Check Life
[CPump2]
7.3 Part Life Information P.7-375

7.4 Jigs and Tools VJ628XE-M-00
7.4 Jigs and Tools No. Name Part number Remarks

This section provides lists of jigs and tools required for service operations. 18 Loupe Generic product For confirming adjustment pattern
19 magic marker Generic product -
7.4.1 Required Tools 20 plastic bag Generic product -
21 Thread Locker Generic product Three bond 1401
(1) Tools for Part Replacement
22 waste cloth Generic product -
No. Name Part number Remarks 23 acetate tape Generic product width: 18mm、30mm
1 Phillips screwdriver No.2 Generic product More than 250 mm shaft length is
recommended.
2 Phillips screwdriver No.2 Generic product Less than 50 mm shaft length is
recommended.
3 Phillips screwdriver No.1 Generic product -
4 slotted screwdriver Generic product -
5 slotted screwdriver Generic product -
（precision）
6 Box driver Generic product For replacing CR board assemblies
7 Flat-shaped ratchet Generic product -
driver
8 Long-nose pliers Generic product -
9 Tweezers Generic product -
10 Hex wrench (2.5 mm) Generic product -
11 Hex wrench (2.5mm） Generic product For screws retaining Head base, with shaft
length of 150mm or longer and not L-
shaped
12 Hex wrench (1.5mm) Generic product -

13 E ring holder (E-2.5) Generic product -
14 E ring holder (E-6) Generic product -
15 Penlight Generic product -
16 tube cutter Generic product For replacing Valve Heads or Ink
tubes
17 Measure Generic product For replacing Steel belt, longer than
3m
7.4 Jigs and Tools P.7-376

7.4 Jigs and Tools VJ628XE-M-00
(2) Tools for Adjustment
Part
No. Name Remarks
number
1 Personal computer Generic Network interface connector (RJ-45)
product should be equipped.
(10M/100M Ethernet I/F)
2 Network interface cable Generic Cross-type cable
product * Use stratight-type cable to connect
HUB.
3 Dedicated network - MUTOH Service Assistance
software
4 Tension gauge Generic Max. 40 N (4,080gf) for measurement
product Manufacturer: Ohba Keiki Seisakusho
Co., Ltd.
5 Tension gauge Generic Max. 2 N (204gf) for measurement
product Manufacturer: Ohba Keiki Seisakusho
Co., Ltd.
6 Dedicated paper - To adjust printing precision.
7 PG Adjusting Jig (1.1/ DG-43193 For Print head height adjustment
1.3) (1.1mm/1.3mm）
8 Cutter Holder DG-43191 -
adjustment Jig
9 Valve Head Washing kit DG-41787 -
(VJ Ink)
10 Level Generic For confirming installation environment.
product
11 Jig Panel Assy DG-44954 -
7.4.1 Required Tools 377

7.5 Lubrication/Bonding VJ628XE-M-00
7.5 Lubrication/Bonding Parts name Location Manufacturer Model name
This section covers the lubrication/bonding information. Head base Head mouting Apply to the position Dow Corning MOLYKOTE(R
After disassembling/assembling this printer, always perform necessary lubrication/bonding section plate of the screw hole Toray Co., Ltd. )EM-60L
referring the following table. securing shoulder GREASE
screw.
CAUTION Head base Apply to the part Dow Corning MOLYKOTE(R

pressing screw contacting with the Toray Co., Ltd. )EM-60L
• Only use specified lubricants to the printer. The use of unauthorized lubricants CR cursor. GREASE
may damage the components and shorten the printer life.
• Pay attension not to lubricate too much on a part. PF drive Set screw Apply screw-locking Three Bond Co., 1401
section agent to the Ltd.
coupling set screw.
CR drive CR Following After adjusting Steel Three Bond Co., 1401
Parts name Location Manufacturer Model name section Movement Belt belt, apply screw- Ltd.
pulley adjusting locking agent.
PF drive Up/down gear on Apply to gear. Dow Corning MOLYKOTE(R
screw
section pressure lever Toray Co., Ltd. )EM60L
GREASE Others Screw Apply to the area Three Bond Co., 1401
screw-locking agent Ltd.
CR drive Y rail Apply to the hole Dow Corning MOLYKOTE(R
is applied.
section securing Y drive Toray Co., Ltd. )EM-60L
base. GREASE The areas Attach acetate tapes Not specified -
sharpened edge to the tape wires or
Apply to the hole Dow Corning MOLYKOTE(R
is likely to harnesses where
securing the return Toray Co., Ltd. )EM-60L
emerge sharpened edge is
pulley bracket. GREASE
likely to emerge.
Drive pulley Apply to the drive Dow Corning MOLYKOTE(R
pulley. Toray Co., Ltd. )EM-60L
GREASE
Pressure cam Apply to cam part. Dow Corning SUPERMULPA
Toray Co., Ltd. SS32（Super
multi dia tetrat）
Roller guide Apply to the front Dow Corning MOLYKOTE(R
surface of Roller Toray Co., Ltd. )EM-60L
guide. GREASE
Cursor Rack Apply to Gear. Dow Corning MOLYKOTE(R
section Toray Co., Ltd. )EM-60L
GREASE

7.6 Transportation of Product VJ628XE-M-00
7.6 Transportation of Product

This section describes how to transport the product.
Before transporting the product, you must package it in the same manner as it was delivered
using protective materials and packaging materials so that the product will not be subject to
excessive impact and vibrations during the transportation.
Refer to the Installation Manual

VJ628XE-M-00
8 Product Overview
8.1 Introduction ...................................................................381
8.2 Part Names and Functions ...........................................382
8.2.1 Appearance..........................................................382
8.2.2 Operation panel....................................................383
8.3 Printer Status.................................................................386
8.3.1 Operating Status Type (when using Jig Panel)....386
8.3.2 Switching Operation Status (when using Jig Panel)

.............................................................................387
380
8.1 Introduction
This chapter explains the features, part names and functions of this printer.
381
8.2 Part Names and Functions VJ628XE-M-00
8.2 Part Names and Functions No. Name Function

Part names and functions are explained below.
1 Platen Media will be printed on this. There is a suction fan and a heater
inside.
8.2.1 Appearance 2 Media Pressure Arm Media are suppressed to Platen.
The media fixing handle is being interlocked with.
3 Carriage The print head and the cutter are built in.
6 4 Media Holding Plate It is in a front cover.

5
By attaching to the both ends of media, the curvature of media
can be stopped to some extent.
5 Front Cover It opens at the time of media loading and maintenance
operation, etc.
6 Media Fixing Handle It turns at the time of loading of media, and removal.
3
7 Waste Fluid Tube It is a tube for discharging waste fluid.
2
8 Operation Panel A setup of a operating condition, and the status display of a
printer and a setup of various functions are performed.
7
9 Cartridge Slot Ink cartridges and Cleaning cartridges are attached.
10 Network Connector An Ethernet cable is connected.
13
11 Scroller Holder Roll media are loaded.
8
12 12 Power Connector A power cable is connected.
13 Line Voltage It changes Voltage.
1 4 Selection Switch
10 11
8.2.1 Appearance 382

8.2.2 Operation panel No. Name Function

4 Multi Key Various functions are carried out according to a situation.
(1) Operation Panel while printing:
Operation panel is used to set operational conditions, display the status of the printer, and set （press）A stop/resumption of printing
other functions. （press and hold）Cancellation of printing (data deletion)
The names and functions of the operation keys and status lamps are explained below. under printing standby:
（press and hold）Cutting Media
When waiting for decision at the time of cooperation with
㨀㧵㧼 VSM.:
Operation manual （press）fixedness
while warming up:
（press）The compulsive start of printing
Under error occuring :
1 4 （press）Buzzer stop
No. Name Function

1 Power Key The light is switched on blue in power supply ON state.
2 Data LED By green blink, under reception and analysis of printing data
is displayed.
3 Error LED An error and warning are displayed by red lighting and blink.
8.2.2 Operation panel 383

(2) Jig panel No. Name Normal Setup menu display

1 [Menu]key Shifts to the Setup menu. Shifts from Setup menu display
NOTE to Normal.
When starting Self-diagnostic function or Maintenance mode 2, it is necessary to
2 [Enter]key　 Restarts printing when the • Select the menu to be set, and
connect Jig Panel Assy (maintenance parts) to the MAIN Board of the printer.
printing is suspended. shifts to the next hierarchy.
• The setting is determined and
saved.
8, 9 10 [Long Feed] Feeds a specified amount of —

key media when pressed for more
than two seconds.
3 [Pause] key Pauses printing. —
[Cancel] key Press and hold this key for more • Returns to the previous menu
17
than two seconds to do the hierarchy.Changes made in
following operations: the setting are discharged.
13
・When printing: • Shifts from Setup menu
14
15 Forcefully terminates printing display to Normal.
11
16 and deletes one file of the
12
Media Type 6 remaining data.
Heater Link Roll ・When receiving or analyzing:
Origin Rigid Deletes data that are already
1
5 received and analyzed, and
delete the next data.
4 [<] key — Changes the set value.
[Nozzle Check] Press and hold this key for two —

key seconds or more to perform
Nozzle Check printing.
Long Feed
5 [>] key Sets Cleaning Mode. • Down the menu level in the
• The lamp of Cleaning Mode directory tree.
that you set lights up in green. • Changes the set value.
3 4 7 2
6 [Backward↑] Media is fed in the reverse —
(2-a)Operation Keys key direction.
[+] key — • Changes to the previous item
in the displayed menu.
㨀㧵㧼
• The setting is changed to the
Some keys have multiple functions and names depending on the printer status forward direction.
(normal or setup menu display). • The numeric value is
See 8.3 Printer Status for more details. decreased during numerical
input.

No. Name Normal Setup menu display No. Name Color Status Description
7 [Forward↓] key Media is fed in the forward - 13 Roll lamp Gree Lamp “Roll media” is set as “Media type”.
direction. n ON
[–] key - • Changes to the previous item 14 Rigid lamp Gree Lamp “Media type” is set as “Rigid”.
in the displayed setting. n ON
• The setting is changed to the
reverse direction. 15 Long lamp Gree Lamp • Cleaning Mode is set to Long.
• The numeric value is n ON • When the Normal lamp is also turned on, Cleaning
decreased during numerical Mode is set to Short.
input. Lamp Cleaning Mode is set to Normal.
8 [Power] key Turns printer ON and OFF. Turns printer ON and OFF. OFF
16 Normal lamp Gree Lamp • Cleaning Mode is set to Normal.
n ON • When the Long lamp is also turned on, Cleaning
(2-b)Display section
Mode is set to Short.
No. Name Color Status Description Lamp Cleaning Mode is set to Long.
OFF
9 Power lamp Blue Lamp Power ON.
ON 17 LCD display - - Displays operation status of the printer or an error
section message.
Lamp • Data is received and analyzed.
blinks • Performing media initial operation.
Lamp Power OFF.

OFF
10 Error lamp Oran Lamp An error has occurred
ge ON The error content is displayed on the LCD
Lamp The remaining amount of ink is low.

blinks
Lamp There is no error.
OFF
11 Heater Link Gree Lamp Blower heater is in the "Printer Link" condition.
lamp n ON
Lamp Blower heater is in the "Manual" condition.

OFF
12 Origin lamp Gree Lamp "Origin" is activated.
n ON
Lamp “Origin” is deactivated.
OFF

8.3 Printer Status VJ628XE-M-00
8.3 Printer Status 㨀㧵㧼
The status of the printer is explained below. 6.2 Operations in Maintenance Mode 2
8.3.1 Operating Status Type (when using Jig Panel)
(1) Normal
Indicates that the printer can print when media is loaded.
Each setup concerning printing can be operated by using Operation panel.
㨀㧵㧼
Operation manual
(2) Setup Menu

Each setup concerning printing can be operated by using Operation panel.
The settings required for normal printing are usually made on the printer driver or
application, but can also be made using Operation panel.
㨀㧵㧼
Operation manual
(3) Self-Diagnosis Function

Indicates that each settings concerning printing using Operation panel. Names and
functions of Operation panel keys are the same as those of setup menu display.
㨀㧵㧼
5.3 Operations in Self-Diagnosis Mode
(4) Maintenance Mode 2

Indicates that each setup concerning to the life counter on this printer can be
operated by using Operation panel. Names and functions of Operation panel keys
are the same as those of setup menu display.
8.3.1 Operating Status Type (when using Jig Panel) 386

8.3 Printer Status VJ628XE-M-00
8.3.2 Switching Operation Status (when using Jig Panel) (3) Self-Diagnosis Function
Follow the steps below to switch the operation conditions. Display the self-diagnosis menu on Operation panel to use the self-diagnosis function.
The self-diagnosis menu is completely independent from the normal operation mode or setup
menu display mode. Switch to the self-diagnosis menu display mode, following the steps
(1) Normal Status →　Setup menu display below:
Press the [Menu] key of Operation panel when the printer is in a normal status.
㨀㧵㧼
• [Menu 1: Setting>] is displayed on Operation panel and transits to a setup menu
status. 5.2.2 Starting Up
㨀㧵㧼
Operation manual (4) Maintenance Mode 2 Display status
Display the maintenance mode 2 menu on Operation panel to use the maintenance mode.
The maintenance mode 2 is completely independent from the normal operation mode and
setup menu display mode. Switch to the maintenance mode menu display mode, following
(2) Setup Menu display → Normal Status
the steps below.
When the setup menu is displayed, operate either of the following. Operation panel transits
to the normal status display.
㨀㧵㧼
• Press [Cancel] key on Operation panel. 6.2.1 Starting Up
• When in the setup menu status, leave the printer without any key operations for
3 minutes.
Normal Status
[Menu] key [Cancel] key

or no key response for 3 minutes
Setting menu will be displayed.
㨀㧵㧼
Despite of the operation described as above, while displaying the CR maintenance
menu, Operation panel does not go back to the normal status.
Operation manual
8.3.2 Switching Operation Status (when using Jig Panel) 387

VJ628XE-M-00
9 Specifications
9.1 Introduction ...................................................................389
9.2 Product Specifications .................................................390
9.2.1 Main Unit Specifications.......................................390
9.3 Interface specification ..................................................391
9.3.1 Network interface specification ............................391
9.4 Options/Supplies List ...................................................392
9.4.1 Supplies ...............................................................392
9.5 Choosing Place for the Printer.....................................393
388
9.1 Introduction
This Chapter explains the specifications of the product, optional parts, supplies, and user
support.
389
9.2 Product Specifications VJ628XE-M-00
9.2 Product Specifications Item Specifications

Ink Supply system Supplied through tubes from independent color
9.2.1 Main Unit Specifications cartridges
Ink bag each 220ml ± 5ml
Item Specifications 4 color setting: Black, Cyan, Magenta, Yellow
6 color setting: Black, Cyan, Magenta, Yellow,
Model Name VJ-628X
Light Cyan, Light Magenta
Printing method On-demand piezo drive 8 color setting: Black, Cyan, Magenta, Yellow,
Light Cyan, Light Magenta, White, Metallic
Motor driving method Firmware servo ／ DC motor
Environmental Operation condition Temperature: 20° C ～ 28° C
Media feeding method Roll media: Rear feeding / front ejection condition Humidity: 40% ～ 60%、No condensation
Media fixing method Pressurizing roller manual- down method Printing accracy Temperature: 22° C ～ 28° C
Media supply and ejection Roll media : Rear feeding/ ／ front ejection coverage Humidity: 40% ～ 60%、No condensation
Roll media Outer diameter 150mm or less Change rate Temperature: within 2° C per one hour
Humidity:within 5% per one hour
Tube diameter 2 inch / 3 inch
Storaging condition Temperature: –20° C ～ 60° C
Weight less than 9kg （Ink not filled) Humidity: 20% ～ 80%、No condensation
Storage life:six months
Maximum length 610mm
Storaging condition Temperature: 5° C ～ 30° C
Maximum thickness 0.3mm
（Ink filled) Humidity: 20% ～ 80%、No condensation
Maximum print 600mm Storage life: within 4 days
width
Power Voltage AC100-240V
Print margin ＜ Roll Media ＞
range AC90V ～ 264V
Front: Max 15mm (For continuous print: 5mm）
,Rear: 5mm（Maximum end edge of media is Frequency 50Hz / 60Hz ± 1Hz
40mm) ,Left: 5mm~25mm,Right: 5mm~25mm
Power consumption Printing 830W or less
Head height adjustment Manual: 1.2mm/2.5mm
When the power is 1.1W or less
CPU 64Bit RISC CPU off.
Memory 256MB Outer diameter height 365.6mm（main body only）
Command MH-RTL（RTL-PASS） 1165.6mm（when dedicated stand is installed）
Inteface Ethernet (10BASE-T/100BASE-TX) width 1188mm

depth 422.9mm（main body only）
590mm（when dedicated stand is stand）
Weight main body: Approx 31.8kg
dedicated stand: Approx8.7kg
9.2.1 Main Unit Specifications 390

9.3 Interface specification VJ628XE-M-00
9.3 Interface specification

This section describes each type of interface specifications supported by this product.
9.3.1 Network interface specification
Item Specification
Network type Ethernet IEEE802.3
Network I/F 10BASE-T / 100BASE-TX Automatic transfer type

（RJ-45 Connector twist pair cable)
MDI / MDI-X Automatic transfer
Corresponding protocol TCP/IP
9.3.1 Network interface specification 391

9.4 Options/Supplies List VJ628XE-M-00
9.4 Options/Supplies List

9.4.1 Supplies
(1) Ink Cartridges
㨀㧵㧼
• For more information about the operations and supply items, contact your local
MUTOH dealer. ｛Operation Manual」
• For problems resulting from using a non-suggested media will exempt the
warranty.
(2) Media
㨀㧵㧼
warranty.
(3) Other
㨀㧵㧼
warranty.
9.4.1 Supplies 392

9.5 Choosing Place for the Printer VJ628XE-M-00
9.5 Choosing Place for the Printer NOTE

• Avoid the following temperature and humidity conditions. Otherwise, printed
WARNING images may appear different from what you expectation.
• Places where sudden changes in temperature and humidity are expected,
• Do not place the printer in a location under the following conditions. Doing so may
even though the condition is within the range specified
cause the product to fall, become damaged, or cause injury.
• Unstable surfaces • Places where direct sunlight or excessive lighting are expected
• Slanted areas • Places where air conditioners blow directly
• Locations that are subject to vibration from other product • MUTOH recommends that the printer should be installed where air conditioning
Confirm the horizontal with a level when installation environment might inclined, and can be adjusted easily.
set up the printer in horizontal place.
• Do not stand on the printer or place any heavy objects on it.
Doing so may cause it to fall over, become damaged, or cause injury.
• Do not cover the ventilation hole of the printer with cloth, such as a blanket or table (2) Required Space
cloth. Doing so could prevent the printer from ventilating and cause fire. Install the printer on a flat surface that fulfills the following conditions.
• Keep the printer away from humid and dusty areas. Failure to do so may result in
electrical shock or fire. • The place to install printer with the dedicated stand should have enough loading
capacity.
NOTE
(1) Installation Environment Requirements
For the printer and the dedicated stand, refer to 9.2 Product Specifications.
Choose a place for printer installation following the requirements of the table below. Do not use the printer without dedicated stand.
Floor loading capability 2940Pa (300kgf/m2) or over
Electrical Voltage AC180V ～ 264V

specificati
ons Frequency 50/60Hz ± 1Hz
Environm Operation Temperatures: 20 °C to 28 °C

ental environment Humidity: 40 % to 60 %, No condensation
conditions
Printing accuracy Temperatures: 22 °C to 28 °C
warranty range Humidity: 40 % to 60 %, No condensation
Rate of change Temperature: within 2°C per hour

Humidity: within 5 % per hour
Storage Temperature: -10 °C to 40 °C

environment Humidity: 20 % to 80 %, No condensation
(when ink is filled) Storage life: 30 days (Perform the maintence operation
written in the operation manual.)
9.4.1 Supplies 393

VJ628XE-M-00
10 Appendix
10.1 Introduction ...................................................................395
10.2 Maintenance Part List ...................................................395
394
10.1 Introduction
Table 10-2 Y Rail Assy
This chapter provides referential information such as service data.
Name No. Explod Remarks
ed
10.2 Maintenance Part List View
CR Motor Relay A1Assy DF-48991 B-43 -
The following table lists the maintenance parts per unit (as of April 30, 2015).
The part number below is identical to that of the exploded view. CR Motor Assy DG-44693 B-40 -
Pressure Roller Spring DF-49691 B-16 -
Table 10-1 Board Box Pressure Roller Assy DF-49053 B-18 -
Name No. Explod Remarks Pressure Roller Axis Assy DF-49054 B-19 -
ed Pressure Arm Assy DF-49052 B-17 -
View
Fence Guide Assy DF-49027 B-82 -
Head Cable Assy DF-49017 H-50 -
T Fence Spring Assy DG-44690 B-83 -
JUNC ID Cable Assy DG-44717 H-54 -
CR HP Sensor, Lever Sensor DF-49471 B-62 -
JUNCTION2 Board Assy DG-43396 H-48 -
CR Origin Sensor Cable Assy DG-44691 B-63 -
MAINBoard Assy DG-44712 H-16 -
Lever Sensor Cable Assy DG-44692 B-65 -
MAIN DC Cable Assy DG-42993 H-24 -
CR Return Pulley Assy DF-49047 B-49 -
IL Dummy Cable Assy DG-44713 H-18 -
B-50 -
Cooling FAN (24V) Assy DG-45354 H-29 -
P_REAR Sensor Assy DG-42945 B-74 -
FG Cable Assy DG-43741 H-40 -
CR Belt A1Assy DF-49044 B-44 -
AC SEL SW Cable Assy DG-44720 H-62 -
T Fence A1Assy DF-49024 B-81 -
Slide Switch Assy DG-44719 H-60 -
Power Board Assy DG-43172 H-21 -
AC JUNC-Power Cable Assy DG-44714 H-23 -
JUNC ID Cable 2Assy DG-44718 H-55 -
JUNC FFC Assy DG-44716 H-51 -
Inlet AC JUNC Cable Assy DG-44715 H-39 -
AC Inlet Assy DG-43177 H-37 -
395
10.2 Maintenance Part List VJ628XE-M-00
Table 10-3 Cursor Table 10-4 Head Base
Name No. Explod Remarks Name No. Explod Remarks

ed ed
View View
Cutter Solenoid Spring Assy DF-49062 A-131 - IA5540 Head Assy DG-43988 A-81 -
Cutter Spring DG-43484 A-134 - Head FFC Assy DG-44687 A-88 including 1 piece
P-Edge Sensor Assy DG-43319 A-137 - Valve Head Assy DG-41543 A-82 -
Cutter SOL Cable Assy DG-43318 A-140 - A-93 -
CR Encoder Assy DG-42947 A-48 - A-94 -
CR HP Sensor, Lever Sensor DF-49471 A-34 - A-95 -
PG Origin Sensor Cable Assy DG-43315 A-43 - O Ring M6 DF-46671 A-95 including 100 pieces
Cursor Roller Arm Assy DF-49065 A-19 - VJ628 Periodic Maintenance Kit DG-44737 A-82 -
A-20 - A-93 -
A-21 - A-94 -
A-22 - A-95 -
Carriage Assy DG-44688 - refer to Exploded View A-70 -
Mini Latch S Assy DG-44689 A-28 - A-72 -
HeadFG Assy DF-49018 A-75 -
Carriage Assy DG-44688 - refer to Exploded View
Cutter Solenoid Assy DF-42234 A-130 -
396
Table 10-5 CR Board Table 10-7 PF Motor

ed ed
View View
Steel Bare Assy DG-44704 E-11 - PF ENC Scale Assy DF-49028 D-20 -
Ink Tube_JUNRON3-4(2m) DG-45566 E-1 - Speed Reduction Pulley Assy DF-49051 D-17 -
Head FFC Assy DG-44687 A-88 including 1 piece PF Timing Belt Assy DG-44700 D-13 -
CR Board Assy DG-42959 A-109 - PF Encoder Assy DG-44701 D-32 -
CR FFC Assy DG-44703 E-17 including 1 piece PF Motor Assy DF-49020 D-27 -
PF Motor Cable Assy DG-44699 D-26 -
G Roller Plate Assy DF-49049 D-7 -
Table 10-6 Cable Guide
Slide Axis Support Assy DG-44702 D-2 -
ed
View
Clamp FFC32Assy DG-44741 E-19 -
Clamp Bare 64 Assy DG-44743 E-20 -
Clamp Tube Assy DG-44742 E-18 -
Steel Bare Assy DG-44704 E-11 -
Tube Guide FilmAssy DG-44705 E-16 -
CR FFC Assy DG-44703 E-17 including 1 piece
Ink Tube_JUNRON3-4(2m) DG-45566 E-1 -
397
Table 10-8 Frame R•Heater

ed
View
HEATER Assy DG-44696 D-14 including 1 piece
Thermistor Assy DG-44695 C-4 including 1 piece
Carriage Fixing Plate Assy DG-44734 L-1 -
L-2 -
L-3 -
Media Holder Assy DG-44697 C-86 including 1 piece
Scroller Holder Roller Assy DG-44698 C-59 including 4 pieces
Table 10-9 Frame L•Scroller

ed
View
Adsorption Fan Assy DG-42988 C-80 -
Adsorption Fan Cable Assy DG-44694 C-82 -
Bottom Guide Assy DG-44730 K-14 including 2 pieces
Scroller Holder Roller Assy DG-44698 C-68 including 4 pieces
398
Table 10-10 Cartridge R(Continued)

Table 10-10 Cartridge R
Name No. Explod Remarks ed
ed View
View Ink ID Board Assy DF-43968 F-55 -
I/C Holder Assy 1 DG-45562 F-1 common parts Holder Pressure Spring DF-43967 F-56 -
I/C Holder Assy 2 DG-45563 F-4
Table 10-11 Circulation pump
F-8 ed
F-9 View
F-10 Diaphragm Pump Assy DG-43907 F-72 -
F-11 Circulation Pump Relay Cable DG-45567 F-78 -

Assy
F-12
F-14
F-15 for I/C Holder Assy 1
F-19 common parts
F-12
F-20
F-55
F-56
F-57
F-58
F-59
399
Table 10-12 Cartridge L(Continued)

Table 10-12 Cartridge L
Name No. Explod Remarks ed
ed View
View AC JUNCTION Board Assy DG-44710 G-70 -
I/C Holder Assy 1 DG-45562 G-1 common parts Ink ID Board Assy DF-43968 G-55 -
I/C Holder Assy 2 DG-45563 G-4 Binding Band DG-44940 G-77 -
I/C Holder Assy 3 DG-45564 G-5 Holder Pressure Spring DF-43967 G-56 -
I/C Holder Assy 4 DG-45565 G-6 AC JUNC Power Cable Assy DG-44714 H-23 -
G-8 AC SEL SW Cable Assy DG-44720 H-62 -
G-9 Inlet-AC JUNC Cable Assy DG-44715 H-39 -
G-10 AC JUNC CNT Cable Assy DG-44711 G-72 -
G-11
G-12
G-14
G-15 for I/C Holder Assy 4
G-19 common parts
G-12
G-20
G-55
G-56
G-57
G-58
G-59
400
Table 10-13 Maintenance Table 10-14 Cover

ed ed
View View
Cleaner Head Assy DF-49687 I-58 - Cover Switch Assy DG-42956 J-17 -
Wiper Solenoid SDC630KG DG-41090 I-49 - Cover R Cable Assy DG-44729 J-20 -
Wiper SOL Cable Assy DG-44723 I-51 - Switch Lever Assy DG-44728 J-18 -
Cap Head Assy DG-41179 I-24 - PANEL Board Assy DG-44726 J-6 -
Diaphragm Pump Assy DG-43907 I-70 - Label (Caution Cutter) Assy DG-44731 K-31 -
Vacuum FAN Relay2 Assy DF-48995 I-72 for Diaphragm Pump Switch Panel Cable Assy DG-44727 J-10 -
Waste Fluid Tank Unit Assy DG-45368 I-85 -
I-86 -
Table 10-15 Other
I-87 -
Name No. Exploded Remarks
I-88 - View
I-90 - PG Adjusting Jig DG-43193 - -
VJ628 Periodic Maintenance DG-44737 - refer to Exploded View (1.1/1.3）
Ink Tube JUNRON_3-4(2m) DG-45566 - diameter : 3φ
length : 2m
Reuse Tie5NVOB Assy DG-44733 K-16 including 1 piece
Valve Head Washing Kit DG-41787 - -
（VJ Ink）
Cutter Holder Adjusting Jig DG-45003 - -
Caster (With no stopper) Assy DG-44938 - including 1 piece
Caster (With a stopper) Assy DG-44939 - including 1 piece
Jig Panel Assy DG-44954 - -
401
　 Self Diagnosis Function Diagram 1、 2 　　　　 VJ628XE-M-00
Self Diagnosis Function Diagram 1、 2
Self Diagnosis Function Diagram（1／3） Self Diagnosis Function Diagram（2／3） Ver. 1.00
Check1：Test Test1：Ram Capacity Check1：Test Self Diagnosis Function Diagram（1／3）

Test2：Version Ver：Firm Check2：Ink Charge
Ver：Parameter Check3：Adjustment Adj.1：Rear/Edge RearEdge：Caliblate
Ver：DipSW RearEdge：Sensing
Ver：Board Rev. RearEdge：Input
Ver：Company Code 0×01
Ver：Seri. Adj.2：NozzleChk Cleaning
Print
Test3：Panel Panel 1：Key Adj.3：CheckSkew
Panel 2：LCD Adj.4：HeadSlant Slant1
Panel 3：LED Slant2
Test4：Sensor Sen.1：CR Origin

Sen.2：Cover Adj.5：Uni/Bi Low 1：Uni-D 320 VSD1
Sen.3：Lever 2：Uni-D 320 VSD3
Sen.4：Edge AD 3：Uni-D 320 VSD4
Sen.5：Rear AD 4：Uni-D 400 VSD1
Sen.6：Head Gap 5：Uni-D 400 VSD3
Sen.7：Head 6：Uni-D 400 VSD4
Sen.8：Trans.1 7：Bi-D 300 VSD1
Sen.9：Trans.2 8：Bi-D 320 VSD3
Sen.10：I.NT 9：Bi-D 320 VSD4
Sen.11：I.ED 10：Bi-D 400 VSD1
Sen.12：I.ID 11：Bi-D 400 VSD3
Sen.13：CutSolenoid 12：Bi-D 400 VSD4
Sen.14：WiperSolenoid 13：Bi-D ALL
Test5：Encoder Encoder：CR
Encoder：PF Adj.6：BiD Copy
Adj.7：Uni/Bi High
Test6：Fan Fan 1：Vacuum Fan
Fan 2：Cooling Fan Adj.8：Margin TopMargin
Bottom
Test7：Record 1：Maintenance SideMargin
2：Error
3：Error Init. Adj.9：TeatPrint 1：Adjust ALL
4：Print Adj.10：Longstore 2：Parameter ALL
5：Ope. TIme Adj.11：CountClear 3：Log info.
6：S/C Log Adj.12：SendPitch 4：S/C Log info.
7：S/C Log Init. Adj.13：FillPattern
Test8：Head Signal
Test9：Time Check
Check4：Cleaning Time 1：Short

Time 2：Noramal
Time 3：Long
Check5：Print Print 1：Adjust ALL

Print 2：Parameter ALL
Print 3：Log info.
Print 4：S/C Log info.
Check6：Parameter Param1：Initialize Init.1：Uni/Bi Low

Init.2：Uni/Bi High
Init.3：Margin
Init.4：Servo
Init.5：Head
Init.6：Wiper
Init.7：CR Motor
Init.8：PF Motor
Init.9：Pump
Init.10：CPump1
Init.11：CPump2
Check2：Ink CHarge Init.12：Cutter
Ink Charge1：Normal
Init.13：Waste Ink
Init.14：ALL
Ink Charge2：Init
Check3：Adjustment Param2：Update Update1：Rear/Edge

Check4：Cleaning refer to Self Diagnosis Function Diagram（2/3） Update2：Head Rank
Check5：Print Check7：Servo Update3：Ui/Bi Low
Check6：Parameter Check8：Endurance Self Diagnosis Function Diagram（3／3） Update4：Uni/Bi High
Check7：Servo Check9：Media Feed Update5：Margin
Check8：Endurance refer to Self Diagnosis Function Diagram（3/3） Check10：Media Initial Update6：Charge Flg.
Check9：MediaFeed Check11：Heater Update7：Debug Bit
Check10：MeadCheck Check12：Speed Mode Update8：DotCtrl.
Check11：Heater Update9：Heater Flg
Check12：SpeedMode Update10：Ink Type
Update11：Ink Config.
Update12：Periodic CL
Update13：Uni/Bi Ptn
Update14：Thickness
　　　　　　　　　　　　　　　　　　　　　　　　　　　　　　　　　　　　　　　　 402P.11-402
　 Self Diagnosis Function Diagram 3 　　　　 VJ628XE-M-00
Self Diagnosis Function Diagram 3
Ver. 1.00
Check1㸸Tset Mainte. 1 : Indication Indication㸯㸸Mainte. Print Numer

Check2㸸Charge refer to Self Diagnosis Function Diagram (1/3) CR Motor
Check3㸸Adjustment T.CR Motor
Check4㸸Cleaning PF Motor
Check5㸸Print T.PF Motor
Check6㸸Parameter refer to Self Diagnosis Function Diagram (2/3) Pump
T.Pump
Check7㸸Servo Servo1㸸320 cpsࠉCW GP CPump1
Servo2㸸320 cpsࠉCCW GI T.CPump1
Servo3㸸400cpsࠉ CW GLPF CPump2
Servo4㸸400cpsࠉ CCW PWM Scale T.CPump2
ȰC Fire A
Fire B
Check8㸸Endurance Life1㸸CR Motor Fire C
Life2㸸PF Motorࠉࠉࠉࠉࠉࠉࠉࠉࠉࠉࠉࠉ Fire D
Life3㸸Cutter Fire E
Life4㸸Pump Fire F
Life5㸸CPump Fire G
Life6㸸Head Lock Fire H
Life7㸸Wiper T.Fire Aࠉ
Life8㸸Nozzle T.Fire Bࠉ
Life9㸸Total Life T.Fire Cࠉ
Life10㸸Check T.Fire D
T.Fire E
Check9㸸MediaFeed T.Fire F
Check10㸸MediaInitial Top&Width T.Fire G
Width T.Fire H
Off Cleaning
Wiper
Check11㸸Heater Heater1㸸Sensor Wiper Sol.
Heater2㸸Check CutNumber
CutterSol.
Check12㸸Speed Mode Normal UnlockPos.
Low Waste Ink
Indication㸰㸸Print Print1㸸Num
Print2㸸Area
Print3㸸Effect
Indication㸱㸸Ope.Time Total
Noramal
Diag
Mainte.
Mainte.2 : InitCounter Init.1 : Print Num
Init.2㸸PrintInfo.
Init.3㸸ALL
Init.4㸸CR Motor
Init.5㸸PF Motor
Init.6㸸HeadUnit
Mainte.3 : Cleaning Init.7㸸Wiper
Mainte.4㸸Print Init.8㸸Pump
Init.9㸸CPump1
Mainte.5 : MediaFeed Init.10㸸CPump2
Init.11㸸Cutter
Init.12㸸UnlockPos.
Init.13㸸WasteInk
　　　　　　　　　　　　　　　　　　　　　　　　　　　　　　　　　　　　　　　　 403P.11-403
　 Electric Wiring Diagram 　　　　 VJ628XE-M-00
Electric Wiring Diagram
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8
CR Encoder
3DQHO))&
-LJ3DQHO DG-44703
P_EDGE Sensor
DG-44703
DG-44727 DG-44703 DG-43315 PG Origin Sensor
PANEL Board Assy
connected DG-44703
DG-44726
DG-44703
not connected
DG-43318 Cutter Solenoid
F_Cover Sensor DG-44729 CR Board Assy
ࠉࠉ(Inter lock) DG-44699 PF Motor DG-42959 DF-49018
not mounted
DG-44687
PF Encoder DG-44687
DG- DF- DF-48991 CR Motor DG-44687
are Maintenance part number. MAIN Board Assy
DG-44713
DG-44694 adsorption Fan DG-44687
DG-44712
P_REAR Sensor
Cooling Fan(MAIN board)

DF-49017 I/C Cable 1 Assy
Micro Switch
DG-44717
INK ID Cable 1 Assy
Cable color (white/Black)
Wiper Solenoid DG-44723 Circulation pump (origin side)
AC
Circulation pump㸦the opposite side of origin㸧 I/C Cable 2 Assy
Inlet DG-44711 Micro Switch
Cable color㸦White/Red㸧
INK ID Cable 2 Assy
DG-43741
DG-45567
CR Origin Sensor DG-44691
Waste fluid Pump DF-48995
JUNCTION 2 Board I/C Cable 3 Assy
Micro Switch
Lever Sesnor DG-44692 DG-43396
Power Board Assy INK ID Cable 3 Assy
DG-44715
DG-44714 DG-42993 I/C Cable 4 Assy
DG-43172
Exhaust Fan
Micro Switch
AC INK ID Cable 4 Assy

JUNCTION
Board Assy Origin Side
DG-44710
DG-44716 I/C Cable 4 Assy
(HEATER
ࠉDRIVE DG-44718
Micro Switch
ࠉBoard Assy) DG-44695 INK ID Cable 4 Assy

DG-44720
230V
I/C Cable 3 Assy

Slide Switch
100/200V selection Switch
JUNCTION 2 Board Micro Switch
DG-44695 INK ID Cable 3 Assy

DG-43396
I/C Cable 2 Assy

Micro Switch
INK ID Cable 2 Assy
I/C Cable 1 Assy

Exhaust Fan
Oposite side Micro Switch
INK ID Cable 1 Assy

of Origin
Electric Wiring Diagram
2015.4.30 Rev.A Model : VJ-628X
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8
　　　　　　　　　　　　　　　　　　　　　　　　　　　　　　　　　　　　　　　　 404P.11-404
　 Exploded View 　 Board BOX 　　　　 VJ628XE-M-00
Exploded View 　 Board BOX
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8
H-48 H-49
JUNCTION 2 Board H-51 JUNC FFC Assy
DG-43396 DG-44716
refer to the Electric Wiring Diagram for the detail of cable connection MAIN J20
MAIN J22
H-6 H-44
H-5
FG Cable Assy
DG-43741 H-55
JUNC ID Cable 2Assy

H-8
H-63
DG-44718
H-12
H-28 H-40 H-62
AC SEL SW Cable Assy

DG-44720
AC Inlet
H-60
H-59
HEATER DRIVE J6 Slide Switch Assy
H-41
DG-44719
H-10 H-44 H-61
H-9
H-38
H-9 H-39
H-21
Inlet-AC JUNC Cable Assy Power Board Assy
DG-44715 DG-43172
H-5
H-13 H-30 H-37
H-27
AC Inlet Assy
DG-43177
H-10 MAIN J30

H-1 H-23
H-35
H-11 H-29
H-36
Head Cable Assy H-49 AC JUNC-Power Cable Assy
DF-49017 Cooling FAN(24V)Assy DG-44714
DG-45354
HEATER DRIVE J2
H-50
H-44
H-22
MAIN J19
H-32
H-18
H-33
MAIN J21 H-34

MAIN Board Assy Power Board IL Dummy Cable Assy
H-48 DG-44712 DG-44713
JUNCTION2 Board Assy
H-54 DG-43396 H-16
H-24
JUNC ID Cable Assy MAIN DC Cable Assy Board Box
DG-44717 H-17 DG-42993 2015.5.20 Rev.A Model : VJ-628X
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8
　　　　　　　　　　　　　　　　　　　　　　　　　　　　　　　　　　　　　　　　 405P.11-405
　 Exploded View Y Rail Assy 　　　　 VJ628XE-M-00
Exploded View Y Rail Assy
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8
B-42
B-39
B-85
MAIN J17
B-26
B-86 B-29 B-28
B-33
B-44
CR Belt A1 Assy
B-43 B-38 B-22 DF-49044
B-51
P REAR Sensor Assy
B-41 DG-42945 B-52
B-50 CR Return Pulley Assy
CR Motor Relay A1Assy DF-49047
B-1 B-77
DF-48991 B-85
B-32 B-31
T Fence A1 Assy B-49
DF-49024 B-71
B-40 Fence Guide Assy B-82 B-35 B-73

DF-49027 B-54
CR Motor Assy B-76 B-53
DG-44693 B-72
B-47
B-27
B-29
Pressure Roller Spring B-83 B-74
DF-49691 B-84 B-81 B-73
B-28 B-3
㸦including 1 piece)
T Fence Spring Assy B-55
B-16 DG-44690 B-75
B-4
B-15 B-48
CR Origin Sensor Cable Assy
B-14 B-12
DG-44691
B-4
B-3
B-6
B-20
B-18
B-7
Pressure Roller Assy B-67

B-63 B-8
DF-49053
B-60
㸦including 1 piece) CR HP Sensor, Lever Sensor
DF-49471 JUNCTION_R J14
B-19 B-17 B-62 B-61

B-33
B-32
B-65
Pressure Roller Axis Assy
DF-49054 B-31
㸦including 1 piece) JUNCTION_R J15
B-58 B-9
Lever Sensor Cable Assy

CR HP Sensor, Lever SensorB-64 B-59
DF-49471
DG-44692 Y Rail Assy
2015.5.30 Rev.A Model : VJ-628X
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8
　　　　　　　　　　　　　　　　　　　　　　　　　　　　　　　　　　　　　　　　 406P.11-406
　 Exploded View 　 Cursor 　　　　 VJ628XE-M-00
Exploded View 　 Cursor
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8
A-41
A-38 A-33
A-40
A-32
A-36
Carriage Assy
DG-44688
A-3
A-42 A-37 (A part of following page is included)
A-2
A-133 A-126 A-8
A-132 A-129 A-9
Cutter Solenoid SpringAssy A-7

PG Origin Sensor Cable Assy
DF-49062 DG-43315
A-8
CR J12
A-131 A-43
A-13
A-130
A-28 Mini Latch S Assy
DG-44689
A-34
Cutter Solenoid Assy
DF-42234
A-135 A-15
A-129 CR HP Sensor, Lever Sensor A-14 A-32
DF-49471
A-48 A-49 A-33
A-141
CR J11
A-138
CR Encoder Assy
DG-42947 A-35
A-137
A-1
A-47
A-36
A-140 CR J17 A-29
A-127
A-50 A-20
Cutter Spring A-134 P-Edge Sensor Assy CR J15 A-51
DG-43484 DG-43319
A-139 A-23 A-39
A-21
Cutter SOL Cable Assy

DG-43318
A-128 A-23
A-22
Roller Arm Assy
A-136 DF-49065
A-19
Roller Arm Assy
A-142 DF-49065 Cursor
A-21
A-22 2015.5.20 Rev.A Model : VJ-628X
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8
　　　　　　　　　　　　　　　　　　　　　　　　　　　　　　　　　　　　　　　　 407P.11-407
　 Exploded View 　 Head Base 　　　　 VJ628XE-M-00
Exploded View 　 Head Base
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8
VJ628 Periodic Maintenance Kit
DG-44737
A-92 A-67
A-54
A-55
A-94
A-95
O Ring M6 Carriage Assy
DF-46671 DG-44688
(including 100 pieces) (A part of front page is included)
A-93
A-83
A-62
Valve Head Assy
DG-41543
A-61 A-55
Head FG Assy
DF-49018
A-76 A-58
IA5540 Head Assy A-82
DG-43988
㸦including 1 piece㸧 A-75
Head FFC Assy
A-81 DG-44687
A-74 A-64
A-65
A-86 A-66
A-88
A-63
to A-55
A-73
to A-55
A-53
A-85
A-56
A-59
A-84 A-57
A-60
A-72
A-71
A-70
VJ628 Periodic Maintenance Kit

DG-44737
Head Base
2015.5.20 Rev.A Model : VJ-628X
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8
　　　　　　　　　　　　　　　　　　　　　　　　　　　　　　　　　　　　　　　　 408P.11-408
　 Exploded View 　 CR Board 　　　　 VJ628XE-M-00
Exploded View 　 CR Board
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8
A-123
A-122
A-123
E-1
1510mm(Slot4 Circulation)
1200mm(Slot4)
1245mm(Slot3)
1805mm(Slot8)
1750mm(Slot7) (including1 piece㸧ࠉ
A-107 E-17 (x5)
1710mm(Slot6)
1620mm(Slot5) Head FFC Assy
DG-44687 A-88 CR FFC Assy
1340mm(Slot2)
1380mm(Slot1) DG-44703 (including 1 piece)ࠉ
VJ Tube 3-4(2m) A-110

DG-42723
㼀㼛㻌㻼㼞㼕㼚㼠㼔㼑㼍㼐 A-109
A-114
A-115 CR Board Assy

A-106 DG-42959
A-116
A-102
A-117
A-101
A-103
A-118
A-100
A-119
Steel Bare Assy A-101
DG-44704
E-11
A-146
E-14 A-146
A-145
CR Board
T
E-15
N
O
R
F
2015.5.20 Rev.A Model : VJ-628X

1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8
　　　　　　　　　　　　　　　　　　　　　　　　　　　　　　　　　　　　　　　　 409P.11-409
　 Exploded View 　 Cable Guide 　　　　 VJ628XE-M-00
Exploded View 　 Cable Guide
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8
E-7
E-5
E-6
E-1
E-1
Ink Tube JUNRON 3-4(2m) 1570mm(Slot3 Circulation)
DG-45566 1200mm(Slot4)
E-12
1245mm(Slot3)
1805mm(Slot8)
1750mm(Slot7)
(including 1 piece)ࠉ 1710mm(Slot6) E-8
1620mm(Slot5) E-25
1340mm(Slot2)
CR FFC Assy 1380mm(Slot1)
DG-44703
E-26 to E-13
E-17 E-32
E-6
(5ᯛ㸧
E-24
Tube Guide Film Assy E-30
DG-44705
E-31
E-16
E-38
A-114
E-9 A-116
E-39(5cm)
to E-12
E-39(4cm)
E-13
A-117
Nozzles A B C D E F G H
A
B C
E D
G F
H
Steel Bare Assy
E-11 DG-44704 4color K K C C Y Y M M
K
K C
Y C
M Y
M
6color K C M Y Lc Lm Cl Cl
A-118
K
C M
Lc Y
Cl Lm
A-115 Cl
Clamp FFC32 Assy E-19
DG-44741 A-119 8color K C M Y Lc Lm Wh Mt
E-20 (7color K C M Y Lc Lm Wh Wh ) K
C M
Lc Y
Wh Lm
Clamp Bare 64 Assy E-14 Mt
DG-44743
E-18 Ink Slot No. 1 2 5 6 7 8 3 4
E-15 Cable Guide
T
N
O
Clamp Tube Assy

R
F
DG-44742 2015.5.20 Rev.A Model : VJ-628X

1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8
　　　　　　　　　　　　　　　　　　　　　　　　　　　　　　　　　　　　　　　　 410P.11-410
　 Exploded View 　 PFMotor 　　　　 VJ628XE-M-00
Exploded View 　 PFMotor
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8
D-33 MAIN J24
D-22 D-32
D-34
PF Encoder Assy D-31
DG-44701
PF Motor Cable Assy
D-21 DG-44699
D-36
D-18 D-26
PF Motor Assy
DF-49020
D-20 MAIN J12
D-19
D-28
PF ENC Scale Assy D-30 D-37
DF-49028 D-12 D-27
D-17
Speed Reduction Pulley Assy

DF-49051
D-13 D-11 D-5

PF Timing Belt Assy
DG-44700
D-36
D-36
D-7
D-38
D-9
G Roller Plate Assy
DF-49049
D-4
D-3
D-5
D-5
D-36
D-2
D-8
D-6
D-1
D-2
D-3 PF Motor
T
N
Slide Axis Support Assy

O
R
F
DG-44702 2015.5.20 Rev.A Model : VJ-628X

1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8
　　　　　　　　　　　　　　　　　　　　　　　　　　　　　　　　　　　　　　　　 411P.11-411
　 Exploded View 　 Frame R ・ Heater 　　　　 VJ628XE-M-00
Exploded View 　 Frame R ・ Heater
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8
Carriage Assy
DG-44734
L-3
C-50 HEATER DRIVE J5
C-87
L-2
C-85
C-86 HEATER Assy
L-1 DG-44696
C-14
C-1 C-21
C-51
HEATER Assy
DG-44696 C-16
C-45
C-14
C-85 Media Holder Assy C-18

DG-44697
C-11 C-86 C-20
C-5
HEATER DRIVE J4 MAIN J39
C-6 C-4 C-56

C-5
Thermistor Assy C-46
C-44
C-6 C-4 DG-44695
MAIN J40
C-33
Thermistor Assy C-43

DG-44695
C-60
C-21 C-32
C-27
C-18
C-59
C-10
C-20
C-57
C-49
C-58
C-17
C-15
C-55
C-31
Scroller Holder Roller Assy
DG-44698 C-61
(including 4 pieces)
C-73
C-26
C-25 C-74
Frame R㺃Heater
T
N
O
R
F
2015.5.20 Rev.A Model : VJ-628X

1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8
　　　　　　　　　　　　　　　　　　　　　　　　　　　　　　　　　　　　　　　　 412P.11-412
　 Exploded View 　 Frame Ｌ　　　　 VJ628XE-M-00
Exploded View 　 Frame Ｌ
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8
㹉-9
㹉-11
C-44 C-45
C-64
㹉-1
C-70
C-79 㹉-11
C-69 㹉-7
C-67
C-68 Scroller Holder Roller Assy
DG-44698 㹉-10
C-83
(including 4 pieces)
C-38 C-37
C-42
C-77 C-49
MAIN J27
C-65
㹉-8
C-78
Adsorption Fan Assy

DG-42988
C-80
C-38
Adsorption Fan Cable Assy

C-82 DG-44694
C-81
C-39
C-73
C-74
Bottom Guide Assy
DG-44730
Frame L࣭Scroller
T
N
㹉-14
O
R
F
2015.5.20 Rev.A Model : VJ-628X

1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8
　　　　　　　　　　　　　　　　　　　　　　　　　　　　　　　　　　　　　　　　 413P.11-413
　 Exploded View 　 Cartridge R 　　　　 VJ628XE-M-00
Exploded View 　 Cartridge R
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8
F-60(slot 1) JUNCTION J8
F-60
Holder Pressure Spring F-61
DF-43967 Ink ID Board Assy F-62
F-56 DF-43968 F-63 I/C Holder Assy1
DG-45562
F-55
I/C Holder Assy2 F-17(slot 3) JUNCTION J18
F-58 DG-45563 F-18(slot 4) JUNCTION J19
F-1
I/C Holder Assy3
F-57 DG-45564
refer to ͆Circulation pump͇ F-26 I/C Holder Assy4
DG-45565
F-59 F-5
F-15 F-4
F-16
F-17
F-18
F-34 F-19
F-6
F-9 F-8
F-23
F-33
F-28
F-32 F-20
F-22 refer to ͆Circulation pump͇

F-11
F-12
F-14
F-24
F-10
F-40
F-25
F-42
F-44
F-42
F-41 F-69
Cartridge R
T
F-27
N
O
R
F
2015.5.20 Rev.A Model : VJ-628X

1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8
　　　　　　　　　　　　　　　　　　　　　　　　　　　　　　　　　　　　　　　　 414P.11-414
　 Exploded View 　 Circulation pump 　　　　 VJ628XE-M-00
Exploded View 　 Circulation pump
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8
to Main
E-1 (1510mm)
F-73
E-1 (1200mm)
to Head
E-38 F-75 (2cm)

F-77
E-37(2cm)
F-78
Circulation Pump Relay Cable Assy

DG-45567
F-72
E-1 (1570mm)
F-74(3cm)
F-76 Diaphragm pump Assy

E-1 (1245mm) DG-43907
F-71
F-69
F-70
to Head E-1 (1340mm)

E-1 (1380mm)
F-69
E-36 (80mm)
Circulation pump
T
N
F-34
O
R
F
2015.5.20 Rev.A Model : VJ-628X

1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8
　　　　　　　　　　　　　　　　　　　　　　　　　　　　　　　　　　　　　　　　 415P.11-415
　 Exploded View 　 Cartridge L 　　　　 VJ628XE-M-00
Exploded View 　 Cartridge L
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8
Platen Heater Pre Heater
Holder Pressure spring G-60
DF-43967 G-61
G-56 INK ID Board Assy G-62 I/C Holder Assy1
H-62 DF-43968 G-55
AC JUNC CNT Cable Assy G-63 DG-45562
DG-44711 AC SEL SW Cable Assy
DG-44720 E-1(1805mm) I/C Holder Assy2
G-58 G-26 DG-45563
G-72 E-1(1750mm)
P/S CN001
E-1(1710mm) G-1 I/C Holder Assy3
Inlet-AC JUNC Cable Assy DG-45564
DG-44715 G-57
I/C Holder Assy4
DG-45565
H-39
G-5
AC JUNC-Power Cable Assy
H-23 DG-44714
G-59 G-4
G-69 G-15
G-16
G-71 G-17
G-18
G-19
G-73 G-70
E-3
AC JUNCTION Board Assy G-9 G-6
DG-44710 G-8
G-23
G-67 G-75 E-1(1620mm)

G-28
E-2 E-2(60mm) G-33
G-32 G-25
G-20
G-22
G-34
G-11
G-68 G-76 G-24
G-10
G-68 G-12 G-14
G-77
WR
Binding Band
WR DG-44940
G-42
G-74
G-74
G-44
G-40
G-42
G-60(slot 8) JUNCTION J8
G-15(slot 8) JUNCTION J16 G-41

Cartridge L
T
G-27
N

O
R
F
2015.5.20 Rev.A Model : VJ-628X

1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8
　　　　　　　　　　　　　　　　　　　　　　　　　　　　　　　　　　　　　　　　 416P.11-416
　 Exploded View 　 Maintenance 　　　　 VJ628XE-M-00
Exploded View 　 Maintenance
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8
Cleaner Head Assy I-58
DF-49687 Wiper Solenoid SDC630(KG) VJ628 Periodic Maintenance Kit
I-47 DG-41090 DG-44737 I-24
Cap Head Assy
DG-41179
I-56
I-50 I-57
I-53
I-46
I-23
I-54 I-4
I-26
I-48
I-22
I-66 I-28
I-6 I-3
I-7
I-1
I-55 I-27 I-19
I-67 I-49 I-21 I-18
I-52 I-5
I-25
I-37
I-51
Wiper SOL Cable Assy
DG-44723
I-41
I-64 I-20 I-30 I-17
I-65 MAIN J29
I-29
I-6
I-2
I-31
I-42
I-4 I-10 I-36
I-2
I-77
I-71
I-84
I-14 I-37
I-73 I-88
I-74
I-13
I-16
I-75 I-86
I-76 I-15
I-70 I-72 I-10 I-85
I-32
Diaphragm Pump Assy
DG-43907 MAIN J31
I-35
to Pump
Vacuum FAN Relay 2 Assy I-9
DF-48995
Waste Fluid Tank Unit Assy

I-90 DG-45368
Maintenance
T
N
O
R
F
I-91 I-87
2015.5.20 Rev.A Model : VJ-628X
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8
　　　　　　　　　　　　　　　　　　　　　　　　　　　　　　　　　　　　　　　　 417P.11-417
　 Exploded View 　 Cover 　　　　 VJ628XE-M-00
Exploded View 　 Cover
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8
J-1
J-50 K-30
K-33
J-49
J-4
J-5
J-51 Switch Panel Cable Assy
J-2
MAIN J13 DG-44727
J-43 J-50 J-10
J-3
Panel Board Assy
DG-44726
J-6 J-50
J-45
J-51
J-50 H-35
to J-6
J-46
J-41
J-44
J-42
K-32
J-11
J-25 J-8
to J-35
to J-35
J-29 to J-36 J-9

to J-35
J-24 J-35
J-42
J-60 J-34
J-58 J-59
J-21
J-55
J-57 J-34
J-21
J-56
J-16
J-36
J-19
J-18
Cover Switch Assy J-17

K-35 DG-42956 J-33
Switch Lever Assy

K-31 DG-44728 J-38
Cover R Cable Assy Cover

T
N
O
Label (Caution Cutter) Assy DG-44729 J-20 MAIN J13

R
F
DG-44731 2015.5.20 Rev.A Model: VJ-628X
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8
　　　　　　　　　　　　　　　　　　　　　　　　　　　　　　　　　　　　　　　　 418P.11-418
　 Exploded View 　 Other 　　　　 VJ628XE-M-00
Exploded View 　 Other
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8
Jig Panel Assy

DG-44954
M-1
Valve Head Washing Kit (VJ Ink)

DG-41787
PG Adjusting Jig (1.1/1.3)

DG-43193
Caster without Stopper)

DG-44938
㹉-16 (including 1 piece)
Cutter Holder Adjusting Jig VJ Tube 3-4(2m) Reuse Tie 5NVOB Assy
DG-45003 DG-42723 DG-44733
Caster With Stopper
diameter㸸3ȭ (including 1 piece) DG-44939
length㸸2㹫 Other
T
(including 1 piece)
N
O
R
F
2015.5.20 Rev.A Model : VJ-628X

1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8
　　　　　　　　　　　　　　　　　　　　　　　　　　　　　　　　　　　　　　　　 419P.11-419
　 Folding Direction 　 CR FFC 　　　　 VJ628XE-M-00
Folding Direction 　 CR FFC
න૏㧦OO OQWPVCKPHQNF
(γ)It bends by the UEQTG A, piled up in order of Ԙ,ԙ,Ԛ,ԛ,and Ԝ from the bottom so that the position of the UEQTG A may suit.
XCNNG[HQNF TGKPHQTEGRNCVG TGKPHQTEGRNCVG
(δ)After bending, it piles up in order of Ԙ,ԙ,Ԛ,ԛ,and Ԝ from the bottom so that the position of the chip box line B may suit.
YKFVJOO
YKFVJOO
CR Board side MAIN Board side
WPKVOO

J1 A B J7
Ԙ RTKPVGF

J2 A B J8
ԙ RTKPVGF

J3 A B J9
Ԛ RTKPVGF

J4 A B J10
ԛ RTKPVGF

J5 A B J11
Ԝ RTKPVGF

An acetate tape is rolled and it fixes, after piling up five sheets.
　　　　　　　　　　　　　　　　　　　　　　　　　　　　　　　　　　　　　　　　 420P.11-420
　 Folding Direction 　 Head FFC 　　　　 VJ628XE-M-00
Folding Direction 　 Head FFC
(QNFKPIFKTGEVKQP
WPKVOO
න૏㧦OO

Head side # PQVRTKPVGF CR side

Ԙ

# RTKPVGF ԙ

γ(QNFVJG((%YKVJTGHGTGPEGVQTKIJVKNNWUVTCVKQPU

δ((%KURKNGFWRKPQTFGTQHԘԙԚCPFԛHTQOVJG
DQVVQOUQVJCVVJGHQNFKPINKPG#CTGCNKIPGF

ε(QWT((%UCTGHKZGFD[CPCEGVCVGVCRGEQNNGEVKXGN[
CVQHԛ
㨪 TQWPFU # PQVRTKPVGF Ԛ
‫ޓޓ‬
OQWPVCKPHQNF #EGVCVG6CRG
XCNNG[HQNF

# RTKPVGF ԛ

2 Means of Attachment of Acetate Tape and Ferrite Core ‫ޓ‬016'

γ When acetate tape is attached, In the following part, Ԛ and ԛ The intervals of FFCs on CR board
make sure FFCs are not are bent in piles. connection side are 8 mm.
#PCEGVCVGVCRG
OOKPYKFVJKUCVVCEJGF misalignment.

KVYKPFUTQWPF
㧠
4KIJV
γGZRTGUUGU((%URKNGFWRHQWTUJGGVU 㧟
#EGVCVGVCRG
OK

NG
　　　　　　　　　　　　　　　　　　　　　　　　　　　　　　　　　　　　　　　　 421P.11-421
　 Folding Direction 　 JUNC FFC 　　　　 VJ628XE-M-00
Folding Direction 　 JUNC FFC

γ(QNF((%TGHGTUVQVJGHQNNQYKPIKNNWUVTCVKQPU
න૏㧦OO
OQWPVCKPHQNF
XCNNG[HQNF
㪩㩷㫊㫀㪻㪼
WPKVOO

㪡㪬㪥㪚㪫㪠㪦㪥㩷㪙㫆㪸㫉㪻㩷㫊㫀㪻㪼 printed
TGKPHQTEGRNCVG

YKFVJOO

printed MAIN Board side
㪣㩷㫊㫀㪻㪼
WPKVOO

㪡㪬㪥㪚㪫㪠㪦㪥㩷㪙㫆㪸㫉㪻㩷㫊㫀㪻㪼 printed
TGKPHQTEGRNCVG

YKFVJOO
printed MAIN Board side

　　　　　　　　　　　　　　　　　　　　　　　　　　　　　　　　　　　　　　　　 422P.11-422

VJ628D Service Manual

Uploaded by

Document Information

Copyright

Available Formats

Share this document

Share or Embed Document

Sharing Options

Did you find this document useful?

Is this content inappropriate?

Copyright:

Available Formats

VJ628D Service Manual

Uploaded by

Copyright:

Available Formats

MAINTENANCE

1 Safety Instructions 3.3 Replacing Cover section . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 67

3.6.4 Replacing CR Origin Sensor . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 97 3.8.12 Replacing Mini Latch . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 128

4 Adjustment 4.6 CR Belt Tension Adjustment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 231

7.5 Lubrication/Bonding . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 378

7.6 Transportation of Product . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 379

8.2 Part Names and Functions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 382

8.3 Printer Status . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 386

9.2 Product Specifications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 390

9.3 Interface specification . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 391

9.4 Options/Supplies List . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 392

1. For Users in Europe

About this Manual 3. Manual Notation

2. Manual Configuration Must be observed to avoid slight or moderate bodily injury or

Revison Reason Chapter Section Contents Page No. Errata Remarks

1.2 Types and Meanings of Warnings .................................11

1.3 Warning Labels................................................................12

1.3.1 Location and Type of Warning Labels................... 12

1.2 Types and Meanings of Warnings

Table 1-1 Explanation of safety terms

Safety terms Details

Must be observed to avoid slight or moderate bodily injury or

Contains important information and useful tips on the operation of

1.3 Warning Labels 1.3.1 Location and Type of Warning Labels

No. Types of Warning Labels

1.3.1 Location and Type of Warning Labels 12

2.2 Troubleshooting with Error Messages..........................15

2.2.1 Operation Status ................................................... 15

2.2.2 Errors with Message ............................................. 17

2.2.3 Errors Requiring Reboot ....................................... 21

2.2.4 Error Messages during File Transmission............. 32

2.3 Troubleshooting Without Error Messages....................34

2.3.1 Initial Operation Problems..................................... 34

2.3.2 Media Feed Problems ........................................... 38

2.3.3 Printing Problems.................................................. 39

2.3.4 Noise Problems..................................................... 51

2.3.5 Online Function Problems..................................... 54

2.3.6 Other Problems ..................................................... 55

2.3.7 Problems in Using MUTOH Service Assistance ... 57

No. Trouble Contents Reference

2.2 Troubleshooting with Error Messages

2.2.1 Operation Status

No. Message Event/symptom Check item Action Reference

2. Is Switch board installed facing down? Reinstall it correctly.

2.2.1 Operation Status 15

No. Message Event/symptom Check item Action Reference

2.2.1 Operation Status 16

2.2.2 Errors with Message

No. Message Event/symptom Check item Action Reference

9. P_EDGE sensor may be damaged. Replace P_EDGE Sensor. "3.8.6Replacing P_EDGE

10. CR_FFC may be damaged. Replace CR_FFC. 3.9.3 Replacing CR FFC

11. CR board may be damaged. Replace CR board. "3.8.4Replacing CR Board

2.2.2 Errors with Message 17

No. Message Event/symptom Check item Action Reference

4. Check the connection of JUNC_ID Cable. Make sure to connect it securely.

8. JUNC_ID cable may be damaged. Replace it. "3.5.12Replacing JUNC_ID

9. JUNC_FFC may be damaged. Replace it. "3.5.13Replacing JUNC_FFC

10. JUNCTION Board may be damaged. Replace it. "3.5.11Replacing JUNCTION

2.2.2 Errors with Message 18

No. Message Event/symptom Check item Action Reference

9. JUNC_ID cable may be damaged. Replace JUNC_ID cable. "3.5.12Replacing JUNC_ID

10. JUNC_FFC may be damaged. Replace JUNC_FFC. "3.5.13Replacing JUNC_FFC

12. JUNCTION Board may be damaged. Replace it. "3.5.11Replacing JUNCTION

3. JUNCTION board may be damaged. Replace it. "3.5.11Replacing JUNCTION

　 10. CR_FFC may be damaged. Replace CR_FFC. 3.9.3 Replacing CR FFC

(2) Mechanical Serious Errors　